Home

User Guide - NetObjects Fusion

1. 86 Adding and Modifying Alt Tags 87 Editing Objects and Assets 87 Selecting an Object 88 Ren ming an Objects is oett ee eee ogee hed 89 Resizing an Object 0 2 0 0 cece a e teens 89 Positioning 89 Moving or Copying an 89 Aligning and Distributing 90 Grouping Objects een E e AEE eee 91 Adding Moving and Deleting Guides 92 Aligning Objects Using Smart 92 Snapping Objects to Grids Guides and Each Other 93 Layering 93 Rearranging Layered 94 Adding rue RES RS Edu 94 7 Controlling Published Output Approaches to Page 96 Selecting a Layout Method 97 Using Layouts REG AER REM ERE eR 97 Using Layout Regions 98 Using Text Boxes eee 98 Using Tables co renat netbrr cU SMS 99 Selecting an HTML Output Method 100 Setting the Site s HTML Output Method 101 Publishing with Dynamic Page Layout 103 Publishing with Regular 107 Publishing with Fixed Page Layout 1
2. 581 Publishing Your 584 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server 586 The Server Setup 586 Publish Profile Checklist 586 21 Select the Directory Structure 589 Define Server Profiles serioen a hu Yuste xps rs 591 Creating a Global Publish Profile 596 Publishing 596 Viewing a Server s 597 Transferring Your Site to the Web 598 32 Advanced Publishing Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure 602 Creating a Custom Folder 602 Renaming Folders and 603 Deleting Folders dehy acre onde 603 Rearranging the Directory Structure 604 Viewing and Setting Publishing Properties 604 Suppressing a Page or Asset from the Published Site 605 Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory606 Setting the Server Port and Permissions 609 Publishing with Firewalls or Proxy 611 Publishing Special 612 Managing Script 612 33 Working with Character Sets Available Character 616 Setting th
3. 52 Entering META 53 Viewing Modification 55 Setting Backup Preferences 56 4 Working with Templates Creating a Site from a Template 60 Using Templates to Expand a Site 61 Exporting 63 Changing an Existing Template 64 Customizing a Template isses 64 Sharing NetObjects Fusion Site Files 65 5 Importing Sites and Documents Importing Existing Sites 68 Creating a New Site from an Existing Site 70 Using an Existing Site to Expand a Site 72 Importing a Microsoft Office Document 72 6 Page View Basics Exploring Page View 76 MasterBorder and Layout 77 Setting Up the Page Design View Display 77 Setting Page Properties 78 Displaying Pages in Page View 78 Displaying a Page from Site 78 Using the Site Navigation Palette 79 Setting Page Size 79 Adding Objects to the Page 81 Using Object Toolsi in cts 81 Page View 1 81 Importing Pages tene ry ena a ate e MUERE 85 Reusing Assets
4. 2 H amp 2 H Sales 01 Q2 03 04 North 345 564 380 475 South H45 490 475 510 Columns 2 H Cell Space 2 Table border Border 1 Brdr Color Advanced Generate non breaking spaces Tableis aform Table HTML Border Properties 3 In the Advanced section of the Table tab select Generate non breaking spaces to prevent empty cells from collapsing in Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer When this option 1s selected NetObjects Fusion inserts a space character in every table cell If you embed an image in a table cell the extra space causes a gap between the image and the cell border To remove the gap clear this option 4 To make the table a form select Table is a form See Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms You can add HTML code to a table See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly You can also convert a table into a Layout Region by right clicking the table and selecting Convert Table to Layout Region from the shortcut menu See Working with Layout Regions on page 114 Setting the Table Background You can have both a color and a picture in the table background If the picture has a transparent area the background color shows through 1 In Page view select the table 242 Chapter 15 Adding Tables 2 Click the Background tab on the Table Properties palette and in the Color field select e Aut
5. 562 Adding a File 562 20 Editing Asset Names and 563 Opening a File Asset in an External Application 564 Displaying a Page Containing a Specific File Asset 564 Deleting a File Asset epp bh Hee ye eee Eis 564 Deleting All Unused File Assets 565 Verifying File Assets 565 Managing Links and Link Targets 567 Updating an External 567 Displaying the Page Containing a Link 569 Adding an External Link 569 Deleting Link yo eee eh unes euer tin eR REIR 569 Updating Link Targets 569 Verifying Linkse ceter cide dea eS tea eR alee 570 Managing Data Objects and Photo Galleries 570 Managing 971 Adding a 571 Editing a 573 Deleting a 573 31 Publishing Your Site The Publishing Process 576 Additional Publishing 577 Exploring Publish View 578 Publishing 579 Setting Up to Publish Locally 580 Setting HTML
6. 277 Editing a Navigation 280 Editing a Table Style 281 Editing a Data List 282 Editing a Style Background 283 Editing the SiteStyle Line 284 Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles 284 A Note about the Body and Normal P Text Styles 286 Creating a SiteStyle oso sese RP pas beeen 287 Managing 289 Adding a SiteStyle eee nes 289 SiteStyles from Imported 1 5 294 12 Removing SiteStyles 294 Styles Folder Structure 295 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners Working with Banners and Navigation Bars 298 Using Navigation 298 Adding a Navigation 299 Setting Navigation Structure 300 Setting Navigation Bar Orientation 301 Set Border Width and Button Spacing 301 Setting Button Navigation Bar Properties 303 Click Browse to change the button image or rollover image and select an image file from your hard disk or LAN If you want to use an image that is on a CD ROM copy it to your hard disk TADS 309 Setting Text Navigation Bar Properties
7. My Picture 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list The data field you are working with should include a full or relative link to the images being displayed 516 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database 5 Set the image attributes These attributes will be applied to the image on the published page Width determines the image width in pixels Height determines the image height in pixels Border determines the image border in pixels Alt displays an alt tag for the image 5 Bill Jones bjones myspares com Ted Davis tdavisOmjsports com Carl Williams Cwillams1230mjsports com To display link data fields 1 In Page view select the Link object from the DB Component toolbar Link Object Note You cannot add a Link object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the link s location 517 Retrieving and Displaying Data The Link Properties palette appears Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list The data field you are working with should contain the correct link information Set the link attributes Target determines the frame that displays the
8. 495 Adding Database Engines Using Tables for Object Placement Certain database objects must be added or placed in the correct order for the code to be generated correctly For example when using a Recordset Iterator object the Start iterator object must be placed before the end iterator object Otherwise the site will publish with errors and the database will not be functional It is recommended that when using recordset iterator and or conditional objects a table is used to make sure placement is correct and the records will be aligned correctly when displayed Connector Properties Untitled6 Untitled E eB I Rr RU D FU While using tables is not required the examples in this guide include tables when using iterators or conditional statements with data output objects Connector insert delete and update objects can be placed anywhere on the page Adding Database Engines The ASP and ColdFusion database components can connect to any database using ODBC If the database engine you are using is not listed you can simply type the database in the Engine field See Setting up the Database Connection on page 497 The PHP database component connects directly to any MySQL database or to an MS Access database on a Windows platform using a datasource Full support for MS Access and MySQL are provided and can be selected in the PHP Connector Properties palette
9. PE Right m wrap wrap Space around object Horizontal 0 0 a 3 Set the alignment options Depending on the type of object you selected NetObjects Fusion displays some combination of the following alignment options e Vertical alignment of the object to the top middle or bottom of the text line Horizontal alignment of the object to the left center or right of the text box without text wrapping Horizontal alignment of the object to the text box with text wrapping If you select Left wrap the text wraps around the right side of the object 1f you select Right wrap the text wraps around the left side of the object To embed the object at the top left of the text box move the pointer to the beginning of the text 125 Sizing a Text Box Inthe Space around object section specify the amount of vertical and horizontal space you want to leave between the image and the text The text wraps around the object according to your specifications he rectangle is set to Left wrap T The circle is set iiia Sizing a Text Box When you create or select a text box you can control its width the minimum height and the scaling of the text box to the full width of the Layout area or the browser window 1 In Page view select a text box or add a new text box The Text Properties palette appears 2 Click the Text Box tab if necessary Text Properties 2 xl A 0 Backgroun
10. You can also turn an existing Layout or container object into a form Click the Layout area Layout Region text box or table and select the form option on the General tab of the Properties palette for example Text box is a form 431 Adding Objects to a Form Adding Objects to a Form You can add any standard form objects to a form including single and multiple line text fields check boxes radio buttons scrolling lists and drop down lists Layout Layout Region Form Sign Our Guestbook aE Edit fields SESE SESS ESSE SESE Check bowes Drop down list 2 Small Logo Large Logo Let us know what you think about our services Multi line text field ERS Radio buttons rrr rJ we send you more information Submit Cancel Form buttons Scrolling list M KL You add objects to a form using the Form toolbar This toolbar appears when you first create the form or you can open the toolbar from the View menu by choosing Toolbars Form Tools Form Tools The Form toolbar appears when you create a form a Arrange and align the fields check boxes and other objects in a form just as you would arrange objects in a Layout area table or text box You must place form objects inside a form to make them work as part of the form If you don t place form objects inside a form a red warn
11. 309 Setting a Navigation Bar 311 Using Banners s ros pene ne DIETE 311 Adding a 312 Changing the Banner 312 Changing a Banner s 313 Setting Banner Style and 313 19 Creating Links and Anchors Creating 316 Types of Links iso ed sedge Sedge eme 316 Link Indicators eee Los ewe ts 316 Creating an Internal 317 Adding Editing and Deleting an Anchor 319 Creating a Smart Link 320 Creating an External Link 322 13 Setting Link Targets 327 Setting Frame Targets 327 Setting Pop Up Window Targets 328 Following Links 331 Finding a 332 Editing or Removing a Link 332 Adding HTML toa Link 332 Working with 334 Creating an 334 Editing an 334 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs About 338 Adding a Catalog 340 Creating a
12. Wisma Ticker Tapers eni ach eas Adding Time Based Pictures Adding Server 27 Data Publishing Static and Dynamic Data Publishing Storing Data with NetObjects Fusion Publishing Creating a Data Creating a Data Object for Internal Data 478 Changing an Internal Data Field Name 480 Creating a Data Object for External Data 480 Creating a Data amp 482 Creating Stacked Pages 485 Designing the Stacked Page 486 Adding Navigation Buttons to Stacked Pages 488 Adding a Stacked Page for Internal Data 489 Deleting a Stacked 489 Adding Text and Images to Stacked Pages 489 Deleting a Data 490 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database How the Database Component Works 492 Creating a Data Source 493 Using the Database Component 495 Adding Database Engines 496 Setting up the Database Connection 497 Defining a Database Schema 502 Adding a 506 Using the SQL 511 Retrieving
13. 245 Merging and Splitting Table 245 Setting Row and Column Properties 247 Working with Table Cells 248 Selecting Table Cells 248 Setting Cell Properties eee eee 248 Sizing Cells ove etd ere epe E eR 250 Adding Text and Pictures to 250 Sorting Table 251 Importing Table 251 Exporting Table 252 setting Table 253 Defining Table 253 Creating a Table 255 Adding a Table Style in Style 258 11 16 Drawing Shapes and Lines Drawing Shapes 262 Adding HTML Horizontal Rules 263 Adding a SiteStyle Line 264 Drawing Lines and 265 Editing Lines and Arrows 267 17 Using SiteStyles What Is a SiteStyle 270 Exploring Style View 270 Applying SiteStyles 274 Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles 274 Removing the Read Only 275 Editing Banners and Buttons 275 Adding Banners and
14. Pop Up Window Default M Add Edit Remove The Pop Up Window link fields will become active 5 Select a Pop Up Window target from the Name drop down list or click Add to create a new Pop Up Window target See Setting Pop Up Window Targets on page 328 Note If you edit an existing Pop Up Window all links using that Pop Up Window will be affected To create Pop Up Windows for Photo Pages only click Add to create a new Pop Up Window target Selecting a Photo Page Layout 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 232 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries 3 Display the Photo Page tab Photo Gallery Properties Editor PhotoGallery Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Open a Pop Up window Default Add Edit Remove Layout Text Attributes Help m xz E DER Format Format Caption Display title in banner Photo Frame Template Bevel Style Crimson Preview scaled to fit Bevel Crimson is a flat beveled crimson 980002 plastic frame Allows photo to be resized to any dimension Works against any background Save Profile 4 Inthe Layout section of the tab select a layout In the samples the boxes with an X represent the photo the bold line is the title text and the text block 1s the capt
15. Type the field name and select a data type for the field e Formatted text Characters in these fields can be formatted individually Formatted text fields can contain paragraph and line breaks and can exceed 255 characters You cannot sort on formatted text fields e Simple text All characters in these fields share the same formatting characteristics Simple text fields cannot contain paragraph or line breaks and cannot exceed 255 characters You can sort on simple text fields Image file These fields can contain an image in one of these formats bmp gif animated embedded interlaced jpg pct pex png psd tga or tif You can sort on image file fields NetObjects Fusion uses the file names to sort the image files Note Carefully plan the fields you define within an internal data object After you click OK in the Data Object dialog you cannot delete the field from the data object or change the data field type Click OK Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 to add fields When you are done click OK in the Data Object dialog 479 Creating a Data Object Data List tool The data object is now an asset of your site and you can continue as follows e Ifyou re working in Page view the Data Publishing dialog is still open You can select fields and format the data list as described in Creating a Data List on page 482 and lay out your stacked pages as described in Creating Stacked Pages on
16. 167 Applying a Text Style to a Paragraph 167 Applying a Style toa Text 167 Using Custom 168 Setting a Style s 169 Creating a Text Style eee ee eee 170 Creating a Custom Text Attribute CSS only 173 Modifying a Text 174 Deleting a Text Style eres teh oes Be a ek 174 Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists 175 Formatting eae ee ote 176 Setting the List Start 177 Setting the List Bullet or Numbering Type 178 Inserting 178 Adding Text to a Shape or Picture 179 Creating and Editing Fields 181 Inserting an Existing 181 Creating a User Defined Variable 182 Checking 183 Finding sete EP TONS PR S 185 Replacing 185 Counting Words Lines Paragraphs and Characters186 13 Placing Pictures Choosing an Image Format 188 Adding 1 aso Seen 188 Using the Picture Properties Palette 191 Optimizing 191 Basic Image Optimization
17. File Jice_wanna_berm Browse AltTag Display Inline C Jeon 8 Picture Browse HTML To provide text that the browser displays if it cannot play the video type a description in the AltTag field Inthe Display section select e Inline to display a control that site visitors can use to play the video sound track Note If you select this option site visitors do not see the video They only hear the sound track Icon to select one of the three images to represent the video When a site visitor clicks the icon Real Player opens playing the specified video 377 Inserting Other Types of Files ae Plug In tool Picture to use another image file to represent the video When a site visitor clicks the icon Real Player opens playing the specified video 7 Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Inserting Other Types of Files Although NetObjects Fusion supports a wide variety of media files you might have other formats such as Adobe Acrobat PDF files that you want to include in your site You can place other files including Adobe Acrobat VRML RealSpace FlashPix files and Headspace Beatnik files using the Plug In tool When a site visitor clicks the document s icon the file appe
18. remove a parameter select it and click the minus button To add a parameter click the plus button and enter a name and value in the Enter Value dialog To change the order of the parameters in the generated HTML click the Up or Down arrow buttons The selected parameter moves up or down in the Parameters list Inserting a Java Bean Component Java Beans are a type of Java applet Unlike Java applets which require class files plus other types of files Java Beans are an all in one implementation of Java A single jar file contains everything required to run the applet To insert a Java Bean 1 In Page view select the Java Bean tool from the Web Applications tools flyout on the Advanced toolbar Draw a box to indicate the position of the Java Bean The Open dialog appears Select a Java Bean file from the NetObjects Fusion 8 Java Beans folder or select one that is currently used in the site from the Java Archive Assets tab A Java Bean file can have a jar or class extension Most Java Beans have a jar extension but some jar files might not be Java Beans If you try to open a jar file that is not a bean you see a message from NetObjects Fusion Click Open 384 Chapter 22 Adding Java and ActiveX The Java Bean placeholder appears on the page Beans have different icons in the upper right corner of the placeholder the icon is created by the bean s author and has no effect on the bean
19. 192 Advanced Image 192 Creating a Transparent GIF 195 Resizing and Orienting a Picture 197 Resizing Picture ssa ee Se eee SNe eee ek a s 197 Tiling Pictures usd RR Rer SER 198 Rotating a Picture 2 eee 199 Flipping a tee ee 199 Cropping a Picture 200 Adjusting a Picture s 201 Creating a Border Around a Picture 202 Adding Text toa Picture 203 Removing Red Eye ina Picture 203 Editing Picture Hotspots 204 ERE NE E 205 14 Creating Photo Galleries About Photo 208 Adding a Photo 210 Creating New Photo 210 Inserting an Existing Photo 211 Working with 211 Adding Photos essi sig RR 212 Arranging 214 Resizing Photos 4 teens 215 217 Opening the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 218 Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions 218 Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions on the Images Tab219 Add
20. 282 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Editing a Style Background 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to change and click the Edit Style background box The Page Background Properties palette appears Page Background Properties Background Color Color FFFFFF X Image background gif m 2 In the color field select e Automatic to use the default background color set in the browser Transparent to let the image or color of a style underneath the background show through For example if the site s paragraph text has a background color setting the page background color to transparent lets the paragraph background color show through Color to use a solid color background To choose a different color click the Color button and select from the Color Picker 3 In the Image field select Automatic to use the default image set in the browser None to use a background with no image e Background gif to use the SiteStyle background Browse to select another image for the background 283 Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles Editing the SiteStyle Line You can use a variety of horizontal page wide images to separate pages into sections You insert these lines in Page view using the SiteStyle Line tool as described in Adding a SiteStyle Line on page 264 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to change and click
21. Click outside the text box to deselect it The text box sizes vertically to the text you enter 152 Chapter 12 Designing with Text Dragging and Dropping a Text File 1 In Windows Explorer locate the text file you want to add to the page Note You cannot drag and drop Word 2000 doc files You can drag and drop Word 97 doc files but you will get better results if you import them See Importing a Microsoft Office Document on page 72 2 Drag the file onto the page The text appears on the page in a text box Pasting Text from the Clipboard 1 Cutor copy the text from the original source such as a word processing document 2 In Page view click where you want to position the text 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste or Paste Special Select Paste to paste the contents of the Clipboard onto the current page You might lose some of the original text formatting when you copy and paste text from the Clipboard e Paste Special to retain formatting You can select Formatted Text RTF to insert the contents of the Clipboard as text with font and table formatting e Unformatted Text to insert the contents of the Clipboard as text with no formatting HTML Format to insert the contents of the Clipboard as HTML format To select the Paste Special default click Set Paste Default and choose one of the three options 153 Formatting Text Formatting Text You can format selected text using t
22. HumanResources CustomerSupport CustomerSupport FirstName is equal to Mary Where JOR LastName OR LastName starts with Where clauses starts with Rm ga Order by FirstName v FirstName Ascending Ascending w Sort order Number of records to display 6 In the Select area To add datafields to recordset highlight the fields on the left side that you want to work with and click the plus sign 507 Adding a Recordset To replace fields highlight the field on the left side you want to add to the recordset then highlight the field you want to replace it with on the right side and click the check icon to apply e To remove datafields from a recordset highlight the field on the right side and click the minus icon order the datafields in a recordset use the up and down arrows You can select several fields at one time by holding down the CTRL key then selecting multiple fields 7 Adda Where clause to narrow your recordset results See Filtering Recordset Results on page 508 8 To sort the query results select a field from the Order By drop down list then select ascending or descending order For example use Order By to sort last names in ascending order so that Paul Smith would appear before Mary Stuart 9 Type a number in the Return Records field or choose a number from the drop down list to specify the number of rec
23. Manufacturer Manufacturer Comments Description Imported file E Commerce headers m i Catalog Properties Extended Description y editor key fields On Sale Price Retail Price Sale Price m Sales Tax Shipping Cost Surcharge Fy Weight Fy Image Path y Match OK Cancel 351 Formatting the List Page 7 In the Map Columns dialog match a Key field from the E Commerce Properties Editor by choosing a corresponding field from the imported file in the drop down list The drop down list will display the column headers which is the first row in your imported file If you matched the file headers in the imported file with the Key headers from the E Commerce Properties Editor you can click Match and have NetObjects Fusion automatically match the fields 8 Click OK to close the Map Columns dialog In the E commerce Catalog Properties Editor you will see the imported products listed on the Products tab Formatting the List Page On the List page you determine how your site visitors will view your products You can e Choose a layout with text and images displayed in rows and columns Determine which attributes will be displayed for selected products e Choose purchase button options Selecting a Layout for Your Catalog You can select a layout that showcases your products in an attractive way Text can be placed above below or beside images in columns and row
24. Text within the text box can be set to flow around other embedded objects so you don t have to create multiple text boxes to achieve a text wrap effect 98 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output You can set the text box to expand itself to the size of the browser window When your site visitor views the page it rewraps to fit within the browser window You can use any HTML output method Dynamic Page Layout Regular Tables or Fixed Page Layout Text Box Limitations You give up pixel level control of the layout and design of your page and use alignment choices to control the placement of objects which means the way they appear in a browser can be somewhat unpredictable Using Tables If your page design or page content is tabular you can use a NetObjects Fusion table to control the layout of the entire page Table Advantages Each cell within a table functions like a text box with all the attributes and controls of a text box outside the table You can embed objects within cells arrange them using each object s alignment properties and wrap text around objects You can use a percent width layout so the basic layout design adjusts to changes in browser window width font sizes or screen resolution Table Limitations You give up pixel level control of the layout and design of your page and use alignment choices to control the placement of objects Browsers interpret tables differently so be sure to view
25. The Add catalog dialog appears Available catalogs are listed in the Insert an existing E Commerce Catalog section at the bottom of the dialog 341 Working with Products 3 Select Insert an Existing Catalog 4 Select the catalog you want to insert and click OK Working with Products You begin building your catalog by adding products and then setting product attributes descriptions and choosing images You can do this one product at a time or import a comma or tab delimited file See Importing Products on page 350 Adding Products You add products on the Products tab of the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 1 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor You can e Add a catalog by following the steps in Adding a Catalog on page 340 e Double click a product on a list page or a detail page 342 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs The E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor appears displaying the Products tab E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor x Products List Page Detail Page Store Display Add 0 00 Duplicate Remove Fitter Import Attributes Description Deteillmage Thumbnaillmage Related Products Name Price Sale Price 000 SKU Part Number Weight Retail Price for display only Manufacturer Options None X Add Option Sales Tax Let Store Engine Define Values feme Shipping Cost Let Store Engine
26. blank X Add Edi Remove HTML Cancel e Ifyou are linking to an anchor on a specific page select the page in the SiteStructure and then select the anchor from the list on the right Link type intemal Link X Eind Find Again Internal links 4 Anchor links fa n Home Name o Mission none O Events Activities Top D Highlights O Nest Tour T Contest Wonder Lodge Current page Target None v HTML 4 To seta link target see Setting Link Targets on page 327 318 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Note You may not need to select a frame target NetObjects Fusion automatically targets most internal links If you select lt none gt NetObjects Fusion uses the default target which depends on the current frame setup The destination page for the link appears only in the frame you select 5 Click Link NetObjects Fusion creates the link When a site visitor clicks the linked item the browser displays the destination page or the selected anchor Adding Editing and Deleting an Anchor An anchor marks a specific location on a page Anchors let site visitors go directly to a particular part ofa long page instead of scrolling and searching for information You can place an anchor anywhere in a text box or table or on a picture or drawn shape You link to an anchor using the Link dialog When a site visitor clicks the link the browser displays the page
27. record will be displayed with red text Else If the condition is not met font black the record will be displayed with black text EndIf You can add multiple conditions to one expression by including an Elself object If you wanted to display records of freshman students in a blue font the resulting expression would be If Classification Senior t ifthe first condition is met fo nt red the record will be displayed with red text Elself Classification Freshman _ If the second condition is met font blue record will be displayed with blue text Else If neither condition is not met fo nt black the record will be displayed with black text EndIf Notice that like recordset iterators each expression has a beginning object If and a closing object EndIf To build simple conditional statements In Page view select the Conditional Expression object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Conditional Expression object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the Conditional Expression s location 525 Retrieving and Displaying Data The Conditional Expression Properties palette appears Conditional Expression Properties MBE 3 Select If from the Type drop down To use the Conditional Expression object you must have one
28. 2 ET Ax Pause Time Seconds Number of Images 3 To set the number of seconds each picture is displayed before moving to the next one click the Pause Time Seconds row specify the number of seconds and click the check mark 4 To set the number of different images to display in the rotating picture double click the Number of Images row specify the number of images and click the check mark 464 Screen Door tool Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components You can display up to 50 images for your rotating pictures An Image row and URL for Image row for each image you specify appears Note The images you select for rotating pictures are resized to the size of the first image you select For best results use images that are the same size 5 Double click an Image row select an image file from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open 6 To create a link for this image double click the image s URL for Image row then in the Link dialog select the type of link See Creating Links on page 316 7 Specify the link information and click Link 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each image You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Directing Visitors to a Browser Specific Page The Screen Door component detects the visitor s browser type and redirects the visitor to a page targeted for that specific browser You can choo
29. 4 Choose to pause or not pause before redirecting a site visitor If you set Pause to Yes enter the number of seconds you want to pause 5 Set up appropriate links for the default page and for each individual browser type See Creating Links on page 316 466 d Site Mapper tool Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components Adding a Site Map Button Site Mapper is a Java navigation applet that site visitors can use to create an interactive map of a site If your site is large Site Mapper simplifies navigation by providing a detailed view of the site s levels Using the site map visitors can jump directly from page to page without using the page navigation controls The Site Map button provides three ways for visitors to view the site structure similar to Site view in NetObjects Fusion Inan outline view e By searching for certain words Site Mapper Microsoft Internet Explorer Structure Outline Bs B Site visitors can view the site three ways This map shows the structure When site visitors move the pointer over a page the page name appears The size of each node adjusts so the entire tree fits in the window With a large site the nodes may be too small to use Show upto Leve C2 Al Select the number of levels to display To add a Site Map button and set its properties 1 In Page view display the page where you want to add the Site Mapper component T
30. 430 Adding Objects toa Form 432 Naming Form Objects 433 Adding a Single Line Text Field 433 Adding a Multiple Line Text 1 1 435 Adding Radio Buttons 436 Adding Check 437 Adding a Combo 438 Adding Submit Reset and Custom Buttons 439 Submitting Responses as Plain Text 441 Submitting Data to a Text 441 Submitting Data in an Email 443 Processing Data with CGI Script 444 Adding Hidden Fields 446 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components Using the Component Manager 449 Adding Toolbars to the Component Manager 450 Displaying Toolbars in the Component Manager Using the Component About Adding a Rotating Ad Banner Adding DynaButtons Adding 6 Loading Pictures onto Your Site Adding a Go Adding Pictures That Roll Over Adding Rotating Directing Visitors to a Browser Specific Page Adding a Site Map Button
31. Directory Structure on page 602 400 CHAPTER 24 Building Dynamic Pages You can include animations and other interesting effects in your site by adding actions to individual objects or pages You can make objects move on off and around the screen hide or show them bump them with other objects have them exchange places and so on Site visitors can drag them around the page You can even have actions respond to a site visitor s entry in a form No programming is required You build actions by simply choosing a series of options from menus When you use actions note that Due to limitations of Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator actions work only in versions 4 0 and later of Internet Explorer and version 4 x of Netscape Navigator Actions are not supported in Netscape Navigator 6 0 You can use actions on pages with AutoFrames do not use actions on pages with frames that were scripted by adding HTML directly For reliable performance make sure you select Dynamic Page Layout All Browsers as the HTML output method on the Layout Properties palette If your site visitors use only version 4 0 and later browsers select Fixed Page Layout For Layout Regions containing objects with actions select Regular Tables This chapter describes Adding actions to pages objects and text Tailoring actions with custom messages Targeting several objects with one action Modifying actions Scripting your own actions Scriptin
32. Generate HTML frame borders Home Mission Events Next Tour Mission Events Next Tour Generate HTML frame borders Home Mission Events Next Tour The left frame was selected followed by the bottom frame as indicated by the numbers on the AutoFrames tab As a result the left frame extends the full height of the page The bottom frame was selected first followed by the left frame The bottom frame extends the full width of the page Keep in mind that because enabling AutoFrames makes your page consist of at least three HTML pages it can slow page loading 144 Chapter 11 Working with AutoFrames Generating HTML Frame Borders If you want site visitors to be able to resize the frame on the AutoFrames tab of the MasterBorders Properties palette select Generate HTML frame borders To set frames to be borderless in the site visitor s browser clear Generate HTML frame borders NetObjects Fusion turns off the borders for all frames in that MasterBorder To combine frames with borders and frames without borders on the same page you must script the frames See Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML on page 546 145 Setting Frame Properties Setting Frame Properties 1 In Page view click the frame label or right click in the frame and select Frame properties from the shortcut menu The Frame Properties palette appears Frame Properties
33. In addition to names you can also provide a value to be sent when a site visitor selects a check box radio button or item in a combo box For example a check box named Yellow with a value of Yes might be sent to a CGI script as Yellow Yes depending on the script Actions you add with NetObjects Fusion can also use form object values to manipulate a site visitor s response See Scripting Parameter Values on page 416 If you re using a CGI script you might need to coordinate the names and values you enter with those used in the script Each CGI script has its own naming conventions but in general names cannot include spaces or punctuation Check with your server administrator or ISP for information Adding a Single Line Text Field A single line text field can accommodate just a few words such as a name or phone number After creating the form as described on page 430 1 In Page view select the Forms Edit Field tool from the Form toolbar 2 Draw a rectangle on the form The Forms Edit Field Properties palette appears 433 Adding Objects to a Form 3 Set the Forms Edit Field properties Forms Edit Field Properties o Name FormsEditField Password field Name passed to the script processing the form Type text to appear in the field by default Select to hide the site visitor s typing m Text field width measured in characters Visible length 18 characters E Maximu
34. To avoid scroll bars displaying when you don t need them add a little extra room to margins you re going to set as frames or turn off scroll bars on the Frame Properties palette See Setting Frame Properties on page 146 See Creating a MasterBorder on page 135 if you need help creating a MasterBorder To set a MasterBorder margin as an AutoFrame 1 In Page view click an empty space inside the MasterBorder or in the gray area outside the page The MasterBorder Properties palette appears 2 Click the AutoFrames tab MasterBorder Properties PIE Frames E E Left Right Top Bottom Generate HTML frame borders 142 Chapter 11 Working with AutoFrames 3 Click the button for each margin you want to set as a frame Left Right Top or Bottom NetObjects Fusion adds a label Left Right Top or Bottom to indicate a frame In addition to the frame you select the Layout area also becomes a frame T i a a a ag p IY i No gl The left margin is set as an AutoFrame If you add frames to more than one margin the selection sequence is important because frames overlap each other in the order in which you add them You can 143 Adding an AutoFrame change the overlap sequence by clearing the AutoFrame option for all margins and then reselecting them in a different sequence Mission s MasterBorder Properties Next Tour ight Bottom 2
35. gt Between Head Tags Inside Body Tag Beginning of Body End of Body End of Page Click to insert contents of an HTML script or other text file Click to insert a field Preview your code in placeholder HTML that NetObjects Fusion generates Type or paste your HTML or script on the tab You can click the Insert File button to insert contents of an HTML script or other text file Click the Insert Field button to insert a field See Managing Variables on page 571 4 Click OK Preview the site to test your code and view the source from your browser to see the resulting HTML To edit your code open the Page HTML dialog again click the tab containing the code and make your changes Accessing an AutoFrame s HTML If your site uses AutoFrames you can add HTML or script to the frameset file that gets generated for example to include a lt NOFRAMES gt tag for browsers that don t support frames or to modify the size or layout of your frames You can also 543 Accessing an AutoFrame s HTML add code to any content page the frames display for example to center the frame s contents 544 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Working in the Page HTML Dialog In Page view access the frameset s HTML click in the MasterBorder or AutoFrame then click the HTML button on the General tab of the Properties palette Or right click in the MasterBorder or AutoF
36. is lower or equal is greater than is greater or equal contains starts with ends with does not contain Description All conditions must be met or no results are returned At least one condition must be met or no results are returned Tests that the value on the top is empty Tests that the value on the top side contains data Tests that values match completely or no results are returned Tests that values are different Tests that the value on the left side of the operator is less than the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator is less than or equal to the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator is greater than the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator is greater than or equal to the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator includes the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator starts with the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator ends with the value on the right side Tests that the value on the left side of the operator does not includes the value on the right side c Choose a value from the drop down list or type in a custom value 509 Adding a Recordset d Click the plus sign Where FirstName is equal to Mary OR LastName starts with R
37. on page 158 and Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 for descriptions of the options in the Text Format dialog A Note about the Body and Normal P Text Styles If you do not assign a font to the Body or Normal P text elements and leave their text styles set to Automatic the browser s proportional and fixed width font settings are passed through to the SiteStyle for the Body text and Normal P text Consequently if you leave the settings as Automatic Body and Normal P text 286 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles appear in Page view as they do in the browser All text styles in the site are affected by these settings This helps you with overall page design because you can see exactly how the fonts look based on the browser settings Note that the Body and Normal P fonts are not generated when you publish your site They are derived from the site visitor s browser settings If you change the text settings applied to the Body text element some settings might not affect the body text on your pages The inherited settings depend on the HTML output method you use when publishing your site The following table shows which settings are affected font Y Y font style Y N size N N color Y Y position N N case N N decoration N N small caps N N Creating a SiteStyle You can create original styles to give your site a unique look When you create a new SiteStyle each graphic element is save
38. x gig 8 0 Style Editor 3x3 Text Middle repeating cell region Text Border region Text Table Style Site Style Current Site Style X Table Set Custom Style 4 Drag your cursor to highlight the boxes and click on the box that is in the last bottom right position to set the table style dimensions Note The Style Editor allows you to format a single table region 1x1 up to 25 separate table regions 5x5 However the table style can be applied however to a table of any size 256 Chapter 15 Adding Tables 5 Drag the blue handles in the Style Editor area to define the middle or repeating cell region Table Properties 2 x 8 o Style Editor 3x3 Click on cell to Text Text Text apply formatting Text Text Text Text Text Text Table Style Site Style Current Site Style ne Table Set Custom Style x 6 To apply text styles and formatting to cells click on a cell in the Style Editor area To change the cell background color in the Color field select e Automatic to set the cell background to the color specified for the table e Color to select a background color for the cell from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker change the cell background image in the Image field select e Automatic to set the background
39. 1 In Page view click the Site Navigation palette button Site Navigation The Site Navigation palette appears palette Site Navigation 2 xl 8 Activities C Highlights Next Tour B al Contest Wonder Lodge 2 Double click the page you want to open NetObjects Fusion displays the page you select Setting Page Size The size of a NetObjects Fusion page is defined by the combined size of the MasterBorder and Layout area The default page size is 730x555 pixels You can redefine the default page size on the General tab of the Current Site Options dialog See Changing General Settings on page 52 You can change the size of an individual page by adjusting the size of the MasterBorder area the Layout area or both 79 Setting Page Size MasterBorder handles Layout Width and Height fields 8 Layout area handle OL MasterBorder a handle Layout area handle 1o LLL 1190 8L 299 10 100 0 190 99 11111 90 a MasterBorder LL 9 99 Mission BUSINESS NAME has been serving the STATE PROVINCE community since DATE We specialize in BUILDING MAKING SES cuni 3 AC CE Dini ID Events PRODUCT SERVICE and our staff offers quality 7077000 gt Next Tour SERVICES you can count on In addition our frien amp answer any questions you may have about our cc THAT rrr rr Whether you need SERVICE PRODUCT 1 pao Se PRO
40. 1 In Page view select the Layout Region 115 Working with Layout Regions The General tab of the Layout Region Properties palette appears E ral Grid Guides v Grid 12 aj Height 12 Z pixels 2 Select Grid if necessary 3 Enter values for the width and height of the local grid The Layout Region grid always displays in pixels Converting a Layout Region to a Table To see the underlying table structure you can convert a Layout Region into a table NetObjects Fusion constructs a table and places objects in the same position they occupied in the Layout Region 1 Right click the Layout Region and choose Convert Layout Region to Table from the shortcut menu The Convert Region to Table dialog appears Convert Region to Ta PR Process empty cells C Leave as individual cells Cancel 2 Choose how you want NetObjects Fusion to process empty cells Select Leave as individual cells to skip empty cells Span in rows to merge cells in row order Span in columns to merge cells in column order 116 Chapter 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions Setting the HTML Output Method for a Layout or Layout Region You can select the HTML output method that determines the type of HTML code NetObjects Fusion produces for the current Layout or Layout Region This HTML method is independent of the method used to publish the parent container For example if a Layout Region
41. 28 Working with Site Files 28 Creating and Opening Sites 29 Starting with a Blank Site 29 Starting with the Site 31 Opening an Existing 31 Working with the SiteStructure 33 Selecting Page veces 33 Working with a Group of 34 Setting PrODertleS sque tk t e eS ahve ce 35 Setting Page Properties 36 Setting Site Management Properties 37 Setting META Tag Properties 38 Setting Properties for a Group 40 JA ding iqq Lee PES 42 Copying and Pasting 42 Deleting d Page Sewanee t eR 43 Movie a Page c te See ek Sad 43 Replacing the Home 44 Renaming 45 Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions 46 Setting Up the Site View Display 47 Collapsing the SiteStructure Display 48 Working in Site Outline View 48 Printing the 49 Saving Your Work 50 Backing Up Your 51 Setting Options for the Current Site 52 Changing General
42. 5 Click OK Custom attributes do not display in Page view but do appear in the browser if it supports cascading style sheet features Modifying a Text Style 1 In Page view from the Text menu choose Edit Text Styles The Text Styles dialog appears 2 Select the style you want to modify then click Edit The Text Format dialog appears 3 To change the style see Formatting Text on page 154 4 When you finish click OK in the Text Format dialog 5 In the Text Styles dialog click Close NetObjects Fusion updates any paragraph to which you applied the style Deleting a Text Style 1 In Page view from the Text menu choose Edit Text Styles The Text Styles dialog appears 2 Select the style you want to delete then click Delete You cannot delete a style defined with multiple scopes You must delete each one separately To see if a style has multiple scopes select All Available Styles from the Scope drop down list and click the plus sign next to the style 3 Click OK to confirm deletion and click Close 174 List type buttons Chapter 12 Designing with Text Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists To create a simple numbered or bulleted list 1 2 In Page view select the text you want to format as a numbered or bulleted list Click a list type button on the Text Properties palette to select a numbered list or a bulleted list When you click a list type button NetObjects Fusion applies t
43. Displaying Pages in Page View Quooo Page view e HTML tag icon indicates the text has an HTML tag inserted at this point Embedded object icon indicates the embedded object s insertion point e Action icon indicates an action is associated with the object e Warning icon indicates a potential layout problem or other error condition A ScreenTip identifies the problem You cannot hide this icon e Question mark icon indicates an empty navigation bar You cannot hide this icon Select Rulers amp Guides from the View menu to show and hide rulers and guides e Select Grid from the View menu to show and hide grids Setting Page Properties To display the Page Properties palette from the View menu select Page View Options and click the Page tab See Setting Page Properties on page 36 Displaying Pages in Page View You can display a page from Site view or move between pages in Page view using the Site Navigation palette or the Go To command on the Go menu For information about the Go To command see Using the Go Menu on page 12 Displaying a Page from Site View From Site view to display a page in Page view Click the page icon then click the Page button on the control bar Double click the page icon Click the page icon then from the Go menu choose Page 78 Chapter 6 Page View Basics Using the Site Navigation Palette The Site Navigation palette displays the SiteStructure
44. Home Page title Home Custom Names Page type Normal MasterBorder DetautmtasterBorder z Exclude Hom navigation NetObjects Fusion Window About the Properties Palette When you click an object in Site Page or Style view the properties palette changes to display the properties available for that object Properties appear on tabs that also might change when the selected object changes For example when you select a text box in Page view the Text Properties palette includes Text Box and Actions tabs Layout Properties 2 x E d i t 210 Layoutname HomeLayout Laut th e Width 570 E 730 Pixels Height H 555 Pixels HTML output text Tables Columns Rows Show Layoutis a form Center in browser HTML When you double click in the text box to edit the text the Format tab is added to the display H Text Properties 2 x Edit 22 the f text Egaz S Se npp aoe arenes TE lt none gt Link Ancho Format To shrink the properties palette to display just its title bar double click the title bar or click the minimize button do the same thing again to restore the full display To completely hide the properties palette click its close box To show the palette again from the View menu select Properties Palette A check mark on the
45. Jal for your submission 4 Select the table you will be inserting records into from the drop down list 5 In the operand field select the datafield or variable you will be applying the condition to 6 Select an operator from the Operator drop down list See Table 28 1 on page 509 for operator definitions 7 Select a datafield or variable from the Value drop down list or type in a new value Delete Inspector X From Employees Where Jano o ID is equalto 125 s equal to m x 25 v Ez E Ea OK Cancel 8 Click the plus sign to add the condition or click the check sign to replace the existing condition 9 Select AND or OR to add additional conditions then repeat Steps 5 through 8 10 Click OK to close the Delete Properties editor 333 Modifying a Database 534 CHAPTER 29 Working with HTML Directly In addition to adding content links and DHTML actions to your site using NetObjects Fusion tools you can work directly with the code to insert HTML and scripts For example you can add META tags to index your site for search engines power content with JavaScript or Visual Basic routines center pages throughout your site or do whatever else you can when coding raw HTML You can t edit the HTML that NetObjects Fusion automatically generates but you can add your own code virtually anywhere Before working with HTML directly you should be familiar with HTML tags
46. Paragraph List Borders Background List style Bullet S Bullet Image Automatic Browse Line indent Automatic Alllines First line only Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel 176 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 4 Set the List style If you choose Automatic the settings for the parent style pass through to the list See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 Bullet Select a bullet character or type of numbering from the drop down list Bullet Image CSS only To use a graphic as the bullet character click Browse and select the image you want 5 Set the Line indent CSS only e Automatic applies the indenting of the object that contains the list whenever the list text wraps to a second line The amount of the indent is preset See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 e lines indents all lines in each listed item to the same position e First line only indents the first line of each item in the list but not the other lines 6 Click OK Setting the List Start Value If you select a numbered list and want it to start with a value other than 1 or A you can define a new start value To set a new start value 1 In Page view select an
47. Setting table structure Working with cells Adding text and pictures to tables Sorting table data Importing table data Exporting table data Setting Table Styles 239 Adding a Table Adding a Table 1 In Page view choose the Table tool from the Container flyout on the Standard HH toolbar and draw a box where you want to position the table Tabs tog The Create Table dialog appears Create Table Bows E Cell Pad 2 Columns 2 Cell Space 2 24 Width Auto X Height Auto Cancel 2 Specify the number of columns and rows in the table 3 Setthe Cell padding which is the amount of space between the contents of a table cell and the cell boundaries Cell padding is measured in pixels Table border Cell padding Sales Q1 02 North 345 564 380 South 445 Cell spacing 4 Set the Cell spacing which is the distance between cells 5 Click OK Note The properties you set when creating a new table will be saved and used for the next table created The table appears with the Table Properties palette These properties apply to the entire table you can also select a row column or individual cell and set its 240 Chapter 15 Adding Tables properties See Setting Row and Column Properties on page 247 and Setting Cell Properties on page 248 Alm 8 auo Eitto Contents Alignment Vertical Auto Horiz
48. You can create selection criteria that isolate the records you want in your data list Enter your selection criteria and click OK If you do not use all three lines choose end from the drop down list at the end of the last line you use Inthe Data list area of the Data Publishing dialog enter a name for the data list Inthe Fields list select fields to include in the data list by clicking the check boxes to the left of the fields As a shortcut you can click the Add All button which marks all fields for display Typically however you display only a subset of fields in the data list and display all fields on stacked pages To link a field to its stacked page select the field in the Data Publishing dialog and click the Link Unlink button A data list automatically includes a navigation button that links to the record s stacked page When you link a field site visitors can click either the button or the linked field to jump to the record s stacked page To change the order in which fields appear in the data list click a field and then click the up and down arrow buttons Continue to select fields and click the up and down arrow buttons until the list is in the order you want 10 Set the Stacked Page options e Display all fields places all fields available in the data object in a simple layout when NetObjects Fusion creates the first stacked page Use this shortcut to avoid placing fields individually
49. m Time Based Picture tool 10 Click the LED Type row and select a style for the LED text 015 square dots e liscircular dots e 2isregular text 11 Click the LED Font Size row and select a size for the message text You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Adding Time Based Pictures You can use the Time Based Picture component to display different pictures at the same location on your page at the time of day you specify You select the image to display and specify the hour at which to display it The browser automatically displays the picture at the specified time The picture remains on the page until it 1s time for the next picture to be displayed NetObjects Fusion supports gif and jpg formats in components See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 To add time based pictures and set the properties 1 In Page view select the Time Based Picture tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Draw a box on the page where you want to locate the picture A picture placeholder and the Time Based Picture Properties palette appear Time Based Picture X 20 Time Based Picture The number of images is 3 by default 470 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components 3 Click the Number of Images row and specify the number of images you want to rotate You can use up to 24 images NetObjects Fusion adds an Image Start T
50. on page 277 1 In Page view select the banner The General tab of the Banner Properties palette appears 313 Using Banners 2 In the Site Style field select the style that contains the banner you want to display Only active styles will appear in the list 3 In the banner field select the banner you want to display 4 Inthe Display section select Horizontal or Vertical orientation 314 CHAPTER 19 Creating Links and Anchors NetObjects Fusion makes it easy to create navigation aids using links You can make any text image shape or area of an image into a navigation aid by adding a link Link page objects to any point on the Web including points within your site or open your link in a pop up window You can also create and link to anchors markers at a specific location on a page to aid navigation in long pages This chapter tells you how to create and use Internal links Anchors Smart links External links Email links Relative links File links Link targets Links with added HTML Imagemaps 315 Creating Links Link icon Creating Links You can use the linking techniques described in this chapter to manually link objects such as text pictures and drawn shapes to internal locations in a site and external locations such as files and other Web pages As you organize a site you re likely to create multiple links to the same location You can easily upd
51. or to the page s content HTML indicator icon Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Page HTML Generated HTML Insert Field lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN gt lt TITLE gt Title of Page will be generated by NetObjects Fusion lt TITLE gt lt NetObjects Fusion Generated HEAD HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY NetObjects Fusion Generated BODY Parameters gt lt NetObjects Fusion Generated BODY gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Between Head Tags Inside Body Tag Beginning of Body End of Body End of Page Click to insert contents of an HTML script or other text file Click to insert a field Preview your code in placeholder HTML that NetObjects Fusion generates Type or paste your HTML or script on the tab You can click the Insert File button to insert contents of an HTML script or other text file Click the Insert Field button to insert a field See Managing Variables on page 571 Click OK The object is marked with an HTML icon Preview the site to test your code and view the source from your browser to see the resulting HTML To edit the code open the Object HTML dialog again click the tab containing your code and make changes 551 Examples of Object HTML Examples of Object HTML Displaying a Message on Mouse Click You can display a message when site visitors click an image or text link One way to do this
52. 7 Click another photo in the File Name list to continue adding titles and captions or click Done to close the editor To edit existing text click in the text field and make changes Be aware that if you formatted some or all of the text on the photo page the formatting will be lost if you modify the text on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor For information about formatting the title and caption text see Formatting Photo Titles and Captions on page 221 219 Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions Adding and Editing Photo Titles on the Thumbnail Page If the selected thumbnail template accommodates a photo title you can enter it directly on the thumbnail page 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Click in the blue border at the bottom of the thumbnail image and type the title text Photo Gallery Properties editor Gallery Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Format C Textlink Enter the Gallery Template Slide z Style the title text here Columns 2 Cell spacing O 4 Pixels Include title Format Title Help Preview scaled to fit Slide e Thumbnail images are automatically created e Thumbnail images appear in vertical columns Title is placed below the images mmu To edit existing text click in the text field and make changes For information about formatting the title
53. 7 01 sec color 4 Click on the Transparency check box Click on the Add Color button to open the Color Picker dialog then select the transparent color Resizing and Orienting a Picture Resizing a Picture When you resize a picture and publish the site NetObjects Fusion changes the HTML lt HEIGHT gt and WIDTH attributes of the image so the file is displayed in the new size 1 In Page view select the picture you want to resize The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the Geometry tab 197 Resizing and Orienting a Picture 3 To maintain the picture s scale so that the height and width are proportional select Maintain Aspect Ratio Picture Properties 2 X Width Height Unit 24 feo H one Maintain aspectratio Tile Select to Rotate Maintain image E Rotation z height and CEE width Horizontal Vener proportions Iu Apply 4 Inthe Height and Width fields select the desired image dimensions You can select to display the image dimensions in Pixels or Percent from the Unit drop down list Tiling a Picture You can create multiple instances of a picture by tiling it 1 In Page view select the picture you want to tile The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the Geometry tab 3 Select Tile Picture Properties 2 x Width Height Unit for d or ced fes Maintainaspectratio
54. AltTag Display Play inline Cc Launch from picture aricen gif 2022 The name of the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab To select a different movie file click the Browse button 5 To provide text for the browser to display when it cannot play a movie enter a description in the AltTag field 6 In the Display section select e Play inline to position the movie in the browser window in the same location as the placeholder Launch from picture to use a picture to represent the movie on the page and play it in a new browser window when the site visitor clicks the picture You can use the placeholder icon or click Browse and select a different image file 7 Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 371 Inserting a QuickTime Movie 8 On the Controls tab set the sound volume for the movie You can enter number from 0 to 256 QuickTime Properties BEE jo Molume 2 4 Display options Hide all Controller Auto start T Loop Jin Back and Fortt Keep movie in user s cache 9 In the Display options section select Hide all if you don t want to show the movie but want to use it only as background sound This option does not work if you choose Launch from picture on the General tab Controller to display a control bar that site visitors can use to start or stop the movie
55. Click OK to close the Connector dialog Using the Schema Editor If you are unable to connect to your database or want to add specific tables and fields you can add configure the database schema manually 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the DB Component toolbar Click on the page to indicate the connector s location The Connector dialog appears Complete the settings on the Connection tab The Database tab will become active Click on Add Table The Table dialog will appear Name Table 1 OK Cancel 504 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Note The Add Table button is not active if the Import from Connection checkbox is selected Uncheck Import from Connection to configure tables and fields manually 5 Type in the table name and click OK The table will appear under the Connector in the Schema field Connector Connector1 x Connection Database Recordsets Schema amp Connector Add Column H E Employees 9 08 Title View Date Eev Table Remove Import from Connection Note While some platforms are not case sensitive it is recommended you type the name of the table exactly as it appears in your database 6 Click Add Column to add a field from the table The Column dialog will appear Name Field 1 fvarcHaR bd OK Cancel 7 Type ina field name and select a field type
56. Layout Region tool Chapter 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions Layout Regions define an HTML table If you use many Layout Regions or nest Layout Regions it increases the size of the page s HTML file and slows page rendering in your site visitor s browser Creating a Layout Region 1 In Page view select the Layout Region tool from the Container flyout on the Standard toolbar 2 Draw a Layout Region on the Layout 3 Position and size the Layout Region just as you would position any other object 4 Add objects to the Layout Region Adding Objects to a Layout Region Like a Layout a Layout Region can contain any object text pictures media or even other Layout Regions To add objects to a Layout Region Select the appropriate tool and create an object within the Layout Region Drag objects into the Layout Region from elsewhere on the page e make the Layout Region expand as needed to contain the object drag the object into the Layout Region When the Layout Region border changes to a thick blue outline the object is contained in the Layout Region Todragan object over a Layout Region without embedding it hold down Alt as you drag the object Displaying the Layout Region Grid To make it easier to place objects precisely in the Layout Region you can use a local alignment grid that is independent from the grid displayed within the Layout To display and modify the Layout Region grid
57. Out To Left Out TG Ton Left Opens a dialog with Values all default parameter Expression values For some actions you can click Values on the Parameters menu to choose from a wider selection of values 407 Adding an Action to Linked Text a Link Tool The Parameter Values dialog appears listing all parameters currently available for this action and their default values Parameter values for a Fly message Parameter Values Select a parameter to edit its value in the text field Whether you type a value directly or choose it from a list or dialog depends on the parameter To modify a value select a parameter and edit its value in the field at the top of the dialog Depending on the parameter you might type the value or choose it from a drop down list or from the Color Picker Picture File Open dialog or Link dialog Click OK when you re done editing parameters You can also write your own JavaScript expression to generate a parameter value See Scripting Parameter Values on page 416 8 Click OK in the Set Action dialog Adding an Action to Linked Text In addition to adding an action to a text block you can also add an action to linked text by creating a smart Blank link and then setting the text to have an action instead of linking to another page A text link can be a trigger but cannot be a target 1 In Page view select the text 2 From the Object menu choose Link or
58. Primary and secondary navigation bars offer different sets of button pictures which are defined by the current SiteStyle Other than the pictures displayed primary and secondary navigation bars function the same way Because secondary button pictures are typically different in size shape or color you can use a secondary navigation bar to visually distinguish links to different parts of your site For example to help site visitors understand the SiteStructure you can use the secondary navigation bar for the lower levels of your site To see the difference between primary and secondary navigation bars go to Style view Custom navigation bars are created in Style view and can be used in place of the default primary and secondary navigation bars Navigation bars available in active 303 Using Navigation Bars site styles can be used on any page allowing you to create unique styles on individual pages See Adding Banners and Buttons on page 277 You can also choose whether the button for the current page will be highlighted or not Use button highlighting to show site visitors which page they are on If you are using AutoFrames be aware that highlighting affects the way the browser refreshes your page A highlighted button indicates Evers the current page You can also enable rollover buttons on the navigation bar If rollover is on when a site visitor moves the pointer over the button the SiteStyle ro
59. See Chapter 26 m Picture Rollover tool See Chapter 26 Rotating Picture tool See Chapter 26 Screen Door tool See Chapter 26 eu Site Mapper tool See Chapter 26 Em Ticker Tape tool See Chapter 26 9 Time Based Picture tool See Chapter 26 Plug In s Toolbar Flash tool See Chapter 26 iii Shockwave tool See Chapter 26 QuickTime tool See Chapter 26 Windows Media tool See Chapter 26 Real Player tool See Chapter 26 Active X tool See Chapter 26 Plug Ins tool See Chapter 26 Java Applet tool See Chapter 26 Java Bean tool See Chapter 26 Sound tool See Chapter 26 26 t 4B 50 8 v G 84 Chapter 6 Page View Basics Dragging and Dropping Objects 1 In Windows Explorer select the file you want to place You can drag and drop any file you can place with an object tool 2 Drag the file into the NetObjects Fusion window and drop it on the page 3 Set the object s properties Importing Pages In Page view you can import a page authored elsewhere convert it to NetObjects Fusion format and edit its contents as you would any other page You can import files with htm html jsp rtf or txt extensions or files created in Microsoft Word 97 Word 2000 or Word version 2002 If you prefer not to convert an HTML page to NetObjects Fusion format you can place it as an object See Referencing HTML from Page View on page 392 Note Because of variations
60. Setting Up the Site View Display change orientation from the View menu choose Orientation and then choose Vertical or Horizontal Tochange background color from the View menu choose Background Color and select a new color from the Color Picker set up page icon color codes see Setting Site Management Properties on page 37 Collapsing the SiteStructure Display By collapsing the display of the SiteStructure you hide the child pages ofa selected page displaying only the page icons you want to see A page with hidden child pages displays a plus symbol beneath its icon To collapse the display of child pages click the triangle beneath the parent s page icon To expand the display to see child pages again click the plus sign I Click here to expand O the SiteStructure Click here to collapse the SiteStructure You can also collapse the display by selecting a parent page and pressing Tab To expand the display press Tab again The Structure and Outline views display the same expanded and collapsed pages If you change the child pages hidden and shown in one view the other view reflects your changes Working in Site Outline View Site Outline view displays the SiteStructure in outline format including a table of the properties child name page type status publishing status and comments of 48 Click the minus sign to collapse this branch of the site This branch of th
61. This option is not available when Hide all is selected and it does not work if you choose Launch from picture on the General tab e Auto start to automatically start playing the movie when the page loads Loop to replay the movie when it comes to the end To replay the movie from the end to the beginning select Back and forth 10 To store the movie in the cache on the site visitor s system select Keep movie in user s cache If the visitor leaves the page and comes back the movie doesn t have to be downloaded again because it is already in the system cache You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 372 Windows Media Player tool Chapter 21 Placing Media Inserting a Windows Media Player File You can add video such as an animation or a movie to a site To view these files site visitors must install the appropriate plugin for their browser and platform The latest browsers often have video players built in For example Microsoft Internet Explorer uses Windows Media Player To ensure that site visitors can view your video provide a link to a site from which they can download the appropriate plugin NetObjects Fusion supports these video file formats Windows Media wm wmy asf asx avi MPEG mpg mpeg mlv mp2 mpa mpe mpv2 m3u mp2v To insert a Windows Media Player file 1 In Page view select the Windows Media Pl
62. Tile Rotate no Rotation X Flip Horizontal Vertical Apply Select to tile the image 198 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 4 Drag a selection handle to enlarge the box and display more or fewer tiled images NetObjects Fusion displays multiple images of the picture in the box Each image is the size of the picture in the source file Rotating a Picture You can rotate pictures in 90 degree increments 1 In Page view select the picture you want to rotate The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the Geometry tab 3 In the Rotate drop down list select the desired rotation Picture Properties 2 1 Width Height Unit foo H Je H pixels Maintain aspectratio Tile Rotate 90 clockwise 0 no Rotation ise clo 90 cloc Picture rotated 90 degrees Flipping a Picture You can flip pictures horizontally or vertically 1 In Page view select the picture you want to flip The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the Geometry tab 3 In the Flip field select e Horizontal to flip the image horizontally along the vertical axis 199 Resizing and Orienting a Picture e Vertical to flip the image vertically along the horizontal axis Image flipped horizontally Original Image Image flipped vertically Cropping a Picture
63. Un ume CER Click on the Color icon to open the Color Picker Select a border and click OK 202 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 6 Inthe Thickness field specify the thickness of the border m Picture Properties 2 X ales amp mel R O Border Line style Solid Color Mill Thickness 3 a The border color is controlled by the site visitor s browser and the page text color settings Check the border appearance in the appropriate browsers before publishing your site Adding Text to a Picture You can add text to a picture and format its font size and alignment The text you add becomes part of a new image file when you publish the page containing the picture If you chose to Copy to site s Assets folder in the Picture File Open dialog when you add text to a picture and publish the site NetObjects Fusion generates a new file listed in Publish view as an auto generated image Your original file is unchanged and included among the site assets The new file is included in the published site on the server See Adding Text to a Shape or Picture on page 179 Removing Red Eye in a Picture You can use the Picture properties to remove red eye in a picture 1 In Page view select the picture for which you want to reduce red eye The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the Red Eye Removal tab 3 Click the red eye icon 203 Editing Picture Hotspots The red eye marquee will appea
64. Using the Picture Properties Palette In NetObjects Fusion you can perform advanced image manipulation using the Properties Palette If you chose to Copy to site s Assets Folder then when you crop an image tile an image rotate an image create a transparent GIF or add text to a shape or picture NetObjects Fusion generates a new file referred to as an auto generated image The original image is unchanged and is listed in Assets view To revert back to the original image file 1 In Page view click on the image you want to work with The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click on Revert to Original This restores only changes made to the image file such as cropping or flipping To restore the original image add the image from the assets folder Warning You cannot use Revert to Original if you did not select Save a Copy to site s Assets folder See See Adding a Picture on page 188 Optimizing Images Optimization is the process of fine tuning your images for use on the Web and minimizing the time it takes for the images to download You can use the optimization settings in the Picture Properties palette and the file size information in the Optimize Image editor to keep track of and adjust download time while maintaining image quality See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 for information on image file types supported You can optimize your images in two ways Select a common predefined setting
65. You cannot add a Recordset Iterator to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the recordset iterator s location The Recordset Iterator Properties palette appears dset Iterator Properties o alol Recordset Iterator peer 1 3 Select Start as the Recordset Iterator type from the drop down list A Start iterator is necessary to begin the loop or iteration through the data 4 Type a name for the recordset iterator The recordset iterator name does not have to match any database fields it is used strictly to identify the iterator and its attributes so that it can be used with any recordset added to the page For example if you are going to loop through a recordset that contains email addresses you may want to call the iterator Emaillterator 5 In the RecordsPerPage field specify the number of records returned to display on a page 513 Retrieving and Displaying Data You can add navigation links to the page so that if more records are returned from the query than displayed on the page you can click a smart link that will display the next set of records See Navigating Through Recordsets on page 523 If no value is entered all records will be displayed 6 Select the recordset being queried from the Recordset drop down list 7 Inthe StartRow field enter the row number in the table you are querying where you want the iteration to begin I
66. You use the following objects when you publish data in NetObjects Fusion Data objects A data object is a collection of data fields that define what data will be published Creating a data object is the essential first step in adding internal or external data to your site The data object becomes an asset of your site When you reference records internally you must specify the data fields you want to store When you store records from external data NetObjects Fusion includes all fields available in the source Data fields Defined in the data object data fields appear on stacked pages and are the containers for the data in your site You can arrange and label data fields the arrangement appears on all stacked pages Data lists The data list appears on the parent page of the stacked pages that contain the actual data The data list functions as a table of contents for the 474 Internal or Chapter 27 Data Publishing internal or external data in your site You select the fields you want to display as column headers in the list The field data from either the internal or external source populates the data list when you publish Stacked pages Each record in your database appears on a separate stacked page below the page containing the data list Stacked pages are not siblings of each other but instead are iterations of the same page containing the fields defined in your data object The following illustration shows the re
67. doesn t check it no value is sent to the server Default Select either Checked or Unchecked to set the box s initial status which is returned as the response if the site visitor doesn t change it 4 To label each check box use the Text tool on the Standard toolbar 437 Adding Objects to a Form Adding a Combo Box If a long list of check boxes or radio buttons takes up too much space in your form you can list options in a combo box Use a scrolling list if you want site visitors to be able to select more than one option which is a space saving alternative to a group of check boxes Or use a drop down list for selecting only one option which is an alternative to radio buttons After creating the form as described on page 430 i Combo Box tool 2 Draw a rectangle on the form 1 In Page view select the Forms Combo Box tool from the Form toolbar 3 Setthe Forms Combo Box properties Forms Combo Box Propertie M ES 0 Name FormsComboBoxt Dropdownlist List box Nisible height lines Elements Name Value Selected Name passed to the script for the combo box Names and values passed for each item in the list Name Type the name for this combo box that s passed to the script processing the form If you re using the Form Handler use a number indicating the combo box s order in the output text Type Select whether you want a drop down list that di
68. double click the external link you want to update 567 Managing Links and Link Targets The Links dialog appears None TURON Link to http www netobjects com Location of the link Pages Home HomeLayout List of pages that use the link 2 Change the name in the Name field if desired 3 Update the URL in the Link To field and click OK You can only update the location of one link at a time To update other external link URLs repeat the process If you have a list of links created in HTML and import the HTML into Page view the links are automatically added to Assets view Otherwise you cannot import a list of links in Assets view 568 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Displaying the Page Containing a Link 1 2 3 Double click the link in Assets Links view The Links dialog appears Select the page you want to see in the list of pages Click the Go To button The page you selected appears in Page view Adding an External Link 1 In Assets Links view from the Assets menu choose New Link or click New Asset on the control bar The Links dialog appears Enter a name Type the link destination and click OK Be sure to include http or a similar designator Deleting a Link 1 2 3 In Assets Links view select the link you want to delete From the Edit menu choose Delete Link or press Delete Click Yes to confirm the deletion You cannot delete a link that is in us
69. folder structure 295 importing 289 managing 289 removing 294 text in banners and buttons 276 updating list 294 sizing columns in tables 243 Layouts 114 Layouts to objects 396 MasterBorders 134 multiple objects 89 objects 89 pages 79 pictures 197 rows in tables 243 text 157 text boxes 126 smart links 316 creating 320 defined 320 stacked pages 488 types 321 sort order 25 sounds file display options 376 377 file formats 119 inserting 374 page 119 spans creating 167 spelling checker 183 spelling dictionary 25 spl files 366 Splash files 366 stacked pages 485 adding for internal data 489 adding navigation buttons 484 488 adding pictures 489 adding text 489 defined 475 deleting 489 designing 486 image files and Assets view 562 moving through pages 488 using smart links 488 see also pages Standard toolbar 82 starting NetObjects Fusion 28 structural links see smart links 316 Style view 8 270 272 styles automatic 155 Styles folder 17 sub buttons 457 Submit button in forms 439 swa files 368 swf files 366 symbols inserting 178 T tab typing in HTML 543 26 tables adding 240 252 256 259 background 242 border thickness 242 cell padding 240 cell spacing 240 column width 247 container 96 converting Layout Regions 116 deleting rows and columns 245 forms 430 identifying objects 241 inserting rows and columns 244 merging cells 245 row height 247 selecting cells 250 selecting rows and columns 24
70. importing 67 What s This popup 13 window size at startup 20 Windows Media formats 373 Windows Media Player 373 wizards 31 word count 186 wrapping text around objects 125 Z ZeroMargins MasterBorder 132 external HTML 391 399 Zooming in out 11 30
71. into existence when 311 Using Banners Banner tool a site visitor goes to the page by assigning the On Page Loaded do Transition action with the transition type set to Iris See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Adding a Banner 1 In Page view go to the page on which you want to place the banner 2 Choose the Banner tool from the Navigation flyout of the Standard toolbar 3 Drag a box in the MasterBorder or Layout area where you want to place the banner Drag in a horizontal direction for a horizontal banner or in a vertical direction for a vertical banner A new horizontal or vertical banner appears in the current SiteStyle z e Page name Hom v Use for Banner title Page title Home Banner title ze Display Site Style Current SiteStyle 53 Banner Bannert Orientation Horizontal E Changing the Banner Text By default the banner text is the page name but you can specify a custom name or no name for the banner You can also split banner text into two lines The style of the banner text is determined by the current SiteStyle To change the banner text 1 In Page view select the banner 312 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners The General tab of the Banner Properties palette appears 2 Inthe Banner field type the new text for the banner To make the text two lines press Enter at the end of the first line To restore the default
72. password so that you don t have to manually enter it each time you publish files 594 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site 6 Click Advanced to specify publish settings Advanced Publish Settings I File Naming Aliases Advanced FTP Home page file name Index X File extension for HTML pages html X za Note Advanced options are not available for WebDAV profiles 7 Select the options for your site Home page file name Index is the default page name recognized by most Web servers Select Current Page Name to set the Home page to use the same name as in Site view Select Home or Default to set the page as in Home html and Default html File extension for HTML pages Select htm html or shtml depending on the page extension your browser recognizes That extension is applied to all HTML files for each page in your site Click the up and down arrows to see all the options To add an extension to the list click the browse button Your service provider or hosting company can tell you which extension to use for the Web server Make sure you use a page extension that your browser recognizes or it might not display the page properly If you used the Custom Name dialog in Site view and a file name extension for an individual page that customized extension overrides the site default for that page If pages do not seem to publish with the correct extension custom names that you applied to the pages may be i
73. renaming 603 site files 28 filtering external data 483 firewalls publishing with 611 Fixed Page Layout forms 433 HTML output method 100 107 overlapping objects 93 Flash files 366 Flashpix files 188 flyouts 11 folders aliased 603 606 creating custom 602 deleting 603 renaming 603 folders virtual see aliased folders 606 font size 159 fonts browser fonts in AutoFrames 141 browsers 23 default display in browser 130 SiteStyle banners and buttons 275 Form Handler component 441 form objects adding 432 creating 432 naming 433 warning icons 433 form responses processing 444 Form toolbar 82 432 formatted text fields 479 forms adding objects 432 assigning CGI script 444 check boxes 437 combo boxes 438 creating 430 displaying in browsers 433 edit fields 433 Fixed Page Layout 433 Form Handler 441 Form toolbar 432 hidden fields 446 HTML output method 433 multiple line text fields 435 objects 432 passwords 434 position based 430 radio buttons 436 Reset button 439 Submit button 439 submitting data in email 443 submitting data to text files 441 submitting responses as plain text 441 tables 430 text based 430 types 430 fpx picture files 188 frameless browsers alternate content 548 frames adding 142 AutoFrames 141 borderless 145 browser support 141 548 coding your own 555 creating default target 549 defined 140 generating borders in HTML frames 145 generating visible borders 145 HTML 141 links within 141
74. starts with a pe mr e To replace the existing condition repeat steps a through c then highlight the condition on the right side you want to replace it with and click the check sign To add additional conditions select AND to narrow the query results or OR to broaden the query results and click the plus sign Toremove conditions from a Where clause highlight the condition on the right side and click the minus sign order the conditions in a Where clause use the up and down arrows 5 Click OK to close the Recordset editor Configuring Variables You can define custom variables in the Recordset dialog 1 In Page view double click on the Connector object you want to work with to display the Connector dialog 2 Click on the Recordset tab and select a recordset Click Edit to open the Recordset editor 3 In the Select section click on the Table you are working with 4 Adda Where clause See Filtering Recordset Results on page 508 5 In the Value drop down field choose Custom Variable Where on Lastname FirstName is equal to Mary OR LastName starts with starts with iv j x Eve Order by FirstName Ascending Dos il EE Ascending m 510 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database The Variables dialog will appear Variables x Name Password Add om m Remove OK 6 Enter a variable name 7 Select
75. 2 2 X alelo Erame name User scrollable C Yes C Auto r Enable margin padding Table structure Columns Rows HTML You cannot change the name of the frame 2 Select a User scrollable option Yes The browser always displays vertical and horizontal scroll bars in the frame whether needed or not No The browser never displays scroll bars even if needed to display all objects in the frame If the page content is larger than the frame itself site visitors cannot see the entire page Due to the nature of browsers links to anchors on a frame do not work if User scrollable is set to No Auto The browser displays scroll bars if the size of the page content requires them 3 Select User resizeable frame so site visitors can resize the frame HTML frame borders must be visible so site visitors can drag them to specify a new size If User resizable frame is not available return to the AutoFrames tab and select Generate HTML frame borders 4 Clear Enable margin padding if you want to place objects at the frame border with no spaces 146 Chapter 11 Working with AutoFrames Some browsers cut off content that does not have additional padding Preview your page in several browsers to make sure it appears as you intended 5 Ifyou are publishing using the Dynamic Page Layout or Regular Tables HTML output method choose the most efficient table structure columns or rows If yo
76. Applying a Style to a Text Span A span is a selection of text that you format as a unit You can assign a custom style or other formats to the characters included in a span to differentiate that text from the rest of the paragraph For example if you want your company s name to always appear in bold italic you can create a custom style specifying those attributes Then you select each instance of the company name as a span and apply the custom style You can achieve the same result by selecting the text and manually formatting it from the Properties palette but when you use a span you can apply a custom style quickly and then change it globally if necessary To create a span 1 In Page view select the text you want to format 2 Click the Span tool on the Standard toolbar 167 Working with Text Styles The New Span dialog appears Span specification span selection of Custom style text that you can assign a custom style to ha Dr formatting can be applied directly by using Format the Format button cee 3 Select a custom style from the drop down list or click the Format button and apply formatting to the selected text 4 Click OK To remove a span position the insertion point in the span click the Span tab on the Text Properties palette and click Remove Span Using Custom Styles You can create custom styles to augment HTML tag styles HTML tag styles such as Heading 1 lt H
77. Dynamic Pages Inserting a Sound File Sounds are either digital or synthesized audio files that a browser with a built in player or helper application can play Visitors can also download helper applications from sound technology developers and install them in their browsers To play sounds a system must have a sound card and speakers NetObjects Fusion supports the following popular audio file formats 374 Sound tool Chapter 21 Placing Media Windows Wave wav format sound files that play on Windows and the Mac OS For the Mac OS site visitors must have Netscape 3 x or later Audio Interchange File format aif with browser plugins can play on Windows 95 98 NT 2000 and ME and the Mac OS Musical Instrument Digital Interface midi mid can play on almost all types of operating systems Sun s au format is used in Java applets and can play on UNIX based operating systems RealAudio ra ram rm can play streaming audio on all systems requires RealAudio Web server resident software and sometimes includes video Site visitors must install the RealAudio player browser plugin Rich Music Format rmf is a sound file format that enhances the use of music and sound in interactive environments such as the Web You can also add any of these formats as a background sound that plays when a visitor views your page See Setting Layout and Layout Region Background Properties on page 118 Because
78. ER BY LName ASC Retrieving and Displaying Data Using a Recordset Iterator The recordset Iterator object is used to loop through a query recordset During each iteration the columns of current row are available for output The iterations will continue until one or more conditions are met For example if you are querying a database and want to return only one record that matches the condition FirstName Joe you do not need to add an iterator The query will return the first record meeting that condition then terminate However if you want to return all records in which FirstName Joe you will need to add an iterator so that all records in the database are searched and those meeting the condition will be returned It is important to remember that when using a recordset iterator you must add at least 2 to the page the first to begin the loop and the second to terminate it If you do not add a terminating iterator you will receive errors on the published page 512 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Warning Recordset Iterator objects must added or placed in the correct order for the code to be generated correctly It is recommended that you insert your iterator objects in a table to ensure placement is correct See Using Tables for Object Placement on page 496 To add a Recordset Iterator object 1 In Page view select the Recordset Iterator object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note
79. Enter a number to define the number of lines visible in the field 4 To label the field use the Text tool on the Standard toolbar 435 Adding Objects to a Form Adding Radio Buttons Use radio buttons when you want site visitors to choose one option from a group Clicking one radio button deselects all others in its group After creating the form as described on page 430 e 1 In Page view select the Radio Button tool from the Form toolbar 2 Draw arectangle on the form Radio Button tool 3 Setthe Forms Radio Button properties Forms Radio Button Properti X e o Name passed for the group to the script processing the form This should be the same for all buttons in the group Group name FormsRadioButtont Malue sent Default Value passed if this button is selected C Selected Not selected e Group name Type the name for this group of buttons that s passed to the CGI script processing the form This should be the same for all buttons in the group If you re using the Form Handler use a number indicating the buttons order in the output text e Value sent Type the value passed for the button if the site visitor selects it If you re using the Form Handler and a visitor selects a button named Large in a group named 4 the output text might appear as 4 Large Default Choose either Selected or Not selected to set the button s initial state which is returned as the response if th
80. Home Hobbies Favorites Photo Gallery By default the left right and bottom margins are separated from each other by an outline The lack of an outline between the left margin and the top margin indicates objects can straddle that boundary All pages have a MasterBorder If no MasterBorder is visible either the MasterBorder display is turned off on the View menu or the assigned MasterBorder has all margins set to zero like the ZeroMargins MasterBorder included with NetObjects Fusion You can change the size of any MasterBorder margin even those set to zero See Modifying the Current MasterBorder on page 133 When you create a new site NetObjects Fusion creates a default MasterBorder that contains three navigation aids a banner showing the page name at the top a button navigation bar on the left and a text navigation bar on the bottom As you add levels to the SiteStructure you can set navigation bar options to provide site visitors with appropriate access to all pages See Setting Navigation Structure on page 300 If you do not want to include the default banner and navigation bars in your site you can delete them or select the ZeroMargins MasterBorder 132 Chapter 10 Managing MasterBorders Selecting a MasterBorder In Page view click an empty space inside the MasterBorder If the page has the ZeroMargins MasterBorder click in the gray area outside the page NUM ENG arr 20 200
81. Home Bal EN EN Mission Events Item Fleece Jacket Next T Price 5999 ear Mountain Jacques Designs Description Fleece Jacket alone or as a mid layer stay warm and cozy Contest Color Green E Home Mission Events Next Tour Contest Hiking Products Products 590 280100 UPPER When you add a catalog object to the list page NetObjects Fusion automatically adds the Details page for you On the Site Navigation palette the list page is displayed as a single icon that contains multiple pages Site Navigation Home les Mission O Events Ez Activities amp Hiking Yosemite 7 Highlights g Next Tour B8 o Contest oO Wonder Lodge 8 7 Hiking Products 339 Adding a Catalog Adding a Catalog You can create a new catalog or add an existing catalog to your site You can insert an existing catalog or add catalogs that you removed from the site See Removing a Catalog on page 363 You add the catalog object to the page where you want to display the list of products You can add a new page or use an existing page Creating a New Catalog 1 In Page view display the page where you want to place the catalog object This is the page where the product list appears m 2 Choose the Catalog tool from the Advanced toolbar and click in the upper left W corner of the Layout area patulo tool Start in the upper left cor
82. In Page view select the text box and click the Text Box tab on the Text Properties palette In the Color field select e Automatic to set the background to the color specified in the Text Object style in Style view Transparent to set the background to the background color specified by the parent object of the text box For example if a small text box is embedded in a larger text box with a red background the small text box will also have a red background if Transparent is selected e Color to select a background color from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker In the Image field select e Automatic to set the background to the image specified in the Text Object style in Style view e None to eliminate the background image 127 Creating Pages that Resize to the Browser Window Browse to select an image from the Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the text box the browser tiles the image To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field Creating Pages that Resize to the Browser Window You can configure NetObjects Fusion so the text box is maximized in the site visitor s browser window When you use this option NetObjects Fusion generates the page s HTML without using tables 1 In Page view click th
83. In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to edit a table style for The Table Style Properties palette appears showing the name and format of the current selected table style TableStyle Properties 8 Default Selected Table Tex Tex Name pen Tex Tex Duplicate Delete Tet Text Style Editor 3x3 x Text Text 2 Format the table style See Setting Table Styles on page 253 Click Duplicate to create a duplicate of the table style selected Click Clear to delete all formatting associated with the selected table style Note When you edit a table style every site that uses the table style is affected If the table style you want to change is used in other sites and you don t want them to be affected create a new table style from the original table style 281 Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles Editing a Data List Icon Data list icons appear when you use the Data List tool to create a data list in Page view See Chapter 27 Data Publishing 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to change and click a Data List icon The Bullet Properties palette appears showing the name of the current data list icon image Bullet Properties Datalcon gif Browse 2 Click Browse select a new image in the Picture File Open dialog and click Open
84. Multiple Line Alignment Center Alignment Center Banner Image Button Image banner gif Browse visi Browse Select the font face size and style for the text Click Color and select a color from the Color Picker To position the text on the banner or button set the Horizontal and Vertical positions If horizontal button position is set to Left or Right or vertical position is set to Top or Bottom you can use the Offset option to move the text label on the button in small increments As you change the offset you can see the text move on the button in Style view To rotate the text click the up or down rotation buttons Click Right angles to limit the rotation to 90 degree increments If you clear the Right angles box clicking the rotation buttons increments the rotation angle and rotates the text You can also type a number in the box Select an option for multi line alignment if the banner or button text is more than one line Each button state has its own Properties palette so you can vary the images used on a navigation bar For example you can choose a happy face for the primary highlighted button and a neutral face for the primary regular button 276 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles The Properties palette shows the current image Button Properties Font Eace Trebuchet MS v Size fe Style Bold Color Color Position Hor
85. Names and Locations Giving custom names to assets can make them easier to manage 1 In Assets Files view double click the asset name to display the File dialog 2 Type a new name in the Name field and click OK Files Links Data Objects Variables lame Type InUse Location Size Dae Verify Stati ottom background bevel Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User SitesWySiteVissetstbottom backg 1KB 6 29 2003 7 45 34 Found on 7 ottom background film Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySite Assetstbottom_backg 1KB 6 29 2003 7 48 36 Found on 7 ottom left bevel Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User SitesWySiteVssetstbottom left 1KB 6 29 2003 7 45 34 Found on ottom left film Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySiteVssetstbottom left 1KB 6 29 2003 7 48 36 Found on 7 ottom right bevel Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySiteVAssetstbottom_right 1KB 6 29 2003 7 45 34 Found on i right film Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySiteVassetstbottom right 6 29 2003 7 48 36 Found Image es C NetO jects Fusion 7 5 User s BuiltWithNOF Found on Image C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites ySiteVAssetslclearpixel gif 1 5 29 2003 7 48 36 Found Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser SitesMySiteV amp ssetslleft backgro 1KB 6 29 2003 7 45 34 Found on 7 Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySite As
86. NetObjects Fusion makes it easy for you to add dynamic content to your site whether you want simple object animation or custom JavaScript actions You can have objects fly across the screen as the result of a site visitor s action Or you can launch a sequence of animations at any given time NetObjects Fusion contains powerful message based animation and interactive authoring capabilities that you can use to achieve these effects Take advantage of the Online view Building your site is just the beginning NetObjects Fusion provides direct access to online resources that offer information and guidance for making your site successful You can learn to host and promote your site set up an online store track site visitors and build personal relationships with your customers Templates hundreds of SiteStyles and components that can add new power to NetObjects Fusion and new features to your Web pages are available for you to download Make your site building experience better Take advantage of additional features such as simplified creation of pop up windows attractive new site styles ability to create and apply separate page navigation smart guides and object grouping to easily align objects in Page view and much more How to Get Started with NetObjects Fusion To ensure success as you start building Web sites with NetObjects Fusion 8 use the tools provided with the program to get started quickly QuickStart Tips For information abo
87. Standard Action is displayed in the action type drop down list For information about scripted actions see Scripting Your Own Actions on page 415 Specify the object your action is to target in the Target field The action can target any object on the page the Layout itself or even the MasterBorder By default it targets the object triggering it To target another object click the Target menu button next to the Target field and choose an object from the Object Tree palette If you add a Fly Out to Top Right action to one picture and target it at another for example clicking the first picture can trigger the target picture to fly off the page Set Action Name Action When Clicked gt Standard Action Target Picturel Message gt Select a target from the Object Tree palette H DefaultmasterBorder L3 BuilewithNoF NavigationBar2 NavigationBart Banner1 ActivitiesLayout Expand or contract levels of the Tree by clicking the plus or minus sign for a level You can also cascade an action to several objects at once see Targeting Several Objects with One Action on page 412 6 Specify the action you want to occur in the Message field 405 Adding Actions to Objects and Pages n Message menu button Click the Message menu button next to the Message field point to a category and click the action you w
88. Style SiteStyle C Other Phoenix X HTML 3 To select a different image for the line click Custom Image and choose an image in the Picture File Open dialog 4 To use a line from a different SiteStyle click Other and select a SiteStyle from the drop down list If you change SiteStyles NetObjects Fusion updates the line A SiteStyle line is a gif file You can change the size of the SiteStyle line by dragging a handle However if you assign a new SiteStyle the line returns to its default size Drawing Lines and Arrows 1 In Page view select the Line tool from the Draw tool flyout on the Standard toolbar 2 Drag from one point to another to set the position length and orientation of the line The point where you start dragging is the head of the line The point where you finish is the tail of the line regardless of the direction you drag To constrain the line to vertical or horizontal hold down the Shift key while dragging 265 Drawing Lines and Arrows The Line Properties palette appears Line Properties BRED AltTaq Line width 2 Color Line X Color Head mm Tai Cm Allparts use one color Style Head Line Tail line HeadiTailsame style v Outline Link Anchor HTML 3 Type an alt tag in the AltTag field See Adding and Modifying Alt Tags on page 87 4 Inthe Line width box set the width
89. Style Site Style Current Site Style Table Set Custom Style als 80 Style Editor 313 Border Cells Repeating Cells Clear Table Style Site Style Current Site Style Table Set Custom Style z mls B o Style Editor 313 Border Cells Text Repeating Cells ba Clear Lew Table Style Site Style Current Site Style 7 Table Set Custom Style Table Properties 2 x als 8B o Style Editor did Border Cells Text Text Text Repeating Cells INO Um Clear Table Style Site Style Current Site Style lt Table Set Custom Style Creating a Table Style To create a Table Style 255 Setting Table Styles 1 In Page view select the Table you want to work with The Table Properties palette appears 2 Click on the Table Style tab Table Properties 2 x gg 8 amp o Style Editor 313 Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Table Style Site Style Current Site Style Table Set Custom Style In the Style Editor area click on the blue arrow to display the dimensions selector The dark blue boxes are the cells in the middle region and the light blue boxes are the cells in the border region Table Properties
90. To change the picture for one button 1 In Page view navigate to the page containing the navigation button you want to change 308 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners 2 Double click the button to select it A wide border surrounds the button to show it is selected The General tab of the Navigation Button Properties palette appears Click Browse to change the button image or rollover image and select an image file from your hard disk or LAN If you want to use an image that is on a CD ROM copy it to your hard disk first Setting Text Navigation Bar Properties 1 In Page view select a text navigation bar The Navigation Bar Properties palette will appear Background Color automatic 2 Delimiters Ew Dh Include delimiters in link Format Alignment Center Constrain to single line Options Link current page 2 In the Background Color field select Automatic to set the background to the color specified in the Text NavBar style in Style view Transparent to set the background to the background color specified by the parent object of the text navigation bar e Color to select a background color from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker 3 In the Image field selec
91. Using the Zoom Tools You can select the Zoom In or Zoom Out tool from the Standard toolbar in Site and Page views The Zoom In tool is a magnifying glass with a plus sign the Zoom Out tool has a minus sign You can reverse the function of the current Zoom tool by holding down the Alt key For example if the selected Zoom tool is Zoom In pressing Alt changes it to Zoom Out When you release the Alt key it becomes Zoom In again 11 Navigating in NetObjects Fusion A Preview Site Navigating in NetObjects Fusion NetObjects Fusion provides several navigation tools including buttons on the control bar and the Go menu Using the Control Bar Buttons You use the buttons on the control bar to move between views See NetObjects Fusion Views on page 8 Some of the buttons in the middle of the control bar change depending on the view For example in Site view and Page view you see a New Page button and in Publish view you see a Publish Settings button To see how the site will appear in the browser you specify in the Application Options dialog click the Preview Site button Using the Go Menu The Go menu provides all the navigation features in one place and shows equivalent keyboard shortcuts A dot to the left of a command indicates the current view Go menu presents Page Design navigation commands and HTML Source keyboard navigation Page Preview shortcuts Services Ctrl 1 Site Ctri 2 Page Ctrl 3 Sty
92. Variable Options Click this button to enable variable substitution You can add a prefix and suffix to NetObjects Fusion s syntax that will not conflict with your custom defined variables Entering META Tags When you enter META tags on this tab the tags are inserted in the lt HEAD gt tag of every page of your site To limit this information to a specific page you can enter the HTML directly See Indexing Pages for Search Engines on page 546 33 Setting Options for the Current Site From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site and click the META tags tab Current Site Options General META tags History Backup Keywords Author User defined Category name Content Cancel Keywords Type a series of keywords separated by commas For example if your site features mountain sports you might type words such as skiing rock climbing mountain biking and so on These keywords are added to the META tag in each page s HTML file on every page of the site Search engines use these keywords to index your site For example if you type skiing rock climbing mountain biking the META tag generated and placed between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags of the page is lt META NAME keywords CONTENT skiing rock climbing mountain biking gt Author Enter a name to be included in the META tag in each page s HTML file header For example if you type Jesse Jones the META t
93. Web page Generator to declare the tool used to build your Web page Keywords to list a series of keywords representing the content of your site Language to declare the language used on your Web page Organization to declare an organization associated with your Web page Public to declare if the Web page is available for public viewing Rating to declare the content level of your Web page to screen out inappropriate viewers Refresh to declare the number of seconds before your Web page is refreshed Revisit After to declare the number of days a search engine should revisit your Web page Robots to declare to search engines what content on your Web page to index and spider Click on the text field and enter your content 39 Setting Properties 5 To apply the same META tag to some or all of your Web pages Enter a META tag to the Home page then select Apply META tags to all pages on the META tag tab The META tag will appear on all page Enter a META tag to a page other than the Home page then select Inherit META tags from parent from the META tag tab The META tag will appear on all child pages of the parent page If you make changes to META tags on the child page the inherited META tags will no longer apply 6 Repeat the process for one or all of the available META tags Warning Adding META tags to a page in Site view will overwrite any existing keywords entered using the Site Options dial
94. When scanning make sure you make the scan larger than necessary Adding Photos You add photos on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor If you have just added a photo gallery the Photo Gallery Editor will appear and you may skip step 1 1 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor You can e Add a photo gallery by following the steps in Adding a Photo Gallery on page 210 Double click a photo on a thumbnail page or a photo page The Photo Gallery Properties Editor appears displaying the Images tab Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Images in display order 0 images in gallery File Name Thumbnail Image Photo Image Preview Output Settings File Type PEG Quality Approximate download time sec ef 28 8 Kbps 2 Click Add The Open dialog appears 212 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Navigate to the folder containing the photos you want to add to the gallery Select the photos for the gallery You can e Click a single photo to select it e Press Shift Click or Ctrl Click to select multiple photos e Press Ctrl A to select all photos in the folder oren 0x Look in Photo Gallery e et E3 Jpg Filename Campsite ipg Falls ipg Guides ipg HalfDor Open Files of type Image Files gif ipo ipeg if bmp pcx Cancel Tip To select multiple images press Shift Click Ctrl Click to sele
95. When you click the Links tab a list of all the links and link targets used in your site appears including external links file links user defined internal links and smart links See Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Files Links Data Objects Variables Name Link To Type Target Verify Status _blank Link Target _parent Link Target _self Link Target _top Link Target Climbing Shoes Climbing Shoes Internal none Helmet Helmet Internal none Home Home Internal none January January Internal none January January belay Internal none January January colorado Internal none January Januarytkayak Internal none January January maine Internal none January January nepal Internal none NetObjects Home Page http www netobjects com External none Snow Jacket Snow Jacket Internal none Tours Tours Camping Internal none Tours Tours MountainCycling Internal none Tours Tours MountainHiking Internal none Links between entries in a data list and their associated stacked pages do not appear in Assets view You can manage such links directly on the data list pages See Creating a Data List on page 482 Updating an External Link The Link To location varies depending on the type of link In Assets view you can change the location of an external link yourself by changing the URL You can also change the name of the link for Assets view but not the link s other characteristics 1 In Assets Links view
96. Where Clause tab a In the operand field select the datafield or variable you will be applying the condition to b Select an operator from the Operator drop down list Update Inspector x Fields here Clause OR vj JD v starts with d is equal to Mary R LName starts with V OK Cancel See Table 28 1 on page 509 for operator definitions d Selecta datafield or variable from the Value drop down list or type in a new value e Click the plus sign to add the clause or click the check sign to replace the existing clause Note A Where clause is necessary if you want to update specific data fields If you will be applying the updates to the entire table you do not need to add a Where clause 6 Select AND or OR to add additional conditions then repeat Step 5 7 Click OK to close the Update Inspector editor Delete Object E To delete records from a database 1 In Page view select the Delete object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Delete object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the Delete object s location 532 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database The Delete Properties palette appears 3 Double click in the SQL Wizard field The Delete Properties dialog will appear Delete Properties 20 Delete Double click here to edit ij Thank you
97. Windows Media Player files Sound files Plugins 365 Inserting a Flash File Flash tool Inserting a Flash File With Flash from Macromedia you can create rich Internet content and applications NetObjects Fusion supports Flash swf and Splash spl files To insert a Flash file 1 In Page view select the Flash tool from the Dynamic Media flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate the Flash file s location on the page The Open dialog appears 3 Select a Flash file from your hard disk or LAN or select a Flash file already in use in the site from the Plug in Assets tab For information about using assets see Chapter 30 Managing Assets 4 Click Open The Flash placeholder appears on your page and the Flash Properties palette appears The name of the selected file appears in the File field on the General tab Shockwave Flash Properties jejo File sddContent vtsut Browse AltTag Mersion 5000 5 provide text for the browser to display if it cannot play the Flash file enter description in the AltTag field See Adding and Modifying Alt Tags on page 87 6 To play the latest Flash movies you sometimes must change the version You can find complete information at www macromedia com support flash ts documents test_version htm 366 T 8 10 11 12 13 Chapter 21 Placing Media Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and script
98. a File You can insert the contents of an HTML script or other text file 1 Click in a white area in the HTML Source Editor 2 Choose Insert File from the Text menu 3 In the Open dialog select a file to insert 541 Editing the Page s HTML 4 Click Open Inserting a Field You can insert fields that contain variable text such as the date and time the site was created or last modified the site name and author and so on NetObjects Fusion includes several fields you can use you can also define your own To insert a field into your source code choose Insert Field from the Text menu See Creating and Editing Fields on page 181 for details on inserting fields To use the author META tag you must specify the name of the author in the Current Site Options dialog See Entering META Tags on page 53 Using the Page HTML Dialog In Page View select the area of the page you want to access the Layout area to access the current page s HTML or a MasterBorder to access the HTML of several pages Then use the Page HTML dialog to add code to the document To find out how to add HTML or script to pages that use AutoFrames see Accessing an AutoFrame s HTML on page 543 1 In Page Design view click in an empty spot in the Layout area or MasterBorder To select a ZeroMargins MasterBorder click outside the page 2 Click the HTML button on the Properties palette The Page HTML dialog appears Click a t
99. a Section 1 Go to Site view and select a section 2 Right click the parent page of the section and select Section Character Set from the shortcut menu 618 Chapter 33 Working with Character Sets 3 Select a character set for the section from the Section Character Set drop down Character Set 2 xl Site character set Western European 150 8859 1 Section Character Set use Site Character Set x Use Site Character Set Baltic wWindows 1257 Central European CP852 Central European 150 8859 2 Central European Windows 1250 Chinese Simplified GB2312 Chinese Traditional BIG5 Cyrillic CP866 C 150 8853 5 Setting the Character Set for Imported Pages When you import a site into NetObjects Fusion you must ensure that it has the correct character set before you begin the import 1 From the Tools menu choose Options gt Application 2 In the Application Options dialog click the International tab 3 Inthe Imported HTML section of the dialog select a character set for imported text from the drop down list Imported HTML Imported text uses character set Specified in imported Meta tag Specified in imported Meta taq Baltic Windows 1257 Central European CP852 If you know the HTML pages in the site you are importing have the appropriate character set specified in the META tag you can use the Specified in imported Meta tag setting If however you know t
100. a Table Style from the Table Set drop down list All table styles associated with the selected site style will be available 260 CHAPTER 16 Drawing Shapes and Lines Shapes and lines are essential building blocks for your page designs You can draw rectangles rounded rectangles ellipses and polygons as well as HTML horizontal tules lines or SiteStyle lines and set shape and line properties This chapter describes Drawing shapes and setting properties Drawing horizontal rules Adding SiteStyle lines Drawing and editing lines and arrows 261 Drawing Shapes Draw Rectangle tool Drawing Shapes To draw an ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle or polygon 1 In Page view select the Draw tool on the Standard toolbar and choose the shape you want to add from the flyout 2 Draw the shape on the page Todraw a rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle click and draw the shape draw a polygon click to set the start point click to set all but the last points and double click the last point The Properties palette for the shape you created appears Rectangle Properties 2 x Ojo AltTag Line width Color Fill Color Line M Text in element Enable Link Anchor HTML When you draw a 3 Type an alt tag in the AltTag field See Adding and Modifying Alt Tags on page 87 4 In the Line width box set the
101. adding 535 typing a tab character 543 see also specific HTML tag HTML examples accommodating frameless browsers 548 auto forwarding from transition page 547 coding frames 555 creating default target frame 549 displaying Alert on mouse click 552 indexing pages for search engines 546 HTML file name extension 581 HTML files generate 576 584 HTML meta tags 583 HTML options 581 HTML output Dynamic Page Layout 100 103 Dynamic Page Layout actions 401 Fixed Page Layout 100 107 previewing tables 105 Regular Tables 100 107 selecting method 100 setting for publishing 100 setting output method 117 HTML Source Editor defined 538 tabs for frames 539 HTML Source view adding and editing code 539 defined 536 HTML tag icon 78 HTML based Layouts 97 I icons indicator 77 object 77 image file fields 479 adding images 490 identifying 487 image files formats 188 SiteStyle formats 288 stacked pages and Assets view 562 thumbnail 189 transparent gif files 195 unsupported formats 190 12 see also pictures image name auto generated 603 imagemaps creating 334 editing 334 hotspots 334 images adding to stacked pages 489 editing 87 IMG SRC 397 importing assets 69 HTML pages 85 HTML tables 69 Microsoft Word documents 72 INPUT SRC 398 internal components 454 internal data fields changing names 480 internal data objects adding stacked pages 489 creating 478 defined 477 internal links 316 317 J jar files 384 Java a
102. adipiscing elit sed diam nonum Linked Visited Link Active Link Hover Link Bulleted item 1 Bulleted item 2 Numbered item 1 Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Heading s oer Graphic elements of the selected style Text elements of the selected SiteStyle 272 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Each NetObjects Fusion SiteStyle is composed of graphic and text style elements On the Graphic tab you see samples of the Banner Image containing the banner text and color Primary navigation bar Images of navigation buttons as they appear and behave on the primary navigation bar Secondary navigation bar Images of navigation buttons as they appear and behave on the secondary navigation bar Primary buttons Design of the primary buttons in regular highlighted regular rollover and highlighted rollover states Secondary buttons Design of the secondary buttons in regular highlighted regular rollover and highlighted rollover states Table Styles Preview of the middle and border table regions as they appear in Page view Data list icons Bullet graphic displayed when you use a data object to create a data list Page Background Color or image used as a background of the page Additional Page Elements Images of additional page elements used in Decorator styles Styled line Image for lines placed with SiteStyle Line tool The name of the Sit
103. and page structure If you re not familiar with HTML you can still complete the tasks in Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML on page 546 and Examples of Object HTML on page 552 You can also insert code within link tags and add your own actions See Adding HTML to a Link on page 332 and Customizing Default Actions on page 427 Note NetObjects Fusion doesn t verify HTML you add so be sure to use valid syntax enclosing scripts within lt SCRIPT gt and lt SCRIPT gt tags and so on Also assets referenced in your HTML aren t managed in Assets view If you move the HTML or its assets in your directory structure edit paths in the HTML accordingly This chapter tells you how to add HTML or scripts by Editing the page s HTML e Accessing an AutoFrame s HTML Accessing an object s HTML Inserting HTML in a text box Coding your own objects and frames 535 Editing the Page s HTML Editing the Page s HTML You can add HTML or script to the HTML NetObjects Fusion generates in HTML Source view or in the Page HTML dialog Using the Page HTML dialog you can add or edit the page s code Before the lt HTML gt tag Between lt HEAD gt tags Inside the lt BODY gt tag e At the beginning of the lt BODY gt tag Before the lt BODY gt tag After the lt HTML gt tag For more control over where you insert HTML code use the NetObjects Fusion internal HTML editor in HTML Sourc
104. and click OK The field type should match the field type chosen when creating your table 505 Adding a Recordset The field will appear under the table in the Schema field Connection Database Recordsets Schema Connector1 Employees 9 09 Title 51 83 New Table Yew Field Remove OK Cancel 8 Repeat the steps for adding tables or fields if necessary Import from Connection 9 Click OK to close the Connector dialog Adding a Recordset The recordset object is used to define the set of results a query will return The recordset is used by data output objects to access and display data Only those data fields added to a recordset will be included in the query To add a recordset 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF DB Component toolbar 2 Click on the page to indicate the connector s location The Connector dialog appears 3 Complete the settings on the Connection and Database tabs 506 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database The Recordsets tab will become active Connector Connector x Connection Database Recordsets Recordsets Recordseta Add 4 Type a name for the recordset and click Add The Edit button will become active 5 Click Edit to define the recordset results The Recordset dialog will appear 2 63 Employees Datafields added to B E ELGH E the recordset
105. and photo frames Your images look great on the Web and download quickly This chapter describes Adding galleries Working with photos Adding editing and formatting titles and captions Controlling download time Formatting the thumbnail page Formatting photo pages Saving Profiles 207 About Photo Galleries About Photo Galleries Each photo gallery you add to your site includes two types of pages a thumbnail page and photo pages thumbnail page shows a small image of each photo in the gallery displayed in a template that you select Site visitors click a thumbnail image to see the photo page Mission Next Tour Contest Home Mission Events Activities Hi ghlights Next Tour Contest 208 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Each photo page displays a large version of the image You can add and format a title and description for the photo Home Mission Next Tour Contest Half Dome Rising 4 000 feet above the valley floor Half Dome is the ost recognized symbol of Yosemite Home Mission Events Activities Highlights Next Tour Contest AS 2501 IEEE When you add a photo gallery object to the thumbnail page NetObjects Fusion automatically adds the photo page for you On the Site Navigation palette the photo page is as a single icon that contains multiple pages Site Navigatio
106. as a means to doing business on the web Note Your store engine may include components that must be published for your catalog to perform correctly on the web See Publishing Components on page 596 or refer to your store engine s user manual for details This chapter describes Adding catalogs Working with products e Adding product attributes images and descriptions Formatting list pages Formatting detail pages Configuring store engines Controlling download time Saving Profiles 337 About Catalogs About Catalogs Each catalog you add to your site includes two types of pages a list page and detail pages The list page displays a short summary of each product in the catalog displayed in a format that you select You can choose to add a thumbnail image of your products so that site visitors can click to see the full detail page SL ee ee T Description Take the bite out of wind Color Green 8 Item Eompass Q Price Description Great for beginners Small gt Aj Item 8199 00 amp Description Dur most popular tenti Color Green Item Price Description Ihe perfect backpack 338 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Each detail page can display a large image of the product You can also display product attributes such as name product number price and weight MAR 20 9 NNNM ERR
107. as described in Designing the Stacked Page Layout on page 486 Add navigation buttons creates smart links to navigation buttons next previous up when NetObjects Fusion creates the first stacked page Use this shortcut so you don t have to create these buttons as described in Adding Navigation Buttons to Stacked Pages on page 488 484 Chapter 27 Data Publishing Note The images used for these buttons SPNavLeft gif SPNavRight gif 11 12 and SPNavUp gif are in the NetObjects Fusion 8 NetObjects System folder Click OK The data list placeholder appears Its column heads are the names of the fields you selected for display and a data list button appears at the left of the first row NetObjects Fusion populates the data list only when you preview or publish the page Data never appears in the data list in Page view Set the Data List properties Phone 5 Data List Properties 2 z x Data List icon Field names siet from the identify JV Display column titles current columns of d Bullet Cell SiteStyle ata Jess Bode H C Eile Browse Spacing j H None Padding p a Fill background Noe C MENEN HTML Adjust the settings to change the bullet type background color border size spacing of data and column title display Drag the column heading borders to adjust column width You cannot change the font type or color in a data list except
108. assets bbs html Site Structure arranges your site contents into a directory arrangement that looks like your site in Site view e Your Home page and its assets are stored in the site s root directory Each first level page is stored in its own folder with its assets 589 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server Any child page is stored with its assets in a subfolder beneath the folder that contains its parent page You determine the maximum number of subfolders by setting the Number of Levels option For example a structure set with the by Site Structure option would have this directory arrangement on the server Directory Structure Benefits Job_Regs Personnel m The Site Structure setting creates an efficient file structure allowing the server to load your pages quickly in a site visitor s browser It also provides an effective directory structure for search engines which might index only one page per folder If you apply the Site Structure setting shared assets are stored in the deepest folder common to all pages that use that asset This makes the shared access to those assets as efficient as possible To set the directory structure for a site 1 In Publish view from the Publish menu choose Arrange Files Publish Preview Site Publish Settings Publish Site Arrange Files Properties Tr
109. be seen using the Dynamic Page Layout or Regular Tables HTML Output options 3 Clear the Read only option on the Style Properties palette If you don t remove the check mark you cannot edit the selected SiteStyle Editing Banners and Buttons With SiteStyles you can choose any font on your system for banner and button text and any image for the banner or button background NetObjects Fusion dynamically generates image files for these banners and buttons using the font and images you specify for each element This means that on buttons and banners your site visitors see the fonts you select regardless of their browser or the fonts installed on their systems 1 In Style view select the style you want to change from the list of SiteStyles and clear the Read only option 2 On the Graphic tab click the banner or button state you want to edit 275 Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles The Properties palette appears for the banner or selected button state Banner 1 Properties Button Properties m amp Font Bon Eace Verdana hd Size s z Style Bold z Color Color Face TrebuchetMS Size fe Style Bold p Position Position Horizontal Center z Horizontal x Offset Vertical Middle Vertical Middle z Rotate fo Right angles Rotate c Right angles Multiple Line
110. by editing the text style See Working with Text Styles on page 167 When you are satisfied with the appearance of the data list create a layout for the stacked pages as described in Designing the Stacked Page Layout on page 486 Creating Stacked Pages Stacked pages correspond to records in a database When you store information internally in NetObjects Fusion you enter data for one record on each stacked page If you are drawing information from an external data file each stacked page automatically displays information from a record 485 Creating Stacked Pages Data Field tool Note You can add or delete stacked pages for internal data as described in Adding a Stacked Page for Internal Data on page 489 To add or delete records for external data you must make the changes in your external database or spreadsheet and then republish the site Designing the Stacked Page Layout The stacked page Layout determines the appearance of all the stacked pages Data fields and non data objects text pictures or other assets added to the stacked page Layout are repeated on all stacked pages Layout changes you make to any stacked page are automatically applied to all pages in the stack If you did not select any stacked page options when you created your data list your stacked page Layout is blank You can add text and graphic objects to this page just like any other page The key items to be added however are th
111. change its style or modify it Starting with a Blank Site You can build a new site from a blank site which is a template that consists of a Home page with a banner and navigation buttons To start with a blank site 1 From the File menu choose New Site gt Blank Site The New Blank Site dialog appears 29 Creating and Opening Sites 2 Enter a site name in the dialog New Blank Site Save in User Sites E3 ve My Recent Documents My Network File name Places Save as type NetObjects Fusion Files m 3 Click Save Site view opens and displays a Home page You can begin developing the SiteStructure as described on page 42 RQ EPE a2 Online Site Page Style Assets Publish New Page Preview Site Publish Site Structure Outline N 9 Page name Home Page title Home Custom Names Page Normal MasterBorder DetautmasterBorder z Exclude from navigation 30 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Starting with the Site Wizard You can also start a new site using the Site wizard 1 In Site view from the File menu choose New Site gt Using Site Wizard The Site wizard dialog appears Step 1 Site Type Style Education Family and Community Government and Politics Legal Music and Entertainment Non Profit Photo Album and Web Cam Real Estate Phoenix Aur
112. click Browse to create a new one See Creating a Data Source on page 493 4 Type in the User and Password required if any to connect to your database 5 Click Test to test the connection If the test is successful the database schema will be imported automatically 6 Click OK To connect to an ASP database using a custom string 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF Database Component toolbar Click on the Connection tab 500 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database 2 Choose Custom String from the Type drop down list Connector Connector1 x Connection Database 222115 Type custom String Iv String IDBQ C inyDatabase mdb DefaultDirC XDriverz Mic Test 3 In the String field type in the connection string 4 Click Test to test the connection If the test is successful the database schema will be imported automatically 5 Click OK Connecting to a ColdFusion Database To connect to a ColdFusion database 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF Database Component toolbar Click on the Connection tab Connector Connector1 x Connection tss Recordsets Password Test 501 Setting up the Database Connection 2 in the data source name or click Browse to create a new one See Creating a Data Source on page 493 3 Type in the User and Password required if any to connect to your database
113. click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears 408 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 3 Select Smart Link as the link type and select the Blank link Link type Smart Link X Find Find Again Smart link Previous Page Blank Checkout View cart Target None Description Links to your Home page Links to the parent of the current page Links to the sibling to the right of this page in the SiteStructure page in the SiteStructure ik that can be used to assic Links to the sibling to the left of this C n el Script lin Checkout View cart HTML 4 Click the Link button k Cancel 5 Click the text you selected earlier The Text Properties palette now has a Link tab indicating a link is defined for the text Text Properties 2 x A amp nio Custom Style none Format Name Blank Type Structural URL Blank Link Actions Remove Link 6 On the Text Properties palette click the Link tab then click the Actions button The Actions dialog appears 409 Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages 7 Click the plus button and add an action as described in Adding Actions to Objects and Pages on page 403 8 Click OK in the Actions dialog Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages You can simplify some action combinations or create specialized sequences by triggering actions with custom messages A custom
114. commands you can use on the selected item In all views and in dialogs and properties palettes you can right click an item and select What s This from the shortcut menu to display a description of the item Right click a page icon in Site view to see this shortcut menu New Page Delete Page BoTo Page Insert Template Import Web Site Reference HTML Page Character Set What s This 13 Choosing Colors Choosing Colors In NetObjects Fusion whenever the properties palette includes a Color button you can change the color of the selected object For example you can change the color of the page icons or the background in Site view objects in Page view or button text color in Style view To choose a color for a selected object 1 Click the Color button in any properties palette where it is offered The Color Picker appears Color Picker Current palette Browser Safe Palette Original New 000000 Recent Colors Colors you used recently Load Save The name of the current palette is shown above the color display The last eight colors you selected from the palette are displayed in the Recent Colors boxes 2 Click the color you want to assign to the object The Original and New boxes show the original color and the color you just selected RGB and HTML hexadecimal values are also displayed You might see a warning that the selected color is not Web safe To avoid unexpe
115. contents of the link Protocol determines the type of URL link being used such as http or mailto BaseURL the prefix that will be added to the final link URL Image places an image on the page that site visitors click on to jump to the link Image Src is the location of the image link Caption places a text string on the page that site visitors click on to jump to the link FontFace determines the caption text type FontBold displays the caption text in bold Fontltalic displays the caption text in italics FontSize determines the caption text size 518 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Adding a Hidden Field You can add a Hidden Field object that will place a datafield on the page which the site visitor cannot see A hidden field is typically used to place the primary key field on the page a Hidden Field Object 1 In Page view select the Hidden Field object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Hidden Field object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the hidden field s location The Hidden Field Properties palette appears Hidden Field Properties 9 alol Hidden Field Primarykey Ax Recordset 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list 519 Retrieving
116. do not want site visitors to easily read your HTML code If this option is selected line breaks tabs and unnecessary spaces that make the code more readable are stripped from the generated HTML code The generated HTML code uses as few characters as possible and the code will be unintelligible To restore compressed code so you can read it clear this option and republish the site Line breaks Choose PC Unix or Mac to set the line breaks in the code for the platform you expect to use to view the code Your choice of line breaks does not affect the browser s interpretation of the code regardless of the computer platform being used to view your site 582 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site Word wrap Select the number of characters per line of code before it wraps to the next line This option enhances readability of the HTML code in text editors that do not automatically wrap text However this can cause text to wrap in the middle of an HTML tag which prevents code from working properly and for some JavaScript code you may need to deselect this option so the lines do not wrap HTML tags Select whether the HTML tags are in uppercase or lowercase such as lt H1 gt or lt hl gt in the generated HTML code Attributes Select whether the tag attributes are in uppercase or lowercase such as BGCOLOR or bgcolor in the generated HTML code Use transparent GIF as spacer Select this option if you want NetObjects Fusi
117. either in addition to or instead of the HEAD NetObjects Fusion generates Cancel e Import lt HEAD gt Select this option to publish the external HTML page s lt HEAD gt content Choose Append to Current lt HEAD gt to add external lt HEAD gt content to what NetObjects Fusion generates or choose Replace Current lt HEAD gt to publish only the external page s lt HEAD gt content Note that this setting is not persistent that is it is not retained by NetObjects Fusion between sessions so you must choose this option for each referenced page Caution Don t select Replace Current lt HEAD gt if the page contains actions navigation bars with rollover buttons or is being published using the Fixed Page Layout output option NetObjects Fusion generates lt HEAD gt content these options require 393 Referencing HTML as an Object Do not manage or move assets If you select this option NetObjects Fusion doesn t copy any external assets into Assets view Do this if you prefer that path names in the published HTML not be edited from your native code However you then have to manage images and other assets yourself See Publishing Unmanaged Assets on page 400 6 Click OK In Page view a placeholder for the referenced HTML fills the Layout area Mission Events Next Tour Wonder Lodge htm Last Modified 5 16 2002 3 33 40 PM File Size 3 07KB 3147 bytes Infor
118. for basic optimization e Preview the image in different file formats and with different file attributes for advanced image optimization 191 Optimizing Images Basic Image Optimization To control the image format using standard settings 1 In Page view click on the image you want to optimize The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Select an optimization setting from the Settings drop down list Picture Properties 2 x Gi amp w gIG s RIO Eile CsProgram Browse AltTag girlbiker 3 Optimize Settings BestUPEG Best GIF Best JPEG Good JPEG Progressive good JPEG Small JPEG NetObjects Fusion offers these common optimization settings Table 13 1 Best GIF Best JPG Good JPG Progressive Small JPG Good JPG Quality 100 100 75 75 50 Blur NA 0 0 0 10 Colors 256 NA NA NA NA Dither Floyd NA NA NA NA Steinberg Progressive NA No No Yes No You may choose Not optimized from the Settings drop down list if you prefer not too ptimize your image Advanced Image Optimization To optimize your image with more precision or define your own optimization settings 192 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 1 In Page view click on the image you want to optimize The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click Edit The Optimize Image editor appears Optimize image Original Optimized Image Image View ima M File name girlbik
119. from the DB Component Text Area object toolbar Note You cannot add a Text Area object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click in the form region to indicate the Text Area s location 521 Retrieving and Displaying Data The Text Area Properties palette appears Layout Region Form Test Area Comments m omments 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list To add a form combo box Cu 1 In Page view select the Combo Box object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Combo Box object Note You cannot add a Combo Box object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click in the form region to indicate the Combo Box s location The Combo Box Properties palette appears Layout Region Form lel Combo Box Properties DropDown m sm DropDiown o m s Te ControlStyle DropDown 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 522 e Recordset Navigator Object Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list 5 In the ControlStyle drop down list choose DropDown or ListBox 6 Ifusing a ListBox enter a
120. hotspots on a picture You can link as many hotspots as you like in a single image but the hotspots cannot overlap or extend beyond the edge of the picture Because the imagemaps you create with the following procedure do not require a CGI script running on the server they are called client side imagemaps Server side imagemaps require setup on a Web server to run properly To create a single link on a picture you do not need to use an imagemap unless you only want to link part of the image Imagemaps are only necessary to create multiple links on one object Creating an Imagemap 1 In Page view click the Hotspot tool on the Standard toolbar and select the appropriate tool from the flyout to create a rectangular circular or polygon hotspot 2 Draw a hotspot on an image If you are using the Polygon Hotspot tool you must click to establish each vertex of the polygon then double click to complete the hotspot shape The Link dialog appears 3 In the Link dialog select a link type internal smart external or file See Creating Links on page 316 4 Select a destination for the link and click the Link button Once a picture has hotspots you can move it anywhere on the page and even copy and paste it elsewhere in the site without affecting the imagemap Editing an Imagemap To edit an existing hotspot click the hotspot The General tab of the Hotspot Properties palette appears e To edit the link click Link on the P
121. image Select Alignment position for the text The alignment left aligns centers or right aligns two or more lines of text It has no effect on single lines of text 180 Chapter 12 Designing with Text Type in the Rotate field to change the text orientation by degrees On the left Relative alignment is set to Left HR HR Horizontal position and Vertical position are set FAQ AQ to Center On the right Relative alignment is set to Center Horizontal position to Left and Vertical position to Center To specify multiple lines of text in a SiteStyle banner or button use the Custom Names dialog as described in Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions on page 46 5 Preview the image in Page view You can select the Anti Alias option to smooth fonts and remove the jagged edges from a text selection Turning off this option produces a hard edged transition between pixels and therefore the appearance of jagged edges is heightened Creating and Editing Fields Fields contain variable text that is subject to change such as the date and time the site was created or last modified the site name and author and so on NetObjects Fusion includes several fields you can use or you can define your own Inserting an Existing Field 1 In Page view double click the text box and position the insertion point where you want to insert the field 2 From the Text menu choose Insert Field 181 Creating
122. image sizes 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with Select a thumbnail or detail image Notice the image size on the properties palette If you selected a thumbnail image you can choose to see the size of the current image or of all thumbnail images Resize the image See Resizing Product Images on page 346 As you resize the Properties palette shows the effect on the file size Saving Output Settings To save your output settings 1 In Page view display the list page a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 360 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Display the Products tab The output settings for the thumbnail images and the detail images are separate Click the thumbnail Image tab or Detail Image tab at the bottom of the Products tab Click on the Output Settings menu and choose Save Setting Save Output Settings File type GIF hd Quality Adaptive v Colors 256 Note Note that a change must be made to the default settings in order to create a new setting Type a name for the new output setting Edit File Type Quality and Percent if necessary Click OK Removing Output Settings 1 From the E Commerce Catalog Properties editor click the Thumbnail Image tab or Detail Image tab at the bottom of the Products tab Click on the output settings
123. individual border settings Use Style Width and Color to set the border s line style width and color Click the Color box to select a color from the Color Picker Active borders to specify which borders appear around the paragraph All four segments are selected by default which adds a complete box around the paragraph You can click any combination of segments 5 Select the amount of padding you want at each side of the paragraph 163 Formatting Text Setting Background Options CSS only 1 Position the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format You do not need to select text On the Format tab of the Text Properties palette click the Format button Click the Background tab Paragraph Settings Character Paragraph Borders Background Color E Image Automatic v Browse Attachment Automaic v Repeat Automatic Image Position Horizontal Automatic v Vertical Automatic v Value 7 Value x Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel Set the background format options for the paragraph If you choose Automatic the settings for the parent style pass through to the paragraph See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 Color sets the back
124. install special plugins For information go to www microsoft com To insert an ActiveX control 1 In Page view select the ActiveX Control tool from the Web Applications tools flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate the position of the ActiveX control The Insert ActiveX Control dialog appears listing the ActiveX controls currently installed on your system The bottom section shows the selected ActiveX control which has an ocx or dll extension Insert ActiveX Control VideoS oft FlexString Control ActiveXPlugin Object adbanner Class Adobe Acrobat Control for Activex AOL Flash Factory Object AOL Flash Object AOL YGP Picture Finder Tool AOLVideoCtl Class C AWINDOWS System32 VSFLEX3 00 Set codebase Cancel 3 Select Set codebase to add the codebase parameter to the generated HTML and ensure that the ActiveX control is published to the Web site If a visitor who does not have the ActiveX control you are using views the Web site the option to download the control is offered 4 Select the control you want and click OK The ActiveX control appears on your page and the ActiveX Control Properties palette appears 387 Inserting an ActiveX Control ActiveX Control Properties 1 Palette options vary amp lo depending on which ActiveX Control is i VideoSoft FlexArray Control selected AX ColAlignment Properties HTML The General tab displays the opt
125. is by creating a Blank link and inserting an onClick JavaScript in the link s opening lt A HREF gt tag Note You cannot add or edit HTML for links in HTML Source view You can only do this in the Link HTML dialog 1 In Page view select the image or exact text site visitors are to click and click the Link button on the Properties palette The Link dialog appears 2 Select Smart Link from the Link type drop down list and select Blank in the Name column 3 Click the HTML button in the Link dialog The Link HTML dialog appears 4 Click the Inside Link tab and type onClick alert your message where your message is the text of your message 5 Click OK in the Link HTML dialog then click Link in the Link dialog Preview the page and click the image or text to see the message Microsoft Internet Explorer Message that N To build your site with NetObjects Fusion visit www NetObjects com today appears when site visitors click the link View the HTML source in HTML Source view to see the resulting HTML Another way to add this JavaScript to a picture or text link is to create a custom link In the Link dialog select External Link as the Link type choose javascript from the New link drop down list and type the onClick script in the New link field 552 Marks HTML inserted in a text box Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Inserting HTML in a Text Box You can insert HTML or script inside the con
126. link To display the link as an image choose Button Image and browse to the folder containing the image you want to add Note The Purchase Options tab will only be available if you have configured a store engine If you are using the catalog without a store engine you will not have the option to add purchase items 8 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor Configuring the Store 1 In Page view display the list page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Display the Store tab 357 Configuring the Store E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Products List Page Detail Page Store Id Current Store Engine Ho store engine selected Change Engine Store Engine Settings Online Administration Advanced Monetary Format Use Predefined Values U S Dollar Use Custom Value Label displayed on page Code sent to store engine Weight System Use Predefined Values English Pounds v Use Custom Value Label displayed on page Code sent to store engine Save Profile Done The current store engine is listed in bold 3 Click Change Engine to use an existing store engine or to sign up for a new store engine account 4 Configure and administer your account under Store Engine Settings Online Administration Click Launch to open your Store Engine administration panel e
127. menu indicates the palette is displayed 10 LI OEC Draw tool flyout QA Zoom tools Chapter 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics About Toolbars When you go to Site view the Standard toolbar is docked at the left side of the Site view window Additional toolbars are available in Page view You can move a toolbar by positioning the pointer over the double line at its top and dragging it anywhere in the window To dock the toolbar double click its title bar or drag it to the left side or top of the window Position the pointer here and drag to move the toolbar Triangle indicates tool is one of a group A small triangle in the lower right corner of a tool button indicates the tool is one of a group To see the entire group point to the tool and hold down the left mouse button A flyout containing the other tools in the group appears As you move the pointer over each tool a ScreenTip identifies the tool group and the name of the specific tool To select a tool from a flyout position the pointer over the tool and release the mouse button The tool you select is displayed on the toolbar For example if you point to the Draw tool on the Page view Standard toolbar and hold down the left mouse button you can draw a rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse polygon or line To hide and show toolbars from the View menu choose Toolbars Name of toolbar A check mark on the menu indicates a toolbar is displayed
128. menu and choose Save Setting Highlight the setting you want to delete from the Existing Output Settings list Click Remove 361 Setting Up Navigation for Site Visitors Setting Up Navigation for Site Visitors NetObjects Fusion automatically inserts navigation buttons with smart links on the detail pages Site visitors can use these buttons to go to the next and previous detail pages and to return to the thumbnail page The images used for these buttons SPNavLeft gif SPNavRight gif and SPNavUp gif are in the NetObjects Fusion 8 NetObjects System folder If you do not want to use these buttons you can delete them and set up your own smart links between pages See Adding Navigation Buttons to Stacked Pages on page 488 Saving a Catalog Profile NetObjects Fusion allows you to save the settings associated with your catalog so it can be the basis for future catalogs When you save a profile you save the e List page layout e Detail page layout e Displayed items e Purchase options To save a profile 1 In Page view display the list page or detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Click Save Profile Note that the output settings displayed at the time you save your profile will be stored in your profile These output settings will apply to all images created in a new catalog using this profile 362 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs S
129. message is a simple text string you create that becomes available in the When menu as a trigger and in the Message menu as an action You can then send it as a wildcard action from one object to trigger whatever action is added to another Some actions also use custom messages as parameter values Say you want clicking any of several buttons to trigger an action on a picture but you want to periodically change the action from Wipe to Iris Instead of having to change each button s action message from Wipe to Iris you can have each button send a custom message that triggers a Wipe or Iris action added to the picture Controlling the effect of each button then requires modifying only the picture s action Several uses of custom messages are given in Examples on page 418 To create a custom message 1 Select the object you want to trigger the first action in a sequence and click the plus button on the Actions tab of the Properties palette The Set Action dialog appears 2 Inthe Set Action dialog open the When or Message menu and choose Custom Edit The Custom Messages dialog appears Custom Messages FlyAway ShowPicture Lists all custom messages created Picturelsln DelaylsDone for this site Adds or removes a message from the dialog and the menus 410 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 3 Click the plus button The Add Message dialog appears Add Message Message 4 Type a name f
130. number 4 558 302 and foreign counterparts This program was developed using NeoAccess 1992 1995 NeoLogic Systems Inc International ProofReader text proofing software 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991 1996 LEAD Technologies Inc All rights reserved Portions Blue Sky Software Corporation All rights reserved Portions Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Companies names and dates used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Government Restricted Rights For units of the Department of Defense use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Contractor manufacturer is Website Pros Inc 12735 Gran Bay Parkway West Building 200 Jacksonville FL 32258 If the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 or its successors apply the Software and Documentation constitute restricted computer software as defined in that clause and the Government shall not have the license for published software set forth in subparagraph c 3 of that clause Printed in the U S A NetObjects Fusion 8 Contents Build Your Site s Success 1 How to Get St
131. object to the top of the layer Send Backward to send the object down one layer Send to Back to send the object to the bottom layer Adding Services Use the Services icons on the Advanced toolbar to add hosted services with a page level component to your site 1 In Page view select a service from the Advanced toolbar and click on the page where you want to place the service Tar E 9 2 Follow the on screen instructions to add a service 94 CHAPTER 7 Controlling Published Output The default settings for NetObjects Fusion generate efficient HTML that faithfully reproduces your visual design on the published page The design of your text content however is subject to each site visitor s browser settings To limit these variations NetObjects Fusion offers ways to control published output You can Select from four different types of page containers to serve as your page layout medium Layout area Layout Regions text boxes and tables Use one of three HTML output methods to generate your site s HTML Dynamic Page Layout Regular Tables and Fixed Page Layout e Control the table formatting priority horizontal or vertical used to generate Dynamic Page Layout HTML pages Select HTML or cascading style sheet CSS text formatting This chapter describes Approaches to page design Selecting a layout method Selecting an HTML output method e Publishing with Dynamic Page Layout Publishi
132. of HTML output methods but you can embed them in text boxes So if you need precise placement or specific output for some content but want to generate leaner pages you can use text boxes as your main layout container and embed Layout Regions for selected content Layout Region Advantages e You have pixel level control of the layout and design of content within the Layout Region e You can embed the Layout Region within a text box which combines the benefits of both containers Youcan specify the HTML output type for any individual Layout Region Layout Regions support the column or row priority for page formatting so selected sections of your page can adjust more predictably to site visitor s font and display configuration Layout Region Limitations HTML page files are significantly larger and download more slowly Text cannot flow around other objects unless they are embedded in a text box To create a text wrap effect you have to create multiple text boxes within the Layout Region e You cannot maximize a Layout Region to the full Layout size or set the Layout Region to wrap to the width of your site visitor s browser Using Text Boxes If efficient lean HTML pages are more critical to site visitors than precise placement of content use a text box for page layout Text Box Advantages e NetObjects Fusion generates extremely efficient HTML code for your site HTML files are smaller which means they load faster
133. of asset files and how NetObjects Fusion handles them in Assets view Assets view lists all assets ever added to a site whether they are currently included in the site or not Assets view is a list of pointers to the asset files in their directories Assets view does not contain the actual asset files themselves When you publish a site assets are copied from their current location to the publish location Assets are not copied to the Assets folder except in special cases when you import a site that contains assets in its assets directory or start a site based on a template with assets Assets view does not show the contents of any specific directory on your local hard disk or server Adding a File Asset 1 5 In Assets Files view from the Assets menu choose New File Asset or click New Asset on the control bar The File dialog appears In the Location field of the File dialog type the path and file name of the asset you want to add or click Browse and select a file If you want edit the Asset name and click OK See Editing Asset Names and Locations To force publication of the file even if it is not in use select Always publish file Click OK When you add an asset in this manner it is available for use in your site but it is not yet actually in use The asset now appears on the Assets tab in the Open dialog See Reusing Assets on page 86 562 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Editing Asset
134. or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Display the List Page tab Click Sort Select the product item and choose Ascending or Descending Sort List Name v Ascending sKU Part Number Cc zi Cancel 6 Click OK Resizing Product Images 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Click an image The Properties Palette appears 346 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs 3 Resize the image You can change the image size by dragging the slider on the properties palette by entering the width directly in the Properties Palette or by dragging the image Thumbnail Properties 2j x Photo Properties MRE Proportional Dimension Proportional Dimension Width Width 142 pEBB 216 d Apply Apply to all File Size File Size 270 Thumbnail 394 Configure Configure To set or change the options for this To set or change the options for this thumbnail double click it or click photo double click it or click Configure Configure Configure Configure To change the image size by dragging select the image and drag the small white box until the image is the size you want When you release the mouse button the image is resized If you are on the List page all images are resized Tochange the ima
135. or the Custom Navigation Bar dialog Buttons are linked according to your site s structure Whenever you change the SiteStructure in Site view NetObjects Fusion updates the buttons and banners When you preview or publish your site NetObjects Fusion creates a gif file for each button and banner It combines the assigned font style size and color with the image file for that SiteStyle element to ensure the font you choose appears despite differences in site visitors browsers Using Navigation Bars Navigation bars are rows or columns of buttons or text that are automatically linked to other pages in your site NetObjects Fusion provides button navigation bars and text navigation bars You use the Button Navigation Bar tool and the Text Navigation Bar tool to add navigation bars to MasterBorders or page Layouts 298 Button Navigation Bar tool ab Text Navigation Bar tool Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners The default style for buttons is determined by the SiteStyle you set in Style view See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles The SiteStyle button picture is automatically applied to buttons throughout your site You can change the button style for an individual navigation bar or even an individual button without changing the overall SiteStyle See Setting Button Navigation Bar Properties on page 303 and Change a Button s Image on page 308 You can assign an action to any navigation bar using the Actio
136. own Insert an HTML script or other text file in an unprotected area Undo redo copy cut and paste unprotected code View and add frames in a frameset Set and change many HTML options such as formatting whether to include HTML comments in your published code and so on See Setting HTML Options on page 581 In HTML Source view you cannot Edit code generated by NetObjects Fusion Insert code inside text generated by NetObjects Fusion the lt BODY gt tag Insert code across a range of pages Use the Page HTML Link HTML or Object HTML dialog to insert code in those areas See Using the Page HTML Dialog on page 542 Adding HTML to a Link on page 332 and Accessing an Object s HTML on page 550 Exploring HTML Source View To go to HTML Source view In Page view click the HTML Source tab HTML Source view appears 537 Editing the Page s HTML HTML Source Document Map Functions F_loadRollover lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN gt Tags lt HTML gt lt gt lt IDOCTYPE HTML PUE Document Map SB HTML amp SCRIPT lt META HITP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset I30 8859 1 Source amp lt META NAME Generator CONTENT WetObjects Fusion MX for Windows gt Editor 5 88 lt BODY gt lt TITLE gt c BB TABLE Data Pub lt TR gt lt TITLE gt B lt BEGIN Layou
137. padding 146 properties 146 selection sequence 143 setting background 147 spacing 146 targeting in HTML 148 using in external HTML 391 using with actions 401 see also AutoFrames framesets 141 accessing HTML in AutoFrames 545 coding your own 555 FTP host 587 594 FTP settings 610 G generate HTML files 576 GIF transparent 583 gif files 188 animated 188 dithered background 196 editor choosing 21 transparent 195 Go menu 12 Go Menu component 460 10 graphic based Layouts 96 Graphics Interchange Format see gif files grids Layout Region 115 showing hiding 78 snap to 93 guides adding moving deleting 92 Layout Region 115 showing hiding 78 92 snap to 93 H HEAD referencing externally 391 using content in external HTML 399 Headspace Beatnik files 378 help online help topics 5 QuickStart tips View tips 3 What s This 6 home page file name 581 595 hotspots 334 adding HTML 335 editing 334 HTML accessing 535 adding to AutoFrames 543 548 adding to hotspots 335 adding to links 332 adding to object 550 552 adding to page 536 coding your own frames 555 coding your own frameset 555 colors in code 539 custom file extensions 46 custom editing 543 551 custom managing assets 535 drawing horizontal rules 263 editing 536 editor choosing 21 file names 46 frames 141 importing pages 85 importing tables 69 inserting in text box 553 Layouts 97 minimizing file size 432 referencing external 389 syntax when
138. page 427 406 E Parameter menu button Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Location Dialog Window Browser These options appear on the menu if the target is a Layout or MasterBorder Use these options to open another URL after an animation occurs display a dialog set the size position or some other state of the window or check what browser the site visitor is using say to trigger a different set of actions depending on the browser type e Custom These are messages you create to trigger one action with another in specialized action sequences See Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages on page 410 7 Ifthe action you specify requires parameters or can be tailored with additional parameters specify a value or expression in the Parameters field Click the Parameter menu button next to the Parameters field and click an available option For example for a Fly message you can choose a direction parameter like In from Top Set Action Name Action When Clicked gt Standard Action Target Picturel 4 Message Fly 0 Parameter s In From Cascade message Cancel Primary choices available for a Fly message In From In From Top Right In From Right In From Bottom Right In From Bottom In From Bottom Left In From Left In From Top Left Out To Top Out To Top Right Out To Right Out To Bottom Right Out To Bottom Out To Bottom Left
139. page 485 Ifyou re in Assets view go to Page view select the Data List tool from the Advanced toolbar and draw a rectangle on the page In the Data Publishing dialog select the newly created data object from the drop down list Select fields and format the data list as described in Creating a Data List on page 482 and lay out your stacked pages as described in Creating Stacked Pages on page 485 Changing an Internal Data Field Name 1 Goto Assets view 2 Click the Data Objects tab 3 Double click the data object name The Data Object dialog appears 4 Inthe Fields list double click the name of the field you want to rename The Data Field dialog appears 5 Typea new name in the Name field and click OK 6 Click OK Creating a Data Object for External Data External data exists in local desktop databases or in ODBC data sources Open Data Base Connectivity ODBC drivers draw data from Structured Query Language SQL data sources such as Oracle and Sybase data files They also support Microsoft Excel Microsoft Access delimited text files and others NetObjects Fusion automatically imports all the fields available in the external database file If a simple text field contains a valid path to an image file NetObjects Fusion asks if you want to make the field an image field Before you add an external data object make sure you have all the necessary fields You cannot add fields once you create the external data
140. page name select Use page name This changes the name only on the selected banner To change the name on all banners on this page type a new name in the Page name field or use the Custom Names dialog See Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions on page 46 Changing a Banner s Image You can change the picture for a selected banner in Style view When you assign a new picture to a banner NetObjects Fusion does not display the page or custom banner name on the image If you want text to appear on the banner you must include the text in your banner graphic If you change the image for a banner in a MasterBorder the change does not affect the banner on all the other pages that use that MasterBorder To change a banner picture 1 In Style view display the style containing the banner you want to change 2 Select the banner The General tab of the Banner Properties palette appears 3 Inthe Banner Image area type in the path to the new image or click Browse to select an image file from your hard disk or LAN If you want to use an image that is on a CD ROM copy it to your hard disk first The selected banner displays the new picture Setting Banner Style and Orientation New banners use the current SiteStyle but you can apply banners associated with any SiteStyle to a page If you change the style of a banner in a MasterBorder it changes on every page using that MasterBorder See Adding Banners and Buttons
141. palette to format the text See Formatting Text on page 154 A 7 Bf 58 _ Paragraph aaja 12 li Style Custom style X lt none gt M Link Anchor Format Type the t Ht 1 pe the caption text here Formatting Photo Captions You can format all the captions at once from the Photo Page tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor or format individual captions on the individual photo pages Note If you specify formats and they do not appear in the text it could be caused by the text style definitions usually the definition of the Body and Normal P tags in the SiteStyle For example if the Body tag defines the font size that definition overrides any font size you specify in the Object Format dialog You can get around 223 Formatting Photo Titles and Captions Next this by choosing a SiteStyle that does not define the property you want to set or by formatting the individual photo titles See Formatting an Individual Photo Caption on page 224 Any individual text you format overrides the SiteStyle definitions Formatting All Photo Captions 1 AS t de 5 In Page view display a photo page of the gallery you want to work with Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Display the Photo Page tab Click Format Caption The Object format dialog appears Set the text format See Formatting Text on page 154 Formatting a
142. potential problems by viewing the page in a variety of browsers using different font sizes and then adjusting your design to accommodate these changes See Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output and Chapter 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions for more information about browsers 130 CHAPTER 10 Managing MasterBorders NetObjects Fusion divides a page into the Layout area and the MasterBorder area The MasterBorder contains objects that repeat on a set of pages You can place anything in a MasterBorder that you can place in the Layout including banners pictures and text By placing navigation bars in a MasterBorder you can give pages with the same navigational needs the same navigational structure You can create a MasterBorder and apply it to all the pages in your site or just to selected pages A site can use more than one MasterBorder When you modify a MasterBorder NetObjects Fusion automatically makes the change on every page that shares the MasterBorder This chapter describes e Modifying a MasterBorder Creating a MasterBorder e Changing MasterBorders Applying a MasterBorder to pages e Renaming a MasterBorder Deleting a MasterBorder 131 Working with MasterBorders Working with MasterBorders The MasterBorder is the set of margins top bottom left and right on the page Top margin Hobbies Favorites Photo Gallery Left margin Right margin tt Bottom margin
143. publish profile is stored in the Sitename nod file NetObjects Fusion includes one default server profile Local Publish which is on your local hard disk in the My Computer Drive NetObjects Fusion User Sites Sitename Local Publish directory See Setting Up to Publish Locally on page 580 to modify the settings for publishing to your local hard disk 591 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server You can modify the default profile create your own or delete unneeded profiles You can also create a global copy of a profile which makes the profile available across different sites The information needed to connect to a remote server is specific to your server Contact your ISP hosting company or Web server administrator for the precise information to enter in these fields For guidance on the questions you need to ask see Publish Profile Checklist on page 586 To define a remote server profile 1 In Publish view click Publish Settings on the control bar 3 The Publish Settings dialog appears It is the same dialog you used to set up Publish Settings your local publish profile 2 Click New A new profile will appear in the list box Publish Settings x Global Profile Name m Local Publish C Program Files NetObjects _ Local Network New Duplicate Attributes Server Type Local Network v Profile Name Local Publish Advanced Folder Program Files NetObjects N
144. remove resize handles from an object which fills the Layout You can then use the Convert to Fusion button to import the referenced object into NetObjects Fusion Note Avoid sizing a referenced object to a Layout if there are other objects in the Layout area You might get unexpected results in some browsers Clear Size to layout to add resize handles to a referenced Layout area so you can resize it move it and add other objects Click Edit HTML File to edit the referenced file on the HTML Source tab Managing Referenced Assets When you reference an external HTML file NetObjects Fusion lists the HTML file in Assets view Unless you choose otherwise it imports into Assets view pictures applets media and most other external assets the file references You can move external assets in your directory structure in Publish view while maintaining paths When you publish NetObjects Fusion edits paths to the assets so they can be found For example depending on your original and published directory structures NetObjects Fusion might change the original HTML s lt IMG SRC Images Logo gif to lt IMG SRC Index Logo gif gt in the published HTML However NetObjects Fusion doesn t edit paths to other HTML files or to target anchors within lt A HREF gt tags For these links to be maintained the path names in the original files must work as is when you publish The original lt A HREF gt tags should use relative rather t
145. series of paragraphs and want to make them a list you can apply the List Item lt LI gt style to the paragraphs Inserting Symbols You can insert special symbols such as an em dash or copyright symbol into text 1 In Page view double click the text box containing the text where you want to insert the symbol 2 Click the location in the text where you want to insert the symbol 178 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 3 From the Text menu select Insert Symbol Insert Symbol Character Description Shortcut key Em Dash En Dash Non breaking space Ctr Shift Space Copyright Alt Ctr C Registered Alt Ctr R Trademark Alt Ctr T Ellipsis Single Open Quote Ctri then Single Close Quate Ctrl then TAa Cosme Orinda Fade nae M v Cancel 4 Inthe Insert Symbol dialog select a symbol and click Insert The symbol appears in the text You cannot edit the list of symbols Adding Text to a Shape or Picture When you add text to a shape or picture the text becomes part of a new image file when you publish the page Because the text is part of the image the site visitor s browser displays the correct font even if the font is not installed in the visitor s browser If you add text to a picture file when you publish the site NetObjects Fusion generates a new picture file listed in Publish view as an auto generated image Your original file is unchanged in Assets view and not included among
146. served behind a proxy server firewall or virtually hosted server You must download the site to the local hard drive and then import from the local drive e You can limit the number of pages and levels that NetObjects Fusion captures from a local or remote site Levels are based on the hierarchy of pages in the source site defined by the site s navigation the first level is always the site s Home page The second level consists of pages that are linked from the Home page Third level pages are linked from second level pages and so on NetObjects Fusion imports as many pages as possible at a higher level before going to a lower level You must be connected to the Internet or intranet to activate the remote import When NetObjects Fusion imports a site it starts with the page you specify and stops importing when it hits the page number limit the site level limit or the end of the site If you don t define import limits NetObjects Fusion imports to the end of the site no matter how long that takes or how much it requires in system resources NetObjects recommends limits of 200 pages and 20 levels When you create a new site from an imported site NetObjects Fusion applies the ZeroMargins MasterBorder If you expand a site by importing a section you can apply any MasterBorder already in the site If you import a NetObjects Fusion MX NetObjects Fusion 7 or NetObjects Fusion 8 site the MasterBorders in the original site are pres
147. site NetObjects Fusion places this asset at the root of the site See Adding a File Asset on page 562 Managing Script Assets NetObjects Fusion does not analyze custom scripts that you add to pages MasterBorders or other objects If those scripts reference special assets they are not automatically included in the site s managed assets To have NetObjects Fusion manage and publish assets called in custom scripts you must create file links to those assets or explicitly add them to Assets view 612 Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing When you add the file asset select Always publish file to ensure that the asset is marked In Use After publishing the first time you can clear this setting if you only publish changed assets Scripts have very specific calls to those files generally imagename gif image gif or images imagename gif for images and cgi bin form cgi complete http path to form cgi or form cgi for exe files When you add an asset and the directory structure is set to by Asset Type the added asset is always added to the assets images folder e Ifyou add an asset and the directory structure is set to by Site Section the added asset is always placed in the root if it is an image or in the existing cgi bin if it is an exe Ifthe directory structure is set to by Flat the asset is added to the root Be sure to move the added asset to the correct location in Publish view so the file is published to th
148. sounds your system must also be appropriately configured Some sound formats also require support from the Web server See Inserting a Sound File on page 374 119 Setting Layout and Layout Region Background Properties 120 CHAPTER 9 Working with Text Boxes A text box is a container for text as well as other kinds of objects including pictures sound objects and tables When you use a text box as a container you do not have pixel level control over embedded objects For example you do not insert a picture in a text box and drag it into position Instead you embed the object at a selected point in the text and adjust its placement using alignment positioning and text wrapping choices When NetObjects Fusion publishes pages that use a text box as the main Layout container they have extremely lean HTML code and load relatively quickly in the site visitor s browser This chapter describes Adding a text box Selecting a text box Embedding objects in a text box e Wrapping text around objects Sizing a text box Setting text box background Scaling text box contents to the browser window Preserving your design intentions 121 Adding a Text Box Adding a Text Box A Text tool The text box appears with hollow selection handles indicating you can enter and format text See Chapter 12 Designing with Text 1 Select the Text tool from the Standard toolbar 2 Draga box in the lo
149. tab 4 Click on the Purchase Options tab Select Display Buy to provide site visitors a link that will take them to your store and begin the purchase process display the link as text choose Text Link and enter in the text you want to link To display the link as an image choose Button Image and browse to the folder containing the image you want to add Select Display Add to Cart to provide site visitors a link that will allow them to add products to their cart while continuing to shop display the link as text choose Text Link and enter in the text you want to link display the link as an image choose Button Image and browse to the folder containing the image you want to add 5 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor 355 Formatting the List Page Formatting the Detail Page NetObjects Fusion makes it easy for you to present the catalog in a professional and pleasing way You can choose a layout displaying the product image include product item labels and descriptive text and add images that link to your store The format options you select apply to all detail pages 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the Detail Page tab 4 In the Detail Page Layout section of the tab select a layout E Commerce Catalog Properties E ditor x Products
150. tab at the bottom of the Images tab Thumbnail Image Photo Image Output Settings z File Type JPEG z Quality High z 85 H Percent Apply to AIl Approximate download time 6 9sec 56 6 Kbps x File Size 32 0 KB Alt Tag Rotate 0 rotation Save Profile Done On these tabs you set the quality of the thumbnail and photo images for the selected file As you make changes NetObjects Fusion displays the approximate download time for the file You may choose to save and apply previously defined settings See Saving Output Settings on page 207 Select the File type Most photos will be JPEG format Set the Quality and Percent These fields both affect image quality 100 is the highest quality 0 the lowest quality a Set the Quality field first Each setting corresponds to a range of percents Low corresponds to 0 39 Medium to 40 75 High to 76 99 and Maximum to 100 b Use the Percent field to fine tune the quality setting As you adjust the settings the image in the Preview field changes If the Preview image is scaled down you can close the editor and check image quality in Page Design view 7 Select a download speed 226 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries The most common download time is 56 6 8 apply these settings to all the photos in the gallery click Apply to All This affects all thumbnail images or all photo
151. that are executed on the server Most browsers are Java compatible so site visitors don t need special plugins to run a Java applet To insert a Java applet or servlet 1 In Page view select the Java tool from the Web Applications tools flyout on the Advanced toolbar Draw a box to indicate the position of the Java applet or servlet The Open dialog appears Select a Java file from your hard disk or LAN or select one that is currently used in the site from the Java Class Assets tab See Chapter 30 Managing Assets The extension for a Java file is class or jar Click Open The Java placeholder image appears on the page and the Java Properties palette appears The path to the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab To select a new file click Browse find the file and click Open Java Properties 2 x amp o Eile pletstled_clock class Browse Class led clock class AltTag Applet Servlet Additional Files HTML The current class file is displayed in the Class field 382 Chapter 22 Adding Java and ActiveX You can also drag a Java class file from Windows Explorer onto your page The Java placeholder appears on the page and you can set the Java properties for that file To provide text for the browser to display if it cannot display the file enter a description in the AltTag field Select Applet or Servlet depending on which type o
152. the Component Manager click the up or down arrows float a toolbar drag the toolbar out of the Component Manager container and place anywhere on the page e To dock a toolbar drag the toolbar out of the Component Manager container and dock to the left side or top of the page Customizing the Component Manager You can customize the component toolbar to group toolbars with similar attributes 1 From the File menu choose View Toolbars Customize 2 In the customize toolbars dialog type in a keyword that applies to the toolbars you want to group 452 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components All toolbars with that attribute will be highlighted Keywords Filler JSP Toolbars Title Keywords Advanced Tools Allaire Cold Fusion ASP DB WSP Photo Gallery E Commerce Counter Lite W SP Dynamic Elements Interactive Web Sites Net bjects Database ASP SQL MySQL Micr ColdFusion 5 0 Tags WSP T ag Library Dynamic Interactive Server ColdFusion 6 1 Tags WSP Tag Library Scripting Custom Tags Nest ColdFusion DB NetObjects Database ColdFusion ODBC DSN JSTL Core Tags WSP Tag Library JSP Java JavaBean Servle JSTL i18n Tags WSP Tag Library JSP Java JavaBean Servle JSTL SQL Tags WSP Tag Library JSP Java JavaBean Servle JSTLXML Tags WSP Tag Library JSP Java JavaBean XML NOF Components WSP Ad Banner DynaButtons Picture Loader PH
153. the Multi Object Palette click Align Center to make sure these objects appear correctly in the browser To make aligning 434 Multi Line tool Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms labels and fields easier include the field and label in the same text box or insert both objects in table cells Adding a Multiple Line Text Field To provide a place for long comments or descriptions you can add a multiple line text field Site visitors can type as much as they want and text scrolls as necessary After creating the form as described on page 430 1 In Page view select the Forms Multi Line tool from the Form toolbar 2 Draw a rectangle on the form 3 Setthe Forms Multi Line properties Forms Multi Line Properties 2 x ajo Name FormsMuhiLinet H Name passed to the script processing the form Tent Type text to appear in the field by default Visible length 23 characters Visible height 7 lines HTML e Name Type the name for this field that s passed to the CGI script processing the form If you re using the Form Handler use a number indicating the object s order in the output text Text Type text to appear in the field by default This text is submitted as the response if the site visitor doesn t replace it e Visible length Enter a number to define the width of the text box by specifying the number of characters visible in the field e Visible height
154. the SiteStyle Line The Line Properties palette appears 2 Click Browse select a new image in the Picture File Open dialog and click Open Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles You can edit any text element of an existing SiteStyle to customize it For instance if you change the Heading 3 text style the changes appear throughout your site wherever that text style is applied To customize style elements for some but not all pages you do not edit the SiteStyle you edit the text in Page view See Chapter 12 Designing with Text When you edit a SiteStyle s text elements every site that uses the SiteStyle is affected If the changes apply to text elements set to Automatic the changes flow through to the other sites Note To edit the text elements of a SiteStyle you must first remove its Read only setting See Removing the Read Only Setting on page 275 1 In Style view select a SiteStyle from the list of styles 2 Click the Text tab The text elements appear 284 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles 3 Click a text element to select it NetObjects Fusion MySite nod BEE File Edit View Go Style Tools Help 2 9 E e 2 New Style Add style Set style Online Site Page Style Assets Publish Graphic Y Text X Preview E ES Active SiteStyles Aura Green amp Yellow Body Unordered List Cityscape Teal Phoenix amp NetObjects Fusion Local SiteStyle
155. the form field names are identical to the field names of the table you are using 528 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Verify the Form Settings Properties contains the correct path to and extension of the submission page Form Settings Form name Submission Insert Object m Settings Action html submission php Browse Verify the path Method Post Get Verify the method Encoding type m Hidden fields Name Value Inserting Records in a Database To insert records in a database you create a form and submit to the page the Insert object is placed on qp 1 In Page view select the Insert object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add an Insert object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the insert object s location The Insert Properties palette appears Insert Properties Thank you for your submission 529 Modifying a Database 3 Double click in the SQL Wizard field The Insert Inspector dialog will appear Tobie Nome ET Fields 4 Select the table you will be inserting records into from the drop down list 5 Highlight the data fields new data will be submitted to If the data field is not highlighted the field will not be recognized and no data will be submitted to it 6 Click OK to close the SQL Wizard Updating and Deleting Records from a
156. the line connecting the page to its parent page will be removed Working with a Group of Pages In addition to selecting individual pages you can select several pages and change their properties You can select any combination of noncontiguous pages or you can select a section of your site which is any page and all its children their children and so on To select noncontiguous pages 1 Click the first page to select it 2 Shift Click additional pages to select them NetObjects Fusion places a border around each selected page and lists the pages on the Selected Pages tab of the Properties palette Properties MRED a jala Property MasterBorder Property DefaultMasterBor v Set on all Page name MasterBorder DefaultMMasterBorder Events DefaultMasterBorder Activities DefaultMasterBorder Contest DefaultMasterBorder To select a section 34 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites 1 Click the parent page of the section 2 Shift Click the parent page of the section NetObjects Fusion places a border around each page in the section and lists the pages on the Selected Pages tab of the Properties palette Properties 2 x a jalal Property MasterBorder Property DefaultMasterBor v Set on all Page name Events DefaultMasterBorder Activities DefaultMasterBorder Highlights DefaultMasterBorder MasterBorder wi v Sections are not permanent en
157. the protocol host name or DNS path name and sometimes a file name such as http www netobjects com products fusion html Each external link becomes an asset of the site that you can update in Assets view To create an external link 1 In Page view select some text or select an object to link 2 On the Standard toolbar click the Link tool The Link dialog appears 3 Select the External Link type URL Link type External Link Find Again entry New link http www specialized com New link list with protocol selected Extemal links List of A ly Name Content 15 of TEVIOHS NetObjects Home Page http www netobjects com entered links http www specialized com Name of link in Assets view See Setting Link Targets on page 327 Target None See Adding HTML to a Link on page 332 HTML Cancel 4 Select a protocol from the New link drop down list If you re creating a link that does not require a protocol select none If you want to use a protocol that is not in the drop down list you can type it in 322 5 7 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Enter the appropriate information in the URL entry field and click Save or select an existing link from the list For example you could enter a URL a mailto address or a Java command depending on the selected protocol For details about email links see Adding an Email Link If y
158. the same MasterBorder that page icon is also blue Return to the View menu and choose Page Color Coding User Defined The icon of the originally selected page now turns red and the other page icons return to the default color e Comments Enter notes about the status or content of individual pages This option is not available 1f multiple pages are selected Setting META Tag Properties You can use META tags to include information about a site within the lt HEAD gt tag of each page in the site For example you might want to include keywords to promote your site with the various search engines the site author s name or copyright information Site visitors do not see information included in a META tag You can set META tag properties at the page level or at the site level To add general META tags that will be applied to all pages in your site See Entering META Tags on page 53 To set META tags on a single page 1 In Site view select the page you want to work with 2 Click the META tag tab 38 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Properties 2 x ola Meta Tag Keywords Apply Meta tags to all pages Select a META tag from the drop down list You can select Abstract to provide a brief summary or abstract of your Web page Author to declare the author of the Web page Date to declare the date your Web page was created Description to provide a general description of the contents of your
159. the site s published assets If you remove the text from the picture the image remains listed as an auto generated image To add text to a shape or picture 1 In Page view select the shape or picture to which you want to add text 179 Adding Text to a Shape or Picture The corresponding properties palette appears If you are working with a picture click the Text on Image tab Rectangle Properties ARES Picture Properties ARES olol Cl S Es AltTag Line wid 1 3 Color Font ge gos Font face Times New Color Color Size 10 sue Bod Text in ek Position Text ext in elemen Horizontal Middle E Enable Lese Vertical Middle Offset E H Alignment Center Rotate 0 Link Anchor HTML Antialias text 2 Type the text you want to add Press Enter to start a new line If you do not insert line breaks the text does not wrap and may not be seen if it is wider than the element 3 In the Font area e Select a font style and size Click the Color box and select a color in the Color Picker 4 In the Position Text area Select Horizontal position and Vertical position for the text The Horizontal position and Vertical position settings position the text within the object frame Type in the offset field to position the text from the margins by pixels You cannot offset text that is positioned in the middle of an
160. the table You can embed any object in a table cell See Chapter 15 Adding Tables MasterBorders contain objects that repeat on a set of pages You can place anything in a MasterBorder that you can place in the Layout including banners pictures and text By placing navigation bars in a MasterBorder you can give pages with the same navigational needs the same navigational structure See Chapter 10 Managing MasterBorders The type of container you choose determines which of the following page design options you use You can Position content with pixel level precision by dragging objects into place The position based approach uses Layouts and Layout Regions as containers and preserves your position based layout by generating pages consisting of HTML and cascading style sheet code Use a text based approach With text based design you can preserve the flow of content by embedding objects in text boxes or table cells Text based page 96 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output layout generates lean and efficient HTML code that responds effectively to variations in browser and font size Include hand coded HTML pages in your site You incorporate external HTML pages as part of your site by referencing them as objects on a page or the page itself You can also add HTML in HTML Source view See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly and Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML Selecting a Layout Met
161. then click the Advanced S FTP tab Select Connect passive mode Click OK If the reverse is true and your remote server is behind a firewall or stored on a proxy server NetObjects Fusion cannot publish directly to the server If that s the case follow these steps 1 Publish your site to a local folder other than the Sitename Preview folder of your site Use whatever directory structure and HTML output method you would normally use The default setting Local Publish publishes to the folder Sitename Local Publish 2 Consult with your server administrator for the preferred method of transferring content to the remote server Potential methods include Transferring the entire directory structure of the local site to a holding location on an unprotected server so an authorized administrator can then transfer the site to the protected location Using an FTP application such as WS FTP or other means of access authorized by the server administrator to transfer the entire directory structure of the local site to the protected server Installing Personal Web Server PWS and remotely publishing to it Then you send the site s files via FTP from PWS to the server 611 Publishing Special Assets Whichever method you use be sure to transfer all files and to duplicate the local folder structure precisely Publishing Special Assets When you transfer your site to the Web server NetObjects Fusion transfers the entire site to
162. there are 75 stacked pages After you create a data list on a page NetObjects Fusion generates the first stacked page You create the initial Layout of how all stacked pages look on the first stacked page When you create the Layout of the first stacked page the remaining stacked pages automatically inherit the same Layout Changes you make in the Layout in any one stacked page affect the Layout of all stacked pages in that set The following illustration shows how the data list page and its child stacked pages appear in Site view Data list page Yv Stacked pages Publishing Data In general when you work with data publishing you follow this process 1 Create a data object 2 Create a data list 3 Design a set of stacked pages When you create a data list you create the stacked page for the data object On this stacked page you create the Layout to be used for all the pages in the stack including the field data you want to display on the page e Ifyou storing data internally you enter the field data on the stacked page itself Ifyou are using an external source the field data is drawn from the external database spreadsheet or ASCII text file 476 Chapter 27 Data Publishing When you use the Data List tool in Page view you can perform all three tasks within the Data Publishing dialog Data Publishing Data gbject Create or select a data object Sort Simple Filt
163. this manual to learn about the broad range of features available in NetObjects Fusion Conventions Used in This Guide NetObjects Fusion often provides multiple ways to accomplish a task For example to display a page in Page view you can click the Page button on the control bar choose Page from the View menu or press Ctrl 3 Procedures in this guide generally include the most convenient method but other methods are usually available If you are most comfortable using menu commands you will probably find the item you are looking for on a menu even if it is not explicitly included in the steps If you prefer using shortcut keys check the NetObjects Fusion Quick Reference card for information For readability this manual presents all file names paths file extensions HTML tags and URLs like this Example names that you should replace with your own names appear in bold italic Both this manual and the online help assume you are proficient with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows ME or Windows XP If you need help using these systems consult their respective user guides This guide also assumes you are familiar with the World Wide Web and its terminology For general advice about the Web and examples of how to use NetObjects products visit Online view Getting Help NetObjects Fusion offers several options for getting online help For topic help select Help Topics from the Help menu to launch the help system
164. to Layout the objects align to the right or left side of the Layout or are centered in the Layout one on top of the other On the left the objects are aligned horizontally to the left on the right the objects are aligned the same way relative to the Layout Select an option from the Vertically section to align objects top or bottom sides or to center them If you select Relative to Layout the objects align to the top or bottom of the Layout or are centered in the Layout side by side Select Horizontally or Vertically from the Distribute section to make selected objects equidistant Note Object alignment can have an impact on preserving your design and optimizing your code See Optimizing Dynamic Page Layout Output on page 103 Grouping Objects In a Layout or Layout Region you can group two or more objects to each other Grouped items are treated as a single object and can easily be copied as well as aligned to create consistent design To group multiple objects 1 In Page view select the objects by Shift Clicking each one or by drawing marquee around them 2 From the Object menu choose Group Objects 91 Positioning Objects You will see the Group in the Object Tree Object Tree 2 x Home Bf DefaultMasterBorder NavigationBar2 T NavigationBar1 Bannerl HomeLayout A Text 8 A Text67 Data3 Adding Moving and Deleti
165. to another You cannot move generated HTML files from one location to another nor can you rename the files in Windows Explorer Renaming the files or moving them to a new location breaks links because the file locations are different than those specified in the generated HTML files NetObjects Fusion s default publish setting Local Publish is preconfigured to publish the HTML files on your local disk You do not have to do additional setup However when you re ready to publish to a remote Web server you must set up a publish profile for your ISP s Web server You can create as many publish profiles as you need but you can only log on to one server at a time If you re working on a company s intranet and want a few site visitors to test the site before you transfer it to the Internet you can publish the HTML files to one or more private intranet servers Then when it s ready to share with the world you can publish the site directly to your company s Web server 576 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site The following figure summarizes the basic publishing process with NetObjects Fusion Local Develop the site on your computer Remote Additional Publishing Notes Generate the site s HTML files and save them on your hard disk NetObjects Fusion converts the site to HTML and saves iton your local hard disk You can check the site using your browser without logging on to the Internet No additional setup is
166. to the image used by the table Browse to select an image for the cell background from the Picture File Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the cell the browser tiles the image If you select a picture with a transparent color the background color shows through To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field To apply text styles see Chapter 12 Designing with Text 7 Preview the table style in Page view To clear a table style and remove all formatting click the Clear button 257 Setting Table Styles Object Format Character Paragraph Borders Background Color Image Automatic v Browse Attachment Automatic Repeat Automatic Image Position Horizontal Automatic Vertical Automatic Value M Value Y Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To leam about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel Adding a Table Style in Style View You can save time by creating a new table style and saving it as an element of a site style so that it can be used again much like a SiteStyle banner or button set To add a Table Style as a SiteStyle element 1 In Style view select a SiteStyle from the list of SiteStyles The elements of the selected style appear 2 In t
167. to work with Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Display the Images tab The output settings for the thumbnail images and the photo images are separate Click the thumbnail Image tab or Photo Image tab at the bottom of the Images tab Click on the Output Settings menu and choose Save Setting Note that a change must be made to the default settings in order to create a new setting Type a name for the new output setting Edit File Type Quality and Percent if necessary Click OK Adding Alt Tags Adding Alt tags is an easy way to give text descriptions your photos and help visitors that do not have images loaded or are browsing using text based browsers Also using Alt tags is a great way to make sure search engines recognize all content on your site You can add Alt tags on both the Thumbnail Image and Photo Image tabs To add Alt tags 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page a photo page of the gallery you want to work with Open the Photo Galley Properties Editor Display the Images tab 228 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Thumbnail Image Photo Image Preview scaled to 47 to fit Output Settings prc ERE xl File Type JPEG z Quality High T 85 aj Percent Apply to All Approximate download time 6 9sec 56 6 Kbps M File Size 32 0 KB Alt Tag Rotate 0 rotation Save Profile Done 4 Click the Thumbnail Image tab o
168. value in the Lines field This is the number of records that will be displayed at one time Navigating Through Recordsets You can add a Recordset Navigator object to the page so that site visitors can navigate forwards and backwards through results Smart links are added to the page in which users can go to the first last next or last record To add a recordset navigator 1 In Page view select the Recordset Navigator object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Recordset Navigator object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the recordset navigator s location The Recordset Navigator Properties palette appears lecordset Navigator Properties BRE Recordset Navigator Nameslterator 3 Select the recordset iterator you want to work with from the IteratorName drop down list 4 Set the recordset navigator attributes Alignment sets the links vertically or horizontally on the page 223 Retrieving and Displaying Data Spacing determines the number of pixels between each link FirstVisible places a link on the page that goes to the first record in the recordset FirstImage places an image on the page that is used as the link to the first record in the recordset e FirstCaption places text on the page that is used as the link to the first record in the recordse
169. want the changes from the higher levels to be inherited by the lower levels In that case you can edit the text style so Automatic is not selected for the particular format attribute Editing a style at any level overrides the settings from the parent level For example if you select text and change its color to blue that editing overrides a setting of red text from the SiteStyle level You can mix choices among the formatting attributes so some have the Automatic setting and others don t For example you could select the font to be inherited from a higher level so you set it to Automatic but manually select the color See Working with Text Styles on page 167 for more information about the flow of text styles and formats to text in your site Formatting Selected Text With NetObjects Fusion you can reformat selected text to change the text font size color and style as well as the paragraph alignment and indent You can format selected characters in text boxes or table cells On a stacked page you can format selected characters in formatted text fields but in simple text fields all characters have the same format See Chapter 27 Data Publishing 1 Double click the text box that contains the text Hollow selection handles appear around the text box 2 To select Specific characters drag over those characters A word double click the word To select words quickly you can set your options to automatically sele
170. you want to move and drag it to a new position A red indicator shows where the image will be placed 2 Ja Click the photo in the upper left and drag When you release the mouse button the it to the right photo moves into the new position If your gallery has many photos they will be easier to organize if you can see all the images in Page view without scrolling To see as many images as possible reduce the size of the thumbnail select a template that has a thin frame for example Simple border and increase the number of columns When the images are organized as you want them select the template you want to use change the number of columns and then resize the thumbnails See Resizing Photos on page 215 and Formatting the Thumbnail Page on page 229 214 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Moving Photos on the Images Tab 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Display the Images tab 4 Inthe File Name column Select a photo and drag it into a new position in the list An indicator displays as you move the photo File Name Title Campsite ipg Falls ipg Select a photo and click Move Up or Move Down to shift it into the proper position Resizing Photos You can increase or decrease the size of the thumb
171. your site To display external content with its original look choose ZeroMargins If the HTML contains frames you must choose the ZeroMargins MasterBorder 391 Referencing HTML from Page View 5 Limit number of pages to Select this option to enter the number of files to reference NetObjects Fusion begins with the Home page you select and stops referencing when it reaches the end of the site or the number of pages entered here Note NetObjects Fusion only follows lt A HREF gt links it cannot follow links in JavaScript or cgi scripts Down to structural level Select this option to enter how many levels of your SiteStructure to reference NetObjects Fusion references as many pages as possible at a higher level before going to a lower level Do not manage or move assets If you select this option NetObjects Fusion doesn t copy external assets into Assets view Do this if you prefer that path names in the published HTML not be edited from your native code However you then have to manage images and other assets yourself See Publishing Unmanaged Assets on page 400 Click OK The referenced files appear in Site view where you can rename them just like other pages To keep track of externally referenced pages you can color code the page icons in Site view See Setting Site Management Properties on page 37 From Site view going to Page view displays the external file in HTML Source view where you can e
172. 0 10 Managing MasterBorders Working with MasterBorders 132 Selecting a 133 Modifying the Current MasterBorder 133 Creating a 135 Changing 136 Applying a MasterBorder to Multiple Pages 137 Renaming MasterBorder 137 Deleting a 138 11 Working with AutoFrames Understanding 140 Adding an 142 Generating HTML Frame Borders 145 Setting Frame Properties 146 Targeting Links in AutoFrames 148 AutoFrames and Browser Refresh 149 12 Designing with Text Adding Text to 152 Usingthe Text Tool ueris daar ernst vues 152 Dragging and Dropping a Text 153 Pasting Text from the Clipboard 153 Formatting 154 Selecting HTML or Cascading Style Sheet Text Formatting 154 Understanding the Automatic Setting 155 Formatting Selected 156 Formatting 158 Formatting Text Objects within Paragraphs 165 Working with Text
173. 07 Design Priorities and Method Choices 109 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions Working with 112 Creating a New 112 Selecting a Layout soe cee he EErEE TEPE DENS 113 Renaming a 113 Changing Layout 114 Adding an Object to the 114 Working with Layout Regions 114 Creating a Layout Region 115 Adding Objects to a Layout 115 Displaying the Layout Region 115 Converting a Layout Region to a 116 Setting the HTML Output Method for a Layout or Layout Region 117 Setting Layout and Layout Region Background Properties 118 9 Working with Text Boxes Adding a Text BOX 122 Selecting a Text 122 Embedding Objects in a Text Box 123 Dragging and Dropping an Existing Object 124 Creating a New Embedded Object 124 Wrapping Text around Objects 125 Sizing a Text 126 Setting Text Box Background 127 Creating Pages that Resize to the Browser Window128 Preserving Your Design Intentions 13
174. 1 gt or Normal P are fundamental design characteristics of HTML You can see examples of tag styles on the Text tab in Style view Custom style elements are combined with HTML tag styles to produce a wide range of formats that you can apply to different pages or the entire site See Creating a Text Style on page 170 to create a custom style For example suppose the original H1 head is bold and large You want to create a series of custom H1 styles On one set of pages you want the H1 heads to look like a shout so you create a custom style to set the text to all capitals and italic and you call this custom style Shout On the other pages you might want the H1 heads to look like a whisper so you create a custom style that sets the text to be lowercase and condensed Since you don t want the text to inherit the bold and large size from the original H1 setting you do not select Automatic You name this custom style Shhh When you apply the custom style to the text with the original H1 head the only text attributes affected are those specified in the custom style So if the original H1 head is bold and large the result of applying the custom style Shout to selected text looks like this 168 Chapter 12 Designing with Text THE H1 HEADS WOULD LOOK LIKE THIS The text is bold and large from the original H1 head and also all capitals and italic from the custom style The bold and large attributes pass through to the HI S
175. 11 assigning to navigation bars 299 button rollover example 418 cascading 412 cascading message example 421 collision detection example 420 custom message example 420 421 423 custom messages 410 customizing Set Action dialog 427 deactivating 414 417 426 delay example 424 deleting modifying 414 dragging example 420 examples 418 parameters 407 416 reordering 414 restrictions with frames 401 scripting your own 415 416 slide show example 423 targets 402 405 412 trigger events 402 404 ActiveX controls 387 Ad Banner component 454 Adobe Acrobat PDF files 378 aif files 375 aliased folders 603 606 aligning objects 90 91 alt tags adding and modifying 87 Anchor icon 77 320 anchors adding 319 deleting 319 320 editing 319 320 external HTML 397 see also links animated gif files 188 SiteStyles 287 animation see video files 373 APPLET CODE 398 application options international 25 preview 22 updates 26 Application Options dialog arrows see lines asset type directory structure publishing 589 assets custom HTML 535 custom names 563 customized 604 data objects 570 displaying pages containing file assets 564 displaying pages containing links 569 editing 87 file 561 file types 561 import limitations 69 links 567 managing external HTML 397 managing script 612 publishing external HTML 400 publishing special 612 reusing 86 unmanaged 400 variables 571 see also file assets links variables Assets folde
176. 3 In the Sort by section select the columns you want to sort You can sort by e Ascending Order A to Z Descending Order Z to A Ascending Numeric Order 1 2 3 4 5 Descending Numeric Order 5 4 3 2 1 4 In the Options area select Exclude Cell headers to exclude cells marked as headers from the sort Note If you select to Exclude Cell Headers the cell headers will appear in the Sort By fields Ignore initial white space to sort the cell data by the first character that is not a space Sort selected cells only to sort the selected rows only Importing Table Data You can import existing table data or display data from a file using the Table Import tool 251 Exporting Table Data 1 In Page view choose the Table Import tool from the Container flyout on the Standard toolbar and draw a box where you want to position the table EH i n Table Import Tool The Import Table dialog appears Import Table Import Data Eie E Delimiter Tab S Table Properties Width Auto Cell Pad 2 E Cell Space 2 Cancel 2 Browse to the location the file that has the table data you want to import 3 In the Delimiter drop down list choose e to import a tab delimited txt file Comma to import a comma delimited csv file Custom to specify a new delimiter Type the custom delimiter in the field next to the Delimiter drop down This field is only availabl
177. 4 Click Test to test the connection If the test is successful the database schema will be imported automatically 5 Click OK Defining a Database Schema After setting up the database connection you can import the database schema or use the Schema Editor to configure your tables and fields These values only need to be configured in the Schema Editor and will be stored with the connector profile it was created under Field Attributes Null Default Extra Action FirstName text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext LastName text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Department text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Location text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Phone text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Email text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Login text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext Password text Yes NULL Change Drop Primary Index Unique Fulltext jm With selected _ Change Drop Example of a database schema The tables and fields you add in the Schema Editor will be used to build a recordset After adding a table you will need to determine which datafields from that table you want to pull records from to form your recordset There is no limit to the number of tables and fields you can add and the order in which you add tables and fields is not important by default the sorting o
178. 4 sizing 79 title in browser window 36 transition creating 547 palettes color 15 properties 10 21 showing hiding 77 parameters action 407 parent pages 33 passive mode 610 passwords forms 434 paths custom HTML assets editing 535 in external HTML 397 399 in frameset files 556 pdf files 378 photo galleries adding 210 211 340 341 adding captions 218 adding photos 212 342 adding text 218 adding titles 218 arranging photos 214 controlling download time 21 191 225 359 deleting 236 editing captions 218 editing properties 218 editing titles 218 formatting photo captions 223 formatting photo pages 232 formatting photo titles 221 formatting text 221 formatting thumbnail page 229 formatting thumbnail titles 224 navigating photo pages 234 removing 236 removing photos 217 resizing photos 215 site navigation 235 362 using existing 211 341 photo pages formatting 232 navigating 234 selecting frame template 232 233 Picture Loader component 459 Picture Rollover component 462 pictures adding 188 adding text 179 adding to stacked pages 489 changing in banners 313 changing on one button 308 creating borders 201 202 203 cropping 200 rotating 199 sizing 197 png files 188 polygons see shapes 20 Portable Network Graphics see png files position based forms 430 preferences international 25 Preferences dialog see Application Options dialog Preview folder 17 Preview Site button 12 previewing choosing b
179. 496 dr Connector Object Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database In addition Adodb v3 05 drivers are available in the PHP components directory To use one of these additional drivers locate the correct file at NetObjects 8 ComponentsWNetObjects Database PHP Connector and then type the file name in the Custom Engine field in the PHP Connector Properties palette Note For databases that you do not see a driver you may get them from the Adodb v3 05 for PHP distribution and install to the following location NetObjects 8 Components Y NetObjects Database PHP Connector Setting up the Database Connection A Connector object must be placed on each page in which a database component object is used The connector points to the physical database you created allowing you to access the data and query specific tables and fields Note The Connector dialogs will differ depending on the platform being used For example some settings available in the PHP connector dialog are not available in the ASP or ColdFusion connector dialogs To set up a database connection 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF DB Component toolbar 2 Click on the page to indicate the connector s location The Connector dialog appears Name Create a new connector Name Connector2 C Insert an existing connector IConnector1 Current connectors are listed in the Insert
180. 6 29 21 HavUp image Yes CWetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySite Assets NavUp gif 1KB 6 29 21 right background bevel Yes C WetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySiteVAssets right backgr 1KB 6 29 21 right_background_film image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User SitesMySiteVssetsvight backgr 1KB 6 29 21 spacer image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User SitesMySitetAssetstspacer gif 1KB 6 29 21 top background bevel __ image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySiteVssetsttop backgrou 1KB 6 29 21 top_background_film mage Yes C WetObjects Fusion 7 5 Sites MySite Assets top_backgrou 1KB 6 29 21 top_left_bevel mage Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 SiUser SitesMySiteVssetsttop left 1KB 6 29 21 top left film image Yes C WetObjects Fusion 7 51User Sites MySitewAssetsttop left film gif 1KB 6 29 21 top_right_bevel mage Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5iUser SitesMySiteVssetsttop right be 1KB 6 29 21 top right film image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5iUser SitesiMySiteVissetsttop right fi 1KB 629 2 The original asset name appears here This picture shows its new name You can also edit the location directly in the File dialog For example you could enter a URL instead of a file path to point to a dynamic image on a server Such images however are represented by an X in Page view because the asset is not accessible 563 Managing File Assets Opening a File Asset in an External Application NetObjects Fusio
181. 7 setting cell properties 248 251 253 setting row and column properties 247 setting table properties 241 sizing cells 250 sizing columns and rows 243 splitting cells 245 working with cells 248 targets creating default frames 549 in actions 402 405 managing 567 navigation bar 311 updating link 569 templates appending 61 Blank Site 29 creating 63 creating sites 60 customizing 64 defined 29 59 expanding an existing site 61 exporting sites 63 including publish profiles 64 inserting 61 62 using 59 Templates folder 17 testing your site 12 text adding 152 adding actions 408 adding to photo gallery 218 adding to picture 179 adding to shape 179 adding to stacked pages 489 applying styles 167 assigning font styles 157 bulleted lists 175 checking spelling 183 copying and pasting 153 creating styles 170 creating user defined variables 182 deleting styles 174 dragging and dropping 153 finding 185 formatting 156 formatting photo gallery 221 inserting symbols 178 inserting variables 181 modifying styles 174 numbered lists 175 Paste Special 153 rotating 181 searching 185 selecting 156 setting color 157 setting size 157 SiteStyle banners and buttons 275 spans 167 submitting form responses 441 typing 152 word count 186 wrapping around objects 125 text boxes adding 122 container 96 121 embedding objects 123 inserting HTML scripts 553 scaling contents 128 selecting 122 setting background color 127 setting mini
182. 9 email 323 external 316 322 external updating 567 file 316 325 following 331 hotspots 334 imagemaps 334 in external HTML 397 internal 316 317 mailto 316 323 managing 567 relative 324 smart 316 320 321 targeting 148 text adding actions 408 untargeted 149 updating targets 569 verifying 570 within a frame 141 see also anchors lists formatting 176 localserver 584 M Machine Data Source external data objects 481 Macromedia Director see Director Macromedia Flash 366 Macromedia Shockwave see Shockwave mailto links 316 323 margins 132 MasterBorders accessing adding HTML 536 applying 136 changing 136 changing margins 134 converted from AutoFrames effect on HTML 545 creating 135 default in blank site 132 defined 77 132 deleting 138 modifying 133 naming 137 selecting 133 setting for multiple pages 137 setting properties 133 showing hiding 77 sizing 80 134 with actions 403 412 ZeroMargins 132 measurement unit choosing 21 media files replacing 380 sample 365 messages Alert displaying on mouse click 552 META tag 583 META tags 38 546 547 author 54 keywords 54 Microsoft Internet Explorer action support 401 Microsoft Word importing documents 85 Microsoft Word documents importing 72 midi files 375 mov files 371 MPEG formats 373 N naming custom for assets 563 files 603 folders 603 form objects 433 Layouts 113 MasterBorders 137 objects 89 pages 45 sites 61 navigati
183. 98 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database If the test is successful the database schema will be imported automatically 7 Click OK To connect to a PHP database directly or using a custom string 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF Database Component toolbar Click on the Connection tab 2 Choose Custom String from the Type drop down list Connection pstesese kecordsets Type Custom String v Host Engine I Database User Password Test Pad Type in the Host name In most cases this will be ocalhost Select a database engine from the drop down list or type in a custom engine in the Engine field See Adding Database Engines on page 496 Enter the name of your database in the Database field 6 Type in the User and Password required if any to connect to your database 7 Click Test to test the connection If the test is successful the database schema will be imported automatically 8 Click OK Connecting to an ASP Database To connect to an ASP database using a data source 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF Database Component toolbar 499 Setting up the Database Connection Click on the Connection tab Connector Connector x Connection Database Recordset Type DSN Password Test 2 Choose DSN from the Type drop down list 3 Type in the data source name or
184. Advanced Customize your shopping cart s default settings for the selected store engine e Monetary Format Choose the monetary unit to be used with your products e Weight System Choose the weight measurement to be used with your products Note The Store Engine Settings will depend on the account being used Refer to your store engine s user manual for complete information regarding these settings 5 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor 358 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Controlling Download Time When you configure a catalog be considerate of site visitors by minimizing the time it takes for the images to download Image quality and size both affect download time You can use the output settings in the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor and the file size information on the properties palette to keep track of and adjust download time while maintaining image quality To control the image format 1 In Page view display the list page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the Products tab The output settings for detail images and thumbnail images are separate 4 Click the Thumbnail Image tab or Detail Image tab at the bottom of the Products tab Attributes Description Detail Image Thumbnail Image Related Products Preview scaled to 65 to fit Image Path C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 T utorial Catal
185. But only those objects with actions triggered by the message the text boxes respond by hiding themselves Next the button sends a Show message to its associated text box which makes itself visible 422 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Without cascading messages you d have to add four additional actions to each button one for hiding each text box If you didn t use a custom message to trigger the text boxes to hide cascading a Hide message to the Layout would hide every object on the page Sequencing Actions for a Slide Show Here s an example of using custom messages and a delay action to build a slide show When the page loads a slide flies onto the page stays there for the duration of time specified by a delay flies off and is followed by another slide Before you begin gather the pictures you want to show in each slide and set the HTML output to Fixed Page Layout 1 In Page view create a Layout Region and in it place pictures and text for your first slide By creating each slide in a Layout Region you can include multiple objects per slide 2 Select the Layout Region and clear the Object initially visible in browser option on the Actions tab of the Properties palette You clear this object so the slide doesn t appear until an action triggers it to fly onto the page 3 Create three custom messages named ShowPicture PictureIsIn and DelayIsDone as described in Tailoring Actions with Custom Messag
186. DUC Width 580 2211740 Pizels e Ej leight a PRODUCT 3 we have what you need at prices you Uu MS p kan afford At BUSINESS NAME our goal is to TM cus rovide you with courteous expedient professional ste Setting ervice of the highest quality Tables Columns C Rows Show Feel free to browse our Web site at your Layoutis a form onvenience If you have any questions or would lik Genter in browser speak with a BUSINESS NAME representative egarding our PRODUCTS SERVICES please e UMBER T At BUSINESS NAME the customer always comes first Home Mission Events Next Tour To resize the Layout and MasterBorder areas With the rulers showing drag a Layout or MasterBorder handle to change the area s height and or width Use the far right MasterBorder handle to change the size of the right MasterBorder and the bottom MasterBorder handle to change the size of the bottom MasterBorder To set Layout size precisely enter values in the Layout Width and Height fields on the General tab of the Layout Properties palette For precision MasterBorders enter values for the left right top and bottom margins on the General tab of the MasterBorders Properties palette You cannot make a Layout or MasterBorder smaller than the objects it contains You cannot lock the size of a Layout or MasterBorder If you add an object that is larger than the Layout or MasterBorder the area expands to accomm
187. Database To update or delete records in a database you create a form and submit to the page the component object is placed on It is recommended you perform a query using a Where clause first to view the impact of updating or deleting records before actually carrying out the action By performing this query any records marked for updating or deletion will be displayed If you see that the data you will be deleting is wrong you can make adjustments before taking any actions that cannot be undone To update records in a database Update Object 1 In Page view select the Update object from the NOF DB Component toolbar 530 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Note You cannot add an Update object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the Update object s location The Update Properties palette appears Update Properties amp el Update Double click here to edit 151 Double click h S LCustom Thank you for your submission 3 Double click in the SQL Wizard field The Query Inspector will appear 4 Click on the Fields tab Select the table you will be inserting records into from the drop down list then highlight the associated data fields that will be updated Query Inspector Lx Fields Where Clause Table Name Fields OK 531 Modifying a Database 5 Click on the
188. Define values v Edit Option Save Profile Done 2 Enter in product information by navigating to the sub tabs located on the Products tab Attributes Add detailed information that will identify your product such as a name or part number To assign specific characteristics such as color and size see Adding Options on page 344 Note The attributes listed are determined by the store engine being used Refer to your store s user manual for further information about the attributes listed Description Provide your customers a brief and extended product description The descriptions can be shown on the List page and detail pages of your catalog Also you can add product comments and keywords related to a specific product This information can only be viewed in the E commerce Catalog Properties Editor 343 Working with Products Detail Image Upload an image associated with the selected product Use the options on the Detail Image tab to configure the image output settings For more information about image output settings Controlling Download Time on page 359 e Thumbnail Image Display the product detail image as a thumbnail that can also link to the product detail page For information about image output settings see Controlling Download Time on page 359 Related Products Related products can be used to promote similar products in your catalog You can display rela
189. Editing a Color Palette 1 2 Click the Color button in any properties palette where it is offered The Color Picker appears Select Custom Palette from the drop down list at the top of the dialog 15 NetObjects Fusion Folder Structure An all white palette appears 3 Click a box in the palette area 4 Set the RGB values for the color you want to add to the palette type the hexadecimal HTML value for the color or double click the blank box and choose or create a color in the Color dialog 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color you want to add to the palette 6 Click Save 7 In the Save As dialog type a file name for the palette and click Save The new palette is displayed in the Color Picker until you change it NetObjects Fusion Folder Structure The NetObjects Fusion 8 folder contains all the files you need to use NetObjects Fusion Do not move or rename the NetObjects Fusion 8 folder or any folders within it If you need to relocate the NetObjects Fusion folder you must uninstall and reinstall the program NetObjects Fusion performs best when the application and its parts remain in the folder recommended during installation This is especially true with the User Sites folder Since NetObjects Fusion keeps track of assets and links folder names and locations are very important If you change names and or locations using Windows Explorer or File Manager NetObjects Fusion might not be able to track assets and
190. Height 555 Width 740 i Character set Western European IS0 8859 1 Text formatting C HTML Cascading Style Sheets CSS Quote type Straight Quotes HTML Options Variable Options Cancel e Site name The name assigned to this site when it was created You cannot change this setting SiteStyle The style currently assigned to this site To change the SiteStyle go to Style view See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles 52 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Number of pages Pages currently in this site This setting is updated when you add or delete pages Browser compatibility HTML output method setting for the site See Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output e New page size Default width and height for pages you add to the site Changing this setting does not change the size of existing pages in the site e Character set You can choose a character set from the drop down list See Setting the Site s Character Set on page 617 Text formatting You can choose HTML or cascading style sheets CSS See Selecting HTML or Cascading Style Sheet Text Formatting on page 154 e Quote type Select Straight or Curly quotes for the site s text objects These are Straight Quotes These are Curly Quotes e HTML Options Click this button to define characteristics of the HTML generated when you publish your site See Setting HTML Options on page 581
191. ISPs and Web servers but you should check with your service provider to determine which structure to use If your ISP or Web server has special requirements for a site s directory structure you can customize the site directory structure in Publish view See Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure on page 602 for information When you publish your site to a Web server you specify the directory structure of your files and assets on the server Setting the directory structure for your site does not change the structure that the site visitor sees nor does it affect the links between pages and assets It simply specifies the path names where your pages and assets are stored on the server and what URL is required to access them For example some servers require a one level structure with all pages images and other assets in the same directory others let you set up your own directories NetObjects Fusion provides three pre configured directory structures Flat for servers that require all resources and assets to be in a single directory Many commercial ISPs and hosting companies require this kind of structure Asset Type arranges your site contents into folders according to their asset type This is the default setting in NetObjects Fusion For example if your site contains a typical mix of text and media a structure set by Asset Type arranges your contents into the structure shown below Directory Structure t 9
192. If type object on the page 4 Double click in the Expression Wizard field The Conditional Expression Editor will appear Conditions Editor Lx Conditions fs empty v Ea 4 E EUN a In the operand field select the datafield or variable you will be applying the condition to b Select an operator from the Operator drop down list See Table 28 1 on page 509 for operator descriptions Selecta datafield or variable from the Value drop down list or type in a new value d Click the plus sign to add the clause or click the check sign to replace the existing clause 526 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database e Click the conditions drop down list to add additional condition fields or click OK to close the Conditional Expression Editor Select AND to further narrow the filter or select OR to broaden the query Add a data output below the Conditional Expression object and set its properties The datafield you select in the properties palette will be displayed on the published page only if the conditions set in Step 4 are met Add a new Conditional Expression object below the data output object Select Else as the Type Add another data output below the second Conditional Expression object and set its properties All records that did not meet the conditions set in Step 4 will be displayed here Add a final Conditional Ex
193. List Page Detail Page Store Detail Page Layout Boo Detail Page Display Items Product Items Product Items to Display Xx 111 Sale Price Add gt Name Move Up Sales Tax Price Shipping Cost Add All gt gt Extended Description Move Down SKU Part Number Options Weight Remove Lema lt lt Remove All Save Profile Done In the samples the boxes with an X represent the product and the lines are the text 5 In the Detail Page Display Items section highlight the product items you would like displayed on the detail page and click Add To display all product items click Add All 6 Highlight the item in the Product Items to Display field and click Format to Edit the item label and format the text 356 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Remove the item label 7 Inthe Detail Page Purchase Options section Select Display Buy to provide site visitors a link that will take them to your store and begin the purchase process To display the link as text choose Text Link and enter in the text you want to link To display the link as an image choose Button Image and browse to the folder containing the image you want to add Select Display Add to Cart to provide site visitors a link that will allow them to add products to their cart while continuing to shop To display the link as text choose Text Link and enter in the text you want to
194. ML effects only to advanced browsers Delivering objects with actions or other DHTML effects to greatest number of browser versions Objects with actions in Layout Region embedded in a text box Dynamic Page Layout for site Regular Tables for Layout Region containing objects with actions Using cascading actions Embedded Layout Regions containing objects with actions grouped for cascading messages Dynamic Page Layout Fixed Page Layout 109 Design Priorities and Method Choices 110 CHAPTER 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions Layouts and Layout Regions are containers for the objects you place on your pages When you use Layouts and Layout Regions you can position content with pixel level precision by dragging it into place in the container This chapter describes Working with Layouts Creating Layouts e Working with Layout Regions Creating Layout Regions Setting the HTML output method for Layouts and Layout Regions Setting the background of Layouts and Layout Regions 111 Working with Layouts Working with Layouts The Layout makes up the body of the page It is surrounded on all four sides by the MasterBorder Each Layout is attached to a single page unlike a MasterBorder which can be applied to any page in the site There is no connection between Layouts on separate pages Each page has a default Layout named PagenameLayout For example when you add a page its page
195. N Citmages File Folder 7l cid amp display css 1KB Cascading Style Sh 7 41 Aura Green amp Yellow Capsula Blue Shee hi Poe cp 7 amp C Aura Orange amp Blue Tope te ee 8 2 Aura Red amp Purple Select an item to view its description Style ssx 4KB 55X File 7 4 c Book See also Bulet silver My Documents Business Green My Network Places C Business Purple amp Blue Business Red amp Tan 3 Capsula Blue EC Capsula Green S E Capsula Red C Capsula Yellow C Cityscape Gold C Cityscape Purple H E Cityscape Teal H E Comic H E Corporate Crossblock II Blue amp Green Crossblock II Gold amp Crimson H E Crossblock II Rose amp Lilac C Cupid Blue C Cupid Pink H E Diamond Grape 89 07 Elemental ao Fancy zi object s Disk free space 2 28 GB 11 36 lr My Computer When you select a new image for a style element NetObjects Fusion copies it into the appropriate folder for the SiteStyle If you re editing an existing SiteStyle the new image replaces the file previously assigned to that element NetObjects Fusion copies the new image to the folder but doesn t overwrite the old file unless the new and old files have identical names For example suppose you want to modify the Mountain SiteStyle to change the highlighted button color First open P3 gif in the Mountain Images folder and use
196. NetObjects Fusion 8 0 User Guide Copyright 2004 Website Pros Inc All rights reserved This manual as well as the software described in it is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment representation or warranty regarding the performance of NetObjects Fusion by Website Pros Inc Website Pros Inc assumes no responsibility for the consequences of any errors or inaccuracies in this manual Except as permitted by the license for this manual no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Website Pros Inc Trademarks NetObjects NetObjects Fusion PageDraw and SiteStyles are registered trademarks and AutoSites Everywhere HTML SiteStructure and The Web needs you are trademarks of Website Pros Inc These and other graphics logos service marks and trademarks of Website Pros Inc and its affiliates may not be used without the prior written consent of Website Pros Inc or its affiliates as the case may be All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered marks of their respective holders GIF conversion capability licensed under U S Patent
197. NetObjects Fusion styles and are available for all nod files Online SiteStyles These are SiteStyles located on a Web server Online SiteStyles are created in an XML format and are available to all NetObjects Fusion users 270 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles You must be connected to the Internet to set or activate an Online SiteStyle Warning Removing an Active SiteStyle or a Local SiteStyle will remove the style permanently See Removing SiteStyles on page 294 Click the Graphic tab to see the graphic elements of the currently selected SiteStyle Click the Text tab to see the text elements which show how the site s text appears on the page Click the Preview tab to view the elements as they would appear in a browser 271 Exploring Style View NetObjects MySite nod Edt View Go Style Tools Help Do B amp 4 Indo ete Renee Graphic tab a Currently selected SiteStyle List of SiteStyles Text tab Graphic Text Active SileSlyles Aura Green amp Yalow Cityscape Teal Phoenix El G3 NetObjects Fusion Local SiteStyles Aibrushed Gold Aura Green amp Yelow Aura Drange amp Blue Aura Red Purple Book 2 Bulet Siver S5 Business Green S Business Purple amp Blue 2 Business Red amp Tan 2 Capsula Blue 2 Capsula Green Capsule Red amp Capsula Yelow Cityscape Gold Cityscape Purple Ciyscape Teal 5 Comic Corpo
198. NetObjects Fusion generates the HTML NetObjects Fusion positions pictures at the insertion point Text tables sound video and other objects are placed with the top edge lined up with the top edge of the text line containing the insertion point You use the object s alignment options to arrange the object within the text box An insertion marker indicates the object s insertion point hen you embed an object in a text box a wide border appears around the box and the insertion point appears as a fou use the object s Insertion marker alignment options to position Embedded image aligned with Lefi wrap setting he object s insertion point 123 Embedding Objects in a Text Box To move an embedded object drag it To place an embedded object on the top line of the text box drag it until its insertion marker is positioned before the first text character When you em bed ano bj ectina Insertion marker positioned Object ext box a wide border appears before the first text character around the box and the n Embedded image aligned insertion point appears as a with Left wrap setting ertical bar You use the object s alignment options to position the object ithin the text box An insertion marker ndicates the object s insertion point You can create a new object in a text box or insert an existing object Dragging and Dropping an Existing Object 1 2 3 In Page view select the Text tool fro
199. New 1 340 Inserting an Existing 341 Working with 1 342 Adding Products ce eee ees 342 Arranging Products 345 Removing Products 348 Duplicating 349 Filtering Products niero decre lese ele 349 Importing Products rer erinan EEEE SEEE ene ee 350 Formatting the List 352 Selecting a Layout for Your 352 Displaying 354 14 Formatting the Detail 356 Configuring the 357 Controlling Download Time 359 Setting Up Navigation for Site Visitors 362 Saving a Catalog Profile 362 Removing 363 21 Placing Media Inserting a Elasli 366 Inserting a Shockwave File 368 Inserting a QuickTime Movie 370 Inserting a Windows Media Player File 373 Inserting a Sound 374 Inserting a Real Player File 376 Inserting Other Types of Files 378 Replacing a Media 380 22 Addi
200. New page size Height 555 24 Width 1740 Character set Western European IS0 8859 1 Text formatting C HTML Cascading Style Sheets CSS Quote type Straight Quotes HTML Options Variable Options Cancel 2 Click the Change button 101 Selecting an HTML Output Method The Browser Compatibility dialog appears Browser Compatibility Browser compatibility Netscape Navigator 4 x Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above HTML generation Dynamic Page Layout Uses complex hidden tables to achieve the highest level of accuracy and better performance Regular Tables Uses a hidden table to achieve a high level of layout accuracy Though performance is not as good as Dynamic Page Layout it avoids occasional problems with Netscape Navigator C Fixed Page Layout Uses Cascading Style Sheet Positioning and IE specific tags for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above to create the highest level of accuracy uses HTML and Netscape specific tags for Netscape Navigator 4 x When you select both 4 0 browser options both HTML output options are applied Cancel 3 Select Browser compatibility options You can select Netscape Navigator 4 x or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above or both 4 Select the default HTML generation option for this site Dynamic Page Layout and Regular Tables are compatible with all browsers Ifyou select Fixed Page Layout and e Netscape Navigat
201. P 10 2001 This page has visible MasterBorder This page has the ZeroMargins MasterBorder Click inside it Click outside the page Modifying the Current MasterBorder 1 In Page view select the MasterBorder The MasterBorder Properties palette appears The Name field shows the name of the MasterBorder assigned to the current page 2 810 Name DefauktMasterBor Margins Pixels Ler eo Right H Top 65 Bottom 60 If the MasterBorder Properties palette does not appear check the View menu to make sure the MasterBorder display and the properties palette are turned on 133 Modifying the Current MasterBorder 2 To change the size of the margins drag the handles on the ruler Drag these handles to change the MasterBorder size If an object is in the way such as a banner occupying the top and left margin you must move the object to resize the MasterBorder If the MasterBorder is not visible you cannot drag the handles For precise margin settings in the Margins section of the MasterBorder Properties palette type values into the fields or click the arrows 3 Arrange objects such as a banner or navigation buttons delete unwanted objects and insert additional text or objects 4 Ifconserving browser window space is important to you when the objects are arranged to your satisfaction from the Object menu choose Size MasterB
202. P DB NetObjects Database PHP MySQL ODBC D Plua Ins WSF Flash Shockwave Quicktime Windows X visible Iv Show Description Dock Left Dock Right x eso Y E 2 Eloat Close Choose the toolbars you want to appear in the component manager and select the Visible checkbox Select Show Labels and Show Description to display the component object labels and descriptions If the component object can only be displayed with a label the Show labels option will be inactive Select the location of the component manager e Dock Left docks the component manager on the left side of the window Dock Right docks the component manager on the right side of the window Set the position of the component manager in the X and Y fields and click Float to float the component manager About Components You can use Publish components and Page components in NetObjects Fusion The component s type dictates where it appears within NetObjects Fusion Publish components are used to post process the HTML generated by NetObjects Fusion or to change NetObjects Fusion s FTP capabilities See Publishing Components on page 596 453 Adding a Rotating Ad Banner Ad Banner tool e Page components appear on toolbars in Page view You use the tools to place components on your pages See Using the Component Manager Note To add copies of the same component to a site you must place a new component each time Cop
203. Pages on page 403 so clicking the button cascades the HideAIIProfiles message to the Layout In the Set Action dialog enter Mouse Clicked in the When field the Layout in the Target field and Custom HideAIlIProfiles in the Message field Also check the Cascade message option 4 Adda second action to each button so clicking it targets a Show message to the text box associated with the button In the Set Action dialog enter Mouse Clicked in the When field the text box this button should display in the Target field and Object Show in the Message field 5 Select each text box and on the Actions tab of the Properties palette clear the Object initially visible in browser option Text Properties Clear this option for each text box so its contents don t appear until the site visitor clicks the appropriate button Object initially visible in browser 6 Add an action to each text box that s triggered by the HideAIIProfiles message and hides the text box In the Set Action dialog enter Custom HideAlIProfiles in the When field the text box itself in the Target field and Object Hide in the Message field Then preview the page Clicking a button should send HideAIlIProfiles as cascading action message to the Layout The Layout doesn t have any actions triggered by this message so it doesn t respond But it does cascade the message down to its embedded objects As a result every object on the page receives the message
204. Paragraphs and Characters To get a count for the current page in Page view choose Word Count from the Tools menu Page Word Count PR Word count Line count Paragraph count Character count If the text box includes embedded objects the line count is incremented for each embedded object 186 CHAPTER 13 Placing Pictures You can enhance your pages by placing pictures in the Layout area and MasterBorder This chapter tells how to add pictures and modify their size and appearance This chapter describes Choosing an image format Adding a picture Using the Picture Properties palette Optimizing images for the Web Resizing and Rotating images Adjusting an images color Adding image borders Adding text to a picture Removing red eye Editing image hotspots 187 Choosing an Image Format Picture tool Choosing an Image Format To display a picture most browsers require the picture to be stored in one of the following Web standard formats Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg supports 24 bit true color Graphics Interchange Format gif supports 8 bit 256 color images NetObjects Fusion also supports GIF 89 a format for transparency interlacing and animation as well as animated gifs An animated gif file contains multiple images that a browser plays in sequence adding movement to your pages without browser plugins Portable Network Graphics png supports any co
205. Profile list The publish profile Server Type must be FTP 3 Click Advanced The Advanced Publish Settings dialog appears 607 Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory Publish Settings 4 Click the Aliases tab Advanced Publish Settings E xj File Naming Aliases Advanced FTP URL Path FTP Path P New Alias Edit Alias Delete Alias CGI Alias Cancel Enter the FTP path where CGI scripts are stored in the CGI alias field This establishes an alias to the executable directory on the server where CGI scripts are kept To create other aliased folders 1 In Publish view arrange the directory structure for your site the way you want it to appear on your server Isolate the pages or assets you want to store in an aliased location into one branch of the directory structure under a common parent folder If necessary create a custom folder for each set of aliased content If your site requires more than one alias such as one alias for secure pages and another alias for protected assets you can create more than one custom folder Drag pages and assets into the appropriate custom folder s as needed Click Publish Settings on the control bar The Publish Settings dialog appears Choose a profile from the Profile list If necessary make changes to that profile Position the Publish Settings dialog so you have a clear view of the Contents of directory pane in Publi
206. Properties from the shortcut menu The Properties dialog appears 2 Select Don t publish then click OK NetObjects Fusion displays a red slash through the page or asset icon and suppresses it from the site when published To re enable publishing for a suppressed page or asset repeat step 1 clear Don t publish and click OK Note This Don t publish command is not the same as the Don t publish command in Site view Selecting the Don t publish command in Site view eliminates the pages and all links to it from the published site In Publish view the Don t publish command does not eliminate the page from the published site The page is simply not generated again and not recopied to the site The page and all links to it remain The images and assets of the page may be republished but the page will not Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory Sometimes you need to store certain assets of your site in a location separate from the rest of your site For example e You can link to programs such as CGI scripts or other executables that have to be placed in a specific CGI directory so they run properly e You can place an order form or other pages in a secure location that requires authorized access without restricting access to the rest of your site e You can link to images or other assets that are maintained or controlled by others and stored in a protected location 606 3 Publish Setting
207. Properties palette appears with the Row or Column tab added Table Row Properties EMES AmB BH 88 E Height 27 Auto Width 86 Auto Alignment Fit to Contents Mertical Auto Horizontal Auto Adjust Auto B Horizontal Auto E Adjust Advanced E B Row is a form E Rowis aheader Row HTML Row properties Column properties Set the Vertical and Horizontal Alignment to position objects within cells Set Row height or Column width Display the Row tab of the Cell Properties palette To make all selected rows the same height enter a number in the Height field and press Enter e Display the Column tab of the Cell Properties palette To make selected columns the same width enter a number in the Width field and press Enter To size each selected column to its contents click Fit to Contents To make the row a form select Row is a form See Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Due to limitations of HTML you cannot make a column a form Select Row is a header to format the cells as a row heading You can add HTML code to a row See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 247 Working with Table Cells Working with Table Cells Each table cell is an individual object You can add cells set alignment of its content choose a background color and picture format text make the cell a form or add HTML Selecting Table Cells 1 Click
208. Select the image you want to remove and press Delete Removing a Photo Page 1 In Page view display the photo page containing the photo you want to remove from the gallery 217 Opening the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Delete 2 Click the Delete button on the control bar 3 Click Yes to confirm deletion Removing Photos from the Images Tab 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Display the Images tab 4 Inthe File Name column select a photo and click Remove Click Remove All to remove all photos from the gallery Opening the Photo Gallery Properties Editor The tab you see when you open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor depends on how you open it e Ifyou double click a photo on a thumbnail page or photo page the editor opens showing the Images tab with the photo you clicked selected Ifyou double click a thumbnail frame the editor opens showing the Thumbnail Page tab e Ifyou double click a photo frame the editor opens showing the Photo Page tab e Ifyou click the Configure button on the Photo Gallery Properties palette on the thumbnail page the editor opens to the Thumbnail Page tab e Ifyou click the Configure button on the Photo Gallery Properties palette on a photo page the editor opens to the Photo Page tab Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions A title and descriptive ca
209. Server The Transfer Files dialog appears File locations Transfer files from local directory Local Publish Transfer files to remote server Remote Publish 1 J Cancel 2 From the Transfer files from local directory drop down list select the name of the local directory where you published and saved the site s HTML files This is usually the Local Publish selection for your local hard disk or an intranet server where you initially generated the HTML files 3 From the Transfer files to remote server drop down list select the publish profile where you want to transfer the files If you need to define a new publish profile before transferring the files click the pencil icon next to the drop down lists The Publish Settings dialog appears 4 Click OK NetObjects Fusion generates a temporary copy of the site connects to the remote server using the settings in the publish profile and uses its internal file transfer program to transfer the site s HTML files and directories to the remote server using the file and directory structure you specify While NetObjects Fusion is transferring the published site to the server you can select a different view and continue working You cannot open a different site Note Changes made to the site while it is being transferred are not automatically made in the published version 598 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site When the transfer is complete
210. Server Tags Select a tag from the toolbar then click on the page where you want to place the tag A tag placeholder and the tag properties appear In the Tag Properties palette set the TAGTYPE to e Start if it is a beginning tag End if it is a closing tag Note Tags that do not require a closing tag do not have the TAGTYPE attribute listed Specify the tag attributes in the tag properties palette Warning NetObjects Fusion does not verify the tags attributes and values you add so be sure to use valid syntax Many tags have attributes that require values for the tags to function correctly 472 CHAPTER 27 Data Publishing NetObjects Fusion makes it easy to publish information such as employee directories product and service catalogs and event schedules You can enter manage and store this information as records either in your NetObjects Fusion site or in an external application such as a database or spreadsheet To publish the data you specify its source and create a layout for the pages that will display it NetObjects Fusion uses your Layout to create a separate page for each record and can automatically provide site visitors with buttons to navigate between them This chapter describes how to publish data using NetObjects Fusion including Static and dynamic data publishing Creating a data object Storing data internally Using data stored externally Creating a data list Cre
211. Text Properties palette 2 Right click in the text box and choose Object HTML from the shortcut menu The Object HTML dialog appears On the Before Tag tab type paste or insert the HTML or script Press Enter after the script and type lt On the After Tag tab type Click OK ROO You defined a space on the page for a text item inserted the HTML or script and told NetObjects Fusion to put the HTML or script in place of the text Preview the page to test your code and view the source from your browser to see the resulting HTML If necessary go back and adjust the box s position in Page view to get the actual spacing you want 554 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Coding Your Own Frames You can create HTML frames in any part of the MasterBorder without coding HTML by using AutoFrames But if you want to put frames in the body of your page you can script them just as with any HTML editor Here s an example of accessing HTML to create a section of a site that uses two horizontal frames one body frame that scrolls and a footer frame that doesn t Navigation buttons in the footer open each of two pages in the body while a Home Page button links out of the frames section to the site s Home page 1 In Site view create a new page for the frameset the page where your frames begin Name the page Frames 2 Beneath this page create three content pages for the frames to display named Footer One and
212. The date on which the site was created You cannot edit this field e Last modified The last date on which the site was changed You cannot edit this field Revision log Enter comments into the Latest changes field to keep a record of site modifications The comments you type appear in the Past changes field when you next open the site 55 Setting Options for the Current Site Setting Backup Preferences From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site and click the Backup tab Current Site Options x General META tags History Backup Backup settings Backup location C Program Files NetObjects NetObj Browse File naming convention Web Site backup1 nod Maximum number of backups stored 4 24 Cancel Automatic backup This option is selected by default When you close NetObjects Fusion the program automatically backs up your nod file and saves it in the Backups subfolder under the User Sites sitename folder If you need to use one of these backup files copy it from the Backups folder into the User Sites sitename folder before you open it so the asset paths will be correct If you do not want NetObjects Fusion to automatically back up your sites clear the check box Backup location NetObjects Fusion saves backup files in the User Sites sitename Backups folder by default To change the location of the backup files type a new path name in the Backup lo
213. Two Attach HTML to this page to define it as a frameset b d Add content to the frames on these pages using NetObjects Fusion tools 3 Display the Frames page in Page view and add HTML that defines it as a frameset setting the size and position of each frame and the content it initially displays Select the Layout click the HTML button on the Layout Properties palette and type the following in the Between Head Tags area of the Page HTML dialog lt frameset rows 70 gt frame name main src html one html gt frame name footer src html footer html gt lt frameset gt Or if you re publishing the site using the Flat directory structure rather than the by Asset Type structure type the following for the second and third lines frame name main src one html gt frame name footer src footer html gt 555 Coding Your Own Frames This HTML creates two horizontal frames one called main that occupies the bulk of the page and a 70 pixel high frame called footer at the foot of the page Click OK in the dialog when you re done Note The src attribute is a relative path name to a content page that must match exactly the path name generated when you publish the page The path depends on the directory structure selected in Publish view from the Publish menu choose Arrange Files and then choose one of the submenu options The file name is the page s nam
214. Us amp Store D Climbing Shoes D Tents D Snow Jackets Custom navigation bar s 0 Home D Tours 302 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners 3 From the Link type drop down list select Internal Linkto link to another page in the site Select a page in the list on the left and click Add to move it into the list on the right or drag it from the left to the right External Link to link to a page in another site Type the path to the page you want to link to for example http www netobjects com and click Add to move it into the list or drag it from the left to the right e File Link to link to a file Type the path to the file you want to link to or click Browse to locate the file click Save and then click Add to move it into the list or drag it from the left to the right If your site has many pages and a lot of links click Find to search for a specific link in the list of current links Click Find Again to search for the next occurrence of the same link 4 To arrange the order of pages on the navigation bar simply drag the pages into position To remove a page select it and click Remove To clear the structure and start over click Remove All Setting Button Navigation Bar Properties Set Button Style New navigation bars use the currently applied SiteStyle but you can set individual navigation bars to use any available button sets associated with a SiteStyle or create a custom style
215. You can crop a picture to make only part of it visible 1 In Page view select the picture you want to crop The Picture Properties palette appears Click the Geometry tab In the Crop area click on the crop tool icon The crop marquee will appear on the selected image Picture Properties 2 X Width Height Unit Maintain aspectratio V Tile Rotate 0 no Rotation Horizontal Vertical Apply 200 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 4 Drag any selection handle to adjust the size of the marquee enclosing the part of the image you want to keep NetObjects Fusion crops the portion of the picture outside of the marquee 5 Click Apply in the Properties Palette to crop the image Picture Properties 2 x Width Height Unit us zm a v Maintain aspectratio V Tile Rotate 0 no Rotation p Horizontal Vertical Crop amp _ lt _o qo Adjusting a Picture s Color You can use the Picture properties to adjust a picture s overall color 1 In Page view select the picture for which you want to adjust the color The Picture Properties palette appears m Picture Properties 2 x ale 81012 Brightness am Contrast Hue Saturation Spectrum 2 Click the Adjustment tab You will have the ability to ed
216. a Green amp Yellow 2 In Step 1 choose a site Type and corresponding Style Click Preview Style to view the style in a browser or click Next 3 In Step 2 select pages and page layouts for your site You can add pages remove pages or keep the pre selected pages for your site type 4 In Step 3 enter personal and business information To save this information in your profile for later use click Save to profile 5 Click Finish and type a name for your site in the Save Site As dialog 6 Click Save to build your site Note Once you have completed the site wizard you can edit your site at any time Opening an Existing Site 1 From the File menu choose Open Site 31 Creating and Opening Sites The Open dialog appears Look in User Sites MySit My Recent Documents eskto 2 My Documents My Computer My Network File name fo Files of type NetObjects Fusion Files nod m Cancel j 2 Open the folder that contains the site you want to open 3 Select the site s nod file and click Open You can also open an existing site by Choosing it from the list of recently used files on the File menu e Choosing it from the list of sites in Online view e Double clicking the nod file in Windows Explorer Dragging the nod file from Windows Explorer to the NetObjects Fusion window 32 Chapte
217. a cell 2 Move the pointer over the cell and hold down the left mouse button 3 When you see the cross shaped pointer drag it over the cells you want to select Selected cells are highlighted with a border Setting Cell Properties 1 In Page view click a cell in a table to select it The Cell Properties palette appears 2 If necessary click the Cell tab Cell Properties BRED A 8 810 Alignment Vertical Auto Horizontal Auto B gj EJ Bl 8 55 Custom style none Format Advanced Cellis atorm Cellis aheader Cell HTML 3 Setthe Vertical and Horizontal Alignment for the cell If the cell alignment is set to Auto the alignment of the row or column containing the cell is shown in parentheses If you select a different setting for the individual cell it overrides the row or column setting and is shown in parentheses e Vertical determines alignment to the top middle or bottom of the cell 248 Chapter 15 Adding Tables e Horizontal determines alignment to the left center or right of the cell If the cell contains text you can justify it within the cell To add cells in a table insert new rows or columns See Inserting a Row or Column on page 244 To apply text styles and formatting to cells click the Format tab change the cell background color in the Color field select e Automatic to set the cell background to the color
218. a message and NetObjects Fusion does not open the file Templates created in earlier versions of NetObjects Fusion are nft files If you have templates created in an earlier version of NetObjects Fusion open them in NetObjects Fusion 8 and export them as templates to create a template zip file This chapter describes Creating new sites from templates Using templates to expand sites Changing an existing template Exporting sites Sharing NetObjects Fusion site files 59 Creating a Site from a Template Creating a Site from a Template You can use templates that you or your colleagues create and templates created in previous versions of NetObjects Fusion See Upgrading Your Sites in NetObjects Fusion Getting Started 1 To create a new site based on a template launch NetObjects Fusion and from the File menu of any view choose New Site gt From Template The Select a Template File dialog appears Select a Template File Look in Templates Cj AutoSites Forms My Recent Pages Documents Ls Desktop My Network File name Open Places Files of type NetObjects Fusion Template Files zip nft Cancel Note The Blank Site and Import templates are in the AutoSites folder Do not delete or move these templates If these templates are not available in this folder you cannot create a new site or import a site 2 Navigate to the folder containing the templa
219. aScript or Visual Basic routines with forms See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly This chapter includes Creating forms Adding text fields check boxes radio buttons and combo boxes Adding Submit Reset and custom buttons Submitting data via email or to a text file Processing data with a CGI script Adding hidden fields for client side parameters 429 Creating a Form Form Area tool Creating a Form With NetObjects Fusion you can devote an entire Layout area to a complex form containing many items or create one or more smaller forms each in a Layout Region table or text box One form might log product registrations for example while another emails customer comments to a product manager You can also add a form to the MasterBorder so it appears on several pages 1 In Page view select the Form Area tool from the Standard toolbar and draw a rectangle in the Layout area or MasterBorder The Create Form dialog appears Select a type of form Create Form Provides flexibility in arranging form objects Good for forms that include a lot of text C Create text based form Text or have a simple layout C Create form in ata ss te Useful for forms with a rigid tabular layout Define Layout as a form limits page to one form Cancel Create position based form Layout Region creates a form in a Layout Region that you can resize and drag anywhere on the page When you add
220. ab to indicate where in the HTML you want to add tags or script Unlike the HTML Source view this dialog only lets you enter your HTML or script code into one of six locations Between Head Tags Adds code to the lt HEAD gt content inserting it just before the lt HEAD gt tag Inside Body Tag Adds code inside the lt BODY gt tag as in lt BODY attribute value gt where attribute value is your code e Beginning of Body Adds code just below the lt BODY gt tag e Start of Page Adds code just above the the lt HTML gt tag End of Body Adds code just above the lt BODY gt tag End of Page Adds code after the lt HTML gt tag 542 To add HTML or script between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt inside the lt BODY gt tag itself or to the page s content Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 3 Enter your code on the tab Your typing also appears in blue in the dialog s gray area where you can preview its location in the HTML that gets generated Note To enter a tab character as part of the HTML press Shift Ctrl Tab Page HTML Generated HTML Insert Field lt poctyPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN gt lt TITLE gt Title of Page will be generated by NetObjects Fusion lt TITLE gt lt NetObjects Fusion Generated HEAD HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY NetObjects Fusion Generated BODY Parameters gt lt NetObjects Fusion Generated BODY
221. abase as it compacts the files It is recommended that you do not change this setting Warning Do not shut down Windows while the file is being compacted This could cause your nod file to become unstable External file editors You can select default applications for editing html gif and jpg files from within NetObjects Fusion You launch the default HTML editor by right clicking the external HTML s icon in Page view and selecting Open File In External Editor from the shortcut menu You launch the default image editor by right clicking the image in Page view or Style view or the image name in Assets view and selecting Open File In External Editor from the shortcut menu To choose an external file editor click Browse and find the file that launches the application Auto generated image output In most cases when you add an image to a SiteStyle crop an image tile an image rotate an image create a transparent GIF or add text to a shape or picture NetObjects Fusion generates a new file referred to as an auto generated image You can minimize the time it takes for the images to download by setting the Auto generated image output You can create output settings in Site view or in the Picture Properties palette See Optimizing Images on page 191 Measurement units Choose the measurement unit you want to use as you build your site Choose pixels for the most consistent results independent of monitor resolution 21 Set
222. ackground Home Mission Events Next Tour Contest Browser redraws only the content of the Layout area when a site visitor uses a link to a child page sharing the same MasterBorder and frame 140 Chapter 11 Working with AutoFrames Each frame displays its own content which can include links a form regions or any text graphic or media objects Links within a frame can display a page or display information in the same frame or a different frame You can define targets for the links contained in one frame so they retrieve content into another frame A special type of HTML page called a frameset establishes the combination of frames and frame properties that make up the browser window display The frameset specifies the number of frames defines their size and placement and specifies the pages or resources that make up their original or default content NetObjects Fusion supports two ways of creating frames e You can use the Properties palette in Page view to set AutoFrames and add navigation controls banners text graphics links and scroll bars An AutoFrame frameset contains a body frame for the Layout area of the page and frames for one or more of the MasterBorder margins Left Right Top Bottom An AutoFrame frameset cannot have more than these five frames and they must be in the specified positions e Ifyou require more than five frames or frames in different positions you manua
223. add navigation buttons when creating your data list as described in Creating a Data List on page 482 or you can create custom navigation aids by drawing or importing buttons as described here To add navigation buttons for stacked pages 1 In Page view on one of the stacked pages add an object to serve as a button You can place text draw a button using the Draw tool or import an image using the Picture tool Visit Online view to learn where you can locate a variety of images Select the object Click Link on the object s Properties palette 488 Add Delete Chapter 27 Data Publishing 4 Inthe Link dialog select the Smart Link type 5 Select Next Stacked Page or Previous Stacked Page and then click Link Adding a Stacked Page for Internal Data To add a new record to internal data you create a new stacked page Each new stacked page has the same layout of data fields and non data objects as all the other pages in the stack You can create as many new stacked pages as you want For each new stacked page NetObjects Fusion adds a row to the data list on the data list page You can delete stacked pages for internal data whenever you want Note You cannot add or delete stacked pages associated with an external data object To add or delete records when data is stored externally you must update your external database or spreadsheet application and re publish your site To add internal data stack
224. ag generated and placed between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags of the page is lt META NAME author CONTENT Jesse Jones gt User defined Use the Category name and Content fields to enter standard META NAME information that is recognized by search engines or to enter information for your own use 54 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites The Category name field is the equivalent of the META tag NAME attribute For example if you type copyright in the Category name field and 2001 Mountain Jacques Inc in the Content field the META tag generated and placed between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags of the page is lt META NAME copyright CONTENT 2001 Mountain Jacques Inc gt You can also define your own category and content For example you could enter content providers as the Category name and a list of the colleagues that worked on the site in the Content field This information has no meaning for the search engines but lets you track the content providers for the site Viewing Modification History From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site and click the History tab Current Site Options General tags History Backup Creation date 2 29 2004 8 12 49 PM Last modified 2 29 2004 8 56 04 PM Revision log Latest changes Past changes Latest changes will appear at top of log the next time your site is opened Cancel Creation date
225. age s Publishes the pages you select in the SiteStructure Click the arrow gt gt to display the SiteStructure and select the pages you want to publish The page name s appears in the page field Note If you add a page to the site or change the site s directory structure after publishing make sure you re publish the entire site and not just a site section so all the links are updated Select Publish changed assets only to publish the asset files that have changed since the last time you published the site Note NetObjects Fusion does not query your hard disk to see if it has all the unchanged assets needed by the site If you publish changed assets only be sure you publish to the same location on the hard disk that you did previously so unchanged assets are still available Click Publish NetObjects Fusion creates the local directories converts the site to HTML and stores the site s HTML files on the local hard disk Note Changes you make to the site while it is being stored are not included in the HTML files until you re publish the page or section containing the changes When publishing is complete and your site is in place your browser opens so you can examine the results You can return to NetObjects Fusion make changes to the site and re publish the site or its changed portions as needed When the site works perfectly you re ready to publish it to your ISP s server Web server or other server
226. ailable on stacked pages in 5 pag Data List tool New External Data Source tool Creating a Data Object for Internal Data Internal data is records and fields stored within your site You enter internal data directly into a stacked page by typing text or numbers and by placing pictures You can create a data object in Page view or in Assets view If you create a data object in Page view you can immediately create stacked pages and start entering data If you create a data object in Assets view you must return to Page view to create a data list and stacked pages To create a new internal data object 1 Display the Data Object dialog In Page view select the Data List tool from the Advanced toolbar and draw a rectangle on the page In the Data Publishing dialog click the New button e Ifyou in Assets view click the Data Objects tab and then click the New Asset button on the control bar Data Object Extemal Name Comments Fields Name 478 Chapter 27 Data Publishing Select Internal and enter a name for the data object and comments about it NetObjects Fusion uses the data object name in the list of data objects in the Data Publishing dialog and in Assets view Click the plus button to add a field Fields define the kind of data you can enter The Data Field dialog appears Data Field Name Formatted text C Simple text C Image file Cancel
227. ains 9 To set left center right or block alignment for the paragraph containing the selected text click an alignment button 10 To indent the paragraph click an indent button or press Tab Using this indenting button nests the selected paragraph under unselected paragraphs To nest the paragraph to a deeper level continue to click the button or press Tab Default indenting is set as part of the text s format style 157 Formatting Text You can also assign list formats and text styles to selected text See Creating Bulleted and Numbered Lists on page 175 and Working with Text Styles on page 167 Formatting Paragraphs Using the options in the Paragraph Settings dialog you can set formats for the text in a paragraph the paragraph alignment spacing margins indents paragraph border and paragraph background When you format paragraphs type all the text first and then go back and apply the formatting If you set formats as you enter the text new paragraphs inherit the style of the paragraph before it Note Some options in the Paragraph Settings dialog have no effect if text formatting is set to HTML These options are marked CSS only in the following sections If you apply these options you see them in Page view but they disappear when you preview or publish the site Be sure to test your site in all target browsers to ensure pages display as you intended Formatting Text in a Paragraph 1 Posit
228. al link by replacing the file or link once in Assets view If you insert a variable in text boxes on different pages you can edit the value of the variable in Assets view and NetObjects Fusion updates all instances of the variable throughout your site automatically This chapter describes Managing files Managing links and link targets Managing data objects Managing variables 559 Working in Assets View Working in Assets View When you switch to Assets view choose which kind of asset to view by clicking one of the four tabs below the control bar You can sort a list by clicking a column heading and you can change the width of any column by dragging the column divider to the left or right Assets view File Edit Go Assets Tools Help amp 2R Online Site Page Style Assets Publish New Asset a File Links Data Objects Variables Name InUse Locatior i ify Status BuiltWithHOF C Progrpm Files NetObjects NetObjects Fusion 8Wser Sitesisss 2KB 4 8 03 8 59 48 AM C Progfam FilesWetObjectsWWetObjects Fusion 8 User Sitesisss 1KB 4H 7 04 10 18 04 NavRight C Program FilesWetObjectsWetObjects Fusion 8 User Sitesisss 1KB 4H 7 04 10 18 04 NavUp C Proram FilesWetObjectsWetObjects Fusion 8Wser Sitesisss J 1KB 47 04 10 18 04 spacer C Prfaram9620FilesWetObjectsWetObjects 620Fusion 6208 F Slim spacer C APfogram FilesWetObjectsWWetO
229. al Rules HTML rules are always horizontal They can display with or without beveled edges in a browser When you embed an HTML rule in a text box you can set its length as a percentage of the text box width To draw an HTML horizontal rule 1 In Page view select the Line tool on the Standard toolbar and choose the HR Rule tool from the flyout 2 Draw the horizontal rule on the page 263 Adding a SiteStyle Line The HR Rule Properties palette appears HR Rule Properties MRED 10 Thickness 2 Shaded Length 0 80 This option appears only when the rule is embedded in a text box 3 In the Thickness box set the thickness of the rule The standard width is 2 pixels 4 Select Shaded to create a bevel effect The standard HR rule is shaded 5 Ifthe HR rule is embedded in a text box you can specify its length as a percentage of the text box Adding a SiteStyle Line You can use SiteStyle lines to divide a page into sections A SiteStyle line is part of the current SiteStyle See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles 1 In Page view select the Line tool on the Standard toolbar and choose the SiteStyle Line tool from the flyout Sitestyle Line tool 2 Click where you want to position the left end of the line 264 Line Draw tool Chapter 16 Drawing Shapes and Lines The SiteStyle Line Properties palette appears Picture StlestPhoenislmagestline gil
230. al components also installed on the server including NetObjects Fusion Form Handler CGI scripts or third party components t requires extra steps to set up to publish on a server This chapter describes The publishing process Exploring Publish view e Publishing locally Transferring the site to the Web 575 The Publishing Process The Publishing Process The NetObjects Fusion publishing process involves two basic steps generating HTML files and then transferring the generated HTML files to the Web server e When you select Publish Site NetObjects Fusion converts your site into HTML pages and associated assets using the SiteStructure page design content links and assets information in the Sitename nod file These generated HTML files are used by browsers to display your Web site You specify where the generated HTML files are saved A typical scenario is to publish the HTML files locally onto your computer s hard disk where you can then open run and test the site in your browser without connecting to the Internet When the site is exactly right you re ready to publish it to a Web server Selecting Transfer Files to Server from the Publish menu copies the locally published HTML files to the server you use for Web access To speed the transfer process NetObjects Fusion uses its own built in FTP program Caution You must use NetObjects Fusion to transfer your site s HTML and asset files from one location
231. all the Microsofi ODBC drivers from www microsoft com 494 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database 4 Type the name of your data source in the Data Source Name field Then under Database click Select If you re registering this database on two computers be sure to give it the exact same name on each machine ODBC Microsoft Access Setup 21 x Data Source Name myDatasource Description Cancel Database Lotes Database Help Select Create Compact anced r System Database None C Database Sistem DER Vm Options gt gt 5 Navigate to the folder your database is stored in and select the file Select Database x Database Name Directories myDatabase mdb ay Cancel zoom cfsnippets mdb myDatabase mdb 3 i2sdk1 4 2 02 MssQL I Le Multimedia Files I Read C NetObjects 8 P xh NetObjects Fusion List Files of Type Drives Access Databases rm z c Network 6 Click OK to close the Select Database ODBC Setup and Data Source Administrator dialogs You re now ready to build a database application Using the Database Component To add the Database Component toolbar 1 In Page view from the View menu choose Toolbars Component Tools 2 Select the database language you will be working with 3 The Database toolbar will appear F cum ge 3 Eg 44
232. ally Select an update frequency of Daily Weekly or Monthly Choose when you want to check for updates Select e Launches to search for updates each time you start NetObjects Fusion e Connects to the Internet to search for updates when you connect to the Internet while using NetObjects Fusion This is the default setting 26 CHAPTER 3 Creating and Managing Sites Site view is where you create view and maintain the architecture of your site Site view frees you from the details of file and link management so you can focus on organizing and updating your site For example you can drag a page or section to any location in Site view and NetObjects Fusion updates the links to other pages automatically This chapter describes Site view and its automated site building capabilities including Starting NetObjects Fusion Starting with a blank site Opening an existing site e Working with the SiteStructure Selecting pages Setting page properties Adding copying deleting and moving pages e Renaming pages Assigning custom names e Working with the site outline Printing the SiteStructure Saving and backing up your site Changing site settings 27 Starting NetObjects Fusion Starting NetObjects Fusion When you install NetObjects Fusion it is added to your Windows Start menu 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt NetObjects gt NetObjects Fusion 8 2 Follow the on screen instruct
233. an existing connector section as shown at the right If no other connectors were created you see the dialog above 497 Setting up the Database Connection 4 Current connectors are listed in the Insert an existing connector section at the bottom of the dialog If no other connectors were created you do not see this list Type a name for the new connector and click OK NetObjects Fusion uses the name you enter as the name of a profile which saves connector information Each page you add this connector to a page the settings will appear without having to retype the information and can be edited Click on the Connection tab to enter the database connection settings Connecting to a PHP Database To connect to a PHP database using a data source 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF Database Component toolbar Click on the Connection tab Choose DSN from the Type drop down list Connection Database Rect Type DSN y Engine fisaccess DSN si Browse User Password NEN H Cancel Select a database engine from the drop down list or type in a custom engine in the Engine field See Adding Database Engines on page 496 Type in the data source name or click Browse to create a new one See Creating a Data Source on page 493 Type in the User and Password required if any to connect to your database Click Test to test the connection 4
234. an image editing application to change the button s color Give the new image file any name you like Then in Style view edit the Highlighted Primary Button and choose the edited image The image file you select is copied to the Images folder in the NetObjects Fusion 8 Styles Mountain folder If the new image file has the same name 295 Styles Folder Structure as the original file the original is overwritten Every site you create or open on your machine that uses the Mountain style uses this file for highlighted primary buttons This applies to all style elements that you can base on images This also occurs when you replace the image for a single instance of a button or banner See Change a Button s Image on page 308 and Changing a Banner s Image on page 313 296 CHAPTER 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners NetObjects Fusion includes tools you can use to create banners and navigation bars that help site visitors understand and navigate the structure of your site A new blank site includes a button navigation bar on the left a text navigation bar at the bottom and a banner in the top MasterBorder You can create your own banners and navigation bars and place them in any MasterBorder or Layout area You save time using banners and navigation bars because NetObjects Fusion automatically places page names on the banner and links navigation bars to pages in your site Placing navigation bars in a MasterBorder a
235. an audio file has no visual object NetObjects Fusion represents the audio file with a graphic usually an icon or an inline player control bar that the browser recognizes When a site visitor clicks the icon or the play button on the inline player control bar the browser plays the sound file or opens a helper application to play it To insert a sound file 1 In Page view select the Sound tool from the Plug ins flyout on the Advanced toolbar Click on the page to indicate the location of the sound file The Open dialog appears Select a sound file from your hard disk or LAN or select a sound file already used in the site from the Audio Assets tab For information about using assets see Chapter 30 Managing Assets Click Open 375 Inserting a Real Player File The default sound icon appears on the page and the Sound Properties palette appears The name of the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab You can use the Browse button to select a different sound file Sound Properties File BeepHit wav Browse AltTag Display Inline ZU C Picture det Browse HTML 5 To provide text that the browser displays if it cannot play the sound type a description in the AltTag field 6 In the Display section select e Inline to use the audio player for your browser If site visitors have Headspace Beatnik installed on their sy
236. an item in Publish view indicates the item was customized For example a directory with a new name or a file moved from one directory to a new directory displays a C in the Attributes column Note Customizing your directory structure does not change the appearance design or content that your site visitor sees it only controls how the pages and assets are stored on the server and the URL to access the site s interior information NetObjects Fusion saves the customized directory structure in the Sitename nod file so you don t have to reconfigure the structure each time you generate the site s HTML files or transfer them to a server Warning When you make changes to folders pages and assets in the Remote pane you are changing the folders pages and assets located on the server you publish to Be careful not to delete any important files as it will affect your published site Creating a Custom Folder 1 In either pane of Publish view select the folder page or asset where you want to add a custom folder right click and select New Folder from the shortcut menu NetObjects Fusion adds a custom subfolder named New Folder below the selected folder or file 2 Enter a new name for the folder and press Enter or select another object to record the folder name 3 Drag other folders or files into the custom folder as needed 602 Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing Renaming Folders and Files 1 In either pane of Pu
237. and Displaying Data 512 Using a Recordset Iterator 512 Displaying Data 1 1 514 Navigating Through 523 Adding Conditional Statements 524 19 Modifying a Database cce eo shure ews 528 29 Working with HTML Directly Editing the Page s HTML 536 Working in HTML Source View 536 Using the Page HTML 542 Accessing an AutoFrame s HTML 543 Working in the Page HTML 545 Working in the HTML Source Editor 545 Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML 546 Indexing Pages for Search 546 Auto Forwarding from a Transition Page 547 Accommodating Browsers that Don t Support Frames 548 Creating a Default Target Frame 549 Accessing an Object S HTML 550 Examples of Object HTML 552 Displaying a Message on Mouse Click 552 Inserting HTML ina Text Box 553 Coding Your Own Objects 554 Coding Your Own Frames 555 30 Managing Assets Working in Assets 560 Managing File 561 File Asset 15
238. and Displaying Data 5 The hidden field will be published but not displayed on the published page T Bill Jones bjones mjsports com Click to send message Ted Davis tdavis mjsports com Click to send messaag Carl Williams Cwillams1230mjsports com Click to send message Using Form Objects You can use form objects to display data in forms Note Form objects must be placed in a form layout region For information on creating forms and form object definitions See Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms To add a form textbox Textbox Object 1 In Page view select the Text Box object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Text Box object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click in the form region to indicate the Text Box s location 520 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database The Text Box Properties palette appears Layout Region Form 1 m Text Bos a 3 EAT ast Name I bd LastName 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list 5 Enter a value in the MaxChars field This is the maximum number of characters that will be displayed 6 Type in a name for the text box object To add a form text area 1 In Page view select the Text Area object
239. and Editing Fields The Insert Field dialog appears Insert Field Field Site Created Site Modified Site Generated Date amp Time Format Value Sunday February 29 2004 Cancel 3 Select the type of field you want to insert from the Type drop down list If you select Date amp Time click Date amp Time Format select a format from the list in the Date amp Time Format dialog and click OK Note Once you publish the site the date on the final HTML page does not change automatically It only changes if you modify the site in NetObjects Fusion and publish again This is true of all variables If you select Site amp General and choose Author you must type the author s name on the META tags tab of the Current Site Options dialog See Entering META Tags on page 53 4 Select the specific field to insert from the Field list 5 Click OK in the Insert Field dialog Creating a User Defined Variable A user defined variable is text or a phrase that is subject to change For example if you need to refer to quarterly sales figures you can create a user defined variable and insert the number as a field As the figure changes each quarter you can edit the field as described in Editing a Variable on page 573 and NetObjects Fusion automatically updates the name wherever it appears in your site You can only create plain text variables You cannot reference internal NetObjects Fusio
240. and Layout Regions e Transparent to eliminate the background color of a Layout This option is not available for a Layout Region e Color to select a background color from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker 4 In the Image field select Automatic to set the background to the image specified by the Layout s current SiteStyle or the Layout Region s parent object None to eliminate the background image of a Layout This option is not available for a Layout Region Browse to select an image from the Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the Layout or Layout Region the browser tiles the image To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field 5 Toassign a sound to a Layout that plays when a site visitor views the page a Select Sound In the Background Sound dialog click Browse and select a sound file from your hard disk or LAN You can use sound files in au aiff midi ram or wav formats b To repeat the sound while the page is open select Continuous Loop c Click OK The selected sound plays when you preview the page Note Site visitors must have a sound board speakers or headphones and a browser that supports background sounds installed on their computers to hear background sound To preview and test
241. and display the table of contents Click to return to amp NetObjects Fusion 7 5 Help AEE Click to move Eie Edt Bookmark Options d the last topic you T e Be 7 orward and viewed Contents amp y Indes amp Seach backward 8 Geting Started SiteStyles are sets of thematic elements you can apply to your site Some style through a QQ Creating and Managing Sites elements are graphic and others affect the appearance of text on your pages In Click a book to Creating and Managing Sites Style view you use SiteStyles to create the look and feel of your entire site sequence of iios Working with Templates NetObjects Fusion comes with a number of professionally designed SiteStyles lated topi see the topics it Importing Sites and Documer that you can use to design your site retated topics LS H You can use SiteStyles as they are or edit them You can also create SiteStyles contains click a using your own artwork topic to see Exploring Style View Bue iren for information about 7 Applying SiteStyles Applying SiteStyles specific Editing the Graphic Elem Editing the graphic and text elements Click the in formation Removing the Read On Creating SiteStyles p Editing Banners and Buty underlined text Editing a Navigation Bar Adding and removing SiteStyles Editing a Data List Icon Styles folder structure in an overview Editing a Style Backarour Edit
242. and your site is in place open it in your browser and examine the results That s it Your site is on the Web and available for the world to see See Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing for more publishing options 599 Transferring Your Site to the Web 600 CHAPTER 32 Advanced Publishing NetObjects Fusion provides a range of advanced features to deal with a variety of Web publishing requirements For example some Web servers require special directory structures to host a Web site In addition some complex sites may need additional publishing settings to make the site function properly This chapter describes Customizing your site s directory structure Creating aliased folders and setting the cgi bin directory Setting the server port and permissions e Publishing special assets 601 Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure Although NetObjects Fusion offers three preconfigured directory structures you might need to customize your site s directory structure further Customizing the site s directory structure is usually only necessary if your ISP or host server requires a specific structure for Web sites You can customize the site s directory structure in Publish view by renaming rearranging or deleting site folders creating custom folders or changing the publishing properties for folders pages and assets A Cin the Attributes column of
243. ansfer Files to Server Clear All Customizations Publish Components 2 Choose by Site Structure by Asset Type or by Flat See page 589 for descriptions of the choices 590 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site If you want to customize the structure select the option that produces the structure similar to the one you ll create See Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure on page 602 If you choose Site Structure a dialog appears so you can set the number of levels of subdirectories for your site If Site Structure is already selected choose it again to see this dialog and set the levels Directory Levels x Number of levels 5 Click the up and down arrows in the dialog to set the number of levels Click OK 3 Ifyou customized the directory structure but want to reset it to one of the menu options choose Clear All Customizations The directory structure is reset to the option currently selected on the Arrange Files menu NetObjects Fusion removes custom folders and changes all customized asset names back to the original names 4 Click Yes to accept the new structure The directory structure is revised and displayed in Publish view Define Server Profiles Each Web server has a name and a set of properties that define the connection settings NetObjects Fusion uses to publish your site to that location and server You can select a server or set its properties any time before you publish The
244. ant Set Action Mame Action When Clicked gt Standard Action Target Picturel E Message ES Object is for this target Parameter s gt Transition Action categories Some of the choices available ti Ho SS Drag 4 Move To Get Property gt Move By Set Property gt _ custom gt Your choices for actions depend on the object you re targeting These include e Object Includes options for hiding showing or otherwise arranging the target in relation to other objects adding a delay between the trigger event and a subsequent action loading different images to use for a picture say to show a highlighted button when a site visitor mouses over it For examples see Creating a Button Rollover on page 418 and Sequencing Actions for a Slide Show on page 423 Transition Motion Redraws the object in any of several ways or causes it to move in some way across on or off the page e Drag Makes an object stick to the pointer so site visitors can drag it around the page One action might make the object stick on mouse down while another lets the object go on mouse up For an example see Colliding One Object with Another on page 420 Get Property Set Property These actions are typically used as components of scripted actions or parameter values in particular when working with values entered in forms For an example see Customizing Default Actions on
245. ark a field True and visitors don t fill it in they see the Error URL when they submit the form The required field option is not displayed if your fields are not named as sequential numbers If any object in your form isn t listed in the Form Handler Properties palette you might have named it incorrectly See Naming Form Objects on page 433 Note You must configure all properties listed in the Form Handler or the script will not run If your form fields are not named correctly the script will also fail 442 Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Submitting Data in an Email You can also use the NetObjects Form Handler component to copy site visitors responses into an email to any address you specify Note This feature is not supported under all configurations of Internet Explorer To find out what s required see components information at the Workbench link from www netobjects com support 1 In Page view select the Form Handler tool from the Component toolbar and draw a rectangle on the form for the Submit button ee Be Se 2 On the Form Handler Properties palette click the Publish to option and select Email 3 Enter the email address and relabel the button if you want Form Handler Properties 2 x Form Handler Email AXI Button Name Submit Email e Button Name To change the button s label click in the Button Name row and type a name in
246. ars in the visitor s browser or downloads to the visitor s system When you insert a file using the Plug In tool site visitors need the appropriate plugin for their browser and platform to use the file To insert a file using the Plug In tool 1 In Page view select the Plug In tool from the Plug ins flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate where you want to position the file The Open dialog appears 3 Select a file from your hard disk or LAN or select a file that was already used in the site from the Plug in Assets tab To display the various file types that NetObjects Fusion supports use the Files of type drop down list To insert a file that is not explicitly supported by NetObjects Fusion choose AII Files in the Files of type drop down list then select the file 4 Click Open 378 Chapter 21 Placing Media The plug in placeholder image appears on your page and the Plug In Properties palette appears The name of the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab Plug In Properties BBE jlo Eile welcome par Browse AltTag Display Play inline Launch from picture Pivain gif To provide text for the browser to display if it cannot display the file enter a description in the AltTag field Inthe Display section select e Play inline to display the file on the page in your site e Launch from picture to use a pictur
247. arted with NetObjects Fusion 2 QuickStart ps ices cle lt b hose ORA 2 Step by Step scared erie talent ne i ERR 3 In Depth 3 Conventions Used in This 3 Getting Help om ES ue dA 5 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics NetObjects Fusion 8 NetObjects Fusion 9 About the Properties 10 About Toolbars e 11 Navigating in NetObjects Fusion 12 Using the Control Bar 12 Using the Go Menu 12 Using Shortcut Menus 13 Choosing Colors 14 Working with Color Palettes 15 Choosing a Color Palette 15 Loading a Custom Color Palette 15 Creating or Editing a Color Palette 15 NetObjects Fusion Folder Structure 16 2 Setting Application Options Setting Program 20 Setting Preview Options 22 Setting Text Options 23 Setting International Options 25 Updating NetObjects Fusion 26 3 Creating and Managing Sites Starting NetObjects 1
248. assets or including MasterBorders NetObjects Fusion also adds its own code to the published HTML Of course it never modifies your original files 398 Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML If you don t want HTML added to the original code when the site is published you can choose these options in the Reference External HTML and Reference External HTML Page dialogs Reference External HTML 2 x Home page EANet biects 8 Tutorial H TMLAWond Browse Esos When you reference HTML ptions from Site view choose the Assign MasterBorder 9010105 ZeroMargins MasterBorder Reference External HTML Page Page Browse Een When you reference HTML ptions from Page view choose Replace current lt HEAD gt Import lt HEAD gt Append to Current lt HEAD gt In either case select this option Cancel e When you reference from Site view choose the ZeroMargins MasterBorder NetObjects Fusion doesn t add MasterBorder information to the published HTML or impose a table structure When you reference from Page view choose Replace Current lt HEAD gt from the Import lt HEAD gt drop down list NetObjects Fusion publishes the original lt HEAD gt as is without adding HTML of its own Don t do this if you re using actions or navigation bars with rollover buttons on the page or publishing using the Fixed Page Layout output option neither case select Do not manage or move asse
249. ate these links using the lists in Assets view You can use the Link button on the Properties palette or click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar to open the Link dialog where you specify the destination of a link Types of Links There are four types of links each with its own options in the Link dialog e Internal link which links to a page or anchor within the site Smart link which links to a relative position in the site such as previous page or next page Smart links are sometimes called structural links The Blank link which you can use to trigger an action without going to a new page is also a smart link e External link which links to a page in another site via a URL using a protocol such as ftp mailto http or JavaScript File link which links to a file that visitors can download from the site Link Indicators You can link a selected object or text or a text insertion point e Ifyou Link an object the Link icon indicates the object is linked Ifyou select text and link it the selected text is underlined and appears in the default font and color for links e Ifyou place an insertion point in text without selecting text the link name is inserted in the text 316 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Creating an Internal Link Internal links link to pages or anchors within a site If you move a linked page in the SiteStructure or change the page s name NetObjects Fusion automatically updat
250. ates that you use to create a new site or to import a site See Chapter 4 Working with Templates Warning Do not delete or move the AutoSites folder This folder contains files necessary for NetObjects Fusion to run correctly Tutorial contains the assets you need for the lessons in NetObjects Fusion Getting Started User Sites contains all the sites you create For each site NetObjects Fusion automatically creates a subfolder within User Sites to keep your projects organized Each NetObjects Fusion site is saved with a nod extension The site folder also includes an Assets folder where the assets originally included in the site template are saved a Styles folder where all active SiteStyles associated with the nod are located a Preview folder where HTML sufficient for previewing but not for publishing is stored and a Backups folder where backup nod files are saved After you publish the site a Local Publish folder is added You can also save sites in other locations Utilities contains the NetObjects Fusion Launch Utility which allows you to run NetObjects Fusion 8 and previous versions on the same computer When you run Launch Utility it will present a list of all NetObjects Fusion installations on 17 NetObjects Fusion Folder Structure your computer Select for example NetObjects Fusion 7 and click the Launch button This will update the appropriate Windows system files for that version and launch it Yo
251. ating stacked pages 473 Static and Dynamic Data Publishing Static and Dynamic Data Publishing NetObjects Fusion supports two kinds of data publishing static and dynamic Static data publishing takes any kind of data text pictures multimedia files and so on from a database or spreadsheet NetObjects Fusion publishes the data on your site where it remains unchanged static until the source data is changed and the site is re published Static data publishing which is the focus of this chapter uses data objects that derive data from internal or external sources Dynamic data publishing makes it possible to refresh the data each time a visitor goes to the site When the browser requests the data it is assembled on the spot it does not depend on re publishing the site Dynamic data publishing requires third party components Third party publishers regularly release new components for NetObjects Fusion For the latest information visit Online view Storing Data with NetObjects Fusion Using the data publishing capabilities of NetObjects Fusion you can store text and pictures in a database internal to your site or import data from external sources such as Microsoft Excel or Access using an ODBC data source connection In both cases NetObjects Fusion publishes your data in standard HTML pages This makes it easy to add listings such as product and service catalogs employee directories and event schedules to your site
252. ave Catalog Profile Profiles allow you to save all the attributes associated with your Catalog for use in a future catalog Name NewProfile Catalog Profiles MyStore Remove OK Cancel 3 Type a name for the new profile If you choose the name of an existing profile it will replace the existing profile 4 Click OK Note Not all settings are saved in your profile Product records options and images are not included in a saved profile Removing a Catalog 1 In Page view display the list page of the catalog you want to remove 2 Select the catalog object and delete it 3 Goto Site view 4 Delete the detail page associated with the catalog When you add a new catalog the name of the catalog you just removed still appears in the Insert an existing catalog list in the Add catalog dialog To delete a catalog completely from your site 1 Go to Assets view Select the Data Objects tab Select the catalog you want to delete Ps pes Press Delete 363 Removing a Catalog You can delete a catalog only if you have first removed it from your site as described above 364 CHAPTER 21 Placing Media Media such as sound and video give a site impact The tools in NetObjects Fusion make it easy to add a variety of media files to your pages To find sample media files visit Online view This chapter tells how to add Flash files Shockwave files QuickTime movies
253. ayer tool from the Digital Video flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate where you want to position the video The Open dialog appears 3 Select a video file from your hard disk or LAN or select a video file already used in the site from the Video Assets tab For information about using assets see Chapter 30 Managing Assets 4 Click Open 373 Inserting a Sound File The Windows Media placeholder appears on the page and the Windows Media Player Properties palette appears The selected file name appears in the File field on the General tab Windows Media Player Properties E o File mu peanuts vme Browse AltTag Display Inline e d Picture Browse HTML 5 To provide text that the browser displays if it cannot display the video enter the text in the AltTag field 6 In the Display section select e Inline to display a control that site visitors can use to play the video e Icon to select one of the three images to represent the video The video plays in a viewer or on a new blank page Picture to use another image file to represent the video Click Browse and choose an image file The video plays in a viewer or on a new blank page 7 Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building
254. banner at the top of each product detail page You can rename the page in Site view just as you rename any other page or you can display the product title in the banner or edit the text on the Banner Properties palette See Changing the Banner Text on page 312 You cannot use the name of an existing catalog Choose a Store If you intend to offer online credit card processing you must have a store Click the Add Store option from the drop down list to select a store engine Configuring the Store on page 357 Note NetObjects Fusion allows you to add a catalog without a store You can save your settings and add a store engine at any time Choose a Profile NetObjects Fusion allows you to reuse settings each time you add a new catalog You may choose a profile containing all information associated with an existing catalog or choose Default to create a new profile Saving a Catalog Profile on page 362 Current profiles and profiles of catalogs that were added to the site and then removed are included in the Create a New Catalog section at the top of the dialog If no other profiles were created you can only choose Default 6 Click OK Inserting an Existing Catalog 1 Display the designated list page in Page view 2 Choose the catalog tool from the Advanced toolbar and click in the upper left corner of the Layout area Start in the upper left corner to allow as much space as possible for the thumbnail images
255. base directory 587 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server What is the name and password for your account You need this information so NetObjects Fusion can log on to the server and publish your site What is the preferred name for the default Home page Your service provider determines what file name the server displays by default for each directory on the server Most servers are configured to display by default any file named index others default to home or default You must match this preferred name in the Advanced Publish Settings dialog for remote server transfer What HTML file name extension does your server support Web page servers typically support html htm or shtml as file name extensions Some service providers map one to the other so the server recognizes all of them others require you to use a specific one You must set the Advanced Publish Settings dialog so NetObjects Fusion transfers files with the correct extension You can also enter a custom extension if your server supports it Is a specific port required for upload The service provider or hosting service might have designated a specific port on the server that it wants you to use to upload files If so you must specify this for NetObjects Fusion See Setting the Server Port and Permissions on page 609 Does your log in account have the necessary permissions Servers use permission configurations to control what you are allowed to do while logg
256. bject 7 Add yet another action to the first object that s triggered by the FlyAway message and tells the second object to fly off the page In the Set Action dialog enter Custom FlyAway in the When field the second object in the Target field Motion Fly in the Message field and Out To Top in the Parameters field Then preview the page to test your collision Drag the first object over the second drop it there and watch the second object fly off the page Showing One Object While Hiding Others Here s an example of cascading a custom message to build a sequence of actions where displaying one object selectively hides others Say your page displays a map showing the locations of five company offices For each location a button superimposes a text box on the page profiling that office s activities When a site visitor clicks a location you want to hide any profile that s currently visible and then display the one describing the selected location 1 In Page view place the buttons and text boxes in the Layout area arranging them however you want 421 Examples 2 Select one of the buttons and create a custom message called HideAIIProfiles as described in Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages on page 410 Your message becomes available in the When and Message menus Custom 4 Fly amp way Hide All Profiles E dit 3 each button add an action as described in Adding Actions to Objects and
257. bject and create a custom message named FlyAway as described in Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages on page 410 Create an action to use in creating the custom message and then delete it YES Your message becomes available in the When and Message menus Edit 5 Add an action to the first object as described in Adding Actions to Objects and Pages on page 403 so that mousing down on it makes it stick to the pointer until you mouse up In the Set Action dialog enter Mouse Mouse Down in the When field the first object in the Target field Drag Start Drag in the Message field and Until Mouse Up in the Parameters field 6 Adda collision detection action to the first object like this In the Set Action dialog enter Page Page Loaded in the When field the first object in the Target field and Drag Set Collision Detection in the Message field Then open the Values dialog from the Parameters menu and specify the second object for the Object ID value type the object s ID exactly as it appears 420 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages on the Actions tab of its properties palette and enter FlyAway for the Message value Parameter Values x Values for a collision detection action Fay z AXI ID of the object being dragged Custom message sent to trigger the other object to fly away When the first object is dropped over the second it sends the FlyAway message to the first o
258. bjects Fusion 8 User Sitesisss 1KB 4H 7 04 10 18 06 spacer1 ogram FilesWetObjectsWWetObjects Fusion 8YJser Sitesisss 1KB 4A 7 04 10 18 04 Click a tab to see file assets links data Click a column heading Drag the column divider to objects or user defined variables to sort the table change column width Depending on the selected tab Assets view shows Asset type Column headings Files Name Type In Use Location Size Date Verify Status Links Name Link To Type Target Verify Status Data Objects Name Type Variables Name Contents 560 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Managing File Assets When you click the Files tab in Assets view a list of the files associated with your site appears including external files and those generated by NetObjects Fusion File types include image audio video applets plugins Java class HTML data source and link target In Assets view you can add assets edit asset names and go directly to the page containing a selected asset You can verify the locations of assets in your site and you can open an asset file for editing in the application associated with it You can also replace assets delete selected assets or delete all unused assets in a single action For example if you have an image file of an arrow that indicates the next page in the site you could name this asset Next Page and place it on several pages If you later decide to change the ima
259. bjects Fusion adds the style source name to the style list The list of local styles is displayed 291 Managing SiteStyles To adda CD style source 1 In Style view from the Style menu choose Add SiteStyles Source The Add SiteStyles Source dialog appears Select CD SiteStyles as the Source Type Click Next Enter a name for the new source Add CD SiteStyles Source x CD SiteStyles Source Name My CD SiteStyles CD SiteStyles Source Path D SiteStples Styles Find Source Test lt Back Finish Cancel This is the name that will appear in the Style view Type in the path or navigate to the styles folder located on your CD The path entered must include the folder where the SiteStyles are stored For example if your SiteStyles CD stores its styles in a folder called Mountain Bikes the path will look similar to SiteStyles CD Mountain Bikes Warning If you do not specify the folder where the styles are located all of the CD contents will be displayed in Style view Click on Find Source to have NetObjects Fusion do an automatic search for the styles or click Test to verify the path entered is valid Click Finish NetObjects Fusion adds the style source name to the style list 292 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles To add a network source 1 5 In Style view from the Style menu choose Add SiteStyles Source The Add SiteStyles Source dialog appears Select N
260. ble on the server If your company uses a proxy server or has established firewalls for security make sure the server settings are appropriate for the proxy or firewall e Ifyou define publishing settings for a site and then export that site as a template those settings travel with the template If you are sharing a template with colleagues who can use the same publish settings you can save time by configuring the publish settings in advance exporting them with a template and then distributing the template Exploring Publish View You use NetObjects Fusion Publish view to publish a site locally or remotely NetObjects Fusion MountainJacques nod File Edit Go Publish Tools Help gz spP 3 Online Site Page Style Assets Publish Preview Site Publish Settings Publish Site Local MountainJacques nod Remote Pattytech V 1 amp ll Name Type Attributes Last Remote Publish Last Local Publish Name Type Attributes Last Modification Time assets Folder private Folder mw index html HTM Never Published Never Published 2 vii enf Folder E css R Never Published Never Published 1I vii log Folder Bice css Never Published Never Published 2 For E assets Folder rwarwsrwx E cgbin Folder rwar xr x C9 DBComp Folder wer E eddy Folder wars Fusion Folder mors gurutest Folder rwet xr x Folder rwear xr x E images Folder akev
261. blish view right click the folder or file and select Rename from the shortcut menu 2 Edit the existing object name or enter a new name Press Enter or select another object to record the new name You can rename auto generated folders and files if they are not locked in the Local pane NetObjects Fusion auto generates names of images that you modify in Page view For example if you crop an image or set it to be transparent NetObjects Fusion auto generates a new name for the altered image Auto generated image names are in the format of a filename ext where a stands for auto generated filename is the name of the original image and ext is the extension of the image gif or jpg Auto generated image names only appear in Publish view NetObjects Fusion remembers the new names the next time you generate the HTML files for your site Any local folder or file that you rename is considered customized If you name a customized folder with a name used by an auto generated folder it is still treated as a customized folder Aliased folders are also considered customized folders Publish view displays them in the directory structure even if they are empty and tracks their name and location in the event you change them See Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory on page 606 By definition you cannot change read only assets such as script files and directory files used by NetObjects Fusion Components NetObjects Fusion ignor
262. cation field or click Browse and select a new location File naming convention Select a plain format or one that includes the date and time from the drop down list Maximum number of backups stored Indicate the number of backups you want NetObjects Fusion to keep The oldest backups are overwritten as newer 56 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites backups are created The default is 4 backups if you have adequate disk space you can increase this number 57 Setting Options for the Current Site 58 CHAPTER 4 Working with Templates A template is a predefined set of pages and assets that you can modify to meet your needs Templates can contain a single page a site section or an entire site You can edit a template create a new site from a template or add a template to an existing site You can export your NetObjects Fusion site as a template so you can share your work with other NetObjects Fusion developers or move your site to another computer system NetObjects Fusion 8 template files are zip files Zip files provide a convenient way to group and compress files Each template zip file contains a TemplateName nft file and all the folders required to build a site based on the template Do not change the content of the zip file NetObjects Fusion depends on the structure of the file to find assets when opening the template If you try to open a zip file that is not a NetObjects Fusion template file you see
263. cation where you want to place the text box Selecting a Text Box To add or edit text within a text box double click in the text box The text box selection handles are hollow and the Text Properties palette includes a Format tab in addition to the Text Box and Actions tabs selection handles dindicate you can add edit and format u a To work with a text box as a container click the text box The selection handles are solid and the Text Properties palette displays only Text Box and Actions tabs he solid selection handles indicate you an work ith the extbox as a ontainer Text Properties A itio ont see 1 l MEM z u ces Paragraph Style Custom style Normal P Link Anchor Format Text Properties Background Color Automatic Image Automatic EES Custom style none E Format Lock height HTML Size Layout to Text cc o Text boxis 122 e Insertion marker Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes To add and format text see Chapter 12 Designing with Text Embedding Objects in a Text Box When you embed an object in a text box a wide border appears around the box and the insertion point appears as a vertical bar Text box with wide border Insertion point The insertion point indicates where the object s HTML tags are inserted when
264. ce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the Products tab 4 In the Product Name column select a product and click Duplicate 5 You will see the duplicate product listed with copy in the name Filtering Products You can filter your product list by searching for products with similar attributes 1 In Page view display the List page or Detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the Products tab 4 Click on Filter You will see the Product Filter dialog appear 349 Working with Products 8 Product Filter Name contains T shirt m p jw and SKU Part Number starts with v and gt nc e starts with contains z ends with is r r OK Cancel Choose an attribute to search for Choose a parameter to narrow your search and type in a value To further narrow your search place a mark in the check box and add additional parameters Click OK To remove the filter so that all products are displayed click Show Importing Products If you have an existing product list or prefer to work with a txt csv or xml file you can import your products into the E Commerce Properties Editor When setting up your txt csv or xml file remember first row must contain the row headers The row headers will be used to match the row to the appropriate field in the E Commerce Properties E
265. ced Assets on page 397 for information 390 Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML When you reference HTML from Site view NetObjects Fusion publishes the lt HEAD gt content from the original files along with lt HEAD gt content it generates 1 In Site view select the page to be the parent of the pages you reference 2 From the File menu choose Reference External HTML Select an existing page and choose the Reference External HTML command NetObjects Fusion adds the top level page you re referencing here and its children below The Reference External HTML dialog appears 3 Click Browse The Open dialog appears 4 Select the top level HTML file you want to reference and click Open to return to the Reference External HTML dialog Reference External HTML f NetObjects Fusion references this file and its child files Home C NetObjects Fusion 8 TutoriaHTML Browse Options ene z Mardi Display referenced HTML on Assign MasterBorder ZeroMargins pages with your site s Limit number of Default order MasterBorder or choose ZeroMargins to publish external Down to structural level 20 content with its original look Do not manage or move assets Cancel e Assign MasterBorder Choose a MasterBorder from this drop down list Each HTML file you reference occupies the Layout area of a page while the MasterBorder gives pages the consistent look of
266. ch as navigation bars that appear on multiple pages You can define multiple Layouts and MasterBorders then assign one of each to a page See Working with MasterBorders on page 132 and Working with Layouts on page 112 Setting Up the Page Design View Display Use the Palette Launcher buttons in the lower left corner of the NetObjects Fusion window to open and close the Properties palette Site Navigation palette and Object Tree palette See NetObjects Fusion Window on page 9 Using the Site Navigation Palette on page 79 and Using the Object Tree Palette on page 88 Properties palette Site Navigation palette Object Tree palette HomeLayout Use the commands on the View menu to show or hide Page Design view elements Show and hide palettes and toolbars as described in NetObjects Fusion Window on page 9 Use the MasterBorder command to hide the MasterBorder This provides more onscreen area for you to work on the page Layout e Use the Page Labels command to show and hide the Layout and MasterBorder labels and margin lines Display object outlines to help you control object size and position Use the Object Icons command to display or hide the indicator icons Link icon indicates the object has an associated link e Anchor icon indicates the object has an anchor point to which you can link Script icon indicates the object has associated HTML or scripts TT
267. ck the Link tool The Link dialog appears Select the File Link type 325 Creating Links Converts linked file to HTML List of file links previously entered See Setting Link Targets on page 327 See Adding HTML to a Link on page 332 Link type File Link X Find Again L ocation File path Browse C NetObjects Fusion 8 Tutorial Activities doc of file Convert to HTML document when publishing D File links Path C NetObjects Fusion 8 Tutorial Activities doc Target None Zi HTML Cancel The File path field displays the path to the file and the Name column displays the name that appears as the link if no text or object is selected Click Browse select a file in the Open dialog and click Save If necessary enter or edit the Name This name appears as the link if no text or object is selected and also in the list of links in Assets view so you can quickly identify and sort link destinations It is not added to the HTML generated when your site is published Select Convert to HTML document when publishing so all site visitors can view the document If your linked file remains in its original format it can only be opened by applications that support that file type This feature only works with doc mew xls and rtf files Click Link Note The way the linked file opens for site visitors depends on the configuration of their browser and Web server Tes
268. ck the Link tool on the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears 3 Select the type of link you are targeting Internal Link Smart Link External Link or File Link and set up the link See Creating Links on page 316 4 Inthe Target area choose Existing target from the drop down list 327 Setting Link Targets 5 6 7 In the Name area choose a default target from the drop down list Target Existing X Name LeftFrame x Add LeftFrame bod HTML blank Cancel self parent lop To display the designated content in a new named window click Add and type a name for the window in the Custom Target dialog box If a window with that name already exists the content is displayed in the existing window You may not need to assign a target NetObjects Fusion automatically targets most internal links for you Click Link to close the dialog and create the link Preview the page to test your targeted links Setting Pop Up Window Targets To display the designated content in a new pop up window you can create a new link target To create pop up windows 1 2 In Page view select the object or text that you want to link Click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears Select the type of link you are targeting Internal Link Smart Link External Link or File Link and set up the link See Creating Links on page 316 In the Target area choose Pop Up Window fro
269. click on the Primary or Secondary Navigation Bar Sample The Banner or NavBar Sample Properties palette appears depending on which SiteStyle element you select 2 Click Delete 279 Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles Editing a Navigation Bar In addition to editing button text and images you can change the navigation bar borders and spacing between buttons To edit the borders and spacing of a navigation bar 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to change and click the Primary or Secondary Navigation Bar Sample The Primary or Secondary NavBar Sample Properties palette appears depending on which navigation bar you select Secondary NavBar Sample Display in pixels Border fo Spacing 0 z Selected Button Set Name 8 Tupe Image Duplicate Delete New Button Set Image C Test Add Mew Set 2 Click the Border up and down buttons or enter the value directly to change the thickness of the border around the navigation bar 3 Click the Spacing up and down buttons to change the amount of space between the buttons 280 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Editing a Table Style Table Styles can be used to match the look and feel of your table to your SiteStyle You can create a table style in Style view then apply the table style in Page view using the Table Properties palette 1
270. containing the anchor beginning at the location of the anchor When an anchor link is in a MasterBorder or AutoFrame use the Current page option in the Link dialog to ensure that the link always points to an anchor on the current page If you want an anchor link to always lead to a specific page select the page name instead of the Current page option when you link to the anchor For example suppose your Layout contains a very long text box You place anchors at the top and bottom of the text box and in the MasterBorder you link the words To Top to the top anchor and the words To Bottom to the bottom anchor In the Link dialog instead of choosing the current page name in the Page name section you choose the Current page option If you copy that text box to another page with the same MasterBorder and replace its content the To Top and To Bottom links still work jumping to locations on the current page instead of the page where you made the links To add an anchor 1 In Page view select an image or drawn shape or double click to place the insertion point within a line of text If you place the insertion point within the text without selecting any text the anchor is placed at the location of the insertion point If you select text the anchor is placed at the beginning of the selected text 319 Creating Links m 2 On the Standard toolbar click the Anchor tool The Add Anchor dialog appears listing anchors already on the pa
271. correction you want Display report message If this option is selected after NetObjects Fusion spell checks the page or site you will see the number of corrections made If you find this option unnecessary you can check the Don t display again box after spell checking your page 24 Chapter 2 Setting Application Options Setting International Options From the Tools menu choose Options gt Application and click the International tab Application Options Program Preview Text Formats Date time use System Setting Decimal use System Setting Language Spelling dictionary US English X Sort order Use System Setting 7 Imported HTML Imported text uses character set Specified in imported Meta tag Date time and decimal formats The date time and decimal formats you select affect how these items are displayed wherever they appear in NetObjects Fusion for example the last published date of items in Publish view These settings do not affect generated HTML or text you enter on Web pages Select a format from the Date time drop down list A sample of the format is shown next to each language To determine the decimal point character select a format from the Decimal drop down list If you choose Use System Setting for either option NetObjects Fusion uses the setting in the Windows Regional Settings Properties dialog Spelling dictionary Select the dictionary you want to u
272. cript to generate the parameter value or modify the code that s already there NetObjects Fusion doesn t verify code you enter so be sure to use valid syntax JavaScript Expression x Enter a JavaScript expression here direction D hide Show duration 10 inDuration 2 outDuration 2 repe 5 di replacing or modifying existing code at 1 reverse false message Opens a list of actions you can call from the expression To build your expression around existing actions click the Insert Action button select an action from the Actions dialog and click OK NetObjects Fusion inserts the action at the insertion point in the form ActionName Click OK in the JavaScript Expression dialog and again in the Set Action dialog When the action 1s triggered it uses the parameter values generated by your expression 417 Examples Examples Creating a Button Rollover You can use the Set Image and Use Image actions to give three dimensional feel to a button for example by highlighting it when the site visitor s pointer passes over it by making it appear pushed in when pressed and so on Highlighted button Button 5 look when the page loads For this example you need three pictures of a button one showing how it looks when the page loads one showing it highlighted and one showing it pressed Note This example applies to images of buttons but not to form buttons The Set Image action is n
273. ct all images press Ctrl A Select Use file name for title If you choose the file name for the title it will exclude the extension and automatically populate the title field in the properties editor Click Add The photos you select are listed in the File Name column on the Images tab Photo Gallery Properties Editor My Gallery E x Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Images in display order 4 images in gallery Title File Name Add compte p Campsit gq R Captor Falls ipg Guides ipa emove Half Dome ipg __ Move Up _ Move Down Down 213 Working with Photos Arranging Photos Photos are listed in the File Name column on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor in the order in which you add them to the gallery This is also the order in which they appear on the photo pages If you select several files from a folder they appear in alphabetical order This is probably not the order in which you want to display the photos so you must rearrange them You can rearrange the photos on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor or directly on the thumbnail page If you do this on the thumbnail page you can see the images as you arrange them This is useful if your photos do not have meaningful file names for example 01 jpg 02 jpg Dragging Photos on the Thumbnail Page 1 Display the thumbnail page in Page view 2 Click the image
274. ct the entire word See Setting Text Options on page 23 A paragraph triple click in the paragraph A block of text click the first character then Shift Click the last character 156 B Z U LESS Font style buttons i Alignment buttons Indent buttons Chapter 12 Designing with Text Multiple paragraphs drag through them Text Properties 3 Make sure the Format tab on the Text Properties palette is selected RIES A xi o Eont Arial ES Paragraph xm Se Style Custom style Normal F lt none gt Anchor Format 4 Select a font from the drop down list on the Text Properties palette 5 Select a font size from the drop down list on the Text Properties palette The relative settings 2 to 4 set the font size relative to the site visitor s default browser settings To change the unit of measurement you can type directly into the Size field for example 12 pt To change the unit throughout the site you must edit the font size setting for the text format in Style view Click a font style button to assign characteristics bold italic underline and strikethrough superscript or subscript to the text To assign a color other than the SiteStyle color to the text click the color sample and select a color from the Color Picker 8 Toremove all added formatting from the paragraph containing the selected text click the Clear button Inherited formatting rem
275. cted page in the navigation bar Use rollover buttons to use the Rollover button state for the selected page in the navigation bar Fly out submenus to make child pages not included in the navigation bar visible when the site visitor moves the pointer over the parent page link Auto close fly out submenus close the fly out submenus when the mouse is no longer hovering over 305 Using Navigation Bars Button Style Tours Levet 0 E Apply to all Events Activities Site Style Current SiteStyle Mission Highlights January Button Secondary Fly out submenu Advanced Include Use highlighted Iv Use rollover Auto close Hy out Display Border fo Spacing 24 Bgcolor None C About Us Februaru Store March Use fly out submenus to make child pages not included in the navigation bar visible when the site visitor moves the pointer over the parent page link Creating a Custom Navigation Bar Style New navigation bars use the current SiteStyle but you can apply button sets associated with any SiteStyle to a page See Adding Banners and Buttons on page 277 In addition you can apply advanced settings such as how the fly out submenus are displayed on the page to a custom navigation bar If you change the style of a navigation bar in a MasterBorder it changes on every page using that MasterBorder To create a custom navigation bar 1 In Page view select the navigati
276. cted results for your site visitors choose colors that are Web safe 3 Click OK The new color appears in the selected object 14 Chapter 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics Working with Color Palettes When you choose colors for the objects in your site you select from the palette offered in the Color Picker You can use the Browser Safe Palette which contains colors that are Web safe the system palette used by Windows a palette you import from another application such as Adobe Photoshop or a custom palette you create Choosing a Color Palette 1 Click the Color button in any properties palette where it is offered The Color Picker appears Select a palette from the drop down list at the top of the dialog If you choose Custom Palette and want to load an existing custom palette see Loading a Custom Color Palette To create your own custom palette see Creating or Editing a Color Palette The palette is displayed in the Color Picker until you change it Click OK Loading a Custom Color Palette 1 5 Click the Color button in any properties palette where it is offered The Color Picker appears Select Custom Palette from the drop down list at the top of the dialog An all white palette appears Click Load In the Open dialog navigate to the palette you want to use then click Open This palette is displayed in the Color Picker until you change it Click OK to close the Color Picker Creating or
277. cture action to the first slide triggering it to fly onto the page The completion of the Fly action sends a message that triggers a two second delay after which another custom message triggers both the exit of the current slide and the entrance of the next Customizing Default Actions The trigger events action messages and default parameter values available in the Set Action dialog are defined in the JavaScript Beans jsb and JavaScript js files in the NetObjects Fusion 8 NetObjects System folder If you re experienced in JavaScript programming you can add your own and js files to provide even more choices in the Set Action dialog 427 Customizing Default Actions 428 CHAPTER 25 Designing and Implementing Forms You can add forms to your site to collect information from site visitors for example to survey potential customers conduct credit card transactions have customers register products or otherwise process information visitors submit Using forms visitors can type in text fields and select options using check boxes radio buttons and combo boxes You can use the NetObjects Form Handler component to have responses posted in an email or copied to a text file on your Web server Or you can assign a Common Gateway Interface CGI script to process responses for example by summarizing them on a confirmation page Check with your server administrator or ISP for setup information You can also use Jav
278. d Color Color FFFFFF v Image Automatic x Custom style lt none gt X Format Lock height HTML Size Layout to Text Text box is aform 3 set the width of the text box select it and drag the handles to size the text box as needed The text box retains the width you set unless you size it to the Layout area as described in step 5 4 To set a minimum height for the text box select Lock height and drag the text box handles to the minimum height you want 126 Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes If Lock height is not selected NetObjects Fusion automatically adjusts the height of a text box to fit the text and objects it contains Selecting Lock height prevents the text box from getting smaller in the site visitor s browser To use a text box as the main Layout container on the page select Size Layout to Text This results in extremely lean HTML code Before you do this embed all objects in the Layout area in the text box or place them in the MasterBorder Objects left in the Layout area outside the text box will be overlapped by the text box when you size it to the Layout Unless you want this overlap and use Fixed Page Layout HTML output to support it you must embed move or remove the objects Setting Text Box Background You can add colors and pictures to text box backgrounds If you choose gif with a transparent color the text box background color will show through 1
279. d in the Images folder within the style s folder See Styles Folder Structure on page 295 When you create your own SiteStyle keep these points in mind e When you use an animated gif for a style image only the first frame of the animation displays in the image Text labels for buttons and banners are placed on the images If you want the label to appear above or below the image leave space above or below the image when you create it in your image editing application e Ifyou plan to use your SiteStyle on a page with a background color or image and you want the background to show through your image make sure you set the background to Automatic or Transparent 287 Creating a SiteStyle D New Style Set Style When you create a new SiteStyle you can start with an existing SiteStyle as a template or a blank SiteStyle So before you create a new SiteStyle select an appropriate SiteStyle as your starting point To create a new SiteStyle 1 Create or collect images for your banner buttons lines icons and background Use an image creation application to create the images To be included in a published site they must be in gif jpg or png format If you use an image in bmp pex pet fpx format NetObjects Fusion can convert a copy of the image to gif or jpg for you In Style view click on Active SiteStyles Note New Blank SiteStyles must be added to your Active SiteStyles
280. d keywords to your pages lt HEAD gt content Site visitors don t see this information but search engines require it to index your site Note Search engines index frameset files so if your site uses AutoFrames or scripted frames be sure to access Master HTML so your tags are added to the frameset file 1 In Page view click in the Layout area of the page you want indexed or in the MasterBorder or AutoFrame to index a set of pages 546 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 2 Click the HTML button on the General tab of the Properties palette The Page HTML dialog appears 3 Click the Between Head Tags tab and enter META tags that describe your content For example type lt META NAME DESCRIPTION CONTENT Large selection of valuable high quality antiques and collectibles for any budget gt where the content is a one sentence description containing the most important keywords site visitors might search for Then type lt META NAME KEYWORDS CONTENT antiques quality antiques valuable antiques low cost antiques collectibles jewelry furniture novelties gt where the content lists all important keywords Note You can also enter META keywords in the Current Site Options dialog See Entering META Tags on page 53 4 Click OK 5 Register your site with search engines You must do this separately with each search engine for it to find your site Visit AltaVista Excite Lycos Yahoo and
281. d on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Not Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 44 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 44 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM 565 Managing File Assets If a single file is not found the Verifying Files Used by File Assets dialog appears identifying the missing file and the original path If a folder containing assets is not found the Verifying Folders Used by File Assets dialog appears identifying the missing folder and its original path Verifying Folders Used by File Assets This site is using files in a folder that is no longer available Please select the folder where the files or sub folders are now located Missing folder c netobjects 20fusion 208Y New location Browse Eiles and sub folders in missing folder C NetObjects 20Fusion 208 F SIlmport spacer gif Skip Cancel 2 Resolve the paths of any lost files or folders To specify a new path click Browse and locate the file or folder To skip the lost item and continue verification click Skip NetObjects Fusion gives this file Not found status and goes on to verify subsequent files or folders If the file is due to be published you receive a publish error To stop the verification process click Cancel The verification status of the current file or subsequent files is not updated 3 When verification is complete click OK in the confirmation dialog 566 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Managing Links and Link Targets
282. data as a standard stream of name value pairs separated by an ampersand amp Get sends the values of the form variables as part of the URL Use Get with care as some servers truncate data sent using this method Often the method you use is determined by the scripts you use Check your script s documentation for information Encoding type If your server requires data to be encoded in a particular format such as MIME or BinHex type the format here 4 Click OK 445 Adding Hidden Fields Adding Hidden Fields If a CGI script is processing your form you probably need to use hidden fields to pass additional information to it such as which fields must be filled in to display the success page or where to return data once it s processed Site visitors don t see these fields but the values are submitted to the script with form responses 1 In Page view click anywhere in the form except a form object 2 On the Properties palette click the Settings button For a text box form look for the Settings button on the Text Box tab For other forms look on the General tab The Form Settings dialog appears 3 Add names and values for each hidden field in the Form Settings dialog Form Settings Form name LAYOUTFORM Settings Action Method Encoding type Hidden fields Browse To add a field click the plus button then enter a name and value for the field in the Ente
283. ders and select table styles that can be used across sites Work with text txt and comma separated value csv files and to save time by importing and exporting tabular data Develop Database Solutions You can develop a dynamic site in minutes using NetObjects Fusion s Database component Incorporate common database elements in objects such as forms lists and tables all from within the NetObjects Fusion interface Build pages to display data directly from Page view by simply dragging and dropping elements on to the page setting values in the properties palette and using wizards to add tables and queries This is a great way for beginner and advanced NetObjects Fusion users to implement complex solutions in less time Build a Digital Photo Gallery Use the Photo Gallery tool to put your images on the Web in minutes Select the images you want to use choose a display format and NetObjects Fusion does the rest Your photo gallery is published to the Web for your friends and family to view Create an E Commerce Catalog Simplify the process of building your online store with NetObjects Fusion and match your catalog with the look and feel of your Web site With just a few clicks you can easily create a catalog add products and images and arrange them so that navigation is effortless Then integrate credit card processing for an effective way to deliver world class products and services to your customers online Add Dynamic Content
284. dit its HTML code Referencing HTML from Page View You can reference an external HTML file as the Layout area of a page from Page view and incorporate the file s lt HEAD gt content for example to include existing META tag keywords or JavaScript definitions 1 2 Create a page in Site view In Page view from the File menu choose Reference External HTML Page The Reference External HTML Page dialog appears Click Browse The Open dialog appears 392 Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML 4 Select the external file you want to reference and click Open to return to the Reference External HTML Page dialog If the file is already referenced elsewhere in the site avoid creating a duplicate asset by clicking the HTML Assets tab and selecting the file from there Open a file from this tab to adda new asset to the site Folder HTML Openafile from this tab to reuse an existing asset Look in Tutorial g O i 5 Choose whether to import the referenced file s lt HEAD gt content and manage external assets NetObjects Fusion places this file s lt BODY gt in the Layout area of your new page Reference External HTML Page Page C NetObiects Fusion 8 Tutorial HTML Contest Check here to also publish the file s lt HEAD gt content Import lt HEAD gt Append to Current HEAD v Do not manage or move assets
285. ditor The image path is relative to the folder which contains it e Up to 16 fields can be imported and matched to the fields listed in the E Commerce Properties Editor Note Sample product files are located in the NetObjects Fusion 8 Tutorial Catalog folder To import products into the E Commerce Catalog Properties editor 1 In Page view display the List page or Detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 350 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs 3 Display the Products tab 4 Click on Import The Open file dialog appears 5 Browse to the file you want to import You can import Tab Delimited Files txt These are plain text files using tabs to separate each text string in a row Comma Delimited Files csv These are plain text files using commas to separate each text string in a row Extensible Markup Language Files xml These are plain text files using tags to separate each text string in a row Excel Files xls These are Microsoft Excel spreadsheet files 6 Click OK The Map Columns dialog will appear E Map columns with Fusion s Ecomm Catalog key E3 Please choose for each Fusion s Ecomm catalog key a correspondent column from your imported file If there is no column matching the key select blank option to use default values for that specific key Name Name SKU SKU h Keywords Keywords W
286. do not Text attribute Affects contained Does not affect object contained object Font X Style X Size X Color X Position X Case x Decoration x Small caps x Alignment x Image wrap X Line height X Letter spacing X Word spacing X Space above x relative size corresponds to parent element s width Space below x relative size corresponds to parent element s width First line indent X Left margin X Right margin X List style X List indent X All border and X background attributes 166 oF Span tool Chapter 12 Designing with Text Working with Text Styles A text style is a predefined set of formats for the characters paragraphs lists borders and backgrounds of text Text styles provide a convenient way to specify replicate and update paragraph formatting for a text selection You can create text styles or modify the text styles included with NetObjects Fusion You can also create custom styles to use in conjunction with the styles on the Styles list Applying a Text Style to a Paragraph 1 In Page view position the insertion point in the paragraph to which you want to apply a text style 2 In the Paragraph section of the Text Properties palette select a text style from the Style drop down list The text changes to the new style For example if the original text is the Normal P style and you select the Heading 1 H1 style for the text the entire paragraph changes to the H1 style
287. e You must use the Link dialog to unlink Note You cannot undo this operation You must use the Add Link command to recreate the external link If you accidentally delete a non external link you must recreate it in Page view Updating Link Targets 1 In Assets Links view double click the link target you want to update The Link Targets dialog appears Change the name of the link target if desired Click OK 569 Managing Data Objects and Photo Galleries Verifying Links To make sure links will work properly when a site visitor clicks them you can verify link destinations 1 In Assets Links view from the Assets menu choose Verify All Links NetObjects Fusion displays a progress bar as it verifies and reports the status of link destinations It accesses the Internet to verify external link references If you are not connected to the Internet the external links are not verified e When a link s destination is found the date and time of validation appear in the Verify Status column e Ifa link s destination is not found the problem is described in the Verify Status column When verification is complete the progress bar disappears 2 Resolve the destinations of broken links by double clicking the link and editing it as described in Updating an External Link Link verification takes place in the background so you can switch to another view and continue working while links are being verified To v
288. e quality 100 is the highest quality 0 the lowest quality Settings Unnamed x Format Progressive Quality 100 Maxim v Blur E jo Set the Quality field first Each setting corresponds to a range of percents Low corresponds to 0 39 Medium to 40 75 High to 76 99 and Maximum to 100 e Use the Percent field to fine tune the quality setting Select Progressive to create an image that displays progressively in a Web browser The image will display as a series of overlays enabling viewers to see a low resolution version of the image before it downloads completely As you adjust the settings the image in the Preview field changes If the Preview image is scaled down you can close the editor and check image quality in Page Design view 194 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 4 Click OK to close the Optimize Image editor Saving Optimization Settings To save your optimization settings 1 In Page view select the image with the optimization settings you want to save The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click Edit to open the Optimize Image editor 3 In the Settings area click the plus button The Save Settings dialog appears Save settings Name Cancel 4 Type a name for the new output setting 5 Click OK To remove a custom optimization setting 1 In the Settings area choose the saved setting you want to remove 2 Click the minus button The sett
289. e MasterBorder The MasterBorder Properties palette appears 2 Select the ZeroMargins MasterBorder from the MasterBorder name drop down list or use any combination of AutoFrames and non framed MasterBorders with margins set to zero 3 Select an existing text box or create a new one and embed all objects in the Layout area in the text box 128 Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes 4 On the Text Box tab of the Text Properties palette select Size Layout to Text and then Contents wrap to browser width ques staff is committed to tour guest in learning new skills isting ones T ncouraging you to enjoy your mplish a personal goal we ensure acation experience and look g for more Mission Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Address Text Properties ue Background 3 Color Automatic Image Automatic Ez Custom style none Format J Look height HTML Size Layout to Test Contents wrap to browser width Testboxis a form Settings c program Files etObjects Fusion amp User Sites Mountain Jacques Local Publishlhtmlmission htm s promotes a variety of active tours in alpine lakes rivers ains and forests ain Jacques is to provide an exhilarating memorable and satisfying adventure experience for all any season and any mountain environment cques staff is committed to assisting
290. e Site s Character Set 617 Setting the Character Set for an Individual Page 618 Setting the Character Set for a Section 618 22 Setting the Character Set for Imported Pages 619 URL and Page Name Character Requirements 620 23 24 Welcome to NetObjects Fusion NetObjects Fusion 8 is the essential tool for building effective Web sites Whether you are a professional Web site designer or designing a site for a small business or your family you can use NetObjects Fusion to design your site quickly and easily Map out your site structure by dragging and dropping page icons NetObjects Fusion automatically creates and updates navigation and links Lay out your pages quickly by dragging text graphics and multimedia into place Select from dozens of SiteStyles or customize or create your own to apply a consistent visual theme throughout your site Build Your Site s Success Perform advanced image editing NetObjects Fusion includes all the tools necessary to edit images without having to use third party software You can crop images set borders adjust size and orientation reduce red eye and add text In addition apply custom optimization settings to pictures and auto generated images that control format and download times Apply enhanced table functions including import export Use the advanced table tool to sort data add and adjust rows and columns with precision display hea
291. e SiteStyle definitions Formatting All Photo Titles 1 Preview In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Display the Photo Page tab Click Format Title The Object Format dialog appears Object Format Ad xl Character Paragraph Borders Background Font Style Arial Bold Automatic i Agency FB Algerian Architect Color Automatic 7 m Position Automatic Letter case Automatic Decoration w amp utomatic Underline verline Small caps Automatic zl Strikethrough The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help 5 Set the text format See Formatting Text on page 154 222 Next Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Formatting an Individual Photo Title You can apply formatting to all or part of the title text For example you can make a single word bold for emphasis Formatting you apply here is also reflected in the title text on the thumbnail page 1 In Page view display a photo page 2 Click the Next button on the control bar until the photo you want to work on appears 3 Select all or part of the title text 4 Use the options on the Format tab of the Title Properties
292. e correct location on the server 613 Publishing Special Assets 614 CHAPTER 33 Working with Character Sets In the past most computers used the same character set to represent upper and lowercase English language letters number characters and punctuation characters This character set is known as ASCII However ASCII is a very limited character set unable to support a variety of alphabets To accommodate computer users worldwide different character sets were developed These new character sets are often identified by a number such as code page 850 or ISO 8859 1 Character sets are composed of code points which are the numbers assigned to characters that the computer uses to identify the character For example in ASCII when you type a capital A the computer sees its code point which is the number 65 if you type a B the computer sees a 66 Both the code page 850 and the ISO 8859 1 character sets include accented characters but 850 uses the code point 130 for the character and 8859 1 uses 233 for the same character To eliminate this confusion an effort is underway to create a universal character set that includes every character from every language This character set is called Unicode Characters display correctly in NetObjects Fusion because they are stored in Unicode When NetObjects Fusion publishes or previews a page it converts the text from Unicode to the character set selected for the site or for the indi
293. e data fields you defined in the data object To design stacked pages 1 Go to Site view or use the Site Navigation palette in Page view to navigate to a stacked page If you are working with external data the control bar indicates this is 1 of as many records as were imported from the external source If you are working with an internal data object it indicates this is 0 of 0 because you have not created any records 2 In Page view select the Data Field tool from the Advanced toolbar and draw a rectangle in the Layout area of the stacked page The dashed rectangle represents the first field you are adding Drawing a data field N ame Email icture 486 Chapter 27 Data Publishing The Data Field dialog appears The fields available on the Name drop down list are in the data object you selected in the Data Publishing dialog when you created the stacked pages Data Field Name Email Name Phone Select a field and click OK If you are using external data NetObjects Fusion displays image or simple text field data from the first record in the data file If you are using internal data and select an image file field the field area 1s marked with an X After you create a new record you can double click the X to open the Picture File Open dialog select the file and then click OK If you are using internal data and select a simple or formatted internal text field NetObjects Fusion displays a blank fi
294. e if using a custom delimiter Note Only single character delimited files can be imported For example files using the delimiter are acceptable while files using are not 4 Complete the Table Properties section See Setting Table Properties on page 241 Exporting Table Data You can export table data as tab delimited txt and comma separated csv files 252 Chapter 15 Adding Tables 1 In Page view select the table you want to work with 2 Right click and select Export Table from the menu The Export Table dialog appears Export Table Save in MySite Gaassets 3 Backups MyRecent styles Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer File name Save Save as type Text Tab delimited txt Cancel 3 Choose a location to save the file to 4 Type a file name to save the data as 5 In the Save as Type drop down select Text Tab Delimited to save as a txt file CSV Comma Delimited to save as a csv file 6 Click Save The file will be saved to the location specified Setting Table Styles You can quickly give your table a look that matches your site by creating a table style or applying a table style defined in Style view Defining Table Regions When creating a table style you must first define the two regions you will be working with the middle and border regions The middle region consists of all repeating cel
295. e in Site view all lowercase with an html extension and an underscore in place of spaces and other special characters So One in Site view becomes one html in the resulting HTML If you re not sure where a content file is relative to your frameset page or what its HTML name is look in Publish view Open the Footer page in Page view Click in the MasterBorder and select ZeroMargins in the Name field on the MasterBorder Properties palette Click in the Layout area and enter 110 in the Height field on the Layout Properties palette Add three text boxes to the Layout containing the text One Two and Home Que wo Home Select the text One click Link select the Internal Link type and select the One page In the Target section of the Link dialog click New and type main in the text field next to the New button Click Link to close the dialog Select the text Two and create an internal link to the Two page In the Target section of the Link dialog click Existing and select main from the drop down list Click Link to close the dialog 556 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 10 Select the text Home and create an internal link to the Home page In the Target section of the Link dialog click Existing and select top from the drop down list Click Link to close the dialog 11 Open the One and Two pages in Page view choose the ZeroMargins MasterBorder on the MasterBorder Properties pal
296. e other than the plug in icon to represent the plugin When site visitors click the image the plugin opens in the window Click Browse and select an image file Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Select the Advanced tab 379 Replacing a Media File The Advanced options appear Plug In Properties BEE Blo Parameters Name Use the Parameters section to add custom settings to the plugin You cannot change the plugin 5 standard parameters such as height and width Parameter info 9 Set the parameters Because you add different parameters for different files see the associated user guide To edit parameters that appear in the Parameters section double click the parameter Enter the value in the Add Plug In Parameter dialog To add a parameter click the plus button and enter the parameter name and value in the Add Plug In Parameter dialog remove a parameter select it and click the minus button Tochange the order of the parameters click the Up or Down arrow buttons The selected parameter moves up or down in the parameters list You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Replacing a Media File Sites are constantly changing and evolving As you build your site or after using it for some time you might want
297. e site is collapsed Click the plus sign to expand it E Structure Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites the child pages of the currently selected page If the selected page has no children the table describes the selected page itself To switch to Outline view In Site view click the Outline tab Outline Child Name Mission Status Done Publish Yes Page Type Comments Normal Mission Events Events Normal Not done Yes 3 Activities Next Tour Normal Not done Yes 0 Highlights Contest Normal Not done No Prize Details Pending Next Tour Contest Like SiteStructure view Site Outline view shows if a branch of the site is collapsed A collapsed branch is indicated by a plus sign to the left of the page icon an expanded branch is indicated by a minus sign e To expand a branch click the plus sign to the left of a page collapse a branch click the minus sign to the left of a page In Outline view you can sort the child pages by their properties so you can quickly identify pages with common characteristics Click the heading of the column you want to use to sort the list NetObjects Fusion sorts the list in ascending A Z order To sort the list in descending Z A order point to the column heading and press Shift Click Printing the SiteStructure In Site view you use the Print command on the File menu to print the SiteStructure view of your site or
298. e site visitor doesn t change it Remember that only one radio button in a group can be selected at a time and this only works if all buttons in the group have the same group name 4 To label each radio button use the Text tool on the Standard toolbar 436 x Checkbox tool Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Adding Check Boxes You can provide check boxes for making one or more selections from a group of options or to turn a single option on or off Unlike radio buttons any number of boxes in a group can be selected at the same time After creating the form as described on page 430 1 In Page view select the Forms Checkbox tool from the Form toolbar 2 Draw a rectangle on the form 3 Set the Forms Checkbox properties Forms Checkbox Properties IEG 8 jol Name JFormsCheckbost H Name passed to the script processing the form Value H Value that s passed if this box is checked Default 7 Checked Unchecked HTML Name Type the name for this check box that s passed to the script processing the form If you re using the Form Handler use a number indicating the box s order in the output text Each check box must have a separate name Value Type the value passed for the box if the site visitor checks it If you re using the Form Handler and a visitor checks a box named 6 that has the value Email the output text might appear as 6 Email If the site visitor
299. e view HTML Source view displays all of the page s HTML code in one place which makes it easier to insert and edit code You can also use the Find Cut Copy and Paste commands in this view Code that you can edit appears on a white background You cannot edit code that appears on a gray background Working in HTML Source View HTML Source view combines advanced HTML editing features such as color syntax highlighting and language element insertion with familiar word processing features including drag and drop text editing and text search In NetObjects Fusion HTML code is either protected or unprotected Protected code is the HTML that NetObjects Fusion generates when you publish your site You cannot edit this code Unprotected code is the code you insert You can edit unprotected HTML code in Source view In HTML Source view you can Copy protected blocks of generated HTML and paste them in unprotected areas but you cannot modify or delete them e Drag and drop unprotected blocks of HTML Goto a specific place in the code using the Find command e Add code between objects inside the lt BODY gt and lt BODY gt tags 536 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Add HTML code at various insertion points outside the lt BODY gt and lt BODY gt tags Insert a field such as the date and time the site was created or last modified NetObjects Fusion includes several fields you can use and you can also define your
300. e view from the Text menu choose Edit Text Styles The Text Styles dialog appears Text Styles Definition Attribute Value Styles Normal P Heading 1 H1 Heading 2 H2 Heading 3 H3 Heading 4 4 Heading 5 5 Heading 6 Link A Link active A active The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog Link hover amp hover Link linked A link Link visited A visited List item List ordered OL This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because List bulleted UL the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope lt of styles please see Help New Duplicate Edit Delete Preview The selected scope appears in the field at the top of the dialog The pane on the left lists the HTML tag styles and any custom styles you created for the selected scope When the scope is set to All available styles you can determine a style s scope using the tree structure in the Text Styles dialog Click the plus sign next to a 170 Chapter 12 Designing with Text style to see its scope and the specific pages it applies to In this example the custom style named Sales applies only to the Home page Text Styles Scope Definition All available styles Attribute Styles Normal Heading 1 H1 Heading 2 H2 Heading 3 Heading 4 H4 Heading 5 H5 Heading 6 H5 Link i Link ac
301. eStyle designer is listed above the graphic elements at the top of the view On the Text tab you see samples of Body Body text style that sets the overall text style for the entire site The background of the Body is the same as the background shown on the Graphic tab Normal P Style for text that you type in normal paragraphs Text Object Style for text that you type in text objects Text Navbar Style used for text navigation bars Link Text style and colors for text used for links Changes made to the link style affect the Text Navbar style Unordered List Image and text style for bullet lists Ordered List Numbering and text style for numbered lists Headings Text styles for H1 through H6 heads 273 Applying SiteStyles Set Style To preview the Style Elements to see how they appear in a browser click on the Preview tab Applying SiteStyles By default navigation banners buttons text lists and other site design elements obtain their images and text attributes from the SiteStyle assigned to the site When you apply a SiteStyle NetObjects Fusion automatically applies style elements throughout your site For example it replaces all the buttons in your navigation bars with images from the style you specify while maintaining the relevant links To apply a SiteStyle 1 In Style view select a SiteStyle from the list of SiteStyles The elements of the selected style appear 2 Click the Set Style button
302. ed on whether you can delete files for example or create new directories In Publish view you can specify the file and directory structure that you want NetObjects Fusion to create or use for your site by selecting Arrange Files from the Publish menu Your log in account which NetObjects Fusion uses to store the files must have the server permissions necessary to create the directory structure you defined If your service provider does not let you create directories then you must use the Flat directory structure option to transfer and store your site How much server space do you have Before you publish your site to the Web server check the size of the generated HTML files on your hard disk The default location for the files is a folder named User Sites Sitename Local Publish Make sure you include all the subfolders as well Check that the space allocated on the Web server can accommodate all the files in the Local Publish folder 10 Does your server have security systems in place such as proxies or firewalls Firewalls and proxy servers can prevent NetObjects Fusion from uploading files properly See Publishing with Firewalls or Proxy Servers on page 611 588 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site Select the Directory Structure Many ISPs hosting companies and Web servers require Web site files to be arranged in a certain directory structure NetObjects Fusion supports the three most popular directory structures used by
303. ed pages In Page view on a stacked page click the plus button on the control bar A stacked page with blank data fields appears The counter on the control bar indicates the new total of records in the stack Deleting a Stacked Page To delete the current stacked page of an internal data object In Page view click the minus button on the control bar and click Yes to confirm deletion Adding Text and Images to Stacked Pages When a stacked page displays data from an internal data object you can enter text and add pictures in data fields on the stacked page You cannot edit text on stacked pages that reference external data To enter text in a text data field Double click the data field 489 Deleting a Data Object A dotted outline with hollow handles highlights the field and an insertion point appears inside Type the text you want then click outside the field to deselect it To add an image in an image file data field Double click the data field and select the image you want in the dialog that appears After you add data to the stacked pages the data list can display it Preview the data list page to see how it will look in your browser Deleting a Data Object If you created stacked pages for the data object you must delete the stacked pages and any data lists before you can delete the data object 1 196 TX cm Uv 5 Go to Site view and select the stacked pages Press Del
304. efault a button name is the same as the page name To change the text on a button 1 In Page view navigate to the page containing the navigation button you want to change 2 Double click the button to select it 307 Using Navigation Bars A wide border surrounds the button to show it is selected Page name Highlights Use page name in button Page title Highlights Button title ice Button Image JtestnexonotStylestPhoeninlmagestp3 gif i Rollover Image Jitestucncxc Styles Phoenisslmagestps ait Browse 3 In the Button title field type a new name for the button To enter two lines of text press Enter at the end of the first line This changes the button name only in the selected navigation bar To change the name of all instances of this button on all navigation bars change the Page name field or use the Custom Names dialog See Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions on page 46 To restore the default page name select Use page name in button Change a Button s Image You can change the picture on each individual button in a navigation bar in Page view When you assign a new picture to a button NetObjects Fusion does not display the page name or custom name on the button If you want text to appear on the button you must include the text in your button picture You do not change the current SiteStyle when you customize a button picture
305. eld if you have at least one record If there are no records NetObjects Fusion displays a field containing the field name Simple text fields allow only one line of information and all characters use the same formatting Formatted text fields allow multiple lines of information and individual character formatting See Adding a Stacked Page for Internal Data on page 489 Drag the field to the location you want on the stacked pages Place additional data fields Add text blocks to label your fields lines and other graphics until you are satisfied with the Layout 487 Creating Stacked Pages 6 7 Use the Data Field Properties to set the background and other options for the current data field Data Field Properties 2 x le Background Color automatic z I Image aoma Custom style none X Format Lock height HTML Size Layout to Text r Do one of the following e Ifyou are using external data your stacked pages are already created You can use the Next and Previous buttons on the control bar to scroll though all pages in the stack e Ifyou are using internal data add records as described in Adding a Stacked Page for Internal Data on page 489 You cannot enter data until you add a record to contain it Adding Navigation Buttons to Stacked Pages Next and Previous buttons simplify navigation between stacked pages You can automatically
306. enamed or moved from their default location have a customized publication property Customized assets display a C in the Local Attributes column in Publish view and a checkmark in the Customized option in the Attributes section of the Properties dialog To see the Properties dialog for a customized asset select the asset in either pane of Publish view and from the Publish menu choose Properties Some folders pages and assets are marked read only e Assets created by NetObjects Fusion components such as Site Mapper Dependent Java class files that were added to the site s assets When you add a Java object and preview or publish your site NetObjects Fusion analyzes the object s class file to see if it calls for other class files if so those dependent class files are added as read only assets Read only assets display an R in the Attributes column in Publish view and a check in the Read only option of the Properties dialog Pages and assets have two published date properties that display the latest publication date in both the Last Remote Publish and Last Local Publish columns of Publish view 604 Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing Ifan asset was never published locally or remotely it displays Never Published in red in the appropriate column and has a check in the Needs publishing option of the publication Properties dialog HTML files always appear in red e Ifan asset was changed since the last time it was transfe
307. enerates the HTML files for the second and any additional pages For example if you have two pages named Great NetObjects Fusion creates Great html and Greatl html This only affects the page names in Publish view You can change the name directly on the page icon or in the Page name field on the Page tab of the Properties palette To rename a page on the page icon 1 In Site view click the page name text and type a new name 2 Press Enter or click outside the page icon to enter the name Once in this edit mode you can tab between sibling pages to edit their names NetObjects Fusion remains in edit mode until you press Enter If a page has no siblings pressing Tab moves the text edit selection to the page s parent To rename a page on the Properties palette 1 Select the page you want to rename 2 Edit the text in the Page name field on the Page tab of the Properties palette 3 Press Tab or click outside the palette to enter the new name If several pages are selected you can change the page name on the Selected Pages tab of the Properties palette See Setting Properties for a Group of Pages on page 40 Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions By default banners and navigation buttons use the page name If you prefer you can specify different names If you have a long page name you can break it into two lines 46 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites To specify custom page names in Site v
308. ent of the Home page 1 In Site view select the page you want to become the new Home page 2 Dragthe page to the Home page until you see the colored triangle above the Home page Note Pages excluded from navigation cannot be made into the Home page 44 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites When you release the mouse button the new page becomes the parent of the Home page Select the Mission page and drag it above the Home page The Mission page becomes the new Home page If you move a page that has children to be the parent of the Home page the Home page becomes the sibling of the child pages The Activities and Highlights pages are children of the Events page When you move the Events page into the Home page position the children of the Events page become siblings of the original Home page Renaming Pages By default NetObjects Fusion uses the page name on banners and navigation buttons that identify the page When you publish your site NetObjects Fusion uses 45 Renaming Pages the page name as the HTML file name for the page It also uses the page name when it creates links to the page NetObjects Fusion converts spaces and non alphanumeric characters except periods and hyphens in the page name to underscores _ in the HTML file name If you give two pages the same name and they are published in the same folder NetObjects Fusion adds a numeral to the file name when it g
309. er Set Name Untitled Data list Fields Choose options for the data list Simple Image File Add All Stacked pages Display all fields Choose options for stacked pages Add navigation buttons next previous up Click OK to create the data list and stacked pages Creating a Data Object You can create two types of data objects Internal data objects reference simple text formatted text and picture data fields stored or placed within your site External data objects import fields from a data field created in a program other than NetObjects Fusion External data sources include external databases spreadsheets and ASCII text files Importing external data takes a single table from a database or a single worksheet from a program such as Microsoft Excel it does not import the entire database Use external data if your database is maintained by others who do not use NetObjects Fusion if you have large quantities of data or if the data is frequently updated The tools for creating the two data object types appear on the Data tools flyout on the Advanced toolbar Use the New External Data Source tool to create a data object for external data use the Data List tool to create a data object for internal 477 Creating a Data Object Data List tool New Asset data After you create an internal data object use the Data Field tool to add data fields to the stacked pages Data Field tool only av
310. er you can preview a page that is designated Don t publish as an individual page Do not use the Don t publish setting in an attempt to publish only changed pages to an already published site Doing so causes broken links and other undesirable results Instead you can publish a section of the site to update it See Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site e Color code You can set the color of page icons in Site view to highlight a group of selected pages or pages that share the same MasterBorder A page icon s color has no effect on the published site You can display either a user defined or MasterBorder color by opening the View menu choosing Page Color Coding and then choosing User Defined or MasterBorder You select the colors to be displayed on the Management tab of the Properties palette 37 Setting Properties On the Management tab of the Properties palette click the e User defined Color button to choose a color for the currently selected page or pages e MasterBorder Color button to choose a color for pages that have the same MasterBorder as the currently selected page This option is not available 1f multiple pages are selected For example select a page and choose blue as the MasterBorder color and red as the user defined color From the View menu choose Page Color Coding gt MasterBorder The icons representing all pages that share the MasterBorder of the selected page turn blue If you create a new page and assign
311. er03 ipg Format JPEG Milions of Colors ies MEE xi gil Image size 278 x 183 Pixels Foma 38 Approx Size loading time info Modem 56K z Quaiiy Masi Optimization download Original 9 KB 1 35 sec p settings Bw E times Optimized 19 KB 2 76 sec C cm In this editor you set the quality of the selected image As you make changes NetObjects Fusion displays the approximate download time for the file Note Available optimization settings change depending on the image type You may choose to save and apply previously defined settings See Saving Optimization Settings on page 195 3 Select the File type 193 Optimizing Images a For GIF or PNG 8 file types set the color reduction colors and dither EIE Format v Color Reduct None X Colors 1256 1100 Dither None Transparency Add color Settings Unnamed 14 Set the color reduction first to change the set of colors available in the color table Then choose the maximum number of colors to display in the Colors drop down list e Choose Floyd Steinberg dithering to use a common algorithm to simulate colors that are not available in the color display system of your computer Select Transparency to create a transparent GIF See Creating a Transparent GIF on page 195 b For JPG file types set the Quality and Blur These fields both affect imag
312. erify links through a proxy server open the Windows Control Panel and double click the Internet icon In the Internet Properties dialog click the Advanced tab select Use Proxy Server and configure your proxy server settings Note When NetObjects Fusion cannot verify that an http rlogin tn3270 snews or JavaScript link is valid Unsupported URL Type displays in the Verify Status column If NetObjects Fusion cannot verify a mailto news or telnet link no status displays Managing Data Objects and Photo Galleries Data objects are collections of fields of data You can use a data object to publish data without using CGI scripts or database programming For information about data objects including how to create and delete them in Assets view see Chapter 27 Data Publishing 570 5 New Asset Chapter 30 Managing Assets When you click the Data Objects tab NetObjects Fusion displays a list of all the data objects used in your site In an internal data object you can edit the name and field names and add new fields See Changing an Internal Data Field Name on page 480 For an external data object you can change Simple fields to Image fields and vice versa but you cannot edit field names or add new fields because these items depend on data in the external data file Data objects can also be deleted but use care when deleting and make sure the data object is no longer in use on the site Photo galleri
313. ernet Explorer 3 x and up To add pictures that roll over 1 In Page view select the Picture Rollover tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar Rollover Picture toal 2 Draw a box on the page where you want to locate the pictures A picture placeholder and the Picture Rollover Properties palette appear Picture Rollover Properties 20 Picture Rollover Ax 3 To specify the first image to display double click the Initial image row select the image from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open 462 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components The Picture Rollover Properties palette changes and displays two new rows Mouse over image and Mouse out image Picture Rollover Properties 2 x 20 Picture Rollover backpack jpg El A xd Mouse over image 4 To specify the image to display when the mouse pointer moves over the image double click the Mouse over image row select the image from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open Note The images you select for rollover pictures are resized to the size of the first image you select For best results use images that are the same size 5 To specify which image to display when the site visitor moves the mouse pointer off the picture double click the Mouse out image row select the image from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open 6 To link the image to a specific URL double c
314. erties palette will appear Enter the total number of table rows or columns in the Rows field or Columns field Extra rows are deleted from the bottom of the table and extra columns are deleted from the right side of the table delete a specific row right click on the highlighted row and select Delete Table Row delete a specific column right click on the highlighted column and select Delete Table Column Merging and Splitting Table Cells 1 In Page view select the cells in the table that you want to merge or split See Selecting Table Cells on page 248 The Table Properties palette will appear In the adjust area on the properties palette divide the cell select Split Cells and enter the number of rows and or columns you want to split the cell into in the Split Cells dialog The maximum is 10 x 20 merge cells select Merge Cells All borders between the selected cells disappear 245 Adjusting the Table Structure Merge Cells Adjust Split Cells 246 Chapter 15 Adding Tables Setting Row and Column Properties When you select a table row or column a Row or Column tab is added to the Cell Properties palette 1 2 6 In Page view select the table Select a row or column by moving the mouse pointer over the table border and clicking when you see the single headed arrow Drag to select multiple rows or columns The Cell
315. erved 68 Chapter 5 Importing Sites and Documents HTML coding practices vary so the contents of the source site pages are unpredictable Spaces in html file names cause import problems e NetObjects Fusion does not import server side imagemaps or manage server side resources If the imported site originally used server resources such as JavaScripts CGI scripts or server side includes you must manually recreate these on your server If a page contains too much script you can reference the HTML See Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML e NetObjects Fusion imports all HTML tables in the site e NetObjects Fusion s import feature supports most of the HTML 3 2 specification Cascading style sheet coding is removed from pages during import Content with no other alignment formatting is placed flush left on its page e When you import a site that was built using HTML frames NetObjects Fusion imports the frameset s content pages as regular pages and references the original frameset page as an external HTML page Sites created in NetObjects Fusion MX NetObjects Fusion 7 or 7 5 or NetObjects Fusion 8 generally import with few problems but you should be prepared to clean up an imported site created from another source Adjust font sizes and styles as needed and add NetObjects Fusion navigation bars and banners as appropriate to your design If a page does not import the way you expect check the original source f
316. es all associated links Assets view lists the internal links in your site Using an anchor you can link to a specific page or to a specific location on the current page See Adding Editing and Deleting an Anchor on page 319 To create an internal link 1 a 2 Link tool List of all pages in the site See Setting Link Targets on page 327 See Adding HTML to a Link on page 332 In Page view select an object or text to link Ifyou place an insertion point in text without selecting text the link name is inserted in the text Click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar or the Link button on the object s Properties palette The Link dialog appears Select Internal Link as the link type Link type Internal Link Find Find Again Intemal links AX Anchor links s B Home Name Mission 5 Events m Anchors Activities Top on the C Highlights selected Next Tour age Contest pag E Wonder Lodge C Current page Target Existing v Name m None HTML Poe UP Window Cancel 317 Creating Links e Ifyou are linking to a page select the page in the SiteStructure Link type Internal Link Find Find Again D Internal links 4 Anchor links s B Events Activities Highlights Nest Tour amp T Contest B Wonder Lodge C Current page Target Existing
317. es on page 410 eee Your messages become available 28 ShowPicture under Custom in the When and PicturelsIn Message menus DelaylsDone Edit Using custom messages rather than a generic End Motion trigger to trigger each slide s entrance and exit lets you control exactly which motion triggers what 4 Add five actions to the Layout Region as described in Adding Actions to Objects and Pages on page 403 For each action fill out the Set Action dialog like this Action 1 Enter Page Page Loaded in the When field the Layout Region in the Target field and Custom ShowPicture in the Message field 423 Examples Action 2 Enter Custom ShowPicture in the When field the Layout Region in the Target field and Motion Fly in the Message field Then open the Values dialog from the Parameters menu enter a Direction value of 270 degrees and make sure Visibility is set to Show which tells the picture to fly in from the left Also enter PicturelsIn as the Completion Message Parameter Values 2 x Values for a Fly action Picturelsln X These two settings are equivalent to choosing In From Left from the Parameters menu Direction degrees When the Fly action is complete this custom message is sent to the target to trigger the next action Reverse Direction Completion Message sin You define the Fly action s parameters in the Values dialog instead of choo
318. es are a special type of data object For information about photo galleries including how to delete them in Assets view see Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries You can configure a photo gallery here by double clicking it Managing Variables Text variables make it easy to update text that appears throughout your site User defined variables are displayed in Assets Variables view so you can edit create or delete them NetObjects Fusion also provides standard variables such as the date and time the site was created or last modified but these are not displayed in Assets Variables view Note See Changing General Settings on page 52 to enable variable subsitutions Adding a Variable 1 In Assets Variables view from the Assets menu choose New User Defined Variable or click New Asset on the control bar The New Variable dialog appears New Variable Variable name Value Cancel 571 Managing Variables 2 Enter a name and value for your variable and click OK 572 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Editing a Variable 1 Double click the variable in Assets Variables view The Edit Variable dialog appears Edit Variable Variable name Value 12 99 Cancel 2 Edit the name and value of the variable and click OK If you edit the value of the variable NetObjects Fusion updates all text blocks containing that variable with the new value See Creating a User Defined Var
319. es attempts to move or rename read only files An R attribute and lock symbol in the directory structure indicate a read only file Deleting Folders 1 Ineither pane of Publish view click the folder you want to delete and make sure it is empty You cannot delete a folder until it is empty and you cannot delete pages or assets in Publish view 2 Right click the folder and select Delete Folder from the shortcut menu NetObjects Fusion deletes the folder 603 Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure Rearranging the Directory Structure In either pane of Publish view click the folder page or asset you want to move and drag it to its new location If the change was made in the Local pane NetObjects Fusion moves the object and updates all references and links to it If you move local pages NetObjects Fusion remembers their new locations but might continue to auto generate folders needed to contain that page s assets Components and their related assets have a black lock image on their icons signifying that they cannot be renamed or rearranged Viewing and Setting Publishing Properties In addition to their other properties your site s folders pages and assets have publishing properties that indicate or control the way they are included in your published site Three of these publishing properties indicate the publishing status for that Local folder page or asset e Folders pages and assets that were r
320. et such as the names and attributes for each frame in the frameset and META tags for the page 545 Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML NetObjects Fusion MySite nod review Site Publish Site d oadRolover Left Frame is ad Fol lt BEGIN Page Start of File Script gt E C3 Tags Cr qpocret uca BESTEWIUNUNTSHERESGESNTR ERES the source EE pus code for the te NETS Gent left frame BASE amp v Body Frame is oN HTTP EqUIVe Convent Type CONTENT cext htal charset 180 8859 1 gt o lt STYLE gt WAME Generator CONTENT WetObjects Fusion 7 5 for Vindows gt the source lt BODY gt 78 qb Noona code for the as main page Li IMG Layout BB lt TD gt A jg Frameset ER lt I Page is the Leia TypE text fess HREF tile C Netobjects Fusion 8 User Sites MySite Preview site css gt source code for the 0 N T eB BIS frameset B BR lt TR gt E sam gl 5 E LettFrame 0 Body Frame E Frameset Page To edit a frame 1 Click the HTML Source tab in Page view 2 Click the tab with the name of the frame you want to edit See Editing the Page s HTML on page 536 Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML Indexing Pages for Search Engines To give your content the best chance of being found and ranked by search engines like AltaVista you can add META tag descriptions an
321. etObjects Fusion 86W Browse Save As Global Profile Show 29 Close 3 Select one of the following Server Types FTP File Transfer Protocol Protocol that allows users to transfer files from one computer to another over the Internet 592 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol Secure version of the FTP protocol SFTP uses SSL to encrypt the entire user session thereby protecting the contents of the files and the user s login name and password from outside sources WebDAV Set of extensions to the HTTP protocol which allows users to collaberatively edit and manage files on remote web servers Global Profile Name Server Type o Local Publish C Program Files NetObjects Local Network Local Publish FTP File Transf New Duplicate Remove Attributes Server Type rre File Transfer Protocol Profile Name re Profile Advanced Server Jmyservercom Directory weste User Name jusername Password Perl Test Save As Global Profile Show Close Note Although many ISPs and hosting companies use a single server to receive files and provide Web hosting the service you use may have separate servers for receiving files and Web hosting Select the server to receive your transferred files Check with your ISP administrator for the correct server to select to receive your files Ente
322. ete and click Yes to confirm Switch to Page view select the data list and press Delete Switch to Assets view Click the Data Objects tab Select the data object and press Delete Click Yes to confirm the deletion Click the Files tab Select the data source file and press Delete 10 Click Yes to confirm the deletion 490 CHAPTER 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database You can use the NOF DB Component for PHP ASP or ColdFusion to let your Web site visitors view and instantly update live data in a Microsoft Access MySQL or other ADODB or ODBC compliant databases Customers can change their own contact information in your customer database search a database for a particular item or list the latest prices of all products What one visitor changes another can see instantly without having to wait while you re publish You do all this by placing NOF Database Objects in NetObjects Fusion that publish data via a Web server between your Web site and any PHP ASP or ColdFusion compliant database You don t need to write your own JScript or VBScript the components generate this code for you You should have some knowledge of relational databases and simple SQL SELECT queries to work with components directly Otherwise you can use wizards to build several types of applications without this experience This chapter describes How the Database Component works Creating a data source Using the database compone
323. ets CSS 3 Click OK Understanding the Automatic Setting When you select Automatic in text formatting dialogs the format attributes of a higher or parent style pass through to the lower or child style The order of the cascading styles is Browser SiteStyle Site Page ips Selected text The SiteStyle is the parent of the Site which is the parent of the Page Thus selecting Automatic for an attribute at the Page level lets the setting for that attribute pass from the Site to the Page If the same attribute is set to Automatic in the Site as well then the SiteStyle setting for that attribute flows to the Site and then unimpeded to the Page For example if you set the font color to red at the SiteStyle level and set font color to Automatic on both the Site level and the Page level text at the page level is automatically red when you type it The red attribute flows all the way from SiteStyle to the text 155 Formatting Text When you change a setting at a higher level it changes the corresponding setting at the lower level if the setting at the lower level is Automatic So if the setting at the Page level is Automatic and you change the font at the Site level the font setting changes for the Page level too This feature provides you with a fast powerful way to make formatting changes throughout your site by simply making the change once at the higher levels Of course there may be times when you don t
324. ette and add whatever content you want to appear in the main frame for each page Add content to the Home page You can t preview to see scripted frames so publish the site and test your frames Click each button in the bottom frame The One button should display the contents of the One page in the top frame the Two button should display the Two page in the top frame and the Home button should exit the frames altogether and display the Home page in the whole browser window s Took Gt Bsearch GFavortes Brstoy yy S 4 AAO 7 5 User SiteslMountain JacqueslLocal Publishlframes html Click Here i in June main frame footer frame IEJ Done Bw Computer Frameset HTML you Add pictures and text to added defines the frame content pages using boundaries NetObjects Fusion tools 557 Coding Your Own Frames 558 CHAPTER 30 Managing Assets With NetObjects Fusion you can manage all the assets files links data objects and variables used in your site In Assets view you can navigate to the pages on which these assets appear delete unused assets and verify the location of assets that are in use For information about how to add assets to a site see Chapter 6 Page View Basics NetObjects Fusion uses aliases for files and external links so you can globally replace an item that appears on several pages such as a picture or an extern
325. ette appear Rotating Ad Banner Propertidea P 20 Rotating Ad Banner ses 3 Banner Type Autom Specify the Banner Type Image Size The Ad Banner is the same size as the images you select Standard Banner Size Click Banner Size and choose from the drop down list e Custom Enter a width and height for the Ad Banner Enable or disable Automatic Resizing If Automatic Resizing is disabled you must choose images that are the same size If Automatic Resizing is enabled Ad Banner resizes the larger images to match the smallest image For best results use images that are the same size Set Pause Time to control how long each image is displayed Enter the total number of images you want to use You can use from 1 to 50 images To select an image double click the Image row select the image from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open Double click the URL for Image row and in the Link dialog select a type of link for the image See Creating Links on page 316 Specify the link information and click Link Click the Transition row and select a transition from the drop down list You can choose e Column to draw increasingly larger columns of the new image onto the old image The new image appears to slide in from behind the old image 455 Adding DynaButtons DynaButtons tool Fade to change one image into another by drawing a set of random pixels from the n
326. etwork SiteStyles as the Source Type Click Next Enter a name for the new source Add Network SiteStyles Source x Network SiteStyles Source Name Network SiteStyles Network SiteStyles Source Path Meerveridiectory styles Test e _ This is the name that will appear in the Style view Type in the path or navigate to the styles folder located on your network The path entered must include the folder where the SiteStyles are stored For example if your network stores its styles in a folder called Mountain Bikes the path will look similar to server directory styles Warning If you do not specify the folder where the styles are located all of the directory contents will be displayed in Style view Click Test to verify the path entered is valid Click Finish NetObjects Fusion adds the style source name to the style list 293 Managing SiteStyles SiteStyles from Imported Sites If you import a site built with a previous version of NetObjects Fusion you may notice several additional or duplicate styles added to your Style view Previous versions of NetObjects Fusion associated each style in the SiteStyles list with a site nod As a result all of the SiteStyles included in your template are considered active and therefore imported into your Active SiteStyles Remove Unused Active Site Styles Please select the unused SiteStyles you would like to remove from the Active SiteS
327. ew image onto the old image Rotate to make it appear as though one image is rotating upward from below the other image Smash to drop the new image onto the old one The old image appears to crumble under the weight of the new image Tear to make it appear as though the old image is ripped away to reveal the new image e Unroll to place the new image on top of the old image and unroll it When the site displays in the browser the sequence begins with a random image and its associated transition 11 Repeat steps 7 through 10 for each image you want to rotate into the Ad Banner You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Adding DynaButtons DynaButtons are Java buttons that link to another page on your site other sites or a specific file You can place DynaButtons anywhere on your pages and assign up to 20 buttons to a DynaButton bar In addition you can assign up to 20 sub buttons to each DynaButton You can create sub buttons for navigating from a main page to pages at a lower level When you publish the site each button appears in the browser in the primary button style selected for the site and displays the name of the page to which it is linked You cannot assign custom images to DynaButtons The button s style is determined by your SiteStyle To use custom images for buttons use the Picture Rollover tool Because a DynaButton is an active link the button a
328. ew where you want to add it The inserted site page or section becomes a child of the selected page You can move the pages once they are inserted All inserted pages take on the SiteStyle of the current site For example if several developers separately create parts of a site export their work as templates and insert the templates into a single master site for publishing the 61 Using Templates to Expand a Site master site s SiteStyle ensures that the compiled site has a consistent look and feel If you save the site as a template the SiteStyle is saved as well See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles When NetObjects Fusion inserts a template if the MasterBorder names duplicate those already in the site it prefixes the template s MasterBorders with Inserted and adds them to the current site s library of MasterBorders You can rename edit or delete these extra MasterBorders See Chapter 10 Managing MasterBorders e Every template begins with a single root page which is helpful if you are adding the template to your site However if you want the root page of your template to be the Home page of your site you must create a new site based on the template rather than inserting it To insert a template 1 In Site view right click the page under which you want to insert the template This page becomes the parent of the inserted page or pages 2 Select Insert Template from the shortcut menu The Insert Te
329. f file you are inserting If your applet or servlet requires additional files click the Additional Files button then click Add in the Java Applet Files dialog This list shows all the Class files that NetObjects Fusion detects for the selected Java applet or servlet Java Applet Files led clock class Select another file in the Add Java Applet Files dialog and click Open Click OK to add the selected file To delete a class file from the Class list click the Additional Files button and select the appropriate file in the Java Applet Files dialog Click Delete then click OK To add parameters to the Java applet click the Parameters tab Java Properties 2 x Parameters Name Value ledcolor backcolor framecolor clock mode time mode Parameter info string color of the characters ex green 383 Inserting a Java Bean Component oo Java Bean tool This guide assumes you are familiar with Java and understand the effects of setting these parameters In some cases Java developers provide documentation that explains the parameters To edit parameters double click the parameter and enter a value in the Enter Value dialog For servlets you can specify that the value is an initialization value for the parameter by checking Value is an initializer in the Enter Value dialog learn more about each parameter look in the Parameter info section
330. f no value is entered the first row will be the default 8 Adda second iterator to the page In the Recordset Iterator Properties editor select End as the type Recordset Iterator End Make sure to leave empty cells in between the Start and End iterators so that data output objects can be included in the loop Displaying Data Fields You can display recordset results using any of the data output objects provided Multiple types of data output objects can be placed on a page For example you can place Label Link and Hidden Field objects on the page to display the data fields correctly If you added Recordset Iterator objects to the page you will need to place these data output objects between the Start and End recordset iterators Otherwise the data fields will not be included in the loop and no data will be displayed 514 A Label Object Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Displaying Text Image and Link Fields You can display text image and link fields To display text data fields 1 In Page view select the Label object from the NOF DB Component toolbar Note You cannot add a Label object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the label s location The Label Properties palette appears Al Selected Label object You can add one or several labels to your page For example if you
331. f records will be done in alphabetical order unless specified on the Recordset tab Importing a Database Schema If your Connection settings were entered on the Connection tab and a test connection was successful you can import the database schema and view records in the database 502 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database 1 In Page view select the Connector object from the NOF DB Component toolbar 2 Click on the page to indicate the connector s location The Connector dialog appears 3 Complete the settings on the Connection tab The Database tab will become active 4 Click on the Database tab and select Import from Connection Connector Connector1 x Connection Database Recordsets Department Phone 2 Email 5 89 Title DID Select to automatically import the database schema IV Import from Connection The database schema will appear in the Schema field Note The Import from Connection checkbox is selected by default You may notice a delay when switching tabs while the schema editor is retrieving the schema information 5 To list table or column field data highlight a table or field and click View Data 503 Setting up the Database Connection 6 A dialog displaying the first 25 records or fields will appear Technical Support 6500 istrith email com 2Mary Jones Human Resources 6633 mjones email com x Click OK to close the dialog
332. fficient To force objects to snap to e Guides select Snap to Guides from the View menu e Grids select Snap to Grid from the View menu e Other objects select Snap to Object Outlines from the View menu Make sure the item you are snapping to is visible in Page view See Setting Up the Page Design View Display on page 77 Layering Objects NetObjects Fusion supports Fixed Page Layout a form of HTML output that displays overlapped objects correctly Site visitors using Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 x or higher or Netscape Communicator 4 x can see objects overlap other objects See Publishing with Fixed Page Layout on page 107 To overlap objects 1 In Page view on the General tab of the Layout Properties palette select Fixed Page Layout in the HTML output section 2 Place two or more objects in the Layout or a Layout Region 93 Adding Services Object Tree palette Objects are layered in the order in which you place them To change the layering order see the next section Rearranging Layered Objects 1 In Page view click the Object Tree palette button in the lower left corner 2 Inthe Object Tree palette click the object you want to move Handles appear around the object on the page 3 Click and drag the object up or down the tree to move it to a different layer or from the Object menu choose Arrange Objects and select Bring Forward to bring the object up one layer Bring to Front to bring the
333. font settings To ensure that your pages appear in your browser the way you design them in NetObjects Fusion choose the same font settings in your browser that you use in your site For example if you use Times New Roman size 12 and Courier New size 10 for your browser proportional and fixed width fonts choose the same fonts and sizes in NetObjects Fusion The 23 Setting Text Options suggested settings are the defaults used by Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator when they are installed These settings do not change the actual font in the HTML generated by NetObjects Fusion they only mimic the effect of a font change To change the font see Modifying a Text Style on page 174 NetObjects Fusion sizes text boxes based on the expected font size so when you change sizes you change the Layout of the page slightly Automatically select entire word If this option is selected when you start to drag the mouse pointer over a word NetObjects Fusion automatically selects the entire word and the space after it Smart spell check If this option is selected after NetObjects Fusion checks spelling of a text block it does not check the same text again unless you modify the text or clear this option Check spelling as you type If this option is selected NetObjects Fusion will check the text as you type and then mark possible errors with wavy underlines To make a correction right click on the word and select the
334. form objects text boxes and other objects to the Layout Region you can freely position and align them just as you position objects in a Layout area Create text based form Text box creates a form in a text box Text you type and form objects you add appear sequentially just as when you type This is a good choice for forms that have a lot of text where objects appear sequentially or that have a simple layout like a row of check boxes or a single column of fields A text box form typically generates less HTML when you publish than a Layout Region form Create form in a Table creates a table where you can line up form objects by inserting them in table cells Each cell acts like a text box where you type and add objects just as you add other objects to a table You can only have one table for the entire form If you define a Layout Layout Region or text box as a form you can insert multiple tables to help align form objects 430 Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Define Layout as a form limits page to one form creates a single form on the page that occupies the entire Layout area Click OK gt p Add fields check boxes and other objects to your form along with images and other content as described in Adding Objects to a Form hiess die MEL COL Layout Region Form Please let us know how you like our services we send more information 1 USPS O E mail
335. g anchors 319 color palettes 15 custom HTML you added 543 551 file assets 563 564 hotspots 334 HTML 536 HTML and scripts 539 imagemaps 334 links 332 334 paths to custom HTML assets 535 SiteStyles 295 variables 573 ellipses see shapes email links 323 email submitting forms data 443 EMBED SRC 397 Embedded object icon 78 embedded objects creating 124 moving 124 exporting sites 63 expressions JavaScript 416 external data objects definition of types 477 filtering 483 ODBC drivers 480 external file editors setting 21 external HTML adding 390 assets managed 397 distinguishing in Site view 392 publishing unmodified code 398 referencing as object 394 referencing external HTML 389 referencing from Site view 390 referencing in the Layout area 392 referencing instead of importing 390 sizing on page 396 external links 316 creating 322 updating 567 F fields adding to internal data object 479 adding to stacked pages 486 changing field names 480 displaying all on Layout 484 inserting 181 file directory structure 589 file assets adding 562 deleting 564 565 editing 564 external HTML 397 managing 561 opening 564 types 561 verifying 565 File Data Source external data objects 481 file editors setting external 21 file formats Jpg jpeg files 479 audio 374 for internal data 479 images 188 Shockwave 368 video 373 file links 316 creating 325 file names HTML 556 in frameset files 556 files nod 28 moving 65
336. g Objects In a Layout or Layout Region you can align two or more objects to each other and distribute three or more objects equidistant from each other You can also align and distribute objects relative to the Layout or Layout Region 1 In Page view select the objects you want to align by Shift Clicking each one by drawing a marquee around objects in the Layout If you select different types of objects the Multi Object Palette appears If the object properties appear click the Position tab Multi Object Properties ARES Align Horizontally Left Center Right Vertically Top Center Bottom F Distribute Horizontally Vertically Relative to Layout 2 Ifyou want the objects to align or be distributed relative to the Layout or Layout Region in which the objects are placed select Relative to Layout 3 In the Align section specify the horizontal and vertical alignment When aligning objects NetObjects Fusion uses the object furthest in the direction you specify as the reference point For example if aligning left the leftmost object is used the topmost object is used when aligning top When centering objects NetObjects Fusion chooses the average distance between the selected objects as the center point 90 Chapter 6 Page View Basics Select an option from the Horizontally section to align objects left or right sides or to center them If you select Relative
337. g Template You can change or customize any NetObjects Fusion template For example You can customize a standard company template so it contains your department name location and personnel information If your company develops custom sites you can add your company name contact information and default links to the templates you use most often If you often create new pages or sites with the same look and feel you can add standard objects to the NetObjects Fusion Blank Site template To preserve the original template copy the template zip file before you edit or modify a default template If you need to undo changes to a default NetObjects Fusion template you can re install it Customizing a Template 1 2 From the File menu choose New Site gt From Template In the Select a Template File dialog select the template you want to customize and click Open In the Save Site As dialog give the site the same name as the template Do not enter an extension 64 Chapter 4 Working with Templates Modify the template page s and SiteStyle as necessary In Site view from the File menu choose Export as Template Choose the folder containing the original template if you want to modify the template or choose another location 1f you want to preserve the original template Insert the customized template in other sites as needed Sharing NetObjects Fusion Site Files Templates are the only effective way to share NetObjec
338. g parameter values Examples including a button rollover collision detection and a slide show 401 How Actions Work How Actions Work An action consists of a trigger event that causes the action to begin a message and various parameters specifying what the action does and one or more targets that perform the action A typical trigger event can be a mouse click or simply hovering over a button called a mouse over But the trigger event can also be an event such as a site visitor entering or exiting a page In that case loading the page might trigger pictures to fly across the page A trigger event can also be another action so one object flying off the page could make another object fly on action message might be to show or hide an object make an object fly off the page make an object stick to the pointer so the site visitor can drag it around the page display a dialog or alert and so on The target can be one more objects on the page the page itself or a MasterBorder You add an action to the object that triggers it For example suppose you want to add an action to a button so when a person clicks the button Picture A flies off the page The action you add to the button has the trigger event when clicked plus the action message fly off the page and Picture A as the target Clicking a button that has Sends a fly off the page To the target picture which an act
339. ge Anchor tool Add Anchor Name Anchors on page Bottom Top Cancel 3 Type a name for the anchor in the Name field The name cannot contain spaces Make sure each anchor has a different name 4 Click OK e If Object Icons is checked on the View menu the Anchor indicator appears at the anchor location on the page Anchor icon To edit the anchor select the anchored text or object click the Anchor button on the Properties palette and change its name in the Change Anchor dialog To delete the anchor click the Anchor icon and click Remove in the Change Anchor dialog If you are working with a text object you can click the anchor icon to open the Change Anchor dialog Creating a Smart Link Smart links lead to a page in your site based on its relative position in the SiteStructure rather than its name These links automatically adjust when you change the SiteStructure For example if your smart link leads to the parent of the current page and you move the current page to a different parent NetObjects Fusion updates the link to point to the new parent Sometimes a smart link is called a structural link To create a smart link 1 In Page view select some text or select an object to link If you link to a text insertion point the link name is inserted in the text 320 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors 2 On the Standard toolbar click the Link tool The Link dialog appears 3 Select
340. ge size by dragging the slider on the Properties Palette drag the slider to the right to increase the image size or to the left to decrease the image size A dotted line rectangle increases or decreases proportionally as you drag and the size of the image is displayed in a Screen Tip When the image is the size you want release the mouse button change the image size by entering the width directly in the Properties Palette type a number in the Width field 4 Apply the change e Ifyou on the List page click Apply to All to resize all thumbnail images e Ifyou are on a detail page click Apply to resize only the current photo Apply to All to resize all photos in the catalog 347 Working with Products Resizing Product Boundaries 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Click on the catalog object The Properties Palette appears 3 Resize the product boundaries Catalog Properties L2 EX Catalog Properties 2 x1 Configure Configure Click to change the Configure Click to change the Configure catalog options Configure catalog options _Contigue Catalog Bounding Bos Catalog Bounding Box Overall width Overall width 384 p s asi _ Vertical space between items Apply 10 Horizontal space between items Apply fo You can change the boundary size by dragging the slider on the Prope
341. ge the target Layout Properties Double click the last action of Slide 2 Set Action 2 x V Action2 fF to open the Set Action Pion actionis dialog afont On Dela When gt Actions On Dela Standard Action Target Slide3 E and edit the action to M ShowPicte target the Show Picture action at Slide 3 Parameters Cascade message Cancel 2 9 For the last slide deactivate all but the first action by clearing the box to the left of the action Layout Properties 2 X o Object ID ActivitiesLayout Object initially visible in browser Actiont On Page Lo The last slides actions Action2 On PicturelsIn do Delay Action3 On DelaylsDone do Fly Clear the box next to each action that doesn t apply to the last slide so the actions aren t published By deactivating rather than deleting actions that target another currently nonexistent slide you can easily add slides to your show later by reactivating and targeting the actions at a new slide 426 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Make sure Fixed Page Layout is selected as the HTML output method on the Layout Properties palette and that Word wrap is cleared in the HTML Options dialog you access from the Site Settings General tab Then preview the page to test your slide show Loading the page sends a ShowPi
342. ge to a pointing finger you need only edit the file asset so Next Page uses the pointing finger image file NetObjects Fusion automatically changes the image on all the pages that include the Next Page image asset The File dialog displays an asset s name location and the pages on which it is used To display the File dialog double click an asset s name in Assets Files view This is the name that appears in the Name list in Assets Files view Name Location CANetObjects Fusion ser Sites W Browse This is the asset location N lways publish file Pages Selecting this option publishes the asset any time the site is published even if the ctivities DefaultMasterBorder are Contest DefaultMasterB order Home DefaultMasterBorder My New Catalog DefaultMasterBorde MyStore DefaultMasterBorder Untitled Stacked Page DefaultMasterBorder Untitled Stacked Page DefaultMasterBorder v These are the pages on which the asset is used 561 Managing File Assets 5 New Asset Note Image files that you place on stacked pages to populate an internal data object are not listed in Assets view You can manage such files directly on the stacked pages For information about data objects and stacked pages see Chapter 27 Data Publishing File Asset Characteristics To effectively manage assets it helps to understand the characteristics
343. ghout entire site The Duplicate Text Style dialog box 1s similar Duplicating a style is a quick way to give it a different scope For example you can duplicate the H1 style to the H2 H3 and H4 headings and then edit them individually 4 In the Style type section select Redefine HTML tag and choose a tag to edit from the drop down list Create custom style and type a name for the style in the field A period is added to the custom style s name such as customstylename In HTML the custom style is then referred to as class customstylename 5 Selecta style scope for the new style Page specific If you select this option the new style 1s only available for the current page If you are redefining an existing tag the original definition is still in force for the rest of the site If you create a new style it is not available on any other page of the site e Site wide If you select this option the new style is available throughout the current site If you are redefining an existing tag all instances of this tag change throughout the site For example if you change the H1 font color to red and select Site wide all text in the site with that style applied becomes red 6 Click OK The Text Format dialog appears You can now set the attributes for each feature of the style See Formatting Paragraphs on page 158 and Formatting a List on page 176 for details 172 Chapter 12 Designing with Text Creat
344. ghted Action 2 Enter Mouse Mouse Out in the When field the button in the Target field Object Use Image in the Message field and Image 1 Normal in the Parameters field Action 3 Enter Mouse Mouse Down in the When field the button in the Target field Object Use Image in the Message field and Image 3 Depressed in the Parameters field Action 4 Enter Mouse Mouse Up in the When field the button in the Target field Object Use Image in the Message field and Image 2 Highlighted in the Parameters field To link the rollover button to another page you can add one more action In the When field from the mouse drop down menu choose Clicked in the Target field choose layout in the Message field from the Location menu choose Go to URL and in the Parameters field from the drop down menu choose Values and select the link to go to 419 Examples 8 Preview the page to test your rollover Mouse over the button to see it highlighted and click it to see it pushed in Colliding One Object with Another This example demonstrates a drag action collision detection and custom messages where dragging one object into another makes the second object fly off the page 1 In Page view add two objects to the page 2 Make sure the first object the one you plan to drag is in front of the second object 3 Make a note of each object s ID as it appears on the Action tab of the properties palette 4 Select the first o
345. ground color behind the text Click the Color box to select a new color from the Color Picker Image sets the background to an image Click Browse to select an image e Attachment sets the background image to either remain fixed or scroll as the text scrolls This option applies only to Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 x Repeat sets how the image displays behind the text Choose None to display a single image that does not repeat Select Both to fill the background entirely with the image Select Horizontal or Vertical to display a row of images horizontally or vertically behind the text 164 Chapter 12 Designing with Text The horizontal and vertical settings do not work with many browsers Do not use this feature unless you expect your site visitors to use Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher for Windows or Internet Explorer 4 5 or higher for the Mac OS Netscape Navigator 4 7 and earlier do not use this feature properly Image Position sets the initial position of the background image This feature is supported by Internet Explorer 3 0 and higher but is not supported by Netscape Navigator 4 7 or earlier To set the position to a specific value select Value from the Horizontal and Vertical drop down lists and enter a value for the position in the selected unit of measurement To position the image correctly in browsers the horizontal and vertical values interact Note that when you change the setting for the horizontal or vertical
346. h components you can choose to publish or not publish them These components generally perform post publish processing of the generated HTML files 1 In Publish view from the Publish menu choose Publish Components The Publish Setup dialog appears with a list of available components 596 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site NetObjects Fusion 8 does not include Publish components by default so if you do not install third party components such as NetObjects Fusion Connector for Macromedia ColdFusion this dialog is blank 2 Select a component to include it with your site s HTML files when they are transferred 3 Click OK Viewing a Server s Contents Prior to transferring files to the server you may want to see which files are already on the server and the dates they were modified To see a Server s contents 1 In Publish view in the Remote pane choose the profile associated with the server you want to review and click Connect 2 Check the folder and file names and the modified dates to determine which folders and files you want to save or delete before transferring new HTML files to the server 597 Transferring Your Site to the Web Transferring Your Site to the Web To put your site on the Web you transfer it to your ISP or Web server When the publish process is complete your site is available to the world To transfer your site s HTML files 1 From the Publish menu choose Transfer Files to
347. h the site to a different directory do one of the following Enter the drive and directory path you want to use This path can point to an existing directory or create a new directory To publish to a different machine on your local network create a new local publish profile and browse to that machine Click Browse and select the folder you want to use or create a new folder To create a new folder select the folder in the Browse dialog in which you want to create the new folder then click OK Enter the name of the new folder at the end of the path in the Folder field 580 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site To prevent your site s HTML files from getting mixed in with other files you should always use an empty directory the first time you save the files 4 Click Advanced to configure publish settings Advanced Publish Settings File Naming Home page file name Index X File extension for HTML pages T i 3 Cancel 5 Select the options for your site s pages Home page file name Index is the default page name recognized by most Web servers Select Current Page Name to set the Home page to use the same name as in Site view Select Home or Default to set the page as in Home html and Default html ile extension for HTML pages Select htm html or shtml depending on the page extension your browser recognizes Click the browse button to enter a page extension that is not available in the d
348. han absolute path names for example use A HREF Index html gt rather than lt A HREF HTTP www your original domain com Index html gt You must position external HTML files in your NetObjects Fusion directory structure so the original paths work See Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure on page 602 NetObjects Fusion manages external assets referenced by these tags lt IMG SRC gt lt A HREF gt to non HTML assets such as sound files lt BODY BACKGROUND gt EMBED SRC gt 397 Publishing Native HTML e lt BGSOUND SRC gt lt SCRIPT SRC gt e lt INPUT SRC gt e APPLET CODE gt Although NetObjects Fusion manages external applets that are assets of referenced HTML it might not manage certain classes referenced by the applets Look in Assets view to see if any classes you reference aren t listed Then see Publishing Unmanaged Assets on page 400 for information on getting these classes and other unmanaged assets to the Preview folder or Web server Once an external asset is imported into Assets view you can use it anywhere throughout your site Deleting referenced HTML from your site removes its assets from Assets view unless they re in use elsewhere Publishing Native HTML When you preview or publish referenced HTML NetObjects Fusion copies the HTML from the original files to a location in the publish folder Note that some links may not work in Preview If managing external
349. hat directs the browser to open the link in 332 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors a new window or JavaScript that displays a dialog The steps below demonstrate how to add HTML that directs the browser to open the link in a new window For more information see Accessing an Object s HTML on page 550 1 In Page view select some text or an object to link 2 On the Standard toolbar click the Link tool The Link dialog appears 3 Selecta link type 4 Click the HTML button in the Link dialog If the HTML button is not available the object does not allow additional HTML The Link HTML dialog appears 5 Click the Inside Link tab to indicate where you want to add HTML or JavaScript 6 If you want the link to open the page in a new window type target NewWindow As you type the top part of the dialog displays your code in blue type as it will appear in the HTML NetObjects Fusion generates Link HTML Generated HTML Insert Field Insert File lt A HREF file C NetObjects Fusion 8 Tutorial Activities doc TARGET left gt Before Link Inside Link After Link 7 Click OK in the Link HTML dialog 8 Click Link in the Link dialog When you preview or publish the site the link opens a new browser window 333 Working with Imagemaps 8d Hotspot tool Working with Imagemaps Animagemap can contain several links in a single picture You create an imagemap by drawing
350. he data list thus acts as a table of contents each row contains data for and is linked to a single stacked page To create a data list 1 In Page view display the page on which you want to place the data list 2 Select the Data List tool from the Advanced toolbar and draw a rectangle in the Layout area The Data Publishing dialog appears Select the data object you want to use for this data list 482 Chapter 27 Data Publishing The fields in the selected data object are listed Data Publishing Current data object Data object TT gt New Sort by Simple Filter Set Data list Name Untitled Fields in the table or Fields worksheet in the current data object Simple Image File Add All Stacked pages Display all fields Add navigation buttons next previous up Gk Cancel 3 Choose a sort field from the drop down list For internal data objects you only sort on simple text or image fields Records are sorted in ascending order 4 To filter the data click the Set button You can use simple text fields to filter the data The Filter dialog appears Filter Expression Field Comparison Compare to REM begins with gt and Simple E begins with Clear Filter Cancel Simple begins with and 483 Creating a Data List By default all available records in the data list and on stacked pages appear
351. he Site Mapper does not show pages above this page in the site hierarchy If you place the Site Mapper component in a MasterBorder you can place it on any page using that MasterBorder It is recommended however that you place a Site Mapper component in the Layout of a single page in the site 2 Select the Site Mapper tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 3 Draw a box on the page to indicate the location of the Site Map button 467 Using Ticker Tape The Site Map button and the Site Mapper Properties palette appear Site Mapper Properties 2 xi 20 Site Mapper Stemapper 4 4 change the image displayed for the Site Map button double click the Image row then select the image file you want from the Picture File Open dialog The selected image appears on the page You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Using Ticker Tape If you want to announce a special promotion or event on your site you can use the Ticker Tape component to add a scrolling message to a page and set the colors and speed used to display the message To add a Ticker Tape display and set its properties mm 1 In Page view select the Ticker Tape tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar Ticker Tape tool Mua ii 2 Draw a rectangle to indicate the location and size of the Ticker Tape display 468 Chapter 26 Usi
352. he Table Styles area click on the table image 258 Chapter 15 Adding Tables The Table Properties palette will appear Button text Button text Button text Button text Button text Selected Table Classic MyStyle Name Classic Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Click to duplicate style Click to delete style Duplicste Dele Style Editor 31 L J 1 Text Text Click to format cells Text Text Text Text res ne ne ne A nal 2 Clear table style uum formatting 3 a name for the table style in the Name field 4 Create a table style See Creating a Table Style on page 255 To add or duplicate a table style click Duplicate To delete a table style click Delete To apply a Table Style created in Style view 1 In Page view select the Table you want to work with The Table Properties palette appears 2 Click on the Table Style tab 3 In the Table Style section click on the Site Style drop down list 259 Setting Table Styles Select from the list of active site styles Table Properties 2 X 8 Style Editor 3x3 Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Table Style Site Style Current Site Style 4 Current Site Style Table Set 4 Select
353. he check mark Shockwave Director Properties M E E If you ve worked with Director files you should be familiar with these options For information see your Shockwave or Director user guide You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Inserting a QuickTime Movie QuickTime developed by Apple Computer is a multimedia software architecture used to create and deliver graphics sound video text music and 3D media You can use the QuickTime tool to place QuickTime movies To display QuickTime movies site visitors must install the QuickTime plugin appropriate to their browser and platform For more information on QuickTime visit Apple Computer s site at www apple com quicktime To insert a QuickTime movie 1 In Page view select the QuickTime tool from the Digital Video flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate the location of the QuickTime movie The Open dialog appears 3 Select a QuickTime file from your hard disk or LAN or select a QuickTime file that was already used in the site on the Video Assets tab For information see Chapter 30 Managing Assets 370 Chapter 21 Placing Media QuickTime media has a mov or qt extension 4 Click Open The QuickTime placeholder and the QuickTime Properties palette appear Resize the QuickTime placeholder if necessary QuickTime Properties alo Eile Leader mov Browse
354. he default Ordered or Unordered List style To change the style see Formatting a List on page 176 To add an item to the list press Enter at the end of a line Press Shift Enter to start a new line under the same bulleted item To remove the list style from the selected list level click the List tab on the Properties palette and click Remove List To create a multi level numbered or bulleted List 1 In Page view select the text you want to include in the list Make sure each item in the list is a separate paragraph Click a list type button on the Text Properties palette Select the paragraph or paragraphs you want to make subordinate and click the right indent button or press Tab a Bullet one level one o Bullet one level twof o Bullet two level twof Bullet two level one Bullet three level one A Bullet one level twof B Bullet two level twof Each click of the indent button moves the selected paragraphs over one level in the list and adds the appropriate bullet or list character for that level 175 Formatting a List Formatting a List 1 In Page view select any text in a numbered or bulleted list 2 Click the List tab on the Text Properties palette Text Properties 2 X A iol Custom Style none X Format List Type Bullet type Automatic X Remove List 3 Click the Format button The List Settings dialog appears List Settings Character
355. he image is resized If you are on the thumbnail page all images are resized To change the image size by dragging the slider on the properties palette Drag the slider on the properties palette to the right to increase the image size or to the left to decrease the size A dotted line rectangle increases or 216 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries decreases proportionally as you drag and the size of the image is displayed in a ScreenTip Thumbnail Properties IE E r Proportional Dimension Width je Apply to all D 154 x 102 Rog DX File Size r Configure 34 To set or change the options for this thumbnail double click it or click Configure Configure When the image is the size you want release the mouse button To change the image size by entering the width directly in the Thumbnail Properties palette type a number in the Width field 4 Apply the change e Ifyou are on the thumbnail page click Apply to all to resize all thumbnail images Ifyou are on a photo page click Apply to resize only the current photo or Apply to all to resize all photos in the gallery Removing Photos You can remove photos from the gallery on the thumbnail page on the photo page or on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Removing a Thumbnail 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page of the gallery 2
356. he links They should all display contents in the default target frame Accessing an Object s HTML You can add HTML or script to pictures media a text box or any other object to modify or control that object You can enclose the object in HTML tags or add HTML or script inside the object s tag You can add code before and after a text box s HTML as described here To insert code inside a text box see Inserting HTML in a Text Box on page 553 1 In Page view select the object you want to add code to and click the HTML button on the Properties palette Or from the Object menu choose HTML The Object HTML dialog appears 2 Click the tab to indicate where you want to insert HTML or script Before Tag Adds code just before the object s tag as in your code lt IMG SRC gt if the object is a picture Inside Tag Adds code inside the object s tag as in lt IMG SRC Image gif attribute where attribute is your code This tab appears only if you can add something inside the object s tag After Tag Adds code just after the object s tag for example to insert closing HTML tag for any opening tag inserted before the object 3 Enter your code on the tab Your typing also appears shown in blue in the dialog s gray area where you can preview its location in the object s HTML 550 To add HTML or script between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt inside the lt BODY gt tag itself
357. he options on the Text Properties palette or by applying formats to entire paragraphs The Automatic setting which is a choice for many options throughout NetObjects Fusion allows formats to flow from one design level to another See Formatting Selected Text on page 156 Formatting Paragraphs on page 158 and Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 To apply many text attributes at once in a consistent manner you can use the Styles included with NetObjects Fusion and also create and apply your own text styles See Working with Text Styles on page 167 Selecting HTML or Cascading Style Sheet Text Formatting NetObjects Fusion provides two ways to generate the code that controls the format of the text in your site HTML or cascading style sheets CSS When you select HTML the default NetObjects Fusion uses standard HTML tags in the code that controls text formatting This results in consistent text display across browsers from older 2 0 and 3 0 versions to the most recent versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator Using this setting also ensures that you can update sites created with earlier versions of NetObjects Fusion Cascading style sheets provide a way for site designers to incorporate typographical elements like line spacing and letter spacing that are not supported by standard HTML in their sites These styles are specified in css files which are attached to the site When
358. he site is in Greek and the correct character set is not specified in the META tag then before importing you should choose an appropriate character set from the drop down list If there is no character set specified in the META tag and you forget to set the correct character set before importing NetObjects Fusion assigns the ISO 8859 1 character set 619 URL and Page Name Character Requirements URL and Page Name Character Requirements The characters in a URL are limited to those represented in lower ASCII which includes uppercase and lowercase English letters numbers and common English punctuation You cannot use accented characters or other special characters in a URL You can however name pages using accented characters The names on the banner and buttons display in the correct international form In Publish view however file names page names and folders change to names with unaccented characters For Japanese NetObjects Fusion uses the ASCII characters that are normally converted to a Japanese character For other Asian languages a numeric file name is assigned For European languages NetObjects Fusion strips out the accents the words look the same but without accents For example if you name a page f in Site view in Publish view it is listed as ete html 620 Index A A HREF 397 Action icon 78 actions 401 action messages 402 406 adding to objects 403 adding to text 408 assigning to banners 3
359. hing Locally Publishing Your Site The first time you publish a site you must publish the entire site Later when you re fixing problems or updating information you can publish only the portion of the site that changed Note The site s files are generated in the HTML output format that you specify in the Browser compatibility field of the Current Site Options dialog See Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output 1 In Publish view Site view or Page view click the Publish Site button on the control bar Publish Site The Publish Site dialog appears Publish Site 2 x r Save location Publish files to 2 Pages to publish Entire Site m Publish changed assets only Show 2 amp Publish Cancel 2 From the Publish files to drop down list choose Local Publish to specify your local hard disk as the destination for the published HTML files 3 From the Pages to publish drop down list select the portion of the site you want to publish Entire Site Publishes HTML files for all pages and associated assets for the site Select Entire Site the first time you publish a site e Current Page only Publishes the page you selected in Site view or Page view Usually you use this feature 1f you make a change on one page and want to update just that page s HTML files The selected page name appears in the page field 584 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site e Select P
360. his option is selected your site is saved each time you change views or pages and when you close NetObjects Fusion If you clear the Auto save check box be sure to save your site periodically by choosing Save Site from the File menu Application window maximized at startup If you clear the check box for this option the NetObjects Fusion window opens in the last size you set rather than full screen size Open to most recently used file at startup When this option is selected the last site you worked on opens automatically when you start NetObjects Fusion If Open to most recent view is also selected the site is displayed in the last view you worked in If this option or Open to most recent view is cleared you see Online view when you start NetObjects Fusion If you switch to another view before opening a site you see View tips Open file to most recent view If this option is selected when you open a site it is displayed in the last view you worked in 20 Chapter 2 Setting Application Options Use small fonts in properties palette If you clear this check box you see larger properties palettes in Page view To maximize the area available for your page Layout leave this option selected Compact database upon exit This option is selected by default Compacting the files can save you substantial hard disk space In addition when this option is selected NetObjects Fusion performs an error checking procedure to verify your dat
361. hod There s no best way to lay out your pages your circumstances determine which method works best The pros and cons of each method are listed here Using Layouts If precise placement of content is important to you or if you want to publish individual pages using an HTML output type that is different from the rest of the site use the Layout area as the container for your page layout Layout Advantages You have pixel level control of the layout and design of your page You can drag and drop objects into position You can specify the HTML output type for any individual Layout Layouts support the column or row priority for page formatting which means pages adjust more predictably to a site visitor s font and display configurations Layout Limitations Position based pages require more HTML code to achieve pixel level placement of content so your HTML files will be somewhat larger Text cannot flow around other objects unless they are embedded in a text box To create a text wrap effect you have to create multiple text boxes to contain the other objects You cannot set the Layout to wrap to the width of your site visitor s browser If the browser window is wider than your page the page s background fills in if the window is smaller than your page width your site visitor has to scroll 97 Selecting a Layout Method Using Layout Regions Like Layouts Layout Regions offer pixel level placement and a choice
362. hout style because the custom style did not affect those attributes Applying the Shhh custom style however looks like this The H1 heads would look like this In this case the lt H1 gt text in the Shhh style does not include the bold and large font size because you changed those attributes instead of using the Automatic settings Ifthe settings for bold and large remained Automatic the Shhh style would include the bold and large font When you apply custom styles the name of the custom style 1s appended to the original HTML tag style with a period to differentiate the original HTML tag style from the new custom style So the two H1 custom styles become lt H1 Shout gt and lt H1 Shhh gt When NetObjects Fusion generates the HTML the styles are represented as H1 class Shout gt and H1 class Shhh gt Setting a Style s Scope When creating styles you can limit the range of a style s effects by setting the scope of the style The scope of a style determines where the style s effects are available and applied The scope options are e All available styles Shows all styles regardless of scope e SiteStyle The style is available whenever the SiteStyle is applied Site The style is available throughout the current site Page The style is available only on a specific page of the current site You set the scope of a style when you create it 169 Working with Text Styles Creating a Text Style 1 In Pag
363. iable on page 182 for information about adding variables to your pages Deleting a Variable 1 In Assets Variables view select the variable you want to delete 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete User Defined Variable 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Note You cannot undo this operation You must use the New Variable command to recreate the variable Do not delete a variable that 1s in use If you do it will be replaced with Undefined User variable variable name in the text where it was used 573 Managing Variables 574 CHAPTER 3l Publishing Your Site After completing your site design and development you re ready to publish the results Publishing puts your site on a FTP SFTP or WebDAV server so you and others can see it using a browser The NetObjects Fusion publishing process generates HTML files for the site s pages and associated assets NetObjects Fusion transfers the generated HTML files to the server you use for Web hosting You can control the location of your site directing NetObjects Fusion to save it to a local disk drive so only you can see it or to a remote server so others can see it too When you re sure the site is ready for the Web you publish it to a Web server so everyone in the world can visit your site Note Sites published with NetObjects Fusion work with any Web server on any operating platform No special Web server extensions are required If your site contains speci
364. iated with photos such as path caption and title and Thumbnail page text links are not included in a saved profile Removing a Photo Gallery 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page of the gallery you want to remove 2 Select the photo gallery object and delete it 3 Go to Site view 4 Delete the photo page associated with the gallery When you add a new photo gallery the name of the gallery you just removed still appears in the Insert an existing Photo Gallery list in the Add Photo Gallery dialog To delete a photo gallery completely from your site 1 Go to Assets view 2 Select the Data Objects tab 3 Select the photo gallery you want to delete 236 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries 4 Press Delete You can delete a photo gallery only if you have first removed it from your site as described above 237 Removing a Photo Gallery 238 CHAPTER 15 Adding Tables Presenting information in tabular format is often an effective way to convey complex concepts and ideas NetObjects Fusion makes it easy to add tables to a site You can select and work with a whole table just a row just a column a single cell or several rows columns or cells Each of these objects has its own properties palette and its own HTML button so you can apply HTML to the cell row column or table In addition you can perform advanced actions such as sorting exporting data This chapter describes Adding tables
365. iew 1 2 4 Select the page you want to work with On the Page tab of the Properties palette click the Custom Names button In the Custom Names dialog type the custom names you want to use Custom Names Navigation button Wonder Lodge Banner Wonder Lodge File extension Cancel e Navigation button Appears on navigation buttons leading to this page To add a second line of text press Enter after the first line Banner Appears in the page s banner add a second line of text press Enter after the first line e File extension Page files usually have an htm or html extension A page sometimes requires a different extension to function with specific server software For example pages for secure locations use the extension shtml The extension you choose for this page overrides the extension you specify in Publish view See Setting Up to Publish Locally on page 580 When you finish entering names click OK You can also rename buttons and banners in Page view using the object s Properties palette See Change a Button s Name on page 307 and Changing the Banner Text on page 312 Setting Up the Site View Display You use options on the View menu in Site view to set up your Site view display You can change the Site view orientation and background color and color code the page icons These settings are strictly for working in Site view They have no effect on the published site 47
366. ify code you enter so be sure to use valid syntax You can use any combination of typing inserting existing script text from a text file click Insert Script and open the file from the File Open dialog or inserting a call to an existing action or function To insert a call to an existing action click Insert Action A list of the actions you added to the object appears Select an action to insert and click OK NetObjects 415 Scripting Parameter Values Fusion inserts the action at the insertion point in the text box in the form ActionName Actions 2 x 3 Set Action 2 x Name In NN When Transition Ended i FlyOut gt m Insert Script Insert Action Cancel Selecting this action and clicking OK Inserts the action call FlyOut in your script 4 Click OK in the Set Action dialog Note If you re scripting an action and need to define JavaScript functions or other parameters insert the defining script into the Between Head Tags field of the Layout HTML or Master HTML as appropriate Scripting Parameter Values You can customize an action s parameter values instead of choosing from the ones NetObjects Fusion provides by generating them with a JavaScript expression For example you might use the value a site visitor types in a form object as the number of seconds value in a Delay action If you know JavaScript you can enter expressions directly You can a
367. ile for incorrect or nonstandard HTML code 69 Importing Existing Sites Creating a New Site from an Existing Site 1 From the File menu choose New Site gt From Existing Web Site The Import Web Site dialog appears Import Web Site rk Remote on the Intemet Home page Browse Options When importing a site to add to the current site you can assign a Limit number of pages to MasterBorder Down to structural level Domain name www domain com This is needed for managing links Cancel Assign MasterBorder ZeroMargins 2 Select Local or Remote import 3 Enter the exact file location and path to the top level page you want to import specify a local site enter the full drive and path to the local site s top level source page in the Home page field or click Browse select the appropriate top level page and click OK specify a remote site enter the full URL to the site s top level source page in the Home page field To ensure accuracy navigate to the site or page using your browser then copy and paste the URL from the browser The starting page of your site import does not have to be the source site s Home page usually named index htm or index html it can be any page of any accessible Internet or intranet site You must have full access to this page and the other pages in the site through HTTP 1 0 If you do not have HTTP 1 0 connectivity or there are other secu
368. images depending on the selected tab 9 Set image rotation This setting affects only the selected image To display images in their original form 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Galleries Property Editor 3 Display the Images tab 4 Click the Photo Images tab at the bottom of the Images tab This option is not available for thumbnail images 5 Choose Use Original Image from the Output Settings menu Note You may not edit output settings if Original Image Settings are chosen If you select Original Image on the photos tab frames that have fixed width cannot be used You may change the Photo Frame to one that does not have a fixed width ex Simple Border or choose to revert to the previous image setting To control the image sizes 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Select a thumbnail or photo image Notice the image size on the properties palette If you selected a thumbnail image you can choose to see the size of the current image or of all thumbnail images 3 Resize the image See Resizing Photos on page 215 As you resize the Properties palette shows the effect on the file size 227 Adding Alt Tags Saving Output Settings To save your output settings 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page a photo page of the gallery you want
369. imation appears If automatic sizing does not occur you must size the object manually Check that you have the right browser plugin or ActiveX control installed Before NetObjects Fusion can 368 Chapter 21 Placing Media automatically set height and width parameters for Macromedia Director movies you must install the Macromedia Director ActiveX control version 6 0 1 or later or the Macromedia Director Netscape plugin version 6 0 1 or later To obtain the ActiveX control create a site with NetObjects Fusion that contains a Director movie then preview the site with Microsoft Internet Explorer The ActiveX control is automatically downloaded and installed If you don t have Internet Explorer you can download the current Macromedia Director plugin at www macromedia com shockwave download The name of the selected file appears in the File field on the General tab of the Properties palette Shockwave Director Properties EE will ud File ftestder Browse AltTag Mersion 000 5 provide text for the browser to display if it cannot play the Shockwave file enter a description in the AltTag field See Adding and Modifying Alt Tags on page 87 6 Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly 7 Click the Controls tab 369 Inserting a QuickTime Movie QuickTime tool 8 Click the option you want enter the parameter and click t
370. ime for Image and URL for Image row for each image 4 To select an image double click the Image row select the image from the Picture File Open dialog and click Open 5 To create a link to the image double click the URL for Image row and in the Link dialog select a type of link for the image See Creating Links on page 316 6 Click the Start Time for Image row and select a starting time from the drop down list The start time determines when the image is displayed on your site You can select one hour increments from 12 a m to 12 p m The image is displayed until the next image s starting time Be sure images have consecutive starting times 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each image you add You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Adding Server Tags The NetObjects Fusion Server Tag Library component provides you with server tags allowing you to incorporate queries actions and other dynamic elements into your Web site or application The tag libraries provide complete reference information NetObjects Fusion offers support for the following tag libraries e ColdFusion e JSP Struts Before working with Tag Libraries you should be familiar with tag functionality and requirements To add server tags and set the properties 1 In Page view go to View Toolbars Tag Libraries and select a toolbar with the language you want to use 471 Adding
371. in HTML code not all pages import exactly as you see them Unpredictable results can occur if the page contains incorrect HTML Non HTML such as JavaScripts and CGI scripts does not import If NetObjects Fusion cannot parse the HTML it is imported but appears as external HTML 1 In Page view display the Layout on which you want to import the page It is easiest to import a page into a Layout that contains no content because objects from the imported file will overlay existing objects 2 From the File menu choose Import gt HTML Page or Import Document If you do not have a supported version of Word installed on your system Import gt Document is not available The File Open or Import Document dialog appears 3 Select the type of file you want to import from the Files of type list 4 Select a file from your hard disk or LAN To use a file on a CD ROM copy it to your hard disk To reuse an HTML file already included in the site select it from the HTML Assets tab 5 Click Open 85 Adding Objects to the Page Create backup of Picture check box saves a copy of the original picture in assets NetObjects Fusion places the contents of the file on the current page beginning in the upper left corner of the Layout area You can also import a document from Site view See Importing a Microsoft Office Document on page 72 Reusing Assets By treating object files as assets NetObjects Fusion provides you with a co
372. in a frame you created with AutoFrames the browser either refreshes the entire page or only the content of the Layout area This doesn t affect the appearance of the page but for performance reasons you might not want the browser to refresh the entire page unnecessarily The browser refreshes the entire window if a framed MasterBorder contains a dynamic object such as a banner or highlighted navigation button The dynamic object by definition changes from page to page so the browser has to load the new page Rollover buttons do not change from page to page so they do not affect the page refreshing The browser exits the frameset and displays the retrieved resource in the full browser window if the link retrieves a page with a different MasterBorder or an external HTML page If neither condition exists the browser refreshes the body frame even if no target 1s assigned For additional information about AutoFrames and browser refreshing go to www netobjects com support and click the Workbench link 149 AutoFrames and Browser Refresh 150 CHAPTER 12 Designing with Text Text is the primary tool for delivering your message You can type text onto your pages add it to pictures and shapes and format it for maximum impact NetObjects Fusion includes powerful features that allow formats to flow from one design level to another for example from a SiteStyle to selected text You can also create and apply text styles to kee
373. ine which combination of layout methods and HTML output methods best supports your site design priorities If your priority is Suggested container object Suggested HTML output method Lean HTML and fast browser loading Text box or Layout sized table Dynamic Page Layout Precise placement control for objects Layout and or Layout Region s Dynamic Page Layout Maximizing usability for site visitors Text box sized to Layout Regular Tables with browsers earlier than version 4 0 Absolute control over minimum text Text box with size locked Dynamic Page Layout box height Precise placement control for selected content Text box for page with embedded Dynamic Page Layout but lean HTML otherwise Layout Region for selected content Wrapping text around images and Text box and or table Dynamic Page Layout other objects Overlapping selected objects Overlapped objects in Layout Region embedded in a text box Dynamic Page Layout for site Fixed Page Layout for Layout Region containing overlapped objects Wrapping page to varying browser Text box sized to Layout with Contents Dynamic Page Layout widths wrapped to browser width Drag and drop placement of objects Layout and or Layout Region Dynamic Page Layout while designing the page Horizontal or row based content Table Dynamic Page Layout flow such as spreadsheets or other tabular data Delivering objects with actions Layout Fixed Page Layout or other DHT
374. ing a Custom Text Attribute CSS only When you create a text style the Text Style dialog includes a Custom tab where you can define custom text attributes You should only create custom text attributes if you know HTML and cascading style sheet coding and understand the implications of cascading style sheet features For example if you enter the name cursor and the value wait the pointer in Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 can appear as an hourglass If you assign this new custom style to the Text Object the pointer displays as an hourglass when it is over a text object on your site s pages Similarly you can use custom attributes to take advantage of cascading style sheet attributes not supported directly such as the pointer To create a custom attribute 1 Follow the steps in Creating a Text Style on page 170 to create a new text style 2 Inthe Text Format dialog click the Custom tab 3 Click the New button Text Format newText Home Character Paragraph List Borders Background Custom Name Value Untitled None Attribute properties Name urs Value None Cancel 173 Working with Text Styles 4 Enter the cascading style sheet name for the new attribute and then enter its value To edit an existing custom attribute select it in the list on the Custom tab Its name and values appear in the Attribute properties boxes on the Custom tab Make your changes in those boxes
375. ing and Editing Photo Titles on the Thumbnail Page 220 Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions on the Photo Page221 Formatting Photo Titles and Captions 221 Formatting Photo 221 Formatting Photo Captions 223 Formatting Photo Thumbnail 224 Controlling Download Time 225 Adding Alt 228 Formatting the Thumbnail Page 229 Creating a Text Link to a Photo Gallery 229 Selecting a Thumbnail Template 230 Formatting the Photo Pages 232 Displaying Photo Pages as Pop Up Windows 232 Selecting a Photo Page 232 Selecting a Photo Frame Template 233 Navigating Between Photo Pages 234 Setting Up Navigation for Site Visitors 235 Saving a Photo Gallery Profile 235 Removing a Photo Gallery 236 15 Adding Tables Adding a 240 Setting Table 241 Setting the Table Background 242 Adjusting the Table Structure 243 Resizing Table Rows and Columns 243 Inserting a Row or Column 244 Removing Row or
376. ing icon appears in the form object To minimize the HTML generated by a Layout Region form align its objects using the options on the Multi Object Palette or organize the objects in tables or text boxes See Aligning and Distributing Objects on page 90 Embedding Objects in a Text Box on page 123 and Adding Text and Pictures to Cells on page 250 432 Edit Field tool Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Browsers display form objects differently so test your form on all the browsers and platforms you plan to support Note If you publish pages containing forms using the Fixed Page Layout output option the forms may not display properly in the browser and the form objects display warning icons in Page view Naming Form Objects When you add objects to a form you provide a name or argument for each object that is passed to the NetObjects Form Handler component or CGI script that processes responses These names can be used to output or otherwise process the text typed in a field or the state of each check box radio button or combo box If you re using the Form Handler component to output responses you must name each form object with a sequential number only beginning with 1 and continuing with 2 3 and so on because of the design of the component Don t use text characters or punctuation as in 1 TextField For Form Handler information see Submitting Responses as Plain Text on page 441
377. ing is removed Creating a Transparent GIF When you place a gif image on a page you can make every pixel of one color transparent Although only part of the image is transparent it is called a transparent 195 Optimizing Images gif You can use transparent gifs to blend an image background with the page background or to silhouette an image against the page background Ordinary gif Page background shows through transparent gif An image with a solid background works best because only pixels of exactly the same color can be transparent If the image background is dithered it contains several colors Note Transparency only works with gifs You cannot set a transparency for a jpg or other image file format To create a transparent gif 1 In Page view select the picture for which you want to create a transparent gif The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Click the General tab 196 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 3 Click Edit to open the Optimize Image editor Optimize image Transparency Color Picker Zoom 100 Check to File name missionD2 ipg make a Format JPEG Milions of Colors Beat ile ENE transparent j gif GIF v CelorReduct Adap ve GIF Colors 256 100 Dither Floyd Steinb Optimization Original 47 KB 6 77 sec Select e T Transparency Add color oz e Settings transparent Optimized 49 KB
378. ing the SiteStyle Line topic to Jump Editing the Text Element to detailed Note about the Body at i Creating a SiteStyle information Managing SiteStyles Adding a SiteStyle Add an Online SiteStyle Add a Local SiteStyle Add a SiteStyle from CD E Add a SiteSiye fram a Ni E SiteStyles from Imported E Removing SiteStyles E Styles Folder Structure Managing Assets Laying Out Pages Adding Content Open this book to Adding Interactivity Working with HTML see keyboard b Duck Reference shortcuts Ct 2 To find information in the online topic help click abook on the Contents tab and then double click a topic to see the information it contains Use the gt gt button to move forward through topics in sequential order Use the button to move backward through the sequence Click the Back button to return to the last topic you viewed Look at the topics in the Quick Reference book to find keyboard shortcuts the Index tab and enter a keyword related to your topic e the Search tab and type the word or phrase you want to search for To see information about a specific item in any NetObjects Fusion window or a control in a dialog or palette Right click the object and then select What s This from the shortcut menu Click the question mark icon in the title bar of a dialog or palette then click the item you want to learn about In either case an explanation of the item po
379. inner drag a side handle change the shape of the head or tail drag one of its handles 2 Inthe Style section of the Line Properties palette select a style from the Head or Tail drop down lists to change the head or tail style 267 Drawing Lines and Arrows 268 CHAPTER 17 Using SiteStyles SiteStyles are sets of thematic elements you can apply to your site Some style elements are graphic and others affect the appearance of text on your pages In Style view you use SiteStyles to create the look and feel of your entire site NetObjects Fusion comes with a number of professionally designed SiteStyles that you can use to design your site You can use SiteStyles as they are or edit them You can also create SiteStyles using your own artwork This chapter describes SiteStyles and how to use them including Applying SiteStyles Editing the graphic and text elements of a site Creating SiteStyles Creating text styles Adding and removing SiteStyles Styles folder structure 269 What Is a SiteStyle Style view What Is a SiteStyle A SiteStyle is a collection of graphic and typographical elements you can apply to every page in your site to create its look and feel Your site s SiteStyle gives it a consistent look that survives variations introduced by your site visitor s browser When you change the SiteStyle NetObjects Fusion automatically updates every page in your site with the new loo
380. iods What is your directory When you log on to your remote host you automatically begin in the home directory for your log in account This might not be the right place to put your site however For a variety of reasons you might need to publish your site in a subdirectory of your home directory You must know the relative path from your account s home directory to the base directory where your site should be stored When NetObjects Fusion publishes your site and logs on to your service provider it stores your site s pages and assets in this base directory You enter this path statement as the Directory in the Publish Settings dialog You can create a new base directory below your initial base directory to publish and test a site without disturbing your existing site For example if the base directory is Sitename you can create a new base directory as Sitenameltest and then run the site from that base directory to test it However the host and base directory might not look anything like the URL that your site visitors use to access your site For security and other reasons hosting services frequently name their host machines and user directories according to their own needs Note If you have your own domain such as www mycompany com and are logging in directly to the account that owns that domain you might not need to specify a base directory because the home directory of that account might be the same location as the
381. ion 5 replace the banner text on each page with the title of the photo select Display title in browser If you select this option be sure to select a layout that does not have a title 6 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor Selecting a Photo Frame Template 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Display the Photo Page tab 233 Navigating Between Photo Pages Previous and Next In the Photo Frame section of the tab select a template from the drop down list Options associated with the selected template appear Information about the template and when to use it appear next to the preview window Set the frame options Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor Navigating Between Photo Pages 1 In Page view display the photo page of the gallery you want to work with The first photo in the gallery appears Use the Previous and Next buttons on the control bar to move from photo to photo 234 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Setting Up Navigation for Site Visitors NetObjects Fusion automatically inserts navigation buttons with smart links on the photo pages Site visitors can use these buttons to go to the next and previous photo pages and to return to the thumbnail page The images used for these buttons SPNavLeft gif SPNavRight gif and SPNa
382. ion action message flies off the page To sequence actions you can trigger one with another For example suppose that you want the animation to continue so that as soon as the first action makes Picture A fly off the page the second action makes Picture B fly on In that case you add an action to Picture A with the trigger event motion ended the action message fly onto the page and Picture B as the target After a picture with a motion It sends a fly onto the To another target picture ended action flies off the page action message which flies onto the page These are of course only basic examples of what you can do with actions Many more ideas are presented throughout this chapter Additional information about using actions on your Web pages is available from the Workbench link at 402 Add action button Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages www netobjects com workbench The links from the Workbench to Actions and JavaScript walk you through typical solutions for building dynamic Web pages Adding Actions to Objects and Pages You can add an action to any object Layout or MasterBorder NetObjects Fusion comes with several actions you can apply by choosing options from menus Just specify a trigger event to start the action the action itself and the object you want it to target You can add any number of actions to an object For example one action might cause a button to highlight whe
383. ion Structure You set the navigation structure to specify the relationship between the current page and the pages linked to the buttons on the navigation bar You can base navigation structure on the site structure or create custom navigation bars to give visitors access to pages on different levels of the site pages in other sites and files Creating Navigation Bars Based on the SiteStructure You can choose a navigation level and then set the multi level options to add links to other pages in the site Go to Site view or open the Site Navigation palette if you are unsure about the site levels you want to link Note If you create a navigation bar with no valid links NetObjects Fusion displays a question mark 1 In Page view select the navigation bar The General tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette appears 2 In the Navigation structure section choose a level from the drop down list First Level links to the children of the Home page Parent Level links to pages in the level above the current page in the SiteStructure Current Level links to the current page and all other pages that share the same parent page Child Level links to the children of the current page Breadcrumb Trail displays the current page as the last level of a navigation tree and each parent page in succession 3 In the Include section select Include home page to add a Home page link to the navigation bar Include parent page to i
384. ion the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format You do not need to select text 2 On the Format tab of the Text Properties palette click the Format button 158 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 3 In the Paragraph Settings dialog click the Character tab Paragraph Settings Character Paragraph Borders Background Style Automatic Automatic GBatang Regular BatangChe Italic Dotum Bold DotumChe Bold Italic Color Automatic UE Position Automatic Letter case Automatic x Decoration viAutomatic Underline Overline Strikethrough Small caps Automatic Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To leam about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel 4 Set the text format options If you choose Automatic the settings for the parent style pass through to the paragraph See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 Font applies the text font the list of fonts is derived from the font map in the NetObjects System folder If the specified font for the formatted text is installed on the site visitor s system HTML 3 x compatible browsers display your text using this font If the font is not installed the browser checks a substitution table If the specified substitution is not p
385. ions for the selected control Note If you use an ActiveX control that references an external file such as a pdf file you must specify the relative path of the file as it will be in the final published site First you must add the file as an asset of the site and set it to always publish See Adding a File Asset on page 562 To determine the file s relative path in the final site look at the publish directory structure listed in Publish view 5 To provide text that the browser displays if it cannot launch the ActiveX control enter the text in the AltTag field 6 To change an option select it and enter the information in the field To accept any text you enter click the check mark or move the cursor to another field Tocancelthe change click the X e use the native property page for the ActiveX control click the Properties button You can change the control s settings using the native property page instead of NetObjects Fusion properties Some ActiveX controls do not have a native property page insert HTML tags and scripts click the HTML button See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly You can add actions to ActiveX controls using the Actions tab 388 CHAPTER 23 Referencing and Editing External HIML In addition to content you create and maintain in Page view your site might also include pages that require special hand coded HTML Instead of importing and converting this HTML y
386. ions to configure your system or skip this for now and continue 3 You can use the Site wizard to create a site or go directly to NetObjects Fusion Online view e Ifyou choose the Site wizard follow the on screen instructions to create your site e create a blank site or open an existing site see Creating and Opening Sites on page 29 create a new site based on a NetObjects Fusion template file see Chapter 4 Working with Templates create a site from an existing Web site see Chapter 5 Importing Sites and Documents After the first launch you can set Application Options so NetObjects Fusion automatically opens the last site you worked on in the last view you used See Setting Program Options on page 20 Working with Site Files A NetObjects Fusion site file is a relational database of information about your site Site files have a nod extension Site files are stored in a folder that has the same name you give the site For example if you name the site MySite the site s folder is called MySite and the site file MySite nod is saved inside the folder The site folder contains an Assets folder with the asset files used in the site a Styles folder with active SiteStyles and a Backups folder Once you preview the site a Preview folder is added and when you publish the site locally a Local Publish folder is added as long as you do not change the default local publish locatio
387. is inside a border The padding is the space between the text and the borders Note Browsers can interpret your border and padding settings differently Check the appearance of objects with borders and padding in different browsers to make sure the object appears as you intended 1 Position the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format You do not need to select text 2 On the Format tab of the Text Properties palette click the Format button 162 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 3 In the Paragraph Settings dialog click the Borders tab Paragraph Settings Character Paragraph Borders Background Border settings C None C Border Active borders Style automatic Width gt Top E Lett E ce o d Bottom Right 1 Padding pt Left p E Bottom pt Right Jot Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel 4 Select border settings If you choose Automatic the settings for the parent style pass through to the paragraph See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 Automatic applies the default border setting None prevents the parent element s border settings from being applied Border makes the other options available so you can apply
388. is placed in a Layout area you can set the region to a different HTML output method than the one used for the Layout area When you publish the Layout area is published using its setting and the Layout Region is published using its setting See Design Priorities and Method Choices on page 109 1 In Page view click the Layout or Layout Region The General tab of the Properties palette appears 2 Inthe HTML output section of the General tab select the HTML output method you want from the drop down list HTML output HTML output Site Setting Parent Setting E Site Setting Parent Setting Dynamic Page Layout All browsers Regular Tables All browsers Fixed Page Layout Dynamic Page Layout All browsers Regular Tables All browsers Fixed Page Layout For Layouts For Layout Regions me i Site Setting generates the Layout using the output method specified for the entire site To change this setting from the Tools menu choose Site Settings and change the Browser compatibility setting Parent Setting generates the Layout Region using the output method specified for the object that contains it For example if a Layout is set to Dynamic Page Layout that is the parent setting for a Layout Region contained in that Layout Dynamic Page Layout uses nested HTML tables to achieve the highest level of layout accuracy across browsers If you select this option you can set the table formatting preference See Publi
389. it images Brightness to adjust the tonal range Contrast to adjust overall contrasts and mixture of colors 201 Creating a Border Around a Picture Hue to adjust the color and represents a move around the color wheel Saturation to adjust the purity of the color and represents a move across the radius 3 Adjust the color properties You can adjust a color property by dragging the slider on the properties palette or by entering the width directly in the Properties Palette e adjust the color property by dragging the slider on the Properties Palette drag the slider to the right to increase the property or to the left to decrease the property To adjust the color property by entering the value directly in the Properties Palette type a number in the correct field As you make changes to the color view the Spectrum bar at the bottom of the Properties Palette to get an idea of the color range your image will be displayed in Also as you make changes you can preview the image To reset your image back to the original color set all values to 0 Creating a Border Around a Picture You can use the Picture properties to add a border around a picture 1 In Page view select the picture for which you want to create a border The Picture Properties palette appears Click the Borders tab Click the Border checkbox to add a border around the picture Choose a border style from the Line Style drop down list
390. ite from your hard disk to the server s If you change servers you must select options and define a publish profile for the new server The setup process consists of selecting the directory structure defining the server profile and selecting publish components if necessary These settings are saved in your Sitename nod file so you don t have to create a publish profile each time you want to publish the site When setup is complete you can transfer files from a local directory to the remote server s location Publish Profile Checklist Make sure you can answer the questions in the following checklist before you create a publish profile for a remote server 586 1 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site Who is your service provider This is the business organization or department that is going to store your site on its server and provide your site visitors access to it on the Web The technical support staff of your service provider should be able to provide the answers to the rest of these questions Service providers and other organizations that provide hosting services often offer technical support pages on their own Web sites What is the name of your host This is the name of the server that you are going to publish your site to It might be the same as your domain name such as www yourname com a name assigned by the service provider such as inbox isp com or a specific IP address a series of four numbers separated by per
391. ite visitors 465 refreshing pages 149 setting compatibility 53 using unsupported image files 190 bullet type 178 bulleted lists 175 bullet type 178 button navigation bars 298 adding 299 default location 298 see also navigation bars setting style 303 buttons 298 changing picture on one button 308 custom names 46 default style 299 rollover action 418 SiteStyle text 276 cascading actions 412 CGI directory for publishing 608 CGI scripts 606 naming conventions 433 processing data 444 support 444 CGI BIN folder 445 character sets available 616 imported pages 619 overview 615 page 618 section 618 check boxes in forms 437 checklist publish profile 586 child pages 33 CHMOD command 610 class files 382 384 client side imagemaps 334 collision detection action 420 Color Picker 14 colors Browser Safe palette 15 changing 14 HTML code 539 palettes 15 text 157 Web safe 14 combo boxes in forms 438 Common Gateway Interface see CGI Component Development Kit CDK 449 components Ad Banner 454 DynaButtons 456 Go Menu 460 internal components 454 Page components 454 Picture Loader 459 Picture Rollover 462 Publish components 453 rotating banner 454 Rotating Picture 464 Screen Door 465 Site Mapper 467 third party components 454 Ticker Tape 468 Time Based Picture 470 types Components folder 16 Components toolbar 84 containers defined 96 Layout Regions 111 Layouts 111 text boxes 121 control bar 12 conventions 3 Crea
392. iting our site We re sorry you haven t had a chance to upgrade your browser yet and can t see our framed site We think the frames make it easier to find what you want If you want to obtain a more current browser check out either Microsoft s Internet Explorer or Netscape s Navigator or Communicator products F ll S850ll0am 7 Creating a Default Target Frame If you code your own frames and one content page contains a lot of links that target the same frame you can make that frame the default target That way you don t have to choose a target attribute for each link The default target for the contents of a frame that displays navigational buttons for example might be a frame that displays the primary content those buttons point to Unless you add a target attribute specifying differently all links on that page display their contents in the default frame 1 In Page view open the content page to be targeted 2 Click the HTML button on the Layout Properties palette The Page HTML dialog appears 3 Select the Between Head Tags tab and enter base target framename gt where framename is the name of the frame as defined in the frameset file that you want to be the default target 4 Click OK to close the Page HTML dialog 549 Accessing an Object s HTML Create several links on the content page using the Link dialog Don t add any HTML specifying a target frame Preview the site and test t
393. ized If you use a text link you can place additional objects on the thumbnail page 6 Click the Photo Page tab to continue formatting or click Done to close the editor Selecting a Thumbnail Template To give site visitors direct access to each photo in the gallery you can display a small version of each photo on the thumbnail page NetObjects Fusion provides a variety of thumbnail templates that you can use to format these images for example one template looks like a film strip and another like 35mm slides 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 230 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries 3 Display the Thumbnail Page tab Photo Gallery Properties Editor Yosemite 3 xj Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Format C Text Link Yosemite Thumbnails Template Fim z Style Fixed Width X Columns 4 x Preview scaled to fit Film Fixed Width Film Fixed Width is a good all purpose Thumbnail template that mimics the look of a film strip Fixed width means that when the EEE EEEE film strip contains landscape and portrait photos each row will be the same length To achieve this the thumbnails are centered on a neutral gray background Allows thumbnails to be resized to any dimension Works against any background Automatically numbers each photo sequentially Save Pr
394. izontal Left Offset a Vertical middle z Rotate pou Right angles MultipleLine Alignment Center Button Image plait Browse Browse to change the button image To select a new image click Browse and choose a file in the Picture File Open dialog You can select images from your site assets or from any folder on your hard disk For best results use an image that is the same size as the button or banner To create new banners and buttons banner or button set to The images on the Style view Graphic tab reflect changes you make on the palettes When you finish editing the buttons check the rollover behavior using the navigation bar samples To view how the changes will appear in a browser click on the Preview tab Adding Banners and Buttons You can add new banners and buttons or duplicate existing ones These SiteStyle elements can vary across pages and elements of different styles can be used to give your page a different look and feel See Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the style you want to add a e Ifadding a new banner click on the Banner Properties tab e Ifadding a new button set click on the Primary or Secondary Navigation Bar Sample 217 Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles The Banner or NavBar Sample P
395. k If you do not find a pre built style that is appropriate for your site you can create your own custom SiteStyle Or if a SiteStyle works for most but not all pages in your site you can customize it for just a few pages For even more flexibility for example to use more than one banner image in your site or to use a different image for each button in a navigation bar you can use the Navigation Bar and Banner Properties palettes in Page view See Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners Exploring Style View When you click the Style button on the control bar NetObjects Fusion displays Style view Note If you see the View tips open a site to see the list of SiteStyles Style view shows a list of SiteStyles available for the current site and the graphic and text elements of the selected SiteStyle When you first launch NetObjects Fusion you will see 3 SiteStyle lists Active SiteStyles These are SiteStyles associated with a specific nod Active SiteStyles are added to your user sites folder at NetObjects Fusion 8 User Sites Styles If you export your site as a template only the active styles will be included It is recommended that you keep only those styles currently being used active Local SiteStyles These are SiteStyles included with NetObjects Fusion Local SiteStyles are not specific to one nod file and can be made active at any time The Local SiteStyles list displays the SiteStyles located in
396. k the sub button displays the asset name for the external link To add sub buttons and set the properties 1 In Page view create a DynaButton as described in Adding DynaButtons on page 456 2 Double click the Use Sub Buttons row 457 Adding DynaButtons Yes appears in the right column and NetObjects Fusion adds a Number Sub Buttons row under the Use Sub Buttons row DynaButtons Properties 2 xi o DynaButtons Yes Orientation Use Sub Bul Number Sub Buttons 1 3 To specify the number of sub buttons select the Number Sub Buttons row enter the number of buttons and click the check mark The limit is 20 sub buttons The appropriate number of sub button rows appear numbered in sequential order 4 To define the link for each sub button double click the appropriate sub button row such as Sub Button 1 2 The first number in this case the 1 identifies the button for which the sub button was created and the second number is the number of the current sub button The Link dialog appears See Creating Links on page 316 5 Specify the link information and click Link 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create and define each sub button 458 P Picture Loader tool Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components Loading Pictures onto Your Site Use the NetObjects Picture Loader Component to load an image from a site other than your own You can use this to place adver
397. l HTML Page dialog appears 3 Click Browse select the external file you want to reference and choose whether to import the file s lt HEAD gt content and manage external assets as described in Referencing HTML from Page View on page 392 This file s lt BODY gt is published the HTML table cell generated for the object Reference External HTML Page Check here to also publish the file s lt HEAD gt content M Import lt HEAD gt Append to Current lt HEAD gt Do not manage or move assets either in addition to or instead of the HEAD NetObjects Fusion generates OK Cancel 4 Click A placeholder for the referenced HTML file fills the box Preview the page to see the object If necessary go back and adjust the box s position in Page view to get 393 Toggling Referenced Layouts and Objects the spacing you want As with other objects you can drag a referenced object around the page drag it inside other objects or even layer it Layout Letter 1 Referenced object by Author 1 Ad Banner html Add other referenced objects Letter 2 by Author 2 Feature Articles as well as pictures media and Headine 1 by Author 7 objects created in NetObjects Provide a brief description of selected article Lorem Fusion Would you like our pum dolor sit amet consectetaur adipising elit sed do ation to be iusmod temp or incididunt ut labore et do
398. lationship of these objects for internal and external databases External Data Object Data List Stacked Pages m mee amy a m Max COMO Filter amp Sort Links Catalog m Ee Gizmo s F inn 1 99 e For example you could publish a backpack catalog on your site with a record for each backpack Each row in the data list lets the site visitor navigate to the stacked page that contains the corresponding backpack s description photo and price To create the backpack catalog your first step is to create a backpack data object You can define a data object once and use it in different filtered data lists For example you can create one data list of all the backpacks in your database With the same data object you can create additional data lists of internal frame backpacks external frame backpacks frameless backpacks and so on 475 Publishing Data If you create a data object from an external source for example from a Microsoft Access database and then update or change the external source you must republish the site to update the data For example suppose your backpack data object referenced 50 records originally and the external database is increased with 25 new records After you republish your site the data object references 75 records the backpack data list contains 75 rows and
399. le Ctrl 4 Assets Ctri 5 Publish Ctrl 6 Next Page Ctrl Right Previous Page Ctrl Left Parent Ctrl Up First Child Down Follow Lir ztrH shift Go To Ctrl G Last Recent Preview Alt P The Go menu commands vary slightly from view to view e From all views you can go to any other view or the current view s subviews From Page view you can also go to other pages 12 Chapter 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics Use the Go To command to find any named object in your site To search the entire site for any named NetObjects Fusion item a page layout SiteStyle data list and so on choose Go To from the Go menu Goto Begins with C Contains Ends with Cancel In the Go To dialog enter the name or partial name of the item you want to locate choose Begins with Contains or Ends with and click OK If only one object meets your criteria NetObjects Fusion opens the appropriate view or dialog to display the object If several objects meet your criteria NetObjects Fusion lists them so you can pick one Use the Last command to go to the last page or view you were working on Use the Recent command to select from a list of the views and pages you displayed during the current session Use the Preview command to launch your browser and display a preview of your site Using Shortcut Menus NetObjects Fusion provides shortcut menus you open by right clicking an item The menu lists the
400. lect the Cascade message option in the Set Action dialog when you create the action Cascading messages work best with custom messages See Showing One Object While Hiding Others on page 421 for an example 1 In Page view place the objects you want to target in a Layout MasterBorder Layout Region text box or table Note Actions sent to a Layout or MasterBorder apply to the entire page not just the Layout or MasterBorder So cascading a Hide message at a Layout makes the entire page go blank To hide only a subset of objects on the page put the objects in a Layout Region and target it instead Also hiding the Layout as a Layout Region or in any container also hides its contents without cascading 2 Select the object you want to trigger the action and click the plus button on the Actions tab of the Properties palette The Set Action dialog appears 3 Create an action targeting the container of objects you want the action to apply to When filling out the Set Action dialog enter the page Layout MasterBorder Layout Region text box or table in the Target field 412 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Set Action Name When Clicked Target a container Target Picture1 Message Parameter s Cascade messag Activities DefaultMasterBorder L3 BuilewithNoF NavigationBar2 NavigationBar1 LayoutRegion1 he action applies to objects n the
401. lected in Site view Current page to search text on the page currently displayed in Page view e Current text box to search text in the text box currently selected in Page view Selected text to search only the text currently selected in Page view In the Find what field type the word letters or phrase you want to find Select options to narrow the search Click Find Next NetObjects Fusion searches for the text Replacing Text 1 2 Go to Site view or Page view From the Edit menu choose Replace The Find and Replace dialog appears In the Find in field select a scope for the search The options vary depending on the current view and the selected object Select Entire site to search all text in the site e Selected pages to search text on the pages selected in Site view 185 Counting Words Lines Paragraphs and Characters un R Current page to search text on the page currently displayed in Page view Current text box to search text in the text box currently selected in Page view Selected text to search only the text currently selected in Page view In the Find what field type the word letters or phrase you want to replace In the Replace with field type the replacement text Select options to narrow the search Click Find Next Click Replace to replace the found text or click Replace All to replace all instances of the text with the replacement text Counting Words Lines
402. lick the Link URL row The Link dialog appears Because the entire image is treated as one object you can link it to another page file smart link or external link such as another site See Creating Links on page 316 7 Specify the link information and click Link The details of the link appear in the right column of the button row You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 463 Adding Rotating Pictures Iri Rotating Picture tool Adding Rotating Pictures You can use the Rotating Picture component to display different pictures in succession in the same place on the page For example you could rotate among several images that advertise new products or current sale items To add a rotating picture you specify the image to display and the number of seconds to pause before displaying the next picture in the sequence You can also assign a link to each picture NetObjects Fusion supports gif and jpg formats in components See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 To add pictures that rotate and set their properties 1 In Page view select the Rotating Picture tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Draw a box on the page to indicate where you want to place the picture A rotating picture placeholder and the Rotating Picture Properties palette appear Rotating Picture Properties 2 x 20 Rotating Picture p
403. link will work correctly 324 6 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors When typing the path if you do not include periods or slashes in front of the file name NetObjects Fusion attempts to find the file in the same directory as the page containing the link This is also true for the format filename html To back up one directory before looking for the path use path filename html For each directory you need to back up to find the destination file include another For example suppose you create a Press Releases page in a directory called PR within the News directory index html News news html PR PRlinks html Articles PressReleasel1 html PressRelease2 html A link from PRlinks html to PressReleasel html looks like this Articles PressRelease1 html Remember that some servers are case sensitive your link must exactly match the directory names and file names of where you want to go Click Link Creating a File Link You use file links to link to a file For example you might create a file link so site visitors can download the file When you create a file link the file it refers to becomes an asset of the site and is uploaded to the server when the site is published To create a file link 1 In Page view select some text or select an object to link If you place the insertion point within the text without selecting text the file name is inserted in the text On the Standard toolbar cli
404. links properly The subfolders organize files according to their use Components contains the NetObjects Fusion Components which are mini applications that can add sophisticated functions to your site and System Components which are tools and services that can add advanced features and functionality See Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components FSI Updater contains files required to auto update NetObjects Fusion e Vava contains Java applets and beans WetObjects System contains files used by the program do not delete or remove these files 16 Chapter 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics Note User profiles are stored in the NetObjects System folder This folder contains information such as user profile output settings and site preferences A unique profile is created for each account set up to use that workstation QuickStart contains files used to display basic NetObjects Fusion concepts when you choose NetObjects Fusion QuickStart Tips from the Help menu plus files for the View tips and the Site wizard ReadMe contains important information about this version of NetObjects Fusion Sample Sites contains one site that demonstrates NetObjects Fusion 8 features and sample files Styles contains a separate folder for each local SiteStyle including the ones you create See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Templates contains the AutoSites folder which contains the Blank Site and Import templ
405. list Click the New Style button on the control bar Graphic Active SiteStyles ol My New Style Phoenix Teal amp Gray FA NetObjects Fusion Local SiteStyles Enter a name for your new SiteStyle and press Enter Your new style is added to the list of Active SiteStyles and is selected NetObjects Fusion also creates a folder in the Styles folder to contain the style elements See Styles Folder Structure on page 295 The Read Only option is cleared automatically so you can edit the style Edit each graphic and text element as described in Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles on page 274 and Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles on page 284 Click the Set Style button to apply the new style to your site Your custom SiteStyle images and settings are applied to your site To create a SiteStyle using an existing template 288 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles 1 In Style view highlight a style in the SiteStyles list 2 Go to the Style menu and select Duplicate SiteStyle 3 Enter a name for your new SiteStyle and press Enter The elements in the view look just like the style you selected as the basis for your new style The original SiteStyle the one you based your new design on is not affected by your edits Managing SiteStyles You can add new styles to the list of available styles such as those you obtain from your colleagues or those you create on your own You can also remove
406. ll appear 330 e Link icon Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Pop up Window Properties Editor Name My New Pop Up lt SCRIPT gt var hwndPopup_27b8 function openpopup 27b8 url hwndPopup_27b8 window open url popupwin 27b8 widthz300 height 300 left 300 top 300 toolbar 0 scrollbars 0 menubar 0 status 0 resizable 0 hwndPopup 27b8 resizeT o 300 300 lt SCRIPT gt Edit with Properties E ditor Cancel 6 Modify the script and click OK Note To reset the script back to the default settings click Revert to Original Script If no modifications have been made you will only have the option to Edit with the Properties Editor Following Links If Object Icons is checked on the View menu NetObjects Fusion displays the Link icon wherever you create a link to an object If you place the pointer over the icon the link is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the NetObjects Fusion window Text links are underlined and appear in the default font and color for links In Page view you can follow a link you created to its target page or anchor Right click a linked object and select Follow Link from the shortcut menu or select the object and from the Go menu choose Follow Link To follow a text link select the linked text right click and select Follow Link from the shortcut menu 331 Finding a Link Finding a Link As the number of pages i
407. llover image appears To set the button style 1 In Page view select the navigation bar 2 Click the Style tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette Button Style Level 0 Apply to all Site Style Current SiteStyle Button seo A Fly out submenu Advanced Include IV Use highlighted V Use rollover Zutoclosefy out Display Border 0 Spacing 0 Bgcolor None C 3 In the Standard style section e Select the page level which is relative to the current page you want to apply the button style to The style you choose will apply only to the pages at the selected level The current page is Level 0 its parent page is Level 1 the next parent page is Level 2 and so on until you reach the Home page 304 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners The current pages child is Level 1 its child is Level 2 and so on Level 2 vv Level 0 Current Page Level hd Choose the SiteStyle from the drop down list that contains the button style you want to display Only active site styles will appear in the list Choose the set from the drop down list that contains the button style you want to display 4 Click Apply to all to apply the selected style to all buttons in the navigation bar 5 In the Include section select Use highlighted buttons to use the Highlighted button state style for the sele
408. lly code frames using HTML See Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML on page 546 Although Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer support frames not all browsers do If you use frames you might want to consider creating an alternate site for visitors with browsers that do not support frames See Accommodating Browsers that Don t Support Frames on page 548 and Directing Visitors to a Browser Specific Page on page 465 Within a frame you can influence how variations in browser fonts affect your design The Rows and Columns properties work within a frame the same way they work within a Layout For information see Optimizing Dynamic Page Layout Output on page 103 141 Adding an AutoFrame Adding an AutoFrame When you add AutoFrames NetObjects Fusion applies them to the current MasterBorder and all pages that use that MasterBorder Before you add AutoFrames you might want to select or create a designated framed MasterBorder that you can apply to the appropriate pages To apply different framesets to different pages you ll need one MasterBorder for each frameset As you develop these MasterBorders follow these guidelines Objects in frames can t straddle frame boundaries so check the corners of your page before you add AutoFrames For example if you have a banner across the top of the page that overlaps the left and top borders resize it or move it before you turn on AutoFrames for either border
409. lor depth image To view png images with Netscape Navigator 4 0 the PNG Live 2 0 plugin is required Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 does not require a plugin Earlier versions of both browsers require PNGLive 1 0 to view the image You can find this plugin at http home netscape com plugins image_viewers html If you try to place a picture that is in bmp pet or psd format NetObjects Fusion offers to convert it to gif or jpg format NetObjects Fusion copies the file converts the copy and stores the copy in the site s Assets folder If you are using Windows NT you can use the Picture tool to place Flashpix fpx images You can also use the Media Plug in tool as described in Inserting Other Types of Files on page 378 to place an fpx file in Windows 98 or Windows NT Adding a Picture 1 In Page view choose the Picture tool from the Standard toolbar and click where you want to position the upper left corner of the picture The Picture File Open dialog appears Select the image file you want from your hard disk or LAN or select an image already in use in the site from the Image Assets tab See Chapter 30 Managing Assets You can do advanced image editing such as set the size color depth and compression scheme in NetObjects Fusion See Using the Picture Properties Palette on page 191 From the Files of type drop down list select 188 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures Web Images t
410. lore magna elivered to your ome or office Headline 2 by Author 2 ubscribe today Provide a brief description of selected article Lorem sum dolor sit amet consectetaur adipising elit sed do Lusmod temp or incididunt ut labore et dolore Double click the referenced HTML placeholder to edit the referenced file in HTML Source view To edit the file in an external editor right click and choose Open File In External Editor from the shortcut menu To specify a default external HTML editor see Setting Program Options on page 20 Toggling Referenced Layouts and Objects You can resize a referenced HTML file so it becomes an object in the Layout instead of taking up the entire Layout area You can do this to make room for other objects in the Layout area Conversely you might want to size a referenced object to fill the entire Layout area You can also import the referenced object into NetObjects Fusion 50 Eile CANetObjects Fusion 8sTutorialtH Browse Adds or removes resize handles from referenced HTML Size to layout Imports the object into NetObjects Fusion Convert to Fusion Edit HTML File Displays the source code in HTML Source view 1 In Page view click in the referenced Layout area or object you want to resize 396 Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML 2 On the General tab of the External HTML Properties palette Select Size to layout to
411. ls and is defined in the Table Properties palette as all cells inside the 253 Setting Table Styles blue box The border region consists of all non repeating cells and is defined as all cells outside of the blue box Table Properties Repeating Cells Middle Region Border Region Border Cells Table Style Site Style Current Site Style Table Set Custom Style T We can further separate the existing table into as many 9 specific regions in which the table style will be applied These regions can be identified by drawing lines around the middle table style region It is important to keep these table regions in mind when applying a table style Top Left Corner Right Corner Region Top Region Region 1 Left Side Region Right Side Region Text Text Bottom Right Bottom Region Corner Region Bottom Right Corner Region Middle Region The corner regions are defined by the cross section of the side regions and do not repeat top and bottom regions are repeated horizontally over the y axis 254 Chapter 15 Adding Tables The left and right side regions are repeated vertically over the x axis The middle region is repeated to fill the entire selected area without overlapping the border region Table Style Examples Table Properties Bjo Style Editor 243 Border Cells Repeating Cells Test Clear Table
412. lso modify code for the default values NetObjects Fusion creates and you can assemble expressions out of an object s other actions For example an expression might test for a particular condition like time of day and then trigger actions you created with the Set Actions dialog based on that condition Just as the Values dialog often lists several values an expression can generate one or more values too 416 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages For an example even nonprogrammers can try see Customizing Default Actions on page 427 1 In Page view select the object whose parameter values you want to script and add any actions you want to use as components of the JavaScript expression For these actions ignore the When field since each action is triggered by the expression Also if an action s only purpose is to be called by the expression disable the action by clearing the check box next to it on the Actions tab of the Properties palette Create the action whose parameter value you want generated by the expression as described in Adding Actions to Objects and Pages on page 403 Or open an existing action by double clicking it on the Actions tab of the Properties palette In the Set Action dialog open the Parameters menu and choose Expression The JavaScript Expression dialog appears If the action already has default parameter values the dialog displays the code for those values Enter your own JavaS
413. lumn you want to resize and drag the cell boundary to the new size If you resize a row it changes row height and the overall table height For precise sizing of rows and columns or to make all rows or all columns the same size see Setting Row and Column Properties on page 247 Inserting a Row or Column 1 In Page view select the table The Table Properties palette will appear 2 Enter the total number of table rows or columns in the Rows field or Columns field Table Properties 2 Xi 8 8180 Width 258 Pixels Height 199 Pixels Enter number of Bows 3 Cell Pad 2 rows and columns Columns 5 Cell Space 2 Border 1 Brdr Color Advanced IV Generate non breaking spaces Tableis a form Table HTML 244 Chapter 15 Adding Tables Additional rows are added at the bottom of the table and additional columns are added at the right side of the table e insert a row in a specific location right click on the highlighted row and select Insert Row Above or Insert Row Below from the menu insert a column in a specific location right click on the highlighted column and select Insert Column Left or Insert Column Right from the menu You can also insert rows and columns from the Cell Properties palette See Setting Row and Column Properties on page 247 Removing a Row or Column 1 In Page view select the table The Table Prop
414. ly This chapter explains Using the Component Manager e Adding NetObjects Fusion Components to a page Setting component properties Using the Component Manager The Component Manager provides a way for you to organize your toolbars and save space as you work in Page view The first time you open your site in Page view the Component Manager will be docked to the left of the page You can move the Component Manager to the right side of the page or you can close the 449 Using the Component Manager Component Manager If you close the Component Manager the next time you add a toolbar it will reappear Note All NetObjects Fusion toolbars can be added to the Component Manager Adding Toolbars to the Component Manager To add a component toolbar 1 From the File menu choose View gt Toolbars 2 Select the component toolbar you want to add R amp AB amp p REL E o AP screenboor Bicker Tope BP Time Based Picture Home Mission Events Next Tour Contest Hiking Products The component toolbar will display in the component manager To remove a component toolbar deselect the component from the Toolbars menu or click the x on the toolbar Displaying Toolbars in the Component Manager You can display toolbar objects as icons or text and icons You also have the option to view object descriptions or remove the description field Additi
415. m number of characters that can be Maz length 18 entered in the field characters FE HTML Name Type the name for this field that s passed to the CGI script processing the form You may be able to choose any name or one may be required for this field by the CGI script If you re using the Form Handler use a number indicating the object s order in the output text Text Type text to appear in the field by default This text is submitted as the response if the site visitor doesn t replace it e Password field Select this option if the field is for sensitive information like a password or credit card number Characters site visitors type are submitted to the script but depending on the browser visitors see asterisks bullets or nothing at all as they type This option does not create password protection to prevent site visitors from visiting certain pages That level of protection can only be provided by scripts used by the form or by permission settings on the server itself e Visible length Enter a number to define the width of the text box by specifying the number of characters visible in the field Max length Enter a number to define how many characters site visitors can enter in the field When typing exceeds the field s visible width text scrolls up to this number of characters 4 To add a label to the field use the Text tool on the Standard toolbar Select the label and the field and on
416. m the Standard toolbar and draw a text box Add text See Chapter 12 Designing with Text Select an object elsewhere on the page and drag it into the text box The thick blue text box boundary indicates the object will be embedded Position the insertion point at the place in the text where you want to insert the object and drop the object Position the object within the text box See Wrapping Text around Objects Creating a New Embedded Object 1 2 3 In Page view select the Text tool from the Standard toolbar and draw a text box Add text See Chapter 12 Designing with Text Select the appropriate tool to create the new object Note To embed a text box within a text box you must create it outside the text box and drag it into place Position the mouse pointer in the text and draw a box for the new object 124 Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes If appropriate the Open file dialog for that type of object appears Select the object you want to embed and click OK 5 Position the object within the text box See Wrapping Text around Objects Wrapping Text around Objects Once you embed an object in a text box you can wrap text around it 1 In Page view select the object embedded in the text box The object s properties palette appears 2 Click the Align tab Rectangle Properties 2 x a Alignment 85 Top Middle Bottom C Let Center Right
417. m the drop down list Taget Default M Add E dit HTML Cancel To display the designated content in a new pop up window click Add The Pop Up Windows Properties Editor will appear In the Name field type in a name for the new pop up window 328 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors If a pop up window with that name already exists the content is displayed in the existing pop up window 6 To set the size of the pop up window on the screen enter values for the height and width in pixels Select Full Screen to have the pop up window fill the entire screen Pop up Window Properties Editor 21x Name Pop up Window Se Position From Width 0 Left Margin 300 Height 300 e pixels Top Margin 300 pixels Full Screen Auto Center Options T Show Toolbar Show Menu Bar Resizable T Show Scroll Bar Show Status Bar Preview amp Set Edi with Script Editor Cancel 7 To set the position of the pop up window on the screen enter values for the left and top positions in pixels Placement will be offset from the upper left corner of the screen Select Auto Center to automatically center the pop up window in the middle of the screen 8 Customize your pop up window by selecting from the following options Show Toolbar to add a navigation toolbar to the browser Show Scroll Bar to scroll left right and up down in the browse
418. mation about the referenced file Double click to edit this HTML file Home Mission Events Next Tour Contest Wonder Lodge Double click the referenced Layout area to edit the referenced file in HTML Source view To edit the file in an external editor right click and choose Open File In External Editor from the shortcut menu To specify a default external HTML editor see Setting Program Options on page 20 Referencing HTML as an Object You can reference an external file as an individual object on a page For example you can reference an ad banner an applet created by a Java generator or any other object requiring special code You can even reference several external files on a page For example you might construct a front page for a company newsletter that includes a slot for each of several externally maintained story leads 394 Chapter 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML As when you reference HTML as a Layout area you can incorporate each file s lt HEAD gt tags and script definitions to include existing META tag and script definitions To reference HTML as an object 1 In Page view choose the External HTML tool from the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box where you want the referenced content to appear External HTML tool Put the box in the Layout area to publish the content on one page or in the MasterBorder to publish it in the border of several pages The Reference Externa
419. mic Page Layout or Regular Tables be sure your pages do not have overlapping objects or your published results will not be what you expect See Editing Objects and Assets on page 87 for information Fixed Page Layout uses cascading style sheets layers and scripts to position and publish your design and content Both Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and greater and Netscape Communicator 4 x correctly display pages published in Fixed Page Layout format although the site visitors results might vary according to their system and browser font settings Netscape Navigator 6 0 does not support this option On the General tab of the Current Site Options dialog you designate which type of HTML output is generated This setting determines the site setting for HTML output You can override this setting for individual Layouts and Layout Regions so NetObjects Fusion generates the HTML using a different method See Setting the HTML Output Method for a Layout or Layout Region on page 117 for information 100 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output Setting the Site s HTML Output Method To set the publishing method for your site 1 From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site The Current Site Options dialog appears Current Site Options General META tags History Backup Site name MySite SiteStyle Phoenix Number of pages 8 r Defaults Browser compatibility Dynamic Page Layout All browsers Change
420. mplate dialog appears Insert Template Templates AutoSites Forms My Recent Pages Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer D My Network File name Places Files of type 3 Navigate to the template you want to insert and select the TemplateName zip file NetObjects Fusion Template Files zip nft x Note You can also open nft template files that were created in earlier versions of NetObjects Fusion To remove unused styles imported from your template in your Style view See SiteStyles from Imported Sites on page 294 62 Chapter 4 Working with Templates 4 Click Open NetObjects Fusion inserts the template under the page you selected The page data is added to the nod file and the assets are added to the Assets folder within the site folder The original template is still available Exporting a Site You can export any site or selected pages of a site as a template NetObjects Fusion copies all assets into the Assets folder of the template in the location you select and converts absolute paths to relative paths NetObjects Fusion zips these files and the SiteStyle files and resources for any SiteStyle in use by the source site into the exported template Exporting a site as a template is the only way to share sites with other NetObjects Fusion developers or to combine sites You cannot simply copy the nod file and assets from one computer to another Bef
421. ms you want to include on the Go menu and click the right arrow to move them into the Link column You can include up to 50 items on the menu To change the way an item is listed on the menu double click it in the Menu Item Name column and type a new name Select an item and click the Move up or Move down button to change the order of items on the menu To delete an item select it and click Delete 460 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components 5 Click the Button Format tab Go Menu Menu Items Button Format Example Choose one of the following formats asc J Go Use forms button Text ABC RA o C Use custom graphic EM No button pull down menu selection will trigger link 6 Select one of the three formats An example of each format is shown on the left 7 Click OK 8 To change the items included on the Go Menu or the button format use the Go Menu Properties palette Go Menu Properties 2 Xi e Go Menu vx You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 461 Adding Pictures That Roll Over Adding Pictures That Roll Over You can use the Picture Rollover component to create JavaScript rollovers for any image on your site Because this component uses JavaScript the colors of your images are not compromised To view a rollover picture site visitors must use Netscape Navigator 3 x and up or Microsoft Int
422. mum height 126 sizing 126 text fields formatted 479 simple 479 text files submitting forms data 441 text navigation bars 298 default location 298 see also navigation bars text styles 28 applying 167 applying custom style 168 creating 170 editing 284 modifying 167 scope 169 text based Layouts 96 text based forms 430 third party components 454 thumbnail image 189 thumbnail page formatting 229 selecting template 230 Ticker Tape component 468 Time Based Picture component 470 time format 25 toolbars 11 81 flyouts 11 hiding showing 11 showing hiding 77 tools Data Field 486 Selection tool 81 88 sticky tools 81 toolbars 11 81 using to add objects 81 Zoom 11 transfer site files 576 586 transition page creating 547 transparent gif files 195 transparent GIF 583 trigger events actions 402 404 tutorial 3 Tutorial folder 17 U Universal Resource Locators see URLs unprotected code 536 URLs external links 322 protocol 322 User Sites folder 17 28 user defined variables 182 V variables adding 571 deleting 573 editing 573 inserting in text 181 managing 571 user defined 182 video files display options 374 views 8 Assets view 560 Page Design view 76 Page Preview 76 Page view 75 Publish view 578 Style view 270 virtual folders see aliased folders VRML files 378 W Warning icon 78 wav files 375 Web transfer your site 598 Web server transfer site files 586 Web sites
423. n Home Thumbnail page C Mission contains the photo B Events gallery object B oO Activities B Hiking 7 Yosemite Photo page C Highlights contains a stack of i m pages for each hot wonder Lodge 209 Adding a Photo Gallery Adding a Photo Gallery You can create a new photo gallery or add an existing photo gallery to your site You can duplicate an existing gallery or add galleries that you removed from the site See Removing a Photo Gallery on page 236 You add the photo gallery object to the page where you want to display thumbnail images of the photos in the gallery You can add a new page or use an existing page Creating a New Photo Gallery 1 In Page view display the page where you want to place the photo gallery object This is the page where the thumbnail images appear 2 Choose the Photo Gallery tool from the Advanced toolbar and click in the upper left corner of the Layout area PhotoGallery fool Start in the upper left corner to allow as much space as possible for the thumbnail images The Add Photo Gallery dialog appears Current photo galleries and photo galleries that were added to the site and then removed are listed in the Insert an existing Photo Gallery section at the bottom of the dialog If no other galleries were created you do not see this list Add Photo Gallery x Add Photo Gallery x Please provide a name for your Photo Gallery This
424. n By default your site folder is saved inside the User Sites folder but you can store the site in any location on your local computer Because the paths to the assets in a site file are absolute they include the drive and folder names you cannot save the 28 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites site file on another computer on a network To move a site to another computer you must export the site as a template as described in Chapter 4 Working with Templates It s a good idea to check the size of your nod files periodically Some site designs may cause a sudden increase in the size of the nod file If this happens choose Re optimize from the Tools menu This command can increase the efficiency of the open site file For additional assistance contact NetObjects Technical Support Creating and Opening Sites When you create a site you always begin with a template You can also derive templates from sites you create A template is a fully designed page or site that you can use as a starting point for your own pages or sites A typical template might include a banner and navigation buttons an assigned SiteStyle and text or other content You can start a new site from a template or insert one into your current site Once inserted into a site you can modify template pages any way you like Templates are described in detail in Chapter 4 Working with Templates You can also open an existing site and add to it
425. n DefaultMasterBorder Select a MasterBorder to base the new one on Cancel NetObjects Fusion creates a new MasterBorder based on the selected MasterBorder and makes it the current MasterBorder for that page To apply the new MasterBorder to other pages see Applying a MasterBorder to Multiple Pages on page 137 5 Continue working on the MasterBorder by following the steps in Modifying the Current MasterBorder on page 133 Changing MasterBorders 1 In Page view display the page where you want to apply a different MasterBorder 2 Click in the MasterBorder to display the MasterBorder Properties palette 3 Select the MasterBorder you want from the Name drop down list The margins of the page now display the contents of the selected MasterBorder You can change the MasterBorder of a single page or a group of pages in Site view See Applying a MasterBorder to Multiple Pages 136 Chapter 10 Managing MasterBorders Applying a MasterBorder to Multiple Pages You can apply a MasterBorder to several pages at one time in Site view 1 InSite view select the pages to which you want to apply the new MasterBorder See Working with a Group of Pages on page 34 The selected pages are listed at the bottom of the Properties palette Properties 2 xi jalal Property MasterBorder Property DefaultMasterBor_y Set on all Page name MasterBorder Events DefaultMasterBorder Activities DefaultMaste
426. n Individual Photo Caption You can apply formatting to all or part of the caption text For example you can make a single word bold for emphasis 1 2 In Page view display a photo page Click the Next button on the control bar until the photo you want to work on appears Select all or part of the caption text Use the options on the Format tab of the Captions Properties palette to format the text See Formatting Text on page 154 Formatting Photo Thumbnail Titles If the selected thumbnail template includes a photo title you can format the title of all the photos at once from the Thumbnail Page tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor or you can format individual titles from the thumbnail page Note If you specify formats and they do not appear in the text it could be caused by the text style definitions usually the definition of the Body and Normal P tags in the SiteStyle For example if the Body tag defines the font size that definition overrides any font size you specify in the Object Format dialog You can get around 224 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries this by choosing a SiteStyle that does not define the property you want to set or by formatting the individual photo titles See Formatting an Individual Thumbnail Title on page 225 Any individual text you format overrides the SiteStyle definitions Formatting All Thumbnail Titles 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a pho
427. n can automatically open a file asset in the external application with which the file asset is associated For HTML documents and gif and jpeg image files you can specify your preferred editing application in the Application Options dialog See Setting Program Options on page 20 For other types of files see Editing Objects and Assets on page 87 To open a file asset in an external application 1 In Assets Files view select the asset 2 From the Assets menu choose Open Asset 3 Make your changes and save the file in the external application Displaying a Page Containing a Specific File Asset 1 In Assets Files view double click a file asset to open the File dialog 2 Select the page you want to see from the list of pages 3 Click the Go To button The page you selected appears in Page view Deleting a File Asset You should only delete assets not in use If you delete an asset in use on a page the object containing that asset appears as a blank or with an X through it in Page view To avoid deleting assets in use double click the asset in Assets view to see if it s used on any pages before you decide to delete the asset To delete a file asset 1 In Assets view right click the file asset you want to delete and choose Delete File Asset from the shortcut menu You can also select the file asset in the list and press the Delete key on the keyboard 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Note You ca
428. n fields such as page names asset names or object properties 182 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 1 In Page view double click the text box where you want to insert a user defined variable 2 From the Text menu choose Insert Field The Insert Field dialog appears 3 Select User Defined Variable from the Type drop down list 4 Click New The New Variable dialog appears New Variable Variable name Value Cancel 5 Type a name and value for the field and click OK The field appears highlighted in the Field list of the Insert Field dialog 6 Click OK Note See Changing General Settings on page 52 to enable variable substitutions Checking Spelling You can check the spelling of English language words in NetObjects Fusion You can add words to a personal dictionary so they will no longer be flagged as misspelled Your personal dictionary is a simple text file so you can use any text editor to add or delete words You can check spelling throughout an entire site on selected pages or on a single page If smart spell check is turned on once NetObjects Fusion checks spelling in a text block it does not check the same text again unless you modify the text or turn off smart spell check See Setting Text Options on page 23 183 Checking Spelling 1 Go to Site view or Page view 2 From the Tools menu choose Spell Check 3 Select Entire Site to check the spelling of text on all page
429. n that reverts to the form s initial settings e Button creates a custom button that runs the script you add using the HTML button HTML Opens the Object HTML dialog so you can add a script that runs when site visitors click the custom button See Accessing an Object s HTML on page 550 440 Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Submitting Responses as Plain Text You can have responses submitted as plain text to a file on the Web server using the Form Handler component When you use the Form Handler you don t have to provide your own CGI script the Form Handler provides it for you Note Using the Form Handler component might require configuration of your Web server To find out what s required see the components information at the Workbench link from www netobjects com support Submitting Data to a Text File To use the Form Handler component to copy site visitors responses to a text file on your Web server use the component tool to create the form s Submit button After creating the form as described on page 430 1 In Page view select the Form Handler tool from the NetObjects Fusion E Components toolbar and draw a rectangle on the form F Handler tool 2 Set the Form Handler properties Form Handler Properties 2 xi 20 Form Handler ZAXI Button Name Submit e Button Name a name for the button s label or accept Submit e Publish to From
430. n you mouse over it while another action removes the highlighting when you move the mouse away Note Because MasterBorders can apply to several pages any object in the Layout that s targeted by an action involving a MasterBorder must be available in all Layouts using that MasterBorder 1 In Page view select the item you want to trigger the action and click the Actions tab on the Properties palette Picture Pre a Object ID Picture1 Object initially visible in browser Lists all actions this object triggers Actions with the same trigger event occur in the order listed vw Actiont On Page Loaded do Set Image Action2 On Mouse Over do Use Image Action3 On Mouse do Use Image Adds or removes an action Changes the order of actions Clear the Object initially visible in browser option to hide the object when the page loads For example if an action targeting this object makes it fly onto the page you will want to hide the object until the fly action is triggered 2 Click the plus button on the Properties palette to add a new action The Set Action dialog appears 3 Specify the action s trigger event in the When field 403 Adding Actions to Objects and Pages E When menu button Click the When menu button next to the field point to a trigger category and click the trigger event you want Set Action Name Action When Clicked Trigge
431. n your site grows the number of links will probably increase as well NetObjects Fusion makes it easy for you to find a link 1 Open the Link dialog 2 Click the Find button The Find ink type Link dialog appears Find File Link Find Contains X Cancel 3 Select criteria for the search enter the text you want to search for and click Find NetObjects Fusion finds the first link that satisfies your criteria 4 To find the next link that matches the criteria click Find Again Editing or Removing a Link To edit a link select the linked text or object click the Link button on the Properties palette or Standard toolbar then change the link in the Link dialog If an external link is used in multiple places in your site you can update all instances by editing the link in Assets view To remove a link select it click Link on the Properties palette or Standard toolbar and click Unlink in the Link dialog You cannot remove a link in Assets view but you can verify all instances of a link If you unlink every instance of a link it is removed automatically You can insert HTML and JavaScript before inside and after links See Adding HTML to a Link You can also use a link to trigger an action using the Blank link See Adding an Action to Linked Text on page 408 Adding HTML to a Link You can add your own HTML or JavaScript to a link to extend its capabilities For example you might want to add HTML t
432. nail images or the size of an individual photo page image or all the photo page images NetObjects Fusion retains the image s proportions when you resize Note Some templates do not allow the photos to be resized If you want to resize photos you must select another template To resize photos 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or the photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Click an image 215 Working with Photos The properties palette appears Thumbnail Properties MEE Photo Properties KE E m Proportional Dimension Proportional Dimension width Width js 1 Apply to all Apply Apply to all File Size 1 File Size 20KB Thumbnail 105KB r Configure 34 m Configure To set or change the options for this To set or change the options for this thumbnail double click it or click photo double click it or click Configure Configure Configure Configure 3 Resize the image You can change the image size by dragging the slider on the properties palette by entering the width directly in the properties palette or by dragging the image change the image size by dragging select the image and drag the small white box until the image is the size you want Drag this box to change the size of the image When you release the mouse button t
433. name is Untitled Until you rename that page the default Layout is named Untitled Layout You can add multiple Layouts to a page each with its own properties design and content You might use several Layouts to prototype or publish several versions of the same page You could also create separate Layouts for different versions of your site such as English French media and text only When you publish the site NetObjects Fusion publishes each page using the currently selected Layout The name of the currently selected Layout appears in the Layout drop down list in the lower left corner of Page view jomeLayout renchLa Layout drop down list MedicalLa Neston avout MedicalLa NE IMedicalLa Current Layout You can control various characteristics of the Layout s appearance in Page view See Setting Up the Page Design View Display on page 77 You cannot delete a Layout Objects in any Layout you create are always listed as In Use in Assets view even if the Layout is not selected Creating a New Layout 1 In Page view display the page for which you want to create a new Layout 2 Select Add from the Layout drop down list A new blank Layout appears Any content on the previous Layout is stored with that Layout Each Layout you add is named PagenameLayout The number is incremented for each Layout you create for the page To change the Layout name see Renaming a Layout on page 113 112 Chap
434. nclude a link to the parent page in the navigation bar 300 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners e Include child pages to include links to the child pages in the navigation bar igation Bar Properties alol Tours Structure Site C Custom Edit en Display Activities play First Level 5 Type eurton z Home Highlights k ngnegne Penes Mission b I Parent page v Child pages Home page Target none Mew Target Options Orientation Horizontal Set Button Background You can set a background color for a button navigation bar A background color can visually unify a navigation bar if buttons are widely spaced it can also help site visitors distinguish the navigation bar from the background of the page 1 In Page view select the navigation bar 2 In the Background color section click the Color button and select a color from the Color Picker or select None to use no background color Setting Navigation Bar Orientation 1 In Page view select the navigation bar 2 In the Options section select Vertical or Horizontal orientation Set Border Width and Button Spacing You can set the thickness of a button navigation bar s border as well as the spacing between buttons You can increase the spacing between buttons to let the background show through or to add visual breaks around buttons The border and spacing are meas
435. ncorrect Check the names of the affected pages The Aliases and Advanced S FTP tabs are for advanced setup options See Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing 595 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server To create additional publish profiles click New and repeat the process To edit an existing publish profile select it from the Profile list make the changes and click Close To duplicate an existing publish profile select it from the Profile list and click Duplicate To delete an existing profile select it from the Profile list click Remove and click Yes to confirm deletion 8 Click Test to verify you can connect to your remote server Review The Server Setup Process on page 586 if you experience problems connecting to your remote server 9 Click Close You re now ready to publish your site Creating a Global Publish Profile NetObjects Fusion saves publish profiles with the site you are publishing If you want to use the same profile to publish several different sites you can create a global copy of the profile which makes it available to all the sites you build To create a global publish profile 1 Create a publish profile as described in Define Server Profiles on page 591 2 In the Publish settings dialog click Save as Global Profile 3 Click Close This publish profile will be available for use for all sites you build Publishing Components If you installed third party Publis
436. nd then assigning the MasterBorder to multiple pages is an easy way to give pages with the same navigational needs the same navigational structure New banners and navigation bars you create use elements of the currently selected SiteStyle However you can customize the banners and buttons by assigning other styles or labels or by replacing their images with your own This chapter tells you how to use navigation bars and banners including Adding navigation bars Setting navigation structure e Setting navigation bar properties Adding banners Customizing banners and navigation bars 297 Working with Banners and Navigation Bars Working with Banners and Navigation Bars Typically in each new site you create NetObjects Fusion automatically places a banner in the top margin a button navigation bar in the left margin and a text navigation bar in the bottom margin You can place banners and navigation bars anywhere on the page including MasterBorders and Layouts as well as inside text boxes table cells and Layout Regions Banner Button navigation bar Button Text navigation bar Home Mission Events Next Taur Contest Banner titles and button names are set to the page name by default You can change the name using the Custom Names button in Site view the Custom Names command on the Edit menu the settings on the Navigation Button or Banner Properties palette in Page view
437. ne SiteStyles Source Name Custom Online SiteStyles Online SiteStyles Source URL ntes were orlinestyles com styles Test EXE PEGS This is the name that will appear in the Style view Enter the URL of the online style source Click Test to verify the URL entered is valid Click Finish NetObjects Fusion adds the style source name to the style list The list of online styles is displayed 290 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles To add a local styles source 1 In Style view from the Style menu choose Add SiteStyles Source The Add SiteStyles Source dialog appears Select Local SiteStyles as the Source Type Click Next Enter a name for the new source Add Local SiteStyles Source Lx Local SiteStyles Source Name Local SiteStyles Local SiteStyles Source Path CANetDbiects Fusion 85 Test _ This is the name that will appear in the Style view Type in the path or navigate to the style folder containing the styles you want to add The path entered must include the folder where the SiteStyles are stored For example if your computer stores its styles in a folder called Mountain Bikes the path will look similar to SiteStyles Mountain Bikes Warning If you do not specify the folder where the styles are located all of the directory contents will be displayed in Style view Click Test to verify the path entered is valid Click Finish NetO
438. needed to generate the HTML files and save them locally on your hard disk When the site is ready for the world to see publish it to the ISP server NetObjects Fusion publishes the HTML files to the server The first time you transfer you need to select setup options to define your ISP server s profile such as URL type of HTML to use file structure and so on You only need to do this setup once Sites published with NetObjects Fusion work with any Web server on any operating platform No special Web server extensions are required When you re publish your site for example to update pages or add new information NetObjects Fusion overwrites existing files as needed e NetObjects Fusion does not automatically publish through firewalls or to proxy servers See Publishing with Firewalls or Proxy Servers on page 611 e If NetObjects Fusion has difficulty storing your site on a remote Web server e Make sure your system is online and has a valid connection to your network or the Internet Make sure the server is not down or offline Make sure your publish profile settings are correct Test the remote server account name and password settings displayed in the Publish Settings dialog by using them to log on to the server using a separate FTP or telnet application 577 Exploring Publish View Make sure your account has the appropriate permissions and that sufficient storage space for your site is availa
439. ner to allow as much space as possible for the thumbnail images The Add E Commerce Catalog dialog appears Current catalogs and catalogs that were added to the site and then removed are listed in the Insert an existing E Commerce Catalog section at the bottom of the dialog If no other catalogs were created you do not see this list Add E Commerce Catalog Eg Please Name and Add in drop down menu a store for your E Commerce Catalog You may also explore the catalog without a store This information wvill be used to save the catalog so that you can reuse it at a later time Name Catalog Store tuse catalog without a store engine OK Cancel Add E Commerce Catalog x Please choose whether to create a new E Commerce Catalog or insert a saved E Commerce Catalog Create a new E Commerce Catalog Name JNewCetalog Store Use catalog without a store engine Profile None Insert an existing E Commerce Catalog Created Catalog Sun Apr 18 14 0 Current catalogs and catalogs that were added to the site and then removed are listed in the Insert an existing E Commerce Catalog section as shown at the right If no other catalogs were created you see the dialog OK J Cancel 3 Type a name for the new catalog 340 Iw catalog tool Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs NetObjects Fusion uses the name you enter as the name of the detail page This name appears in the
440. new value is displayed in the list at the bottom of the palette You can also set Management properties for multiple pages See Setting Site Management Properties on page 37 41 Adding a Page Adding a Page 1 In Site view select the page you want to be the parent of the new page 2 Click the New Page button on the control bar New Page I In Site view the new page appears beneath the selected page The new page is named Untitled followed by a number which indicates the order in which new pages were added Note Site visitors may not be able to get to the new page unless navigation is set up in the MasterBorder of the parent page to include the child page It is also a good idea to set the navigation on the child page to include its parent so site visitors can get back to the previous page Copying and Pasting Pages You can copy pages in Site view and paste them anywhere in the SiteStructure 1 Select the page or pages you want to copy and press Ctrl C 2 Select the page to be the parent of the copied pages and press Ctrl V The copies are pasted into the SiteStructure as children of the selected page 42 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Deleting a Page 1 In Site view select the page or pages you want to delete right click the page icon and choose Delete Page from the shortcut menu Click Yes to confirm the deletion If you delete a page that has children the child
441. ng 12 between pages 78 control bar buttons 12 Site Navigation palette 79 navigation bars 273 298 actions 299 highlighted buttons 304 primary and secondary 303 rollover buttons 304 16 see also button navigation bars text navigation bars setting border width 301 setting button spacing 301 setting display options 300 setting targets 311 setting type 304 using 298 navigation buttons adding to stacked pages 484 stacked pages 488 navigation controls see banners button navigation bars text navigation bars NetObjects Component Development Kit CDK 449 NetObjects Fusion folder structure 16 navigating 12 starting 28 updating 26 views 8 NetObjects Fusion Components see components NetObjects System folder 16 Netscape Navigator action support 401 ActiveX support 387 NFX components see components nod files 28 NOFRAMES tag 548 normal P style 286 numbered lists 175 start value 177 object HTML examples 552 Object Tree 88 in actions 405 413 425 using with tables 241 objects accessing adding HTML 550 adding 81 adding actions 403 adding to Layout Regions 115 adding to Layouts 114 aligning 90 91 coding your own 554 copying 89 creating embedded 124 distributing 90 91 dragging and dropping 85 embedding 96 123 formatting 165 layering 93 moving 89 naming 89 optimizing placement on page 104 overlapping 93 100 pasting 90 placing 81 resizing 89 selecting 88 showing hiding indicator icons 77 showi
442. ng Guides Use the page guides to align objects vertically and horizontally You can add as many guides as you want to either the MasterBorder or the Layout area MasterBorder guides are red and Layout area guides are blue Guides associated with a MasterBorder appear on all pages that use that MasterBorder Guides you create are saved with the site To Add a guide select the Layout or MasterBorder and click in the ruler or hold down the Ctrl key while you drag an existing guide Move a guide click its arrow on the ruler and drag it Delete a guide click its arrow and drag it off the ruler Show or hide a guide select Rulers amp Guides from the View menu Aligning Objects Using Smart Guides Use the smart guides to position an object vertically and horizontally without using page guides Smart guides are convenient when you want to align one image or object with another that is already set To show smart guides select Smart Guides from the View menu 92 Chapter 6 Page View Basics use smart guides select and move an object in Page view Object El Smart Guides Snapping Objects to Grids Guides and Each Other Use the Snap feature to align objects exactly When you select a Snap to command NetObjects Fusion creates a magnetic attraction between the selected object and the grid guide or other objects Forcing objects to snap to grids guides and each other makes your HTML code more e
443. ng Java and ActiveX Inserting a Java Applet or Servlet 382 Inserting a Java Bean Component 384 Inserting an ActiveX Control 387 23 Referencing and Editing External HTML Using Referenced Files 390 Referencing HTML from Site View 390 Referencing HTML from Page View 392 Referencing HTML as an Object 394 Toggling Referenced Layouts and Objects 396 Managing Referenced Assets 397 Publishing Native HTML 398 Publishing Unmanaged Assets 400 24 Building Dynamic Pages How Actions 402 Adding Actions to Objects and Pages 403 Adding an Action to Linked Text 408 Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages 410 Targeting Several Objects with One Action 412 Modifying Actions 414 Scripting Your Own 415 16 Scripting Parameter Values 416 Examples c nod or ete te ae s 418 Creating a Button 418 Colliding One Object with 420 Showing One Object While Hiding Others 421 Sequencing Actions for a Slide Show 423 Customizing Default Actions 427 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Creating
444. ng NetObjects Fusion Components The Ticker Tape placeholder and the Ticker Tape Properties palette appear Ticker Tape Properties 2 xl G Ticker Tape To display multiple messages in the Ticker Tape display click the Number of Messages row enter the number and click the check mark You can specify up to 50 messages A new Text for Message and URL for Message row appears for each message you specified Click the Text for Message row and type the message in the Ticker Tape text entry field Click the check mark Double click the URL for Message row and in the Link dialog select a type of link for the message See Creating Links on page 316 Specify the link information for this message and click Link Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each message in the Ticker Tape display Click the Speed row and specify the scrolling speed 1 to 50 of the message Specify a higher number to make the message scroll faster a lower number to make the message scroll slower To set the frame background and LED colors click the appropriate row then select the color you want from the drop down list Frame Color determines the border color of the Ticker Tape display The default is gray Background Color determines the background color of the Ticker Tape display The default is black LED Color determines the color of the message text The default is green 469 Adding Time Based Pictures
445. ng hiding outlines 77 sizing 89 snapping 93 updating multiple instances 86 wrapping text around 125 ocx files 387 ODBC drivers 480 online help see help Open Data Base Connectivity see ODBC 480 options HTML 581 preview 22 orientation Site view 48 Outline view 48 output method see HTML output ovals see shapes overlapping objects 93 P padding 163 Page components 454 Page Design view 76 page layout see Layouts page names allowable characters 46 character requirements 620 setting 311 spaces in 46 556 Page Preview 76 page size 79 Page view 8 75 displaying pages 78 referencing external HTML 392 pages accessing adding HTML 536 18 adding 42 adding actions 403 assigned MasterBorder 36 character set 618 child 33 color coding in Site view 37 containing file assets displaying 564 containing links displaying 569 copying 42 default size 53 deleting 43 displaying 78 Don t Publish setting 37 dynamic 401 editing HTML 536 importing 85 indexing for search engines 546 margins 132 moving 43 naming 36 navigating 78 optimizing object placement 104 parent 33 pasting 42 redirecting site visitors 465 referencing external HTML 392 renaming 45 searching 13 selecting 33 selecting multiple 34 selecting sections 34 setting background 118 127 243 249 257 309 setting Management properties 37 setting properties 36 40 setting size 79 showing hiding Layout and MasterBorder labels 77 sibling 33 site sections 3
446. ng with Regular Tables e Publishing with Fixed Page Layout e Matching design priorities with HTML output method 95 Approaches to Page Design Approaches to Page Design In NetObjects Fusion a container is an object into which you can embed other objects A container can be any size and can hold any kind and number of objects NetObjects Fusion provides five types of containers you can use to design and lay out pages The Layout is the body of the page surrounded on all four sides by the MasterBorder Each page has at least one Layout although you can create additional layouts as needed See Working with Layouts on page 112 Layout Regions are mini layouts that you can use to subdivide the page You can draw and place Layout Regions anywhere on the page and place any kind and number of objects including text boxes or other Layout Regions within their borders See Working with Layout Regions on page 114 Text boxes are a special class of objects because you can embed other objects within them You can also maximize a text box so it fills the entire Layout in effect using a single text box to lay out the entire page See Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes Tables serve as containers for objects If your page design is based on rows or columns of content as in a spreadsheet or other tabular arrangement you can lay out all or part of your page in tables You can then lay out your content within the cells of
447. nk when you specify which frame is to display the results of a link you are targeting that frame 1 5 6 In Page view select the object or text that you want to link The object s properties palette appears Click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears Select the type of link you are targeting Internal Link Smart Link External Link or File Link and set up the link See Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors In the Target area click Existing and from the drop down list choose the target frame in which you want to display the linked information Current page Target Existing X Name LeftFrame s Add HTML Cancel In this example body and LeftFrame refer to the two frames on the current page The other four choices are standard targets that are always available See Setting Link Targets on page 327 You may not need to assign a target NetObjects Fusion automatically targets most internal links for you Click Link to close the dialog and create the link Preview the page to test your targeted links Targeted links in framesets do not load the URL of the page into the browser Location input field The browser sees the URL of the frameset so title and location information about the page reflect the frameset rather than the page s content 148 Chapter 11 Working with AutoFrames AutoFrames and Browser Refresh When a site visitor clicks an untargeted link
448. nnot undo this operation You must use the New File Asset command on the Assets menu to recreate the file asset 564 Chapter 30 Managing Assets Deleting All Unused File Assets 1 In Assets view from the Assets menu choose Delete All Unused File Assets 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion NetObjects Fusion removes all file assets for which the In Use indicator is not Yes Note You cannot undo this operation You must use the New File Asset command to recreate file assets Verifying File Assets To make sure assets publish correctly you can verify that all file assets are in their expected folders However if any portion of the file s path has changed the file will not be found or verified For example if the hard disk drive letter is not the same or not present or if a folder name is changed or the folder is moved or if the file name is changed or the file is moved the file will not be found 1 In Assets view from the Assets menu choose Verify All File Assets NetObjects Fusion verifies and reports the path status of all files When a file s path information is correct NetObjects Fusion lists the date and time found in the Verify Status column Verify Status Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 44 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 44 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Found on 1 31 2001 5 07 03 PM Foun
449. ns tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette For example a navigation bar could fly in from the top when the site visitor opens the page See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages You cannot assign an action to an individual button Adding a Navigation Bar You can add a horizontal or vertical button or text navigation bar to a page 1 In Page view display the page on which you want to place the navigation bar 2 Select the Button Navigation Bar tool or the Text Navigation Bar tool from the Navigation flyout on the Standard toolbar 3 Draga box in the MasterBorder or Layout area where you want to place the navigation bar Drag in a horizontal direction for a horizontal navigation bar or in a vertical direction for a vertical navigation bar A new navigation bar appears with buttons or text linked to the pages indicated in the Navigation structure and Multi level options sections of the General tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette 1 Bar Properties alol Structure Sie Custom Edit Coetor Home Tours Highlighted button Events Mission Display First Level About Us Type Button T Button navigation bar Include Esempsse JV Childpages j ERSTE es Climbing Shoes Home page Tents DEM z New Target Snow Jackets i 3 Options Orientation Horizontal 299 Using Navigation Bars Setting Navigat
450. nt Setting up the database connection Defining a database schema Adding a recordset e Retrieving and displaying data e Modifying a database 491 How the Database Component Works How the Database Component Works You build PHP ASP or ColdFusion applications by placing objects on one or more pages that display data from a database Each page needs at least 2 components a Connector object identifying the table containing the data and either a field or list object displaying the data or a query object identifying the table containing the data MasterBorder Home Mission Contest Hoa Home Mission Events Contest You can also place objects on a page that allow site visitors to search for data navigate forward and backward through results and update add or delete records If you re familiar with relational databases and some SQL you can work with components directly by setting attributes in the properties palettes If you are not familiar with SQL or relational databases you can use wizards to build pages that e List details of a particular record for example to display the name price and description of a particular product e List all records in a database table for example to display names of all available products e Link each record in a list either to details about that record so that clicking a product name displays a p
451. nt site visitors using these browsers from being greeted with a blank page or error message when they access your site add alternate content for them using the HTML lt NOFRAMES gt tag You add the lt NOFRAMES gt tag and your alternate content to the frameset file generated when you publish Your content can include text pictures and links using standard HTML tags 1 In Page view right click in the MasterBorder and choose Master HTML The Page HTML dialog appears 2 Click the Beginning of Body tab and enter lt NOFRAMES gt Hl Thanks for visiting our site lt H1 gt We re sorry you haven t had a chance to upgrade your browser yet and can t see our framed site We think the frames make it easier to find what you want lt P gt If you want to obtain a more current browser check out either Microsoft 5 lt A HREF hitp www microsoft com Internet Explorer lt A gt or Netscape s lt A HREF hitp www netscape com gt Navigator or Communicator lt A gt products lt NOFRAMES gt 3 Click OK to close the dialog 548 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly A site visitor with a browser that supports frames sees the framed site as you designed it A site visitor with an older browser sees the following Corporate NCSA Mosaic MEE File Edit Options Navigate Hotlists Help lal la oje al esr file E Fusion User Sites Myco2 My Computer Corporate corporate html Thanks for vis
452. nt to left center right or block Changing alignment here also changes the alignment setting on the Text Properties palette If no button is selected the text is aligned using the default alignment Image wrap CSS only sets how text can wrap around an image You can choose left right or on both sides of the image To apply wrap settings to a particular image use the Picture Properties palette This feature is most useful when creating text styles See Creating a Text Style on page 170 Line height CSS only sets the amount of space between lines of text in the selected unit of measurement Letter spacing CSS only sets the amount of space between characters in the text in the selected unit of measurement Space above CSS only and Space below CSS only set the amount of space above and below paragraphs in the selected units of measurement 161 Formatting Text e First line indent sets the tab space indent for the first line of text in the selected unit of measurement This is the only way to indent a paragraph without using the space bar Left margin CSS only and Right margin CSS only set the margins on either side of the paragraph in the selected units of measurement Setting Borders and Padding CSS only Borders are lines around a paragraph Padding is the amount of space between the border lines and the text If no border is set padding can mimic margins around text Border Padding This text
453. ntral European Windows 1250 Chinese Simplified GB2312 e Chinese Traditional BIGS Cyrillic ISO 8859 5 e Cyrillic KO18 R e Cyrillic Windows 1251 Greek ISO 8859 7 Greek Windows 1253 Japanese EUC JP e Japanese ISO 2022 JP e Japanese SHIFT JIS e Korean KSC5601 e Turkish ISO 8859 9 Turkish Windows 1254 Unicode UCS 2 e Unicode UTF 7 e Unicode UTF 8 Western European CP437 Western European CP850 e Western European ISO 8859 1 Western European ISO 8859 15 e Western European Windows 1252 616 Chapter 33 Working with Character Sets The following character sets are not included with NetObjects Fusion but are supported once installed in your operating system You can download language kits at www microsoft com or install them from your Windows NT installation disks Western European CP 437 Western European CP 850 Central European CP 852 Cyrillic CP 866 Greek CP 869 Greek CP 737 Turkish CP 857 Setting the Site s Character Set 1 In any view from the Tools menu choose Options Current Site 2 On the General tab of the Current Site Options dialog select a character set from the Character set drop down list Current Site Options General META tags History Backup Site name MySite SiteStyle Mountain Number of pages 4 r Defaults Browser compatibility Dynamic Page Layout All browsers Change New
454. nvenient way to replace or update multiple instances of an object Reusing assets can also reduce the number of files stored on the server Instead of adding multiple copies of a file in several locations you add the asset once and then select from the list of existing assets when you want to place another instance of the asset To place an asset 1 In Page view choose the appropriate tool and draw a box to specify where you want to place the asset The File Open dialog appears 2 Click the Assets tab to see a list of current assets Picture File Open Folder Image Assets File Name mission mission jpg mtnbiker minbiker ipg File Path CANet bjects Fusion 8XUser Sites MySite Assets mission ipa pen Cancel Iv Create backup of Picture EIE 3 Select the asset you want to place and click Open NetObjects Fusion places the asset on the page and opens the appropriate properties palette In Assets view you can replace all instances of this asset in your site using a single command or add file assets See Chapter 30 Managing Assets 86 Chapter 6 Page View Basics Adding and Modifying Alt Tags To make pages load faster some visitors set up their browsers so they do not display images To ensure that your pages provide the information you want to convey regardless of how the site visitor s browser is set up use alt tags to provide descriptive text that appears when images are not displayed Y
455. o gallery You may choose a profile containing all information associated with an existing photo gallery or choose Default to create a new profile Saving a Photo Gallery Profile on page 235 Current profiles and profiles of photo galleries that were added to the site and then removed are included in the Create a new Photo Gallery section at the top of the dialog If no other profiles were created you can only choose Default Click OK Inserting an Existing Photo Gallery 1 2 Display the designated thumbnail page in Page view Choose the Photo Gallery tool from the Advanced toolbar and click in the upper left corner of the Layout area Start in the upper left corner to allow as much space as possible for the thumbnail images The Add Photo Gallery dialog appears Available photo galleries are listed in the Insert an existing Photo Gallery section at the bottom of the dialog Select Insert an existing Photo Gallery Select the gallery you want to insert and click OK Working with Photos NetObjects Fusion creates two copies of each image file one for the thumbnail page and one for the photo page These copies are published when you publish the site the files are generally much smaller than the original image file NetObjects Fusion does not change your original image file 211 Working with Photos The photo gallery is designed to work best with digital photos However you can use scanned photos as well
456. o see a list of all image files that can be viewed in a Web browser including gif jpg and png e A specific file type to see only files of that type You can select GIF JPEG PNG BMP PCX PICT or FPX e Images to view all files that are image files Files to see all files in the selected folder in the dialog Picture File Open Folder Image Assets Look in E Tutorial ck E d C AdBanners lE catalog My Recent um Documents Photo Gallery lE Sounds Desktop boycimber jpg girlbiker jpg irlcimber jpg i ImageMap jpg f Mission doc My Documents mtnbiker jpg twobikers jpg File name Files of type Original fle mission jpg Files IV Copy to site s Assets folder Show thumbnail image Copy to site s Assets folder check box the original file in your Assets folder Make sure Show thumbnail image is selected if you want to preview your image Thumbnail image Show thumbnail image check box Make sure Copy to site s Assets folder is checked if you want to keep a copy of Note If you plan to edit your images it is recommended you save a copy to your site s Assets folder This will allow you to easily revert to the original image and remove all changes 5 Click Open to place the image on the page 189 Adding a Picture If you select a non s
457. object 480 Ka New External Data Source tool New Asset Chapter 27 Data Publishing Note NetObjects Fusion Connector for Macromedia ColdFusion and NetObjects Fusion Connector for Microsoft Active Server Pages support dynamic data publishing Visit Online view for information about these connectors To create a data object from a SQL data source 1 Display the Select Data Source dialog In Page view select the New External Data Source tool from the Advanced Tools toolbar and draw a rectangle on the page e Ifyou in Assets view click the Data Objects tab and then click the New Asset button on the control bar The Data Object dialog appears Select External and then click the Source button The Select Data Source dialog appears You can select an existing data source or create a new data source To create a new data source click New in the Select Data Source dialog and follow the steps in the Windows Create New Data Source wizard To select an existing ODBC source on your system you can use the File Data Source tab or the Machine Data Source tab File Data Source Select from the list of data sources and click OK Machine Data Source Select from the Data Source Name list and click OK Depending on the data source type you choose the Select Workbook or Select Database dialog appears Follow these steps Selecta file in the dialog and click OK Ifthe source refers to a multi
458. odate the 80 Chapter 6 Page View Basics object If you are working with Windows 98 or ME the upper limit for a Layout area is 33 000 pixels by 33 000 pixels Adding Objects to the Page You can use the tools on the toolbars or drag and drop files onto the page to place objects Using Object Tools 1 In Page view select the tool you want to use 2 Draw a box to position the object For some objects you must select a file from the Open dialog The object appears on the page with the appropriate properties palette The options displayed on the properties palette vary depending on the object 3 Set the object properties After you use a selected tool to place an object on the page the Selection tool automatically becomes active To use a tool repeatedly to add several objects double click it to keep it active This does not work for the Form area tool or the Component tools Page View Toolbars Page view includes Standard Advanced Component and Form toolbars Internal Page components are on the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar If you install third party Page components associated toolbars are listed on the View Toolbars Component Tools menu For general information about using toolbars see About Toolbars on page 11 81 Adding Objects to the Page Standard Toolbar Selection tool See Chapter 1 Text tool See Chapter 12 Link tool See Chapter 19 Hotspot tools See Chapte
459. of a section You cannot print the Site Outline view The printed structure shows the same magnification colors orientation and expanded or collapsed child pages that you see on the screen The printout shows the site name in the header and the number of site pages in the footer To print the entire site select the Home page or click All in the Print dialog e To print a specific page and its children select the top level page or a section or click Selected page and its children in the Print dialog e To view what will be printed select Print Preview from the File menu Select Close to return to Site view 49 Saving Your Work To fit a large site on a single page from the File menu choose Print Setup and select the Print to fit option in the Print Setup dialog Saving Your Work To save your work choose Save Site from the File menu NetObjects Fusion also has an auto save feature that saves your work each time you change views See Setting Program Options on page 20 50 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Backing Up Your Site You can back up your site manually or automatically To make a manual backup 1 From the File menu choose Save Site As The Save Site As dialog appears Save Site As Save in O User Sites amp ex E3 zv Mountain Jacques My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name EEG Places Save as NetObjects Si
460. of the NetObjects Fusion window Site view is selected 2 2 D 3 Online Site Page Style Assets Publish You see Online view when you start NetObjects Fusion if you haven t changed the settings on the Program tab of the Application Options dialog Online view offers a variety of resources to help you build successful Web sites It includes services you can integrate into your site content you can incorporate on your pages how to information to enhance your site building experience links to NetObjects and third party resources and much more Start with Site view to create the hierarchical structure of a site or to import an existing site You can see a structural map of the site which is a graphic view that shows how the pages relate to each other or an outline view similar to Windows Explorer You can quickly rearrange your site by dragging and dropping pages and sections See Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Use Page view to design pages and add content In Page view you see the Layout area and MasterBorder of each page The Layout area displays objects that are unique to that page The MasterBorder contains objects that repeat on a set of pages much as headers and footers appear in a word processing document You can also preview the page as it will appear in a browser and view and edit the HTML source See Chapter 6 Page View Basics A SiteStyle consists of a variety of elements including navigation bu
461. of the line in pixels 5 In the Color section click the Color button for the line head and tail choose a color in the Color Picker and click OK To set all three items to the line color select All parts use one color 6 In the Style section select styles for the head and tail from the drop down lists If you want the head and tail to share the same style select the style for the head then select Head Tail same style Select Outline to assign the line color to the head and tail outlines regardless of their fill colors When you publish a page with drawn lines NetObjects Fusion generates each one as a gif file On your page each line occupies the rectangular area defined by the beginning and ending points of the line If the page contains more than one shape of the same type NetObjects Fusion adds a number to the shape s file name For example the first line you draw is named a ArrowLine gif the second one is named a ArrowLinel gif the third a ArrowLine2 gif and so on 266 Chapter 16 Drawing Shapes and Lines Editing Lines and Arrows To change the length and width of a line or to change the shape and size of the line s head and tail 1 In Page view select the line Selection handles appear Place the pointer over a selection handle The pointer changes to a crosshair To make the line longer or shorter or to change its direction drag an end handle To make the line thicker or th
462. ofile Done 4 In the Format section of the tab select Thumbnails 5 Select a template from the drop down list Options associated with the selected template appear For example the slide template includes Style and Cell spacing as well as the option to include and format photo titles Information about the template and when to use it appear next to the preview window 6 Set the template options 7 Specify the number of columns you want to include on the thumbnail page For example if you have 8 photos in the gallery and set Columns to 4 your thumbnail page will have two rows of four pictures each 8 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor 231 Formatting the Photo Pages Formatting the Photo Pages NetObjects Fusion makes it easy for you to give the photo gallery professional polish You can choose from a variety of layouts for the photo and its descriptive text and select a frame that complements your SiteStyle The format options you select apply to all photo pages Displaying Photo Pages as Pop Up Windows You can display the Photo Pages in browser windows or as pop up windows To display the Photo Pages as pop ups 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Display the Photo Page tab 4 Click the Open in a Pop Up Window checkbox Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Open
463. og See Entering META Tags on page 53 Setting Properties for a Group of Pages When multiple pages are selected you set properties on the Selected Pages tab of the Properties palette You can change the properties for all selected pages or for a single page 1 In Site view select the pages you want to work with See Working with a Group of Pages on page 34 Properties 2 x Property MasterBorder X Property DefaultMasterBor_ Set on all Page name MasterBorder Next Tour DefaultMasterBorder WonderLodge DefaultMasterBorder Activities DefaultMasterBorder 40 3 4 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Choose a property from the top drop down list You can select MasterBorder to change the MasterBorder applied to the selected page or pages Page name to change the name of the page in Site view and the default names on the page s banner and navigation button Title to change the text displayed in the title bar of the site visitor s browser and bookmark list Navigation button to change the text displayed on the button in the navigation bar that links to the selected page Banner to change the text displayed on the selected page s banner File extension See Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensions on page 46 Select a property value from the drop down list or type a value into the field To apply the new value to all selected pages click Set on all The
464. og tent jpg Browse DupuSetngs User Settings el File type JPEG x Quality High x 33 E Percent Approximate download time 6 4 sec 28 8 Kbps T File Size 15 KB Rotate fo no rotation z Apply to All On these tabs you set the quality of the thumbnail and detail images for the selected product As you make changes NetObjects Fusion displays the approximate download time for the file You may choose to save and apply previously defined settings See Saving Output Settings on page 360 5 Select the File type Most photos will be JPEG format 359 Controlling Download Time Set the Quality and Percent These fields both affect image quality 100 is the highest quality 0 the lowest quality a Set the Quality field first Each setting corresponds to a range of percents Low corresponds to 0 39 Medium to 40 75 High to 76 99 and Maximum to 100 b Use the Percent field to fine tune the quality setting As you adjust the settings the image in the Preview field changes If the Preview image is scaled down you can close the editor and check image quality in Page Design view Select a download speed The most common download time is 56 6 To apply these settings to all the product images click Apply to All This affects all thumbnail images or all detail images depending on the selected tab Set image rotation This setting affects only the selected image To control the
465. omatic to set the table background to the color specified by its parent object e Color to select a background color from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker Table Properties L2 x jol Background Color Automatic Image Automatic 3 Inthe Image field select Automatic to set the background to the image specified by the table s parent object Browse to select an image from the Picture File Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the table the browser tiles the image If you select a picture with a transparent color the background color shows through To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field Adjusting the Table Structure You can resize add or delete rows and columns and merge or split cells to design the table structure Resizing Table Rows and Columns In Page view select the table and 243 Adjusting the Table Structure Drag the cell guides on the vertical or horizontal ruler to resize a row or column This changes the overall table height or width Use these handles to change the column width a MARE EE Use these handles to move the table Use these handles to change the row height Point to the border of the row or co
466. on to use a transparent GIF named clearpixel gif to space items accurately on a page If you generate tables on a page NetObjects Fusion places invisible image files of varying widths and heights in the table cells to ensure accurate placement of objects Include HTML comments Select this option to insert comments into your generated HTML code that makes reading it easier For example with this option selected the comment lt Start of the Body for this page appears before the lt BODY gt tag e Include Generator meta tag Select this option to identify the application that generated the HTML code The name of the application appears in the code s META tag The default generator META tag for your site is NetObjects Fusion 8 for Windows You can also manually enter information to use for the generator s name in the box e Include character set meta tag Select this option to include the character set for the site in the META tag of each page Normally you only use this option if your site uses a non Western character set e Background image offset Select this option to compensate for the small borders most browsers add to the top and left sides of their windows By selecting this option you can shift the image in NetObjects Fusion so the page content starts in the upper left corner of the page Enter values in the Top and Left boxes to offset the background image Click OK when you finish selecting HTML options 583 Publis
467. on a white background You can edit this code or add code anywhere there is a white background 538 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Language elements are differentiated by text color Blue HTML tag Green HTML attribute names Maroon HTML attribute values Black Text that appears on the page Gold HTML and SCRIPT comments Purple SCRIPT tags Teal SCRIPT tags Red Unknown tags SCRIPT keywords appear in bold text If the page contains frames a tab for each frame appears at the bottom of the HTML Source Editor See Working in the HTML Source Editor on page 545 Blocks of code can be expanded and collapsed by clicking its plus or minus sign respectively Adding and Editing HTML and Scripts in HTML Source View 1 2 In Page view click the HTML Source tab Edit the source code as necessary You can Add or edit code anywhere there is a white background Copy blocks of protected code and paste them in unprotected areas Drag and drop unprotected blocks of code See Moving Text Using Drag and Drop on page 541 Insert the contents of an HTML script or other text file Insert fields such as the date and time To save your edits from the File menu choose Save Site If you switch to another view before saving your changes the Save Files dialog appears 539 Editing the Page s HTML 4 When you switch to another view the Save Files dialog appears Save Files The following file
468. on bar 2 Click the Style tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette 3 In the Style section select Custom and click Edit The Custom Style dialog appears 4 Selecta page level from the site structure list on the left that you want to customize 5 Select the Site Style and Button set you want to use for the page level selected in Step 4 306 Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners Only active styles will appear in the Site Style drop down list amp J Home Button style D Tours amp J Events Site Style Mountain x D Activities Button Set Secondary x S Highlights D January utton text D March D Mission About Us S O Store E Climbing Shoes ds D Tents Orientation Vertical O Snow Jackets Dpen Right Offset x o vp Cancel Apply Select Include Fly out submenus to make child pages not included in the navigation bar visible when the site visitor moves the pointer over the parent page link The advanced Fly out submenu settings will become active Orientation displays the fly out submenu horizontally or vertically Open describes how the menu will unfold Offset defines the position of the fly out submenu Click Apply to save the current page level settings Repeat steps to apply custom styles to additional page levels or click OK to close the Custom Style dialog Change a Button s Name By d
469. on the control bar NetObjects Fusion adds the style to your Active SiteStyle list and applies the style to your site When you go to Page view you see the new style elements and text attributes on each page Editing the Graphic Elements of SiteStyles You can edit any graphic element of an existing style to customize it For instance if you like every element of a style except the banner you can change just the banner image The image for every banner in your site changes to the new image You can also customize SiteStyle elements for some but not all pages See Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners Note When you edit a SiteStyle every site that uses the SiteStyle is affected Your Styles folder stores only one copy of a SiteStyle When you change it the change appears in all sites that use that SiteStyle If the style you want to change is used in other sites and you don t want them to be affected create a new style from the original style See Creating a SiteStyle on page 287 274 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Removing the Read Only Setting All SiteStyles delivered with NetObjects Fusion are set to Read only Before you can edit a SiteStyle you must remove the Read only setting 1 In Style view select the SiteStyle you want to edit from the list of SiteStyles 2 Click in the view so the Style Properties palette appears Style Properties NOTE This view shows properties as they would
470. onally toolbars can be stored in the Component Manager or can float 450 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components Toolbar NOF Components I Ad Banner q gt DynaButtons Object Icon Mission J Events Object Label Contest The Ad Banner tool displays a series of images within a banner Object Description To set Component Manager display options 1 Right click on the toolbar The toolbar menu will appear v Standard Tools Form Tools v Plug Ins Custom Components gt Database Tag Libraries 4 Show Labels v Show Description Customize 2 Select Show Labels to display the object name next to the icon Show Description to display a brief summary of the object Using the Component Manager In the component manager you view only the active toolbar You make a toolbar active by clicking on the toolbar and expanding it Once you make a new toolbar active the previous toolbar collapses 451 Using the Component Manager Custom Components NOF Components DB Component Connector docked toolbar K Recordset Iterator 9 Recordset Navigator A Label Lal image 4 Mission Glink 5 Events SX Test Box Contest EH Text Area CE Combo Box ga Hidden Field IF Conditional Expression Insert Eg Delete d Update lr floating toolbar To view toolbars in
471. ons on page 46 Page type Shows whether the page is a normal page or a stacked page You cannot change this setting it is determined by how the page was created For information about stacked pages see Chapter 27 Data Publishing MasterBorder Shows the MasterBorder assigned to the page You can change the MasterBorder by selecting from the drop down list Exclude From Navigation Removes the page from the site navigation The page is published and typically accessed using links See Creating Links and Anchors on page 315 36 Chapter 3 Creating and Managing Sites Setting Site Management Properties Click the Management tab to set the following properties Properties 2 x Pagestatus Done Don tpublish Color code User defined Color MasterBorder Color Comments Done Page icon displays a check mark when you select Done This is a convenient way to manage individual pages in a large site This setting has no effect on the functioning of the site Dont publish Makes it possible to publish some pages while not publishing others that might be under construction or private The page icon displays a red indicator when you select Don t publish NetObjects Fusion removes pages marked Don t publish from the navigation bars of other pages in the site disables manually created links to such pages and does not generate HTML for these pages during publishing Howev
472. ontal Auto Adjust Each table column row and cell is an individual object You can view the object hierarchy by choosing Object Tree from the View menu You can also see which table object is selected by referring to the Object Tree palette You can rename tables and cells in the Object Tree palette but you cannot rename rows or columns Object Tree 2 x BuiltwithNoF NavigationBar2 J NavigationBarl amp E amp 1 HomeLayout mE HB Columnt Column2 B8 Row Celt BB celz BR Row2 BB celis You can add an action to table or cell using the Actions tab on the Properties palette Setting Table Properties 1 In Page view select the table and make sure the Table tab of the Table Properties palette is displayed If the text box containing the table is sized to the Layout set to wrap to the browser width and the MasterBorder margins are set to zero you can use 241 Adding a Table Relative width to size the table as a percentage of the text box Ifa site visitor resizes the browser window the table will resize accordingly Use Fixed width to ensure that NetObjects Fusion creates a table that does not resize if the site visitor resizes the browser window 2 Enter a thickness for the table border Thickness is measured in pixels Table Properties 2 x amp 3 width 155 Pixels pz Height 56 Pixels
473. options are applicable based on how you set up Browser compatibility in the Current Site Options dialog See Setting the Site s HTML Output Method on page 101 When you choose Fixed Page Layout NetObjects Fusion expresses the location of content in terms of absolute positioning For example instead of using HTML workarounds such as empty table rows and transparent gifs to position a line of text below the top of the page the absolute positioning supported by Fixed Page Layout defines placement of the text box a specific distance from the top left corner of the page in a simple statement of x y coordinates When you select Fixed Page Layout e NetObjects Fusion generates HTML code that produces the same results in Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator 4 x 107 Selecting an HTML Output Method Pages are typically more compact and download faster than table based HTML pages You can overlap objects in Layouts or Layout Regions See Layering Objects on page 93 You get consistent results with pages containing actions See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages There is some risk for text rich pages If a Fixed Page Layout page is viewed in a browser with large font settings the text boxes expand without regard for other objects on the page which can result in unplanned overlapping of objects 108 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output Design Priorities and Method Choices Use this table to determ
474. or 4 x NetObjects Fusion generates layers using the Netscape lt LAYER gt tag This optimizes output for sites viewed in Netscape Navigator 4 x This option is not supported by Netscape 6 0 e Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above NetObjects Fusion generates cascading style sheet positioning code to achieve a high level of layout accuracy This optimizes output for sites viewed in Microsoft Internet Explorer e Netscape Navigator 4 x and Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above NetObjects Fusion generates cascading style sheet positioning code and layers This option is not supported by Netscape 6 0 102 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output Publishing with Dynamic Page Layout When you choose Dynamic Page Layout NetObjects Fusion uses complex hidden tables to achieve the highest level of layout accuracy across browsers To see the table borders in your browser hold down Shift when you click Preview Site or Publish Site Dynamic Page Layout is the default publishing method for NetObjects Fusion Using Dynamic Page Layout e You get relative placement of your content as you designed it in Page view with relative spacing preserved regardless of the site visitor s display configuration e You can prioritize the vertical relationship between objects so site visitors are more likely to see the pages as you designed them regardless of their local browser font and display configurations e Pages can be viewed in most br
475. or its behavior The path to the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab of the Java Bean Properties palette To select a different file click Browse find the file and click Open The current class file is displayed in the Class field Java Bean Properties 2 xi Eile VShadowTestBeanjar Browse Class ShadowTestBean class AltTag Applet Servlet HTML To provide text for the browser to display if it cannot display the file enter a description in the AltTag field Select Applet or Servlet depending on the type of bean you are inserting Ifthe bean requires other files click the Additional Files button then click Add in the Java Applet Files dialog Select another file in the Add Java Applet Files dialog and click Open Click OK to add the selected file 385 Inserting a Java Bean Component 9 Click the Properties tab Java Bean Properties 2 x x slol IbackgroundC Parameter info java awt Color backgroundColor Different beans have different sets of properties This guide assumes you are familiar with Java Beans and understand the effects of setting these properties In some cases Java Bean developers provide documentation that explains the properties 10 To edit a property select the appropriate field Some properties require you to choose a color or enter a value in a dialog Other properties toggle True False or
476. or the message and click OK Do not use spaces or punctuation in message names to avoid causing problems when you publish The message is added to the Custom Messages dialog You can remove it by selecting it in the dialog and clicking the minus button 5 Click OK in the Custom Messages dialog 6 Inthe Set Action dialog create an action that sends your custom message to the target For example to make clicking the source object trigger an action added to a picture fill out the Set Action dialog like this enter Mouse Clicked in the When field the picture object in the Target field and your custom message which is now available in the When and Message menus in the Message field PictureIsIn DelayIsDone Edit 7 Click OK in the Set Action dialog to close it 8 Select the target object click the plus button on the Properties palette and add the action you want the custom message to trigger The Set Action dialog reappears Enter your custom message in the When field and specify a target and action in the remaining fields 9 Click OK in the Set Action dialog 411 Targeting Several Objects with One Action Targeting Several Objects with One Action You can target an action at a container object a Layout MasterBorder Layout Region text box or table to apply the action to every object in the container For example clicking a button could hide all objects in a Layout Region Just se
477. order to Objects This shrinks the MasterBorder to the minimum size required to display the objects it contains but it may also affect your page design Home Hobbie Phot Galen Hems IEenbres Favorites Fhoto Galen MasterBorder margins before and after being 134 Chapter 10 Managing MasterBorders Creating a MasterBorder 1 In Page view select the MasterBorder The MasterBorder Properties palette appears The Name field shows the name of the MasterBorder assigned to the current page MasterBorder Properties 2 X Name DefaultMasterBor Add Edit Click to create a new MasterBorder Margins Pixels Ler mo Big Top 85 Boromeo HTML 2 Click the Add Edit button The Edit MasterBorder List dialog appears displaying a list of all the MasterBorders in the site The current MasterBorder is selected Edit MasterBorder List ZeroMargins Add Click to add a MasterBorder Rename Delete 3 To add a MasterBorder click Add The New MasterBorder dialog appears 4 Type a name for the new MasterBorder select an existing MasterBorder to base it on and click OK 135 Changing MasterBorders You cannot include spaces in the MasterBorder name You cannot begin the MasterBorder name with a number New MasterBorder Name NewMasterBorder Type a name for the new MasterBorder Base o
478. order listed here GQ Picture 4 Click OK in the Set Action dialog Triggering the source object targets the action at the container and then at each of its objects as they re listed in the Object Tree palette Keep in mind that the container responds to the action if it can If the container doesn t know how to respond it is possible that the child objects might know In this case you can cascade the action so the child objects can respond appropriately For an example of cascading an action see Showing One Object While Hiding Others on page 421 413 Modifying Actions Modifying Actions You can modify an object s actions for example to change a trigger event to reorder actions if the object has more than one to disable an action or to delete it altogether In Page view select the object whose actions you want to modify and click the Actions tab on the Properties palette Layout Properties 2 x BOJ Object ID ActivitiesLayout Object initially visible in browser Actionl On Page Loaded do Fly Action2 On Picturelsin do Delay Action3 On DelaylsDone do Fly The object S actions are listed here An unchecked action doesn t get published but can be used in scripted actions and JavaScript expressions 7 Reorders the selected action 4 change the sequence of actions select an action and click the up or down arrow at the bottom of the
479. ords to be returned from the query If no number is specified all records will be returned 10 Click OK to close the Recordset dialog Filtering Recordset Results You can also use a Where clause to narrow your query results A Where clause defines search criteria and returns only those records matching that particular set of criteria For example if you had a database containing 10 000 student records you could use a Where clause to search for students whose major is Psychology which in turn will return only those records meeting that criteria The where clause is not required however using a where clause is recommended If you have for example 10 000 rows of data it is likely you won t want to return them all You can use the Where clause to filter your results to a manageable number To add a Where clause 1 In Page view double click on the Connector object you want to work with to display the Connector dialog 2 Click on the Recordset tab and select a recordset 508 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database Click Edit to open the Recordset editor 3 In the Select section click on the Table you are working with 4 In there Where section a Select a data field from the operand field This is the field you will be searching through for matches b Choose an operator Table 28 1 Operator Definitions Operator and or is empty is not empty is equal to is not equal to is lower than
480. ore it in the location of your choice 9 Click Save NetObjects Fusion imports the site and converts its content structure and links into NetObjects Fusion format If you import a site created with NetObjects Fusion the MasterBorders are imported with the site For a remote import it stores the site s assets and all original HTML files in the Sitename Import folder and assigns the ZeroMargins MasterBorder to each page in the new site If you are importing a site to expand an existing site you can choose a MasterBorder from the Assign MasterBorder drop down list 10 Navigate to each page and make necessary adjustments 71 Importing a Microsoft Office Document Using an Existing Site to Expand a Site 1 In Site view select the page you want to use as the parent of the imported content 2 From the File menu choose Import gt Web Site 3 Follow the steps in Creating a New Site from an Existing Site on page 70 When you use a site to expand a site you can also select a MasterBorder for the imported section From the Assign MasterBorder drop down list select the MasterBorder you want to apply to the imported site or section Importing a Microsoft Office Document If Word 97 Word 2000 or Word version 2002 is installed on your system you can import documents in Microsoft Word Word for Macintosh and rtf formats When you import a Microsoft Office document the imported document becomes a page in your NetObjects F
481. ore you export a site as a template it is a good 1dea to verify the file assets and then delete unused assets See Managing File Assets on page 561 To create a template 1 In Site view from the File menu choose Export as Template 2 Select Entire Site to include all pages in the site in the template Selected Pages to include only those pages selected in Site view in the template The Save Template dialog appears Save Template Save in CQ Templates 3 AutoSites Forms My Recent C3Pages Documents Desktop My Documents My Network File name MySite zip Places Save as type NetObjects Fusion Template Files zip zi Include remote publish profiles 63 Changing an Existing Template Type a name for the template or accept the name assigned by NetObjects Fusion Select the folder where you want to store the template If you want the template to include the publish profiles associated with this site select Include publish profiles Be aware that if you select this option and your publish profiles include the password to your site s FTP location the password will be included in the publish profiles saved with the template Click Save NetObjects Fusion creates the template file an Assets folder and a Styles folder and zips them together in a single file To transfer the template to another computer you simply move the zip file Changing an Existin
482. ossible the browser uses its default font You can change the substitution table by editing the fontmap txt file in the NetObjects System folder Style applies a style to the text You can select italic bold or bold italic Size sets the size of the text You can choose the unit for specifying the font size from the drop down list to the right of the size field You can choose any size up to 22192 pt but the actual font and size site visitors see is based on their browser default setting and therefore is unpredictable Also some older browsers do not support all sizes For those reasons it is best to use the relative settings such as 2 to 4 Then when site visitors increase or decrease their browser font sizes text size also 159 Formatting Text increases or decreases But if you use an absolute font size such as points inches or picas the text on your pages stays the same size even if site visitors want to see it larger or smaller Color applies color to the text The color box shows the current text color To change the color click the color box and select a color from the Color Picker Letter case sets the case uppercase or lowercase of the text Use the Capitalize option to set initial caps which capitalizes the first letter of each word in the text Choose None to remove a letter case format set at a higher level Small caps sets the text to appear in all small caps If small caps is selected it overrides
483. ot available for form buttons 1 In Page view place the picture of the button as it looks when the page loads 2 To add an action to the button click the Action tab on the Picture Properties palette and click the plus button The Set Action dialog appears 3 In the When field from the Page drop down menu choose Page Loaded Click the Target Menu button next to the Target field and from the Object Tree dialog that appears select the button object In the Message field from the Object drop down menu choose Set Image 4 From the Parameters drop down menu choose Values The Parameters dialog appears 418 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 5 Identify when to use which picture file Make sure the loaded version of the button is selected for the Image 1 Normal value Then select the highlighted button for Image 2 Highlighted and the pressed version for Image 3 Depressed Parameter Values Parameter values for Set Image action 6 To specify a picture file in a Set Image action s Values dialog select a value click the button next to the edit field and open a file from the Picture File Open dialog Click OK 7 Add four actions to the button filling out the Set Action dialog for each action like this Action 1 Enter Mouse Mouse Over in the When field the button itself in the Target field and Object Use Image in the Message field Then open the Parameters menu and click Image 2 Highli
484. ou re creating a new external link you can edit the default name for this link in the Name column by double clicking in the column field and typing This name is placed in the text if you do not select text or an object to link It appears in the list of links in Assets view so you can quickly identify and sort link destinations It is not added to the HTML generated when your site is published Click Link Note You can also create an external link as you type If your text includes or NetObjects Fusion automatically creates an external link Adding an Email Link To add a mailto link 1 In Page view select some text or select an object to link If you place the insertion point in text without selecting text the email address is inserted in the text as the link On the Standard toolbar click the Link tool The Link dialog appears Select the External Link type Select mailto from the New link drop down list In the text entry field type the email address using the format username domain com Click Link Preview the page When you click the link the browser s email client displays a mail window with the address you entered in the recipient field provided the browser is configured to send email using the HTML mailto command 323 Creating Links Adding a Relative Link Relative links are important if you must link to files that are published separately Relative links protect the links on y
485. ou can add an alt tag to image Java drawn shape generic plugin QuickTime Shockwave audio and video objects in the AltTag field of the properties palette Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 x and greater and Netscape Navigator 4 x display alt tag text in a ScreenTip when site visitors point at an object so make sure every alt tag is appropriate for a ScreenTip Picture Properties 2 x eG e Eile CaMetObjectsFusi Browse AltTag mission AltTag field Optimize Settings Not optimized T Edit Link Anchor HTML Options To add or modify an alt tag Onthe object s Properties palette type a descriptive name in the AltTag field Editing Objects and Assets You can edit objects created in other software applications from within NetObjects Fusion In Page view right click the object and select Open File In External Editor from the shortcut menu In Assets view you select the Asset and then from the Asset menu select Open File in External Editor If the correct application does not open the file type of the object or asset is probably not associated with the correct application You can set external file editors for html gif and jpg files on the Program tab of the Options dialog See Setting Program Options on page 20 87 Editing Objects and Assets Selection tool Object Tree palette Selecting an Object In NetObjects Fusion you might not always be awa
486. ou can reference HTML files externally and place them anywhere in your site You can manage the external assets for your referenced file in Assets view Also apply a consistent look to the published pages of referenced files by assigning a MasterBorder You can edit referenced files in HTML Source view or in an external HTML editor such as Notepad or Macromedia HomeSite To specify a default external HTML editor see Setting Program Options on page 20 Note You can reference files located on a hard disk or LAN but not from a remote Web server Also lt A HREF gt links in the original HTML files should point to other HTML files and anchors within those files using relative rather than absolute path names See Managing Referenced Assets on page 397 for information This chapter describes how to work with external HTML by Referencing HTML from Site view Page view or as an object Toggling referenced layouts and objects Managing referenced assets Publishing native HTML e Previewing and publishing unmanaged assets 389 Referencing HTML from Site View Using Referenced Files By referencing an external file instead of importing it you can keep the original file intact and maintain it outside of NetObjects Fusion When you import a file instead of referencing it the file becomes a page in the site and is maintained within NetObjects Fusion Referenced files become another page in your site but are maintained
487. our pages if your ISP moves or changes the server location To create a relative link you must know where the destination file is relative to the file containing the link For example suppose you publish a site using the by Site Section publishing option Your company PR department wants to place HTML documents on the server but publish them separately from the main Web site The PR department has its own Articles directory on the server at the root of the site There is also a News directory and the index page for the site at the root of the site The structure looks something like this index html News news html Articles PressReleasel html PressRelease2 html The main News page is published in the News directory You must create a relative link to link the news html page to the articles in the Articles directory To create a relative link 1 In Page view select some text or select an object to link 2 Onthe Standard toolbar click the Link tool The Link dialog appears 3 Select the External Link type 4 Select none from the New link drop down list 5 In the text entry field type the relative path from the news page to the press release page For example Articles PressReleasel html You cannot test this link by previewing because it requires the exact configuration of files that only exists on the server However after you publish the site and the PR department uploads articles into the Articles directory the
488. owsers that support the 3 2 HTML specification including Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 0 or higher and Netscape Navigator 2 0 to 4 x Netscape Navigator 6 0 does not support this option Optimizing Dynamic Page Layout Output If you set a Layout or Layout Region to Dynamic Page Layout output you can control the text flow for each container by choosing the table formatting priority columns or rows that NetObjects Fusion uses to generate the page HTML This helps to preserve your design if a browser s font settings change the size of your text For example a Columns or vertical priority keeps text together in a vertical orientation when text size changes rearrange the page ponen 126686 pone The page with a Columns setting in Page view at lefi adjusts vertically to changes in browser text size as shown at right 103 Selecting an HTML Output Method A Rows or horizontal priority keeps text together in a horizontal orientation when text size changes rearrange the page The page with a Rows setting in Page view at left adjusts horizontally to changes in browser text size as shown at right You can make pages more efficient and predictable by optimizing placement of objects within the site s underlying table structure As a general rule it s best to align objects to each other and to place text boxes in their own cells within the underlying table structure so they can resize as nece
489. p Yellow Body Unordered List Clyscape Teal Phoenix letObjects Fusion Local SteStyles Aibrushed Gold S Awa Green amp Yelow G Awa Orange amp Blue 2 Aura Red amp Purple G Book SS Bulet Siver S Business Green D Business Purple i Blue G Business Red amp Tan G Capsula Blue SS Capsula Green S5 Capsula Red G Capsula Yelow 5 Cityscape Gold 5 Cityscape Purple G Clyscape Teal S S Coporate G Crossblock I Blue amp Green G Ciossblock Il Gold amp Cimson G Crossblock II Rose t Lilac G Cupid Blue Cupid Pink C Decorator c Diamond Grape Elemental Fancy G Frada Green 2 Frada Purple 2 Frada Red SS FusionZap Purple G FusiorZap Turquoise SS FusionZap Yelow SS Gardening S Glasgow Aqua t Orange G Glasgow Green amp Yelow Glasgow Red Gold Bold Ikast Green I5 Ikast Purple Kid S Lattude London Blue amp Gold amp London Green amp Purple amp London Marcon amp Cocoa amp Mountain S Phoerin Green amp Blue D Phoenix Purple amp Slate Body text style sample Lorem ip sum Dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nonum o Ordered Paragraph text style sample Lorem ip sum Dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nonum Text Ob Text Object style sample Lorem ip sum Dolor sit 1 2 Numbered item 2 amet consectetuer
490. p your site design consistent This chapter describes Adding text to a page Formatting text Working with text styles Creating and formatting lists Inserting symbols Adding text to a shape or picture Creating and editing fields Checking spelling Finding text e Replacing text Counting words lines paragraphs and characters 151 Adding Text to a Page A Text tool Adding Text to a Page To add text to a page you can use the Text tool drag and drop text from another application paste text from the Clipboard or import text In each case the text is placed in a text box See Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes When you add text to a page it s a good idea to add all your text and then go back and apply formatting Using the Text Tool 1 In Page view select the Text tool from the Standard toolbar and draw a text box on the page A text box and the Text Properties palette appear Hollow selection handles indicate the text box is in text editing mode Text Properties 2 x A sil 0 Eont oe fo MEN pB z u x a n Paragraph SB Style Custom style Normal lt none gt X Link Anchor Format 2 Type or paste text into the box The text automatically wraps to the width of the box To force a line break position the insertion point at the end of the line and press Shift Enter
491. page option to preview only the current page When you select Current page links to other pages are disabled You can also preview the current page by clicking the Page Preview tab in Page view 22 Chapter 2 Setting Application Options You can use keyboard shortcuts to preview either the whole site or just the current page or section e If Entire site is selected in the Applications Options dialog pressing Alt P or clicking the Preview Site button previews the entire site pressing Ctrl Alt P or clicking the Preview Site button while pressing Ctrl previews just the current page f Current page is selected in the Options dialog pressing Alt P or clicking the Preview Site button previews the current page pressing Ctrl Alt P or clicking the Preview Site button while pressing Ctrl previews the entire site e Window size Select the window size or resolution most appropriate for your site visitor s monitors This opens a preview window sized to the resolution you select so you can see how site visitors will view your site Setting Text Options From the Tools menu choose Options Application and click the Text tab Application Options Program Preview 3 i Updates Browser font settings Proportional Times New Roman Fixed width Courier New 22 Automatically select entire word Smart spell check Check spelling as you type IV Display report message e Browser
492. page size Height 555 rn H Character set Western European IS0 8859 1 7 Text formatting C HTML Cascading Style Sheets C55 Quote type Curly Quotes HTML Options Variable Options Cancel To ensure that characters display properly 617 Setting the Character Set for an Individual Page 1 Load a localized operating system For example for a Cyrillic site you must use a Cyrillic OS 2 Set the site s character set 3 Change the font for each SiteStyle element on the Graphics tab This includes banners buttons and so on 4 Publish the site to see the correct characters in NetObjects Fusion and the browser If you type characters that are not included in the selected character set when you preview or publish the page you might see question marks in place of unknown characters Setting the Character Set for an Individual Page You can override the default site character set and choose a different character set for individual pages 1 In Page or Site view right click on the page and select Page Character Set from the shortcut menu 2 Select a character set for the page from the Page Character Set drop down This character set will be applied only to this page Character Set 2 x Site character set Western European 150 8859 1 Section Character Set use Site Character Set z Use Site Character Set Setting the Character Set for
493. pages move up to the level of the deleted page Note Deleting a page cannot be undone You cannot delete the Home page Moving a Page When you move pages in Site view NetObjects Fusion updates all affected links within the site If you move a page that has children the pages retain their relationship 1 InSite view select the page or section you want to move You cannot move the Home page or noncontiguous pages Drag the page to the target page where it becomes a sibling a child or a parent in its new location As you drag the page a colored outline highlights the target page A triangle to the left or right of the target page s border indicates the moved page will be a sibling a triangle below the target page s border indicates the moved page will 43 Replacing the Home Page be a child and a triangle above the target page s border indicates the moved page will be a parent A triangle on the side of the target page icon shows that the moved page will be a sibling A triangle on the bottom of the target page icon shows that the moved page will be a child A triangle above the target page icon shows that the moved page will be a parent If you want to move a page so it will be the child of a page that already has children target the sibling page You can cut and paste to move noncontiguous pages Replacing the Home Page You cannot move the Home page but you can move a page to be the par
494. palette If two or more actions share the same trigger event they occur in the order listed e Ifyou don t want to publish an action now but might want to later or if you want an action available only to use in a scripted action or JavaScript expression clear that action s check box Next time the site is published this action is not included but it is still available to insert in a script or expression To change an action s properties its name trigger event target action message and so on double click the action and make changes in the Set Action dialog delete an action select the action and click the minus button 414 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Scripting Your Own Actions In addition to the actions NetObjects Fusion provides in the Message menu experienced JavaScript programmers can script their own actions 1 In Page view select the object you want to trigger the scripted action and click the plus button on the Actions tab of the Properties palette The Set Action dialog appears 2 Select Scripted Action from the action type drop down list A text box appears in the dialog Set Action Name Actiond When Hidden Type here Scripted Action Inserts text from a text file Insert Script Insert Action e Inserts call to an existing action 3 Enter your scripted action in the text box using JavaScript NetObjects Fusion doesn t ver
495. ple file database or a spreadsheet with multiple tabs the Select dialog appears Select the file or tab and click OK NetObjects Fusion creates the data object gives it the name of the selected file or tab and imports its fields as simple text fields Ifa simple text field contains a valid path to an image file you can choose to make it a text field or an image field 481 Creating a Data List Data List tool Data List tool The data object is now an asset of your site and you can continue as follows e Ifyou re working in Page view the Data Publishing dialog is still open You can select fields and format the data list as described in Creating a Data List on page 482 and lay out your stacked pages as described in Creating Stacked Pages on page 485 e Ifyou re in Assets view go to Page view select the Data List tool from the Advanced toolbar and draw a rectangle on the page In the Data Publishing dialog select the newly created data object from the drop down list Select fields and format the data list as described in Creating a Data List on page 482 and lay out your stacked pages as described in Creating Stacked Pages on page 485 Creating a Data List Once you create a data object you can create a data list on any page You create a data list and a set of stacked pages at the same time NetObjects Fusion automatically includes linked data list icons in the first column in the data list T
496. position the other setting changes accordingly Formatting Text Objects within Paragraphs A text object is a portion of text that you can treat as a single unit For example a link is a text object When you create a link and format it you apply formatting features to the link as a single unit If you apply a color it applies to the entire link not just a few letters Paragraphs are also text objects because you can format them as a single unit without formatting the entire text box that contains the paragraph Paragraphs can contain links and other text objects When you format a paragraph containing another text object some but not all of the new formatting is also applied to the contained object Generally the formatting is consistent with the type of object and the formatting available for it For example links do not have margins so if you change the paragraph s left and right margins the link is not affected But because the font of a link can be formatted if you format the paragraph s fonts the link s fonts are also formatted However if the link s font has already been defined it will not take on the paragraph s font If you change the format of the contained object it does not affect the container object So if you change the color of the link text the surrounding paragraph text is not affected 165 Formatting Text The following table shows which text attributes affect a contained object and which
497. ppears active when a site visitor moves the mouse pointer over the DynaButton or clicks the button The site visitor can click the DynaButton to go to the appropriate link To add DynaButtons and set properties 1 In Page view select the DynaButtons tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Click on the page to indicate the DynaButtons location 456 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components A DynaButtons placeholder and the DynaButtons Properties palette appear DynaButtons Properties 2 x 20 DynaButtons 0 aix Orientation iHorizontal 3 Select the buttons orientation vertical or horizontal from the drop down list 4 Click the Number of Buttons row specify how many buttons you want and click the check mark 5 Double click the number row such as Button 1 The Link dialog appears You can link this button to another page file smart link or external link See Creating Links on page 316 6 Specify the link information and click Link The details of the link appear in the right column of the button row You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Adding Sub Buttons If a DynaButton contains sub buttons the sub buttons appear when a site visitor clicks the DynaButton The sub button shows information about the link associated with the button For example if a sub button is linked to an external lin
498. pplets 382 file parameters 383 files 382 servlets 382 Java Beans 384 adding actions 386 Java folder 16 JavaScript inactions 415 416 in links 332 552 Joint Photographic Experts Group see jpg jpeg files jpg jpeg files 188 editor choosing 21 K keyboard shortcuts 12 keywords setting META tags 54 L Layers overlapping objects 93 layout methods and design priorities 109 Layout Regions adding objects 115 container 96 converting to table 116 creating 115 defined 114 grids guides 115 minimizing HTML 432 setting background color 118 127 243 249 257 309 setting HTML output method 117 working with 114 Layouts accessing HTML 536 adding objects 114 adding sounds 119 cascading action messages to 412 container 96 creating 112 defined 8 112 deleting 112 external HTML 392 graphics based 96 HTML based 97 multiple 112 naming 113 naming requirements 113 selecting 112 113 selecting layout method 97 setting background color 118 127 243 249 257 309 setting HTML output method 117 showing hiding label 77 sizing 80 114 text based 96 working with 112 lines adding SiteStyle 264 constraining to horizontal vertical 265 drawing 265 editing 267 horizontal rules 263 SiteStyle editing 284 Link icon 77 331 Link Tool 317 links adding 569 adding anchors 319 adding HTML 332 14 adding JavaScript 332 broken resolving 570 creating 316 deleting 332 569 deleting anchors 319 editing 332 334 editing anchors 31
499. pression object below the data output object Select EndIf as the Type To build compound conditional statements 1 2 Repeat Steps 1 5 for building a simple conditional statement Add a new Conditional Expression object below the data output object Select Elself as the Type Add another data output below the second Conditional Expression object and set its properties All records that did not meet the conditions set in Step 1 will be displayed here Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional conditions You can add an unlimited number of Elself objects Add a new Conditional Expression object below the data output object Select Else as the Type Add a final data output below the last Conditional Expression object with type ElseIf and set its properties All records that did not meet any of the above conditions will be displayed here 527 Modifying a Database 7 Add a final Conditional Expression object below the data output object Select EndIf as the Type jnal Expression Properties MBE Eu E Conditional Expression sj Patar Modifying a Database You can use forms with the NOF Database Component to insert records delete records and update records Some notes when using forms to modify your database with the NOF Database Component e When using a form variable verify that the method type in the Form Settings Properties is set to Get Verify that
500. ps up Properties BBE 2021 Page name Home Page title Home Enter or modify a title for the current page Site visitors see this title in the title bar of their browser when they view this page This overrides the default page title which is the page name Exclude from navigation You can also highlight a menu command then press F1 for an explanation or if you are in Style view select an element and press F1 CHAPTER 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics NetObjects Fusion 8 incorporates new technologies with the current browser environment to help you meet today s site building challenges Using NetObjects Fusion you ll find it easy to build dynamic content rich sites that use the latest interactive technologies including cascading style sheets and Dynamic HTML This chapter introduces NetObjects Fusion including information about e NetObjects Fusion views e NetObjects Fusion window e Navigating in NetObjects Fusion Choosing colors and working with color palettes e NetObjects Fusion folder structure NetObjects Fusion Views Online view co Site view E Page view Style view re Assets view NetObjects Fusion Views NetObjects Fusion provides views that correspond to the tasks you complete when you design and build a site Changes you make in one view are reflected in the others You can go to any view at any time by clicking a button on the control bar at the top
501. ption help site visitors enjoy your photos You can add this text on the Images tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor or directly on the page that features the photo If the selected thumbnail template shows the photo title you can add it on the thumbnail page 218 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions on the Images Tab 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Display the Images tab Select a photo in the File Name column vA ek YN Click in the Title text field and type the title for the photo Try to make your title descriptive but brief Text you type here appears on the photo page and at the bottom of the thumbnail image if the selected template includes the photo title 6 Click in the Caption field and type text that describes the photo If you do not want to add a caption skip this step Photo Gallery Properties Editor Yosemite Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Images in display order 4 images in gallery Title File Name Title EN Add Half Dome Falls ipg Waterfalls Remove Caption Rising over 4 000 feet above the valley floor Half Dome is the most recognized symbol of Yosemite Campsite ipa Accommodations R All Guides ipa Mountain Jacques Guides E Move Up Move Down Text you type here appears on the photo page
502. quired by some browsers e Action Type the URL to the CGI script on a server If the CGI script is already on the server enter its URL here for example http www host com myaccount fusionproject assets cgi bin myscript cgi 444 Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms Note Normally NetObjects Fusion publishes custom CGI scripts to the cgi bin directory specified in Publish view If your server s configuration requires publishing scripts somewhere else you must use the Alias tab of the Define Server dialog in Publish view to specify that location in the CGI script field This applies only to custom CGI scripts not to the Form Handler See Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory on page 606 If the CGI script isn t already on the server but needs to be published along with your site s assets click Browse and select the script file to be published from the Open dialog This file appears in the Action field NetObjects Fusion adds the file as an asset and puts it in the CGI bin directory When visitors click Submit the server executes the CGI script at this URL Note If the URL doesn t point to your server s cgi bin folder you must customize your site s published directory structure by renaming cgi bin appropriately See Customizing Your Site s Directory Structure on page 602 Method Choose a method for sending form data to the Web server e Post which is the preferred method sends
503. r Show Menu Bar to add the browser s menu bar Show Status Bar to display the page status in the browser e Resizable to provide the ability to resize the pop up window 9 Click Preview amp Set to preview the pop up window in a browser 329 Setting Link Targets Test Window Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 Size W 393 H 347 Position Margins Left 258 Top 261 To adjust the pop up window settings resize and reposition the browser preview window then click Set The new settings will take effect 10 Click OK to close the Pop Up Window Properties Editor 11 Click Link to close the dialog and create the link 12 Preview the page to test your targeted links Editing the Pop Up Window Script You can also customize the pop up window by modifying the pop up window script included in NetObjects Fusion To edit the Pop Up Window script in NetObjects Fusion 1 In Page view select the object or text that you want to link 2 Click the Link tool on the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears 3 Select the type of link you are targeting Internal Link Smart Link External Link or File Link and set up the link See Creating Links on page 316 4 In the Target area choose Pop Up Window from the drop down list To display the designated content in a new pop up window click Add The Pop Up Windows Properties Editor will appear 5 Click Edit with Script Editor The Script Text Editor wi
504. r 17 Assets view 8 560 au files 375 audio file formats 374 Auto save preference 20 auto updates 26 AutoFrames 141 adding 142 adding HTML scripts 543 548 browser refresh 149 defined 139 optimizing layout 106 padding 146 properties 146 removed from MasterBorders effect on HTML 545 selection sequence 143 setting background 147 spacing 146 table structure 106 targeting links in 148 using with actions 401 see also frames auto generated image name 603 automatic 286 automatic formatting 154 automatic setting 155 169 B background AutoFrames 147 frames 147 Layout Region 118 127 243 249 257 309 page 118 127 243 249 257 309 sounds 119 table 242 background color in text boxes 127 Site view 48 392 background image offset 583 backing up sites 56 Backups folder 17 banners 298 adding 312 assigning actions 311 changing pictures 313 custom names 46 default location 298 editing 275 orientation 313 setting style 313 SiteStyle text 276 using 311 base directory 587 BGSOUND SRC 398 blank site default MasterBorder 132 BODY BACKGROUND 397 body style 286 body text style 273 borderless frames 145 borders 163 creating around pictures 201 202 203 tables 242 Browser Safe Palette 15 browsers action support 401 compatibility options 101 default display font 130 displaying forms 433 font settings 23 fonts in AutoFrames 141 frame support 141 frameless alternate content 548 previewing sites 22 redirecting s
505. r 19 ed gt Pv Form area tool See Chapter 25 Draw Shape tools See Chapter 16 Q uu Span tool See Chapter 12 Form Toolbar Forms Button tool See Chapter 25 Radio Button tool See Chapter 25 Multi line tool See Chapter 25 Zoom tools See Chapter 1 Picture tool See Chapter 13 Anchor tool See Chapter 19 Container tools See Chapter 15 and Chapter 8 Navigation tools See Chapter 18 Line tools See Chapter 16 Check Box tool See Chapter 25 Edit Field tool See Chapter 25 Forms Combo Box tool See Chapter 25 82 Advanced Toolbar Photo Gallery tool See Chapter 14 Data List tool See Chapter 27 Data Field tool See Chapter 27 External HTML tool See Chapter 23 Counter Pro Service See Chapter 6 Guestbook Service See Chapter 6 Site Search Service See Chapter 6 amp NG UsS sIiE TVs Chapter 6 Page View Basics E Commerce Catalog tool See Chapter 20 External Data Source tool See Chapter 27 Object HTML tool See Chapter 23 Counter Lite Service See Chapter 6 Form Manager Service See Chapter 6 Poll Service See Chapter 6 83 Adding Objects to the Page NetObjects Fusion Components Toolbar B Banner tool See Chapter 26 DynaButton tool See Chapter 26 amp Picture Loader tool See Chapter 26 42h Y E Form Handler tool See Chapter 25 E Go Menu tool
506. r 3 Creating and Managing Sites Working with the SiteStructure In Site view the structure of your site is represented by page icons As in a family tree pages have parent child and sibling relationships The pages named Mission Events Next Tour and Contest are children of the Home page and siblings of each other The Events page is the parent of Activities and Highlights and the Contest page is the parent of Wonder Lodge In Site view you can add pages to the site rename pages move them copy them delete them and complete other site oriented actions To add content to a particular page for example to add text or pictures use Page view As you construct a site you typically go back and forth between Site view and Page view Selecting a Page Before you can add copy rename or move pages or set page properties you must select a page By selecting a page you identify it as the one you will work with NetObjects Fusion places a blue border around the selected page Selected page has a DE blue border d 33 Working with the SiteStructure To select a page e Click the Selection tool on the toolbar and then click the icon for the page you want to select Don t click the page s name unless you want to rename the page Press the arrow keys to select the current page s parent child or sibling pages Note Pages that are excluded from the site navigation will have a red border and
507. r Add All gt gt Brief Description Move Down Retail Price ptions Sales Tax ine Shipping Cost SKU Part Number Weight lt Remove lt lt Remove All 4 Inthe Product Item field highlight an item you want to display with the product listing To display all attributes click Add 5 Highlight the item in the Product Items to Display field and click Format to Link the item label to the Detail page and format the text e Edit the item label and format the text Remove the item label so it is not displayed on the List page 6 To change the order in which the items are displayed highlight the item in the Product Items to Display field then click Move Up or Move Down To remove an item from the Product Items to Display field highlight the item and click Remove To remove all items click Remove All 7 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor 354 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs If you have configured a store engine you can choose to display text or graphical links that will place products in a shopping cart Note The Purchase Options tab will only be available if you have configured a store engine If you are using the catalog without a store engine you will not have the option to add purchase items 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the List Page
508. r Photo Image tab at the bottom of the Images tab 5 In the Alt tag field type in the text you would like your site visitors to see Formatting the Thumbnail Page On the thumbnail page you determine how site visitors enter the photo gallery You can set up atext link that visitors click to see the first photo thumbnail size renderings of each photo in the gallery so site visitors have access to individual photos Creating a Text Link to a Photo Gallery You can set up a single text link that site visitors click to enter the photo gallery This takes visitors to the first photo in the gallery They then use the gallery navigation buttons to move between pages in the gallery 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Display the Thumbnail Page tab 4 Inthe Format section of the tab select Text link 229 Formatting the Thumbnail Page 5 In the text field type the text you want to link The default is the gallery name Photo Gallery Properties editor Gallery E xl Images Thumbnail Page Photo Page Format Textlink Enter the Gallen Thumbnails The text link appears on the thumbnail page in the format set by the SiteStyle for linked text See Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles on page 284 Home Mission nter the Galle Events Activities Next Tour Contest Special
509. r Value dialog e To remove a field select it and click the minus button reorder fields in the list and define their order in the submitted data select a field and click the up or down arrow 4 Click OK 446 Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms If you re using the Form Handler component to process a form don t enter hidden fields yourself The Form Handler enters the fields it needs 447 Adding Hidden Fields 448 CHAPTER 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components Components are pre built mini applications that add interactivity to your site without custom programming or scripting Publish components and Page components are available in NetObjects Fusion 8 The component s type dictates where it appears within NetObjects Fusion and the Component Manager can be used to easily organize available components in Page view NetObjects Fusion components are installed when you install NetObjects Fusion You can also download third party components from third party vendors If you are a software developer and want to create your own NetObjects Fusion Components sometimes called NFXes you can use the NetObjects Component Development Kit CDK For information visit www netobjects com Note You cannot preview components in NetObjects Fusion When you add a component to a page and preview you see a placeholder graphic To see how the component works you must publish the site locally or remote
510. r a name that identifies the server in the Profile Name box or use the default name Enter information in the remaining fields in the Attributes section 293 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server Server is the name or IP number you use to connect to the remote server This can be your site s domain name the name of an intranet server or the name of your ISP s server Confirm this information with your ISP administrator or server administrator Directory is the location on the remote server where your site s HTML files are stored Leave this field blank if your site s Home page should be stored in the home directory of the user ID or server account that you use to transfer your site to a remote server e Ifyou want your site s Home page to be stored in a different directory than the home directory enter the path to the Home page here such as public html user For more information about the directory setting see Publish Profile Checklist on page 586 User name is the name you use to log on to the remote server so you can transfer files to it Password is the password that authorizes you to access the server To publish to the remote server you need server permissions for adding files and creating directories If you do not enter a password in this box a dialog appears when you publish the site You enter the password in that dialog You can also select an option for NetObjects Fusion to remember your
511. r categories Object gt Standard Action pace Mouse Down Mouse Up Target Pictet Pensten gt Motion gt Mouse Over Message gt Drag 4 Mouse ut Parameters H Custom NC Some o f the choices available for this object Cascade message OK Cancel Eas The trigger events available depend on the object you re adding the action to These can include Mouse Mouse options do not apply in some cases including text objects Layouts and frames Mouse options are for triggering an action when the site visitor clicks the object mouses down or up for example you might display a pushed in picture of a button on mouse down or moves the pointer over or off the object Object Triggers the action when the object is either hidden or shown as the result of another action that targets this object Page Triggers the action when the page finishes loading or when the site visitor opens another page Transition Motion Drag In a sequence of actions triggers the action at the start or end of another action that targets this object For example ending a drag might trigger another action to restore the object you dragged to its original position e Custom These are messages you create to trigger one action with another for specialized action sequences See Tailoring Actions with Custom Messages on page 410 404 E Target menu button Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 4 Make sure
512. r on the selected image Picture Properties 2 x Telsa 2 Strength fo Eye color areen a 4 Drag any selection handle to adjust the size of the marquee enclosing the part of the image you want to reduce the red eye 5 Select the strength and eye color 6 Click Apply in the Properties Palette to remove red eye Editing Picture Hotspots You can edit hotspots from the Picture Properties palette once they have been added See Creating an Imagemap on page 334 1 In Page view select the picture for which you want to edit the hotspot The Picture Properties palette appears 2 Select the hotspot from the Current list 204 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures The Current list displays all image hotspots Tag co a A c S E Rectangle Hotspot Propertie xi Rlo Mission EI Nes Tour Contest Events Alttag Events Options Always display hotspot Link HTML 3 Type a description of the hotspot in the ALTTag field 4 Click the Link button to edit the hotspot See Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors 205 206 CHAPTER 14 Creating Photo Galleries Using the Photo Gallery tool you can quickly create sophisticated Web photo albums You assemble your digital images add captions and descriptions and choose from an assortment of high quality thumbnail
513. r table contains first and last names in separate fields you can add 2 labels to display the full name In the example above the first column will display the first name and the second column will display the last name 3 Select the recordset you want to work with from the Recordset drop down list 4 Select the data field to display from the DataField drop down list 5 Set the text attributes for the data field This is how the data fields will appear on the published page e FontColor determines the text color FontFace determines the text type e FontBold displays the text in bold e Fontltalic displays the text in italics 515 Retrieving and Displaying Data FontSize determines the text size Bill Jones Ted Davis Carl Williams Lisa Jackson Jone Bennett Mary White John Smith Paula Moore To display image data fields bjones mjsports com tdavis mjsports com Cwillams1239mjsports com hackson mjsports com jane bennett mjsports com mwhite mpsports com jsmithgmjsports com paula mooregmjsports com 1 In Page view select the Image object from the DB Component toolbar Image Object Note You cannot add an Image object to a page that does not have a Connector object already added 2 Click on the page to indicate the image s location The Image Properties palette appears Image Properties 2 0 Image
514. r you need SERVICE PRODUCT 1 Layout E SERVICE PRODUCT 2 or SERVICE eo Pinels ERES PRODUCT 3 we have what you need at prices yot Height ost ess P Time Based Picture an afford At BUSINESS NAME our goal is to HTML output Properties VR with courteous expedient professiona Sie Setting valette series of images within a banner Tables Columns Rows Show eel free to browse our Web site at your Layoutis aform Settings convenience If you have any questions or would lik centerin browser o with a BUSINESS NAME representative HIML Layout area CET itacterBorder Home Mission Events Next Tou You use the tabs between the control bar and horizontal ruler to see different views of the page Use Page Design view to add objects to the page HTML Source view to look at and edit the page s HTML code See Editing the Page s HTML on page 536 e Page Preview to view the current page in Microsoft Internet Explorer 76 Chapter 6 Page View Basics MasterBorder and Layout Area In NetObjects Fusion a page consists of a Layout area and a MasterBorder area The Layout area is the body of the page It contains objects that are unique to that page The MasterBorder is the page margins MasterBorders contain objects su
515. rBorder Highlights DefaultMasterBorder a 2 Make sure MasterBorder is displayed in the first Property field 3 Select the MasterBorder you want from the second Property drop down list 4 Click Set on all to apply the MasterBorder to all selected pages To apply the MasterBorder to an individual page select the page then select the MasterBorder you want to apply You cannot undo this action to restore the original MasterBorder you must reassign it Renaming a MasterBorder 1 In Page view click in the MasterBorder to display the MasterBorder Properties palette 2 Click Add Edit 3 In the Edit MasterBorder List dialog select the MasterBorder you want to rename and click Rename 137 Deleting a MasterBorder Note You cannot rename the ZeroMargins MasterBorder 4 In the Rename MasterBorder dialog type a new name and click OK Edit MasterBorder List Rename MasterBorder PR ZeroMargins m DefaultMasterBorder Name EventsMasterBorder NewM asterB order f Cancel 5 Click Close The new MasterBorder name now appears in the Edit MasterBorder List dialog and in the drop down list in the MasterBorder Properties palette Deleting a MasterBorder MasterBorders that are not in use retain their assets and are stored and tracked by NetObjects Fusion When you import a template MasterBorders included with the template are added to the list of MasterBorders for the site To a
516. rame and choose Master HTML from the shortcut menu The code is applied to the frameset instead of across a range of pages e To add code to a frame s HTML page click the AutoFrame label and then click the HTML button on the Frame Properties palette Or right click in the AutoFrame and choose Frame HTML from the shortcut menu In each case the Page HTML dialog appears where you can add code as described in Editing the Page s HTML on page 536 Note If you remove the AutoFrame from a MasterBorder code added to the frame s content HTML is deleted Working in the HTML Source Editor You can also add or edit a frameset in the HTML Source Editor When a page contains frames tabs appear at the bottom of the HTML Source Editor one for each frame in the frameset one for the page Layout the Body frame and one for the frameset The names of frames are assigned by default when you choose a frame on the AutoFrames tab of the MasterBorder Properties palette The frame names display as framename_pagename html for all frames that must change from page to page and as framename_masterbordername for all frames that do not change The default names are Left Frame Right Frame Top Frame and Bottom Frame depending on which type of frame you selected Additionally there are two other tabs Body Frame and Frameset Page The Body Frame tab displays the code for the page Layout The Frameset Page tab specifies information about the frames
517. rate 2 Crossblock II Blue amp Green G Crossblock II Gold amp Crimson S Crossblock II Rose amp 5 Cupid Blue 5 Cupid Pink Decorator cs Diamond Grape 2 Elemental S Fancy G Frada Green 2 Frada Purple Frada Red FusiorZap Purple FusiorZap Turquoise FusiorZap Yelow Gardening Glasgow Aqua amp Orange Glasgow Green amp Yelow Glasgow Red amp Blue God Z5 Ikast Gold G Ikast Green S Ikast Purple Latitude London Blue amp Gold London Green amp Purple S London Maroon amp Cocoa S Mountain Phoenit Green amp Blue S Phoenis Purle amp Slate Beach Navigation Primary Button text Secondary Button text Table Styles Regular Regular Rollover Button text Default Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Page Backqround Button text Button text Additional Page Elements Highlighted Button text Button text Highlighted Rollover es Bata List Icons Styled Line 3 Data List Icon zi 4 NetObjects Fusion MySite nod 151 File Edt View Go Style Tools Graphic T Text X Previev X ES Active SiteStyles F Aura Green am
518. rce The ODBC Data Source Administrator opens Edt View Go Favorites FPS ei es a Kier eae Address E Control Panel x Control Panel E Accessibilty Options a Modems f Tape Devices Ee Add Remove Programs 7 Mouse 2 Telephony Illi Adobe Gamma AMS DTC Data Sources ODBC ee Maintains ODBC data HE Console 1 Multimedia sources and drivers Date Time Card PCMCIA Microsoft Home Devices Potts Technical Support 2 Display il Printers Find Fast Qi Regional Settings Fonts S SCSI Adapters Gf Intemet Options aS Server Sava Plugin Ry Services Tu Keyboard Sounds 9 mail Al System 11 objects selected Maintains ODBC data 2 My Computer 2 Click the System DSN tab Then click Add The Create New Data Source wizard opens 3 Select Microsoft Access Driver and click Finish Create New Data Source x Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft E cel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Access Driver US S ft Access Treiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Microsoft dBase Treiber dbf Fuel Driver ule gt 07 The ODBC Setup dialog opens If you don t see this icon in the Control Panel window download and inst
519. re of making a selection but in Page view something is always selected For example when you switch from Site view to Page view the Layout Properties palette appears You might not see evidence that the Layout is selected but it is indicated by the properties palette To find out what is selected at any time check the properties palette Using the Selection Tool Click the Selection tool on the Standard toolbar Click an object to select it Click elsewhere to deselect it e Drag a marquee around multiple objects or Shift Click each object you want to select Shift Click selected objects one by one to deselect them Using the Object Tree Palette The Object Tree palette provides a convenient way to select objects especially if you are working with layered or hidden objects 1 In Page view click the Object Tree palette button in the lower left corner The Object Tree palette appears 2 Click an object in the Object Tree palette to locate it on the page Selection handles appear around the object on the page Object Tree RES D Home H DefaultmasterBorder NavigationBar2 1 E NavigationBar1 1 HomeLayout La Pictures Picture4 88 Object Tree palette Chapter 6 Page View Basics Renaming an Object If you add several of the same type of objects to a Layout or MasterBorder NetObjects Fusion numbers each object in the order in which you placed it You can rename the objec
520. require you to type text In some cases properties appear that have no affect on the bean or its behavior 11 Click the Parameters tab If you know the bean s internal parameters you can add or remove them To add a parameter click the plus button and enter a name and value in the Enter Value dialog Ifthere are parameters listed to remove one select it and click the minus button e change the order of the listed parameters select a parameter and click the Up or Down arrow buttons 12 Publish the page to see how the bean works You can add actions to Java Beans using the Actions tab When you choose a Java Bean as the target or source of an action you see an expanded selection of available actions or trigger events as appropriate See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 386 ActiveX Control tool Chapter 22 Adding Java and ActiveX Inserting an ActiveX Control You use ActiveX controls to embed an application in a Web page Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 x or later supports ActiveX controls with which you can add custom capabilities such as audio and movie players calendars custom buttons and forms to your pages You can view documents such as Microsoft Office files in Internet Explorer without launching the associated program Site visitors must use Internet Explorer 3 x or later to view content created with ActiveX controls To view the content in Netscape Navigator 4 x site visitors must
521. rice and description or to a related list from another table say to display all stores where the product is available 492 Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database You cannot preview database components in NetObjects Fusion When you add a component object to a page and preview you see a placeholder graphic To see how the database component works you must publish the site remotely The code generated by the NOF Database Component is evaluated on the server you publish to Note It is important that you verify your server supports the database language you are using For information on server requirements check with your hosting provider or refer to your platform documentation To fully integrate dynamic elements into your Web site you can use the NetObjects Fusion Tag Libraries and add server tags to a page using the database component See Adding Server Tags on page 471 Creating a Data Source You can use a data source to connect to a variety of database management systems such as MSAccess If using a data source you must register your database as an ODBC data source on your computer before building your database application If you re testing the application by publishing to a separate computer follow these steps to register the database on that machine too 1 Open the Control Panel from the Windows Start Settings menu and double click the ODBC or ODBC 32 Bit icon 493 Creating a Data Sou
522. rity measures such as robots txt or ht access files virtual hosting or a firewall you must download the site to your local hard disk via an FTP connection and then select Local import This also applies if you have a virtual domain because virtual domains require HTTP 1 1 4 Setthe limits for the number of pages and number of levels you want to apply to the import process NetObjects recommends limits of 200 pages and 20 levels 70 Chapter 5 Importing Sites and Documents 5 Ifyou are importing a local site enter the domain name for the site s Home page in the Domain name field If the local site was ever published on the Web use the domain name that was used to access it if not leave the placeholder www domain com in the field When it imports a local site NetObjects Fusion needs to know the home base domain of that site so it can tell whether to convert any absolute links it finds into external or internal links It does that by comparing the targeted domain if there is one to the domain name you enter If you are importing a remote site make sure your system is connected to the Internet or intranet so NetObjects Fusion can link to and import the site 6 Click OK The Save Site As dialog appears 7 Enter a name for the new site in the File name field 8 Select the location where you want to save the site By default NetObjects Fusion saves the site in the NetObjects Fusion 8 User Sites folder but you can st
523. rms 436 read only 275 read only folders pages assets 604 RealAudio files 375 376 RealSpace FlashPix files 378 rectangles see shapes referenced files publishing 390 referencing external HTML see external HTML Regular Tables HTML output method 100 107 regular tables 287 relative links 324 relative paths in external HTML 397 in frameset files 556 remote publishing defining profiles 592 22 Reset button in forms 439 resize panes in HTML Source view 538 resizing objects 89 Rich Music Format files 375 right click menus 13 rmf files 375 rotating pictures 199 text 181 Rotating Picture component 464 rounded rectangles see shapes rulers showing hiding 78 92 S Sample Sites folder 17 saving sites 20 scaling pictures 197 scope 169 Screen Door component 465 Script icon 77 SCRIPT keywords 539 SCRIPT SRC 398 SCRIPT tags 535 scripts adding to AutoFrames 543 adding to objects 550 adding to page HEAD or BODY 536 inserting in actions 415 416 inserting in links 552 inserting in text boxes 553 managing assets 398 612 scrolling lists in lists 438 scrolling messages 468 search engines directory structure for publishing 590 indexing pages 546 keywords 54 secondary button states 273 secondary navigation bars 273 303 sections 34 applying MasterBorder 137 character set 618 selecting Layouts 112 113 MasterBorders 133 objects 88 table cells 250 text 156 text boxes 122 tools from flyou
524. rop down list Make sure you use a page extension that your browser recognizes or it might not display the page properly If you used the Custom Names dialog in Site view to assign a file name extension for an individual page that customized extension overrides the site default for that page 6 Click Close Setting HTML Options NetObjects Fusion includes a variety of options to control HTML format and generation 1 In any view from the Tools menu choose Options Current Site 581 Publishing Locally The Current Site Options dialog appears 2 On the General tab click HTML Options The HTML Options dialog appears HTML Options 21x Formatting Indentation C Tab Maximum compression Spaces fi a Line breaks PC Unix Word wrap 250 Letter casing HTML tags Uppercase Attributes Uppercase ne Other options Use transparent GIF as spacer Include HTML comments I Include Generator meta tag Neto bjects Fusion 8 for Windows Include character set meta tag Background image offset Left fi 0 fi 6 Cancel 3 Setthe HTML formatting options These settings do not affect the appearance of your site The settings only affect the HTML code that is created when you publish the site e Indentation Select tabs or a specific number of spaces to indent lines of the code so it is easier to read e Maximum compression Select this option if you
525. roperties palette appears depending on which SiteStyle element you select Banner 1 Properties Secondary NavBar Sample Display in pixels Border 15 Spacing m Selected Banner Mame Banner 1 Type Image Selected Button Set Duplicate Delete fee Name Secondary New Banner Type Image Image C Text Duplicate Geer Add Banner New Button Set Image C Text Add Mew Set 2 Select Image or Text as the type of banner or button set to be added 3 Click Add Banner to add a new Banner or click Add New Set to add a new button set To duplicate existing banners and buttons 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the banner or button set you want to duplicate e Ifadding a new banner click on the Banner Properties tab e Ifadding a new button set click on the Primary or Secondary Navigation Bar Sample The Banner or NavBar Sample Properties palette appears depending on which SiteStyle element you select 2 Type a name for the new Banner or Button Set 3 Click Duplicate To delete an existing banners and buttons 1 In Style view with the Graphic tab selected select the banner or button set you want to duplicate e Ifdeleting a banner click on the Banner Properties tab 278 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles e If deleting a button set
526. roperties palette or the Standard toolbar The Link dialog appears displaying the link information Change the link destination or click Unlink to remove the link 334 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors To add HTML to a hotspot click HTML See Accessing an Object s HTML on page 550 To assign an action to a hotspot click its Actions tab on the Properties palette and follow the procedure described in Adding Actions to Objects and Pages on page 403 To resize a hotspot select it and drag its handles To create an alt tag for the hotspot type in the AltTag field The alt tag appears when the browser does not display the image To create multiple hotspots on an imagemap create one hotspot copy it and paste it on the image The pasted hotspot appears in the upper left corner of the imagemap Move the hotspot to the appropriate location and edit the link 335 Working with Imagemaps 336 CHAPTER 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Using the E commerce Catalog tool you can easily create an online store and offer site visitors an enjoyable shopping experience You can add or import products images and descriptions and choose from an assortment of display options Your store looks great on the Web and site visitors can easily find what they are looking for Add a store engine to process online transactions and further manage products Choose from several providers that offer cost effective solutions
527. rowser 22 setting scope 22 setting window size 23 primary button states 273 primary navigation bars 273 303 printing SiteStructure 49 Properties palette 10 protected code 536 proxy server 611 publish 576 Publish components 453 publish components 596 publish profiles 576 checklist 586 defining 580 exporting 64 global 596 Publish view 9 578 publishing aliased folders 603 606 asset type directory structure 589 base directory 587 CGI directory 608 configuring setup 589 creating custom folders 602 custom properties 604 customizing directory structure 602 data see data publishing deleting folders 603 external HTML unmodified 398 firewall 611 firewalls 611 flat directory structure 589 forced 562 FTP host 587 guidelines 577 locally 579 managing script assets 612 overlapping objects 100 properties 604 605 proxy servers 611 publish profile checklist 586 publish profiles 580 read only folders pages assets 604 rearranging directory structure 604 referenced pages 390 remote profiles 592 renaming custom files folders 603 server profiles 591 setting HTML output 100 101 site section directory structure 589 special assets 612 unmanaged assets 400 publishing directory 587 publishing method see HTML output publishing options and design priorities 109 Q qt files 371 QuickTime movies display options 371 372 inserting 370 volume 372 QuickTime plugin 370 quote type 53 R ra ram files 375 376 radio buttons in fo
528. rred to the server it displays the Last Published date in red and has a check in the Needs publishing option of the publication Properties dialog If you select Publish changed assets only when you publish this site the assets with red dates are republished to the server Pages always appear red because they are always republished unless you specifically choose not to publish a page To see the publication properties of a folder page or asset listed in Publish view 1 Right click the item 2 Select Properties from the shortcut menu The Properties dialog for the selected item appears Properties 2 x General index html Type HTML Page Last publish date Never Published Attributes Bead only Don t publish Jv Needs publishina Suppressing a Page or Asset from the Published Site You can also suppress publishing for a selected page or asset by setting its Don t publish property in the Local pane If you set this property NetObjects Fusion e Overrides the Needs publishing or Publish changed assets setting for this page or asset 605 Creating Aliased Folders and Setting the CGI Bin Directory Displays a diagonal red slash mark through the page or file icon in Publish view and adds a D to its Attribute column e Publishes the site without that page or asset To suppress publishing for a page or asset 1 In the Publish view right click the page or asset in the Local pane and choose
529. rties palette or by entering the width directly in the Properties Palette change the boundary size by dragging the slider on the Properties Palette drag the slider to the right to increase the space or width between products or to the left to decrease the space or width change the boundary size by entering the space or width directly in the Properties Palette type a number in the space or width field 4 Apply the change e Ifyou on the List page click Apply to All to resize all thumbnail images e Ifyou are detail page click Apply to resize only the current photo Apply to All to resize all photos in the catalog Removing Products You can remove products from the catalog on the Products tab of the E Commerce catalog properties editor 348 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs Products List Page Detail Page Store Price Add Fleece Jacket MJ 01 53 33 Compass MJ_02 995 Duplicate 19900 Remove Filter 59 99 1 In Page view display the List page or Detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the Products tab 4 In the Product Name column select a product and click Remove Duplicating Products You can easily duplicate products that share similar attributes 1 In Page view display the List page or Detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commer
530. rting one in the other select the Regions and align them using the Align buttons on the Multi Object Properties Palette Multi Object Properties ole E m Align Horizontally 3 Left Center Right E 4 amp E M Top Center Bottom Distrib Horizontally 205 Vertically Relative to Layout 6 Select the new Layout Region replace its contents with the contents for your second slide and delete its first action from the Actions tab on the Properties palette To make sure you re working with the second Layout Region s actions open the Object Tree palette from the View menu choose Palettes Object Tree and select the Region 7 Copy and paste the second Layout Region once for each remaining slide Align the resulting Regions on top of each other as you did in step 5 While working with each Layout Region replace its contents with those for a new slide You can uncover a Layout Region to work on in Page view by selecting Regions in the Object Tree palette and using the Hide Object or Show Object command on the Object menu Also in the Object Tree palette you can rename Regions Slidel Slide2 and so on to keep track of which slide is which 425 Examples 8 Edit the last action of all but the last slide so it targets the next slide in the show Double click the action on the Actions tab of the Properties palette to open the Set Action dialog and chan
531. s 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the product you want to work with Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Display the List Page tab Click the Layout tab under the product list Select a layout e UD A t Tm Select the number of columns to be used You can place up to 3 columns on a page 7 Select Thumbnail image links to Detail Page to automatically open the product detail page when a user clicks on the thumbnail image 352 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Compass Family Tent Backpack Extended Description Keywords Manufacturer Retail Price Sale Price Sales Tax Shipping Cost SKU Part Number 8 Continue formatting or click Done to close the editor 333 Formatting the List Page Displaying Products You choose which product items you want displayed on the List page Labels can be placed by each item so that site visitors are informed of what each field represents 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the List Page tab Click the Display Items tab under the products list Layout Display Items Product Items Product Items to Display Extended Description Add gt Name Move Up Keywords Price Manufacture
532. s Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing Note You must create a publish profile with server type as FTP to use an alias This option is not available for local SFTP or WebDAV publish profiles To do this you create alias folders using a process in which you define two locations the actual physical location on your Web server where you want to transfer the pages or assets and the URL or logical address that you want NetObjects Fusion to use when referring to that object On some servers this is referred to as creating virtual folders After the site is transferred to the Web server you or your server administrator must configure the server to look in the FTP location for assets that are described as being in the URL location For example your site might include several stock images from your company s marketing department such as the company logo and other approved artwork When you create your site you use copies of the artwork that you stored on a local disk When you transfer your site s HTML files to the company server however you want to use the official images that have been approved and maintained by the marketing department Check with your server administrator to see if your site contents or remote server configuration requires a CGI directory or other aliases To specify the CGI BIN directory 1 In Publish view click Publish Settings on the control bar The Publish Settings dialog appears 2 Choose a profile from the
533. s 5 Aitbrushed Gold Green amp Yelow e Bulleted item 1 5 Aura Orange amp Blue G Aura Red amp Purple e Bulleted item 2 Book Normal P Bullet Siver Business Green 3 Business Purple amp Blue Business Red amp Tan 5 Capsula Blue Paragraph text style sample Lorem ip sum Dolor sit 2 Capsula Green amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nonum 5 Capsula Red 4 3 Capsula Yellow 3 Cityscape Gold 2 Numbered item 2 5 Cityscape Purple Text Object G Cilyscape Teal amp Comic 3 Corporate 7 3 T Crossblock Il Blue amp Green ext Object style sample Lorem ip sum Dolor sit Headings S Crossblock Il Gold amp Crimson amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nonum Croesblock Il Rose amp Lilac Cupid Blue 3 Cupid Pink 3 C Decorator Heading 1 S Diamond Grape 3 Elemental Linked 45 Fancy Freda Green Visited Link 5 Frada Purple 5 Frada Red 3 FusiorZap Purple Ative Link 2 FusionZap Turquoise 5 FusiorZap Yellow G Gardening Blasaow Aqua amp Oranae Numbered item 1 Heading 2 Hoyer Link Heading 3 Note The text styles associated with lists are List Ordered lt OL gt List Bulleted lt UL gt and List Item lt LI gt Selecting the type of bullet character or numbering automatically selects the proper text style from the ordered or bulleted list Changing the lt LI gt style affect
534. s See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Click the Controls tab Flash Properties jol Quality z Scale Showa z Alignment z Auto Start Loop To control the display when using anti aliasing select a Quality option e AutoLow sets the default to normal quality The host computer uses high quality if it has the capacity e AutoHigh starts the movie in high quality The host computer uses low quality if it cannot display the movie in high quality High anti aliases the movie on any computer Low uses a normal quality so the movie displays quickly To determine how the movie fits in the image frame select a Scale option e ShowAll displays the movie within the frame but maintains the image proportions e NoBorder displays the movie so it fills the frame but maintains the ratio of the animation Some edges of the animation might be trimmed ExactFit displays the movie exactly within the frame To specify the movie s alignment within the frame select an Alignment option such as Left Bottom or Top Right To play the movie automatically when the site visitor opens the page select Auto Start To replay the movie when it ends select Loop 367 Inserting a Shockwave File Shockwave tool You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Inserting a Shockwave File With Shockwave from Macromedia yo
535. s both types of lists The Properties palette for the selected text element appears Body Properties Attribute Value font family Arial Helvetica Geneva Sa background color 255255255 background image url iImagesibackground gi Format Changes made to the body properties will affect elements of your entire site such as text color and layout Certain style features applied to the body are not supported by all HTML Generation Outputs You can change your output type in Site Settings 285 Editing the Text Elements of SiteStyles The Attribute column shows the text attributes of the text element The Value column shows the text format assigned to that attribute The only attributes listed are those that have been edited A text element s default attributes are not listed 4 Click the Format button The Text Format dialog appears Character Background Custom Style automatic Color Automatic hd m Position Automatics v Letter case automatic M Decoration Small caps Automatic Preview Ivi Automatic Underline verline JStrikethrough The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog il This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To leam about the scope of styles please see Help 5 Edit the text settings and click OK See Formatting Paragraphs
536. s alias This is a system administrator task outside of NetObjects Fusion so you or your server administrator must define the alias on the server Setting the Server Port and Permissions Depending on your Web server configuration you might need to set specific permissions or a specific port so your Web server software can access your site s HTML files Setting permissions might override the default permissions normally set by NetObjects Fusion The permission settings only apply to FTP and SFTP 609 Setting the Server Port and Permissions E Publish Settings servers that support the CHMOD command Windows IIS servers do not support the CHMOD command therefore to change the permissions on a Windows IIS server see your server administrator To set the server port and permissions 1 In Publish view click Publish Settings on the control bar The Publish Settings dialog appears 2 Choose a profile from the Profile list 3 Click Advanced publish settings and then click the Advanced S FTP tab File Naming Aliases Advanced FTP Home page file name index File extension for HTML pages hw zl 4 Select options for Advanced S FTP settings Server port is the port from which your server accepts FTP connections By default the port setting is 21 which is the most common ISP setting However some security systems or other server configurations may require a different setting Check with
537. s do not separate objects the way you think they should those objects might not be aligned with pixel level accuracy To correct this Shift Click all the objects you want to align 105 Selecting an HTML Output Method The Multi Object Properties palette appears Multi Object Properties 2 x Align Horizontally Left Center Right a Vertically Top Center Bottom T Distribute Horizontally Oo Vertically Relative to Layout 7 Click the alignment setting appropriate for the selected objects 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 as needed 9 Preview the site or page 10 To test the results reset your browser display fonts to a significantly larger size and preview the site again You can see a page s table structure in the browser by holding down Shift when you click the Preview Site button Optimizing AutoFrames If you are using Dynamic Page Layout you can control realignment of AutoFrame content by selecting for each frame the table alignment setting that best preserves your design When you use the Show button to preview the Layout s table structure the preview includes the table structure that NetObjects Fusion expects to use in AutoFrames Locking or Maximizing a Text Box If all the objects on a page are embedded in a text box you can apply three text box properties to reduce the impact of variations in browser configurations locking the minimum size of a text box
538. s have been edited Check the files you wish to save Top Frame Left Frame Frameset Page Cancel 5 Select each file and frame you want to save and click Save Click Cancel to undo all changes you made in HTML Source view since the last save 540 Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Moving Text Using Drag and Drop You cannot drag and drop protected code you can only do this with your own code To select a block of text 1 Move the pointer into the selected block and hold down the mouse button A rectangle appears under the tail of the pointer indicating that the text can be moved 2 Without releasing the mouse button move the pointer to the text block s new location indicated by the blinking text insertion point 3 Release the mouse button to complete moving the text block Finding Text In the HTML Source Editor as in a word processor you can search for text in the current document To find text 1 View the source code for the page you want to search 2 From the Edit menu choose Find The Find dialog appears 3 In the Find what field type the word letters or phrase you want to find and select options to narrow the search 4 Click Find Next NetObjects Fusion highlights the text you are searching for Note You can only search all the code on a page If you select some code and then search the HTML Source Editor begins searching the code that occurs after the selection Inserting
539. s in the site Selected Pages to check the spelling of text on the pages selected in Site view Current Page to check the spelling of text only on the page displayed in Page view If NetObjects Fusion does not recognize a word it displays it in the Not in Dictionary field of the Spelling dialog Email addresses and URLs are not checked Spelling Not in Dictionary Change to Suggestions Ignore All text texts Change Change All Add Suggest Options Cancel 4 Click Options to choose a language and to choose a location for your personal dictionary Ignore to skip this instance of the word Ignore All to skip all instances on this page e Change to replace this instance with the word in the Change to field e Change All to replace all instances on this page with the word in the Change to field e Add to put the word in your personal dictionary Suggest to see alternate spellings for the word Double click a suggestion to use it 184 Chapter 12 Designing with Text e Cancel to cancel the spelling check Finding Text 1 2 Go to Site view or Page view From the Edit menu choose Find The Find and Replace dialog appears In the Find in field select a scope for the search The options vary depending on the current view and the selected object Select Entire site to search all text in the site e Selected pages to search text on the pages se
540. se the SiteStyle s linked text color and the style set for the TextNavBar object See Formatting Text on page 152 and Editing a Style Background on page 254 310 Set the banner name in Site view or on the Banner Properties palette Chapter 18 Creating Navigation Bars and Banners Setting a Navigation Bar Target When a site visitor clicks a navigation bar link you can target a frame or a pop up window to display the linked page For example if you select blank as the link target the page you link to appears in a new browser window 1 In Page view select a navigation bar 2 Click the Style tab of the Navigation Bar Properties palette 3 In the Navigation bar target section select a target from the drop down list or click New Target and add a target avigation Bar Properties 510 Structure Site 7 Custom Edit Custom Display First Level z Type guten z Include Child pages IV Home page Target AE ew Tare Options Orientation Horizontal X For more information on link targets see Setting Link Targets on page 327 Using Banners Banners are picture title bars that display the name of the page helping site visitors understand where they are in your site You use the Banner tool to add new banners You can assign an action to any banner using the Actions tab of the Banner Properties palette For example you can make a banner grow
541. se to direct a visitor to Netscape Navigator 4 x Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and up Netscape Navigator 3 0 or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 The Screen Door is not visible on the page You might want to include information on the page to let site visitors know they are being directed to another page You can only include one Screen Door per page 1 In Page view select the Screen Door tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Draw a box in the Layout area of the page where you want to place the Screen Door This component does not work when placed in a MasterBorder 465 Directing Visitors to a Browser Specific Page A Screen Door placeholder and the Screen Door Properties palette appear Screen Door Properties BRED G Screen Door JavaScript client AX 3 Choose a Method e JavaScript client works for all browsers except the few that do not support the META tag server requires that your Web server is ASP compliant If you are publishing to an ASP server make sure your server administrator updates the browsecap ini file each time there is a browser update This file allows the server to recognize the new version of the browser which in turn allows the Screen Door component to identify the browser correctly If browsecap ini is not updated the Screen Door will not know where to send a site visitor For an updated version of browsecap ini go to www microsoft com
542. se when checking spelling Sort order Character variations between languages result in variations in sorting priorities To ensure that items in Assets view and Publish view are sorted correctly you can choose the appropriate sort order This affects only how the items are displayed in NetObjects Fusion it does not affect the generated HTML If you choose Use System Setting NetObjects Fusion uses the current system sort setting 25 Updating NetObjects Fusion Imported text uses character set Choose the character set you want to apply to text in imported sites For information about character sets see Working with Character Sets Updating NetObjects Fusion From the Tools menu choose Options gt Application and click the Updates tab Application Options Program Preview Text Intemational Check for updates Automatically Manually only when Check for Updates is selected from the Tools menu Update frequency Daily Weekly Monthly Check for updates when NetObjects Fusion Launches Connects to the Intenet Update status Date last checked 2 28 2004 Date of last update Cancel Set your preferences for checking for online program updates Select Automatically to check for updates using the frequency and event you specify or Manually to check only when you select Check for Updates from the Tools menu Automatically is the default setting If you select Automatic
543. separately unless you convert them to NetObjects Fusion mported files can be either HTML pages created by someone else or document files that you want to add as text boxes on your page Once you import a file you maintain it in your site like any other page You can add an external HTML file as A page that appears exactly as it appears in its original file page that appears with your default MasterBorder An individual object on a page See Referencing HTML from Site View on page 390 and Referencing HTML as an Object on page 394 When you reference an HTML file NetObjects Fusion copies all of its data to a new HTML file before it is published The original HTML file remains on your local machine it is not uploaded to the server when you transfer the site Because of this you cannot dynamically update the original file by uploading a new referenced file to the server Referencing HTML from Site View You can reference an entire site or section of a site from Site view For example you might reference an existing site you want to manage with NetObjects Fusion now and convert later Or you can reference files you prefer to maintain in their native code Note For links to work between the HTML files you reference use relative path names in the original lt A HREF gt tags keep all HTML files in the same directory and publish files using the same directory structure as the original site See Managing Referen
544. setsVeft_backgro 1KB 6 29 2003 7 48 36 Found on 7 Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySite AssetsNavLett gif 1KB 6 29 2003 7 32 30 Found Files bottom background bevel Image Data Objects Variables C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser SitesMySiteVAssets bottom backg 1KB bottom background film Image Yes CWetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySite Assets tbottom_backg 1KB 6 29 21 bottom_left_bevel Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySite Assetsbottom_left_ 1KB 6 29 2 bottom left film Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser SitesMySiteVissets bottom left 1KB 5 29 2 ap left bevel bottom right bevel Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySiteVissetsbottom right 1KB 6 29 2 ap left film bottom right film Image Yes C WetObjects Fusion 7 5XIser SitesWySiteVssetstbottom right 1KB 5 2892 op_right_bevd clearpixel Image C NetObjects Fusion 7 5Wser Sites MySite Assets clearpixel gif 1 6 29 21 p right film Company Logo Image es cts Fusion 7 51 ySite s BuiltWthNOF 418 20 left background bevel image Yes CWetObjects Fusion 7 5iser Sites MySiteWAssetsleft backgro 1KB 6 29 21 left_background_film Image Yes C WetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySite Assets lett_backgro 1KB 6 29 21 NavLeft Image Yes C NetObjects Fusion 7 5 User Sites MySite Assets NavLett gif 1KB 6 29 21 HavRight Image Yes C WNetObjects Fusion 7 5iUser Sites MySite Assets NavRight gif 1KB
545. sh view Refer to the directory structure to make sure you type the URL to your custom folder correctly 608 Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing 8 Click Advanced publish settings and then click the Aliases tab 9 To add a new alias click the New Alias button To edit an existing alias select it from the list then click the Edit Alias button The New Alias or Edit Alias dialog appears Km xi URL Path FTP Path Cancel 10 Enter the absolute or relative path from your site s root folder to the custom folder containing the aliased pages and assets as the URL Path Refer to the directory panel as needed to enter the path exactly as it appears including the use of uppercase and lowercase names and spaces For example if you create a custom folder called Companypix and place it under your Assets folder the URL Path would be Companypix 11 Enter the FTP path that you want to use to actually store that folder and its contents This FTP location must be on the same server as the rest of the site because your publish profile only logs onto one server at a time 12 Click OK 13 To add additional aliases click New Alias again and repeat the process When you publish your site NetObjects Fusion keeps all links and references to your aliased content pointing toward the URL path but actually stores the pages and assets in the FTP location you specified Note The server must be configured to support thi
546. shape outline thickness To make the border invisible set it to zero 5 n the Color section of the Properties palette click the Fill Color button In the Color Picker select the color you want to assign to the shape fill and click OK 6 Click the Line Color button In the Color Picker select the color you want to assign to the shape border and click OK 7 To adjust the shape drag its handles 262 HR Rule tool 8 Chapter 16 Drawing Shapes and Lines To change the shape proportionally drag a corner handle while holding down Ctrl To vary the curve of a rounded rectangle select it place the pointer over the inside corner handle until it changes to a four headed arrow then drag toward the inside or outside of the shape m Use this handle to modify the curve m To edit the lines of a polygon select it place the pointer over any handle until you see the four headed arrow then drag the handle to adjust the shape To add text to a shape see Adding Text to a Shape or Picture on page 179 When you publish a page with shapes NetObjects Fusion generates each shape as a gif file If the page contains more than one shape of the same type NetObjects Fusion adds a number to the shape s file name For example the first rounded rectangle you draw is named a_Rounded_Rectangle gif the second one is named a Rounded Rectanglel gif the third a Rounded Rectangle2 gif and so on Adding HTML Horizont
547. shing with Dynamic Page Layout on page 103 117 Setting Layout and Layout Region Background Properties Regular Tables uses a single table to place objects on the page See Publishing with Regular Tables on page 107 Fixed Page Layout uses cascading style sheet positioning and layers to optimize your site in Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above and Netscape Navigator 4 x See Publishing with Fixed Page Layout on page 107 The method you select for the Layout affects the entire page including the MasterBorder and frames you assign to that MasterBorder Setting Layout and Layout Region Background Properties You can control the appearance of each Layout and Layout Region by setting background properties You can assign a background color and place an image in the background of a Layout or Layout Region You can attach a background sound to a Layout that plays when a visitor views the page 1 In Page view select the Layout or Layout Region The General tab of the Properties palette appears 2 Select the Background tab Jol a iol Background Background Color Automatic x Color Automatic Image Automatic X Image Automatic X Sound ay Browse 3 In the Color field select Automatic to set the background to the background color specified by the Layout s current SiteStyle or the Layout Region s parent object 118 Chapter 8 Working with Layouts
548. sing In From Left from the Parameters menu so you can trigger the next action with a custom message Action 3 Enter Custom PicturelIsIn in the When field the Layout Region in the Target field and Object Delay in the Message field Then open the Values dialog from the Parameters menu and enter DelayIsDone as the Custom Message and 2 for the Delay value Values for a Delay action The message sent to the target to trigger the next action after this delay The duration of the delay in seconds The arrival of the first slide triggers a two second delay after which the DelayIsDone custom message is sent to trigger the next two actions Action 4 Enter Custom DelayIsDone in the When field the Layout Region in the Target field Motion Fly in the Message field and Out To Right in the Parameters field After two seconds the slide flies off the page 424 Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Action 5 Enter Custom DelayIsDone in the When field the Layout Region in the Target field you change this later and Custom ShowPicture in the Message field Also after two seconds another slide flies onto the page 5 Create the second slide by copying and pasting the entire Layout Region and placing the copy directly on top of not inside the first Region Copying the Layout Region copies its actions too so you don t have to add the same actions over and over to subsequent slides To stack Layout Regions without inse
549. site Folder E mcostello Folder phe Folder template Folder var Folder IE Background cif Image wrt 4 3 04 8 12 00 PM Ed body indexphp Image mer 4 13 04 1 35 00 AM JE Build3015 zip Comp wr 3 26 04 11 47 00 PM lac01ml pg Image wr 4 3 04 7 46 00 PM IE fac 36ml pg Image werr 4 3 04 7 46 00 PM E lac037l pg Image wir 4 3 04 7 38 00 PM HE lemD48nl ipa Image wir 4 3 04 7 46 00 PM E GettingStarted _v2 zip Comp rwt 4 1 04 9 54 00 PM fd index html HTML wir 4 12 04 4 13 00 PM E3 index php Image wir 4 13 04 1 35 00 AM 3 let index php Image wr 4 13 04 1 35 00 AM 3 Manuels zip Comp wer 3 29 04 2 40 00 AM E Nof8 os zip Comp wer 3 26 04 11 55 00 PM 3 ug zip Comp wir 3 27 04 12 03 00 AM IE ste css CSS wet 4 13 04 1 35 00 AM E3 css CSS wer 4 13 04 1 35 00 AM IE UserGuide_v2zip Comp wr r 4 1 04 9 54 00 PM The Local view presents a representation of the file structure that will be created when you publish your site It does not represent the existing structure for your site on your hard disk or server Therefore changing the directory structure in Publish 578 Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site view does not affect the page relationships in Site view and likewise changing the page relationships in Site view does not affect the representation in Publish view Changes that you make to the directory structure in Publish view only affec
550. sizing the text box to fill the Layout and wrapping the text box contents to the browser width See Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes for information about these options 106 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output Publishing with Regular Tables When you choose Regular Tables NetObjects Fusion translates each page Layout or Layout Region into a single HTML table with rows and columns and places your content into table cells If text content expands because of a browser font setting its table row expands with it and the content below it on the page is moved down Regular Tables is recommended when you e Want pages to display successfully in older versions of some browsers Use many tables or Layout Regions as containers and want to simplify the HTML output Include objects with actions on the page and you choose not to use Fixed Page Layout as the output method e Embed certain JavaScript code that will not work with Dynamic Page Layout Publishing with Fixed Page Layout Pages published using Fixed Page Layout can only be viewed accurately in Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher or Netscape Navigator 4 x browsers Older browsers can view the pages but with unpredictable results in many cases the page content is stacked flush left down the page Fixed Page Layout uses cascading style sheet positioning layers or both to achieve a high level of layout accuracy NetObjects Fusion determines which of these
551. so on for information Search engines continually evolve how they use content to index and rank pages and many of them make this information available at their sites Visit Online view for registration information To see the resulting HTML publish the site and view the source in your browser To test the tags you added publish the site and search for keywords using the various search engines Be patient as it can take days or weeks for indexers to find your site Auto Forwarding from a Transition Page You can create a transition page that appears for a few seconds for example to display a product logo and then forwards site visitors automatically to another page You do this by inserting a META tag in the page s lt HEAD gt 1 In Page view click in the Layout area of the transition page and click the HTML button on the Layout Properties palette The Page HTML dialog appears 547 Examples of Page and AutoFrame HTML 2 Click the Between Head Tags tab and type lt META HTTP EQUIV REFRESH CONTENT seconds URL http server domain com page html gt where seconds is the number of seconds you want the transition page to appear and http server domain com page html is the URL of the page you want to link to 3 Click OK Preview the site to test the transition and go to HTML Source view to see your code Accommodating Browsers that Don t Support Frames Some older browsers don t support frames To preve
552. specified for the table Color to select a background color for the cell from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker Object Format Character Paragraph Borders Background Color Image Automatic v Browse Attachment Automatic Repeat Automatic Image Position Horizontal Automatic Vertical Automatic Value M Value Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help Conca change the cell background image in the Image field select e Automatic to set the background to the image used by the table 249 Working with Table Cells e Browse to select an image for the cell background from the Picture File Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the cell the browser tiles the image If you select a picture with a transparent color the background color shows through To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field To apply text styles see Chapter 12 Designing with Text 6 To make the cell a form select Cell is a form See Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms 7 Selec
553. splays one item at a time or a list box that displays several items in a scrolling list e Visible height For a list box enter the number of visible lines in the box Allow multiple selections For list box select this option if you want site visitors to be able to select more than one item in the list 438 all Forms Button tool Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms 4 To add items to the combo box list click the plus button and in the Enter Value dialog type a name and the value passed to the script for the item Enter Value Name Name that appears in the list Value Value passed if this item is selected Selected by default x Cancel Name Type the name passed for this item which is also the name that appears in the list Value Type the value passed if the item is selected Selected by default Check this option if you want this item initially selected Unless you re creating list box and you select Allow multiple selections only one item in the list can be selected 5 To label the list use the Text tool on the Standard toolbar To remove items from the list select the item and click the minus button Use the arrow buttons to rearrange the order of items in the list Adding Submit Reset and Custom Buttons After adding objects for collecting data from site visitors you must add a Submit button to send the data to your Web server You can also suppl
554. ssary in response to browser font changes By staggering the text boxes and image objects as shown in the diagram at left you require NetObjects Fusion to create multiple tables with different sized columns By aligning the page objects as shown at right you create a simpler underlying table structure for the page which can result in better performance in Netscape browsers To help determine the best alignment you can preview the underlying table row and column structure to see if NetObjects Fusion can divide your Layout into cells efficiently or if you need to rearrange some objects 104 Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output In Page view select the Layout or Layout Region you want to preview The General tab of the appropriate Properties palette appears Select Columns or Rows in the HTML output section Click and hold the Show button Layout Properties 2 x Layout HomeLayout Layout Page width 570 4 730 Piwels Height 524 3 Pinels HTML output Site Setting x Tables Columns Rows Show table structure button Layout is a form HTML Center in browser NetObjects Fusion hides grid lines guide lines and object borders in the Layout and displays solid gray lines to show how the Layout is divided into rows and columns Identify underlying table cells that contain multiple text boxes or other objects Release the Show button If row and column divider
555. stem the browser uses that player to play the sound Icon to select one of the three images to link to the sound e Picture to select another image file as the visual link to the sound Click Browse and select an image file 7 Click the HTML button to insert HTML tags and scripts See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages Inserting a Real Player File RealAudio ra ram rm can play streaming audio on all systems requires RealAudio Web server resident software and sometimes includes video Site visitors must install the RealAudio player browser plugin To insert a Real Player file 376 Real Player tool Chapter 21 Placing Media In Page view select the Real Player tool from the Plug ins flyout on the Advanced toolbar Click on the page to indicate the location of the Real Player file The Open dialog appears Select a Real Player file from your hard disk or LAN or select a file already used in the site from the Video Assets tab For information about using assets see Chapter 30 Managing Assets Click Open The Real Player placeholder graphic appears on the page and the Real Player Properties palette appears The name of the file you selected appears in the File field on the General tab You can use the Browse button to select a different file Real Player Properties 11 14 9
556. sterBorder drop down list Click Open The file is imported into the site and placed as a child page below the selected page in Site view Note You can also import a document from Page view See Importing Pages on page 85 73 Importing a Microsoft Office Document 74 CHAPTER 6 Page View Basics Page view is where you add text graphics and other objects to develop page design and add content You can use a variety of tools object properties and layout aids such as rulers guides and grids to add and arrange objects on the page This chapter describes e MasterBorder and Layout area Setting up the Page view display Displaying pages in Page view Setting page size Adding objects to the page Editing objects Positioning objects Layering objects 75 Exploring Page View Page name Docked Exploring Page View toolbar Rulers Comp onent DynaButtons Manag er Q Picture Loader c Form Handler uy Ek Go menu Mission BUSINESS NAME has been serving the STATE PROVINCE community since 5 DATE We specialize BUILDING MAKING SERVICING OFFERING YOUR ial Picture Rollover Ex PRODUCT SERVICE and our staff offers quality MasterBorder Rotating Picture Next Tour SERVICES you can count on In addition our frienc a lia ol area answer any questions you may have about our cc ScreenDoor HomeLayout Site Mapper Whethe
557. styles and create folders to better manage your Style view SiteStyles are stored in folders labeled with the style name Text styles and graphic styles are stored separately and new text styles do not automatically transfer to a new site Adding a SiteStyle You can add a style from any NetObjects Fusion style folder on your hard disk drive CD ROM or LAN and you can also download online styles You add styles by first adding a SiteStyle Source in the Style view A SiteStyle Source is the location where additional styles are stored Any SiteStyle found at this location will then be available in the Style view Warning SiteStyles from earlier versions of NetObjects Fusion do not include all style elements available in NetObjects Fusion 8 If you import an older style you must update the style to be compatible with the new features For example NetObjects Fusion version 3 0 and earlier did not have the rollover style for buttons Thus if your style is from version 3 0 you must assign button rollover styles before the navigation bars can display rollovers 289 Managing SiteStyles To add an online styles source 1 In Style view from the Style menu choose Add SiteStyles Source The Add SiteStyles Source dialog appears Select Online SiteStyles as the Source Type Click Next Note You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature Enter a name for the new source Add Online SiteStyles Source x Onli
558. t Automatic to set the background to the image specified in the Text NavBar style in Style view None to eliminate the background image 309 Using Navigation Bars Browseto select an image from the Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 186 If the picture is smaller than the navigation bar the browser tiles the image To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field 4 Inthe Delimiters section select the characters you want to use before and after each link in a text navigation bar The default characters are square brackets You can choose angle brackets or other characters or leave this blank Select Include delimiters in link to extend the underline to include these characters Home Mission Events Activities Highlights Next Tour Contest Delimiter Linked page Current page 5 If you are working with a horizontal text navigation bar in the Format section you can select Right Left or Center alignment If you select Constrain to a single line NetObjects Fusion increases the page width to accommodate the navigation bar on a single line If you clear this option you can reduce the width of the navigation bar so it appears on more than one line 6 By default all pages in a text navigation bar are linked except the current page Select Link current page in the Options section to include a link to the current page Text navigation bars u
559. t FirstFontColor determines the FirstCaption text color FirstFontFace determines the FirstCaption text style e FirstFontltalic determines if the FirstCaption text is italicized FirstFontBold determines the FirstCaption text is bold e FirstFontSize determines the FirstCaption text size Attributes with Previous link to the previous record in a recordset Attributes with Next link to the next record in a recordset Attributes with Last link to the last record in a recordset e SEM 5 Bill Jones ME 5ionesOmisports com Previous Next Last Adding Conditional Statements You can further narrow your query results or define how and which records are displayed using the Conditional Expression object The Where clause filters records at the database level the conditional statement queries your recordset 524 IF Conditional Expression Object Chapter 28 Publishing Dynamically from a Database results at the page level For example you have queried your Students table and returned 200 records of students whose major is Psychology Now you would like to display these records on your Web site however you want to display students at the senior level a red font to set them apart In this case you can build a conditional expression by searching the Major datafield for Senior The resulting expression would be If Classification Senior Ifthe condition is met fo nt red
560. t The Layout is the default container for the page and can contain any object To place objects in a Layout you can Select the appropriate tool and create an object within the Layout e Paste an object into the Layout from the Clipboard Drag and drop any object that you previously placed with tool Working with Layout Regions A Layout Region is a container you use to group objects in a defined area on the page Layout Regions are page segments that you can place size and control independently from the rest of the Layout There are five key aspects to using Layout Regions When you move a Layout Region on the page its embedded objects move with it and maintain their positions relative to each other and the Layout Region e You can send cascading action messages to the Layout Region and it will pass the message to all objects embedded within it See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages You can embed a Layout Region within a text box This gives you position based placement of the objects within the Layout Region while the rest of the page is arranged in a text based layout e You can assign an HTML output method to a Layout Region independent of the method used for its parent Layout See Setting the HTML Output Method for a Layout or Layout Region on page 117 e You can designate a Layout Region as a form and embed form objects within it See Chapter 25 Designing and Implementing Forms 114
561. t 11 server contents 597 server permissions 610 server port 610 server profiles 591 publishing 591 server setup 586 checklist 586 servers publishing with proxy servers 611 server side imagemaps 334 Set Action dialog 403 customizing 427 shapes adding text 179 drawing 262 editing lines of polygons 263 varying curve of rounded rectangles 263 Shockwave files audio 368 Director 368 formats 368 inserting 368 Shockwave plugin 368 shortcuts keyboard 12 menus 13 shtml files 47 sibling pages 33 simple text fields creating 479 single line text fields see edit fields site transfer to Web 598 site files 28 Site Mapper component 467 Site Navigation palette 79 site section directory structure publishing 589 Site view 8 27 background color 48 orientation 48 Outline view 48 SiteStructure 33 sites backing up 51 56 24 converting 67 copying 65 creating 29 60 distributing 65 domain names 71 expanding 61 72 exporting 63 importing 67 68 inserting templates 62 modification history 55 moving 65 naming 30 61 opening 31 opening last automatically 20 referencing external HTML 390 saved 28 saving 20 searching 13 selecting sections 34 setting browser compatibility 53 setting options 52 setting publishing method 101 sharing 65 structure 33 wizards 31 SiteStructure 33 expanding and collapsing 48 printing 49 SiteStyles adding 289 adding SiteStyle lines 264 applying 274 creating 287 defined 270 editing 274 284 295
562. t Cell is a header to format the cell as a column or row heading This makes it easier for people with disabilities to read the table You can also add HTML code to a cell See Chapter 29 Working with HTML Directly Sizing Cells To make a table cell shrink to fit the content in the cell 1 Right click in the cell you want to size 2 Select Fit Cells from the shortcut menu The cell shrinks to fit the content Adding Text and Pictures to Cells Working in a table cell is the same as working in a text box You can e Add and format text You can apply formats to all selected cells at one time See Chapter 12 Designing with Text Embed objects See Embedding Objects in a Text Box on page 123 e Wrap text around objects See Wrapping Text around Objects on page 125 e Modify text box properties See Chapter 9 Working with Text Boxes To select the contents of a cell Double click the cell Cross hatching appears around the selected cell You can edit the text in the cell or change cell properties 250 Chapter 15 Adding Tables Sorting Table Data You can sort the table data by column in ascending or descending order 1 In Page view select the table you want to work with 2 Right click and select Sort Table from the menu The Sort Table dialog will appear Sort By First Name x Ascending T LastName Ascending Options Ignore initial whitespace Cancel
563. t is restored 65 Sharing NetObjects Fusion Site Files 66 CHAPTER 5 Importing Sites and Documents You can create a site or expand a site you are working on by importing a site that was created using a different site or page development tool When you import an existing site NetObjects Fusion duplicates the SiteStructure page content and links It lays out content in a design as close as possible to the original You can also expand a site by importing Microsoft Word files The document becomes a page in your NetObjects Fusion site This chapter describes Creating new sites from existing sites Using existing sites to expand sites Importing documents 67 Importing Existing Sites Importing Existing Sites When you create or expand a site by using an existing site follow these guidelines Importing a complex site requires processing time If the source site was created in NetObjects Fusion it is more efficient to import it as a template e You can import an existing site from a local or networked drive or from a remote location such as an intranet server or the World Wide Web e To import from a local drive you must know the drive and folder where the site s Home page usually named index htm or index html is stored e To import from a remote location you must know the URL to the site s top level source page such as http www netobjects com NetObjects Fusion does not import sites that are
564. t script gt lt END Layout script gt function F loadRollover function F_roll gt lt SCRIPT gt lt SCRIPT LANGUAGE JavaScriptl 2 SRC file C Net bjects Fusion MX NetObjects System rollover js gt lt SCRIPT gt lt BODY NOF MB 102 50 140 10 L 620 418 BGCOLOR FFFFFF BACKGRDUND file C Net bjects mein Of E LetFieme C Body Frame H Fremeset Pose Source view is divided into the Document Map pane on the left and the HTML Source Editor pane on the right You can resize the panes by dragging the divider bar The Document Map displays the hierarchy of HTML components and language elements on the current page It provides you with quick access to code for NetObjects Fusion objects To expand a tag s code in the Document Map click the plus sign e collapse a tag s code click the minus sign or right click and choose Collapse Item from the shortcut menu To collapse all tags choose Collapse Map from the shortcut menu Double click a tag to highlight the corresponding code in the HTML Source Editor To hide the Document Map choose Hide from the shortcut menu To restore the Document Map display choose Document Map from the HTML Source Editor s shortcut menu The HTML Source Editor displays the source code for the current page e Protected code is displayed on a gray background You cannot edit this code Unprotected code is displayed
565. t the link in the appropriate browsers before publishing the site 326 Chapter 19 Creating Links and Anchors Setting Link Targets NetObjects Fusion allows users to open link targets in existing frames and pop up windows Setting Frame Targets As explained in Understanding Frames on page 140 when a site visitor clicks a link placed within a frame the browser has to know where to display the results The frame that displays the retrieved content is the target of the link when you specify which frame is to display the results of a link you are targeting that frame NetObjects Fusion includes four default targets Choose e _ blank to load the specified link into a new browser window _selfto replace the frame where the link resides with the document of that link This is similar to how links behave on sites with no frames parent to load the designated content into the current window s parent If the current frame has no parent the content is loaded into the same frame as the element that refers to this target e topto load the designated content into the full original window This cancels all other frames If the current frame has no parent the content is loaded into the same frame as the element that refers to this target To display the designated content in a new named window you can create a new link target To set a link target 1 In Page view select the object or text that you want to link 2 Cli
566. t your site s current directory structure when you publish your site The drop down list in the Local view displays the directory structure of your site as it will be published on your server Click a directory s plus sign to expand the display to show the subdirectories beneath it Click a directory s minus sign to collapse the display and hide the subdirectories beneath it Or click the folder next to the drop down box to navigate up one level The Remote view on the right displays the contents of the remote directory you are currently connected to If you are not connected to a remote server you will see drop down list of available remote profiles You can delete rearrange or rename the directories shown in the Local and Remote panes and you can create new subdirectories at any level below the root Locked components and their related assets signified by a black lock image on their icons cannot be renamed or rearranged For each local and remote directory page or asset displayed the Local and Remote pane displays its name type attributes and the date and time of the last local and remote publish or modification You can sort the content files and folders by clicking a column heading and you can resize the columns by dragging the column heading border The icons associated with different file types are set in the Windows File Types Registry Publishing Locally While developing a site you should publish it at least once
567. tandard Web format the Unsupported File Format dialog appears Unsupported File Format The selected image file is not supported by most Web browsers You may convert the file to either GIF or JPEG format The original file will not be changed C Convert to JPG file C Do not convert file e Ifyou convert to gif NetObjects Fusion reduces the image to 256 colors e Ifyou convert to jpg NetObjects Fusion retains the color information from the original file Ifyou choose not to convert NetObjects Fusion positions the image in HTML using the lt EMBED gt tag Only browsers that have the appropriate plugin installed can view the image 6 Choose the appropriate conversion format and click OK If you chose to Copy to site s Assets in the Picture File Open dialog NetObjects Fusion copies the file converts the copy and stores the copy in the site s Assets folder Both the original file and the copy are listed in Assets view Only the converted copy is required for your site so you can delete the original file The picture and Picture Properties palette appear Picture Properties amp ws 3 G2 e R O Eile CaMetObjectsFusi Browse AltTag mission 2 Optimize Settings Not optimized X Edit Options Link Anchor HTML 190 Chapter 13 Placing Pictures 7 Type a description of the picture in the AltTag field See Adding and Modifying Alt Tags on page 87
568. te Files nod Cancel 2 Type a descriptive name for your backup file and select a location 3 Click Save NetObjects Fusion creates a copy of the nod file in the location you specified and automatically opens that file Note The backup you make with the Save Site As command does not collect all assets and make all links relative Your backup will still refer to assets and components in the original site file folder To make a backup with assets and relative links export your site file as a template as described in Chapter 4 Working with Templates 51 Setting Options for the Current Site For information on automatic site file backups see Setting Backup Preferences on page 56 Setting Options for the Current Site Site options help you manage your site You can change these settings from any view Changes take place as soon as you click OK to close the Current Site Options dialog These options apply only to the current site To set options that apply to all sites see Chapter 2 Setting Application Options Changing General Settings From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site The General tab of the Current Site Options dialog appears Current Site Options General META tags History Backup Site name MySite SiteStyle Phoenix Number of pages 8 Defaults Browser compatibility Dynamic Page Layout All browsers Change New page size ight idth M
569. te you want select the appropriate TemplateName zip file and click Open Note You can also open nft template files that were created in earlier versions of NetObjects Fusion 60 5 Chapter 4 Working with Templates The Save Site As dialog appears Save Site As Save jn CQ User Sites Mysite My Documents EL My Computer Type a site name here 3 My Network File name Save Places Save as type NetObjects Fusion Files nod Cancel Enter a name for the new site in the File name field Select the location where you want to save the site By default NetObjects Fusion saves your site in the NetObjects Fusion 8 User Sites folder but you can store it in the location of your choice Click Save NetObjects Fusion opens in Site view and displays the page icons of the site you created You can modify the SiteStructure as described in Working with the SiteStructure on page 33 Using Templates to Expand a Site One way to expand a site is to insert NetObjects Fusion templates in a specific location in your site Templates are especially helpful if you have standard boilerplate sections or pages that you want to add to multiple sites This is also a great way to share with other developers who use NetObjects Fusion See Exporting a Site on page 63 When you insert a template follow these guidelines Before you insert the template select the location in Site vi
570. ted items that site visitors may be unaware of on the detail page of a product Adding Options You can create product attributes without having to add separate product records For example you can include variations such as size or color to one item without having to create additional products 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Display the Products tab In the name column select a product you want to add options to Click on Add Options gy ow wv The Add Group dialog will appear 6 Enter a Group Name that will identify this group of options ER Add Group You assign different options to a group Please provide a group name and a label When you click OK you can then assign options to this group Group Name pee M Label E Cancel The Group Name will appear only in the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 344 Chapter 20 Creating E Commerce Catalogs 7 Enter a label If no label is entered the label name will default to the Group Name The label will appear beside the options on the List page and detail page of your site 8 Click OK The Edit Product Options dialog will appear Edit Product Options Option Groups Options Name ShirtSizes i Small Medium Large Create New Group New Option Remove Duplicate Group Sort Alphabeticall
571. tents of a text box at the insertion point for example to add text attributes or comments to the HTML Note that you cannot do this in HTML Source view 1 In Page view double click in the text box to get an insertion point 2 From the Text menu choose Insert HTML The Insert HTML dialog appears 3 Enter your HTML or script Insert HTML What you type or paste here Insert Field Delete Cancel is inserted where you clicked in the text box in the published HTML For lt STRONG gt SPECIAL DEALS lt STRONG click Note The Insert HTML dialog can contain up to 255 characters To insert more than 255 characters use the HTML Source Editor or Object HTML dialog or reference an external HTML file 4 Click OK Preview the page to test your code and view the source from your browser to see the resulting HTML For SPECIAL DEALS click here You can double click here to reopen the Insert HTML dialog to view or edit the code 553 Coding Your Own Objects Coding Your Own Objects You can create an object such as a Java applet or a table you want to code yourself by entering HTML or script in an empty text box 1 In Page view draw a text box where you want the object to go The box marks the object s position when you publish but it can grow vertically or horizontally depending on the object To approximate the published size in your Layout area select Lock height on the Text Box tab of the
572. ter 8 Working with Layouts and Layout Regions 3 Add objects to the Layout and modify the Layout properties such as size background or HTML output options Selecting a Layout To display a different Layout for a page In Page view select a Layout from the Layout drop down list Renaming a Layout 1 In Page view select a Layout from the Layout drop down list The General tab of the Layout Properties palette appears Layout Properties 2 x elol Layout name HomeLayout Layout Page width 570 H 730 Pixels Height 524 H 649 Pixels HTML output Site Setting X Tables Columns Rows a Layout is a form m Center in browser HTML 2 Enter a new name in the Layout name field Use letters and numbers only Layout names cannot have spaces hyphens underscores or other special characters and they cannot begin with a number The name of the Layout changes and the Layout drop down list is updated You can also use the Object Tree palette to change the name of the Layout See Renaming an Object on page 89 113 Working with Layout Regions Changing Layout Size You can set Layout size by entering specific measurements on the Layout Properties palette or by dragging the Layout handles See Setting Page Size on page 79 To reduce the amount of white space in the Layout area In Page view from the Object menu select Size Layout to Objects Adding an Object to the Layou
573. text see Formatting Photo Titles and Captions on page 221 220 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries Adding and Editing Photo Titles and Captions on the Photo Page 1 In Page view display the photo page you want to work with 2 Click in the blue bordered title text field and type the title text 3 Click in the blue bordered caption text field and type the caption text caption tether To edit existing text click in the text field make changes For information about formatting the title and caption text see Formatting Photo Titles and Captions Formatting Photo Titles and Captions Formatting Photo Titles You can format all the titles at once from the Photo Page tab of the Photo Gallery Properties Editor or format individual titles on the individual photo pages Note If you specify formats and they do not appear in the text it could be caused by the text style definitions usually the definition of the Body and Normal P tags in the SiteStyle For example if the Body tag defines the font size that definition overrides any font 221 Formatting Photo Titles and Captions size you specify in the Object Format dialog You can get around this by choosing a SiteStyle that does not define the property you want to set or by formatting the individual photo titles See Formatting an Individual Photo Title on page 223 Any individual text you format overrides th
574. that puts the site on the Web Before you can publish to a remote server however you need to define a remote publish profile 585 Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server Setting Up to Transfer Files to Your Web Server To put your site on the Web you must transfer its HTML files and related asset files from your computer s local hard disk to a server that has access to the Web This can be an ISP server that you use to access the Web your company s Web server or any other server that gives you Internet access NetObjects Fusion transfers your site s files to the Web server using FTP SFTP or WebDAV protocols Therefore to transfer to a remote Web server your computer must connect using an FTP SFTP or WebDAV protocol unless that remote server is on your company LAN in which case you can use the Local Publish option Prior to transferring to the server the first time however you must set up a profile of the server to receive the transferred HTML files The setup for a Web server also applies to an intranet server If you ll transfer a site from your hard disk to your company s intranet server prior to transferring to the Web server use the setup steps in this section for both your intranet server and Web server The Server Setup Process To set up a server you select transfer options and define a profile After you select the appropriate options you don t have to select them again You just transfer the s
575. the Form Handler text field e Publish to Choose Email from the drop down list if you have not already done so Email Click and type the email address to which responses will be sent Because of the way the email feature works you cannot have required fields in the email option If you want both features you must use a CGI script that can send email 443 Processing Data with a CGI Script Processing Data with a CGI Script To process form responses other than by outputting text using the Form Handler component use a custom CGI script A CGI script is a program that controls a program on your Web server Using a CGI script you can format responses for a particular application summarize them on a page that s returned to the site visitor or do practically anything else with the data Note Not all administrators let you install CGI scripts on their servers Some provide standard CGI scripts for you to use and a few don t support CGI at all 1 In Page view click anywhere in the form except on a form object 2 On the Properties palette click the Settings button For a text box form look for the Settings button on the Text Box tab For other forms look on the General tab The Form Settings dialog appears Form Settings Form name LAYOUTFORM Settings Action Browse Method Post C Bet Encoding type 3 Specify Form name Type an arbitrary name for the form This is re
576. the Letter case setting Not all browsers support small caps Choose None to remove a small caps format set at a higher level Position sets the text to be subscript or superscript Choose Normal to remove a position format set at a higher level Decoration sets the text to the selected decorations You can select underline overline CSS only and strikethrough Setting Paragraph Alignment Spacing and Margins 1 Position the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format You do not need to select text 2 On the Format tab of the Text Properties palette click the Format button 160 Chapter 12 Designing with Text 3 Inthe Paragraph Settings dialog click the Paragraph tab Paragraph Settings Character Paragraph Borders Backaround Alignment and spacing Alignment 22 Line height pt vj Image wrap Letter spacing pty Margins and indents Space above pov Eirst line indent pt Space below pov Left margin pty Bight margin pt vj Preview The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope of styles please see Help Cancel 4 Set paragraph format options If you choose Automatic the settings for the parent style pass through to the paragraph See Understanding the Automatic Setting on page 155 Alignment sets the alignme
577. the Smart Link type Lirk ype Find Again Smart link Name Description Home Links to your Home page First Child Page Links to the first child page of the current page Blank Creates an empty JavaScript link that can be used to assign an action Checkout Checkout View cart View cart See Setting Link Targets on page 327 Target None See Adding HTML to a HTML C Link on page 332 4 Select the type of link you want The links listed depend on the type of page you are on normal or stacked and on what pages are available to link to from the page you are on Home links to your Home page Up links to the parent of the current page Next Stacked Page links to the next page in a set of stacked pages Previous Stacked Page links to the previous page in a set of stacked pages e Next Page links to the sibling to the right of this page in the SiteStructure e Previous Page links to the sibling to the left of the current page in the SiteStructure e First Child Page links to the first child page of the current page Blank creates an empty JavaScript link on the page that you can use to assign an action 5 Click Link 321 Creating Links For information about stacked pages see Chapter 27 Data Publishing Creating an External Link External links are Universal Resource Locators URLs that point to other pages and items in other sites A valid URL can include
578. the designated location including special assets you tell it to manage These special assets include things like Java classes images and assets contained on external HTML pages and CGI scripts The list of managed assets included in your published site is displayed in Assets view When you transfer the site s files to the Web server you can use any of three methods to ensure that the special assets are included in your site s managed assets Include the assets when you add the object that refers to them For example Ifyou reference external HTML pages using the External HTML tool NetObjects Fusion analyzes the external pages and if it finds assets in the external pages includes those assets in Assets view e Ifyou add Java objects to your pages using the Java tool NetObjects Fusion analyzes their class files and adds other class files referenced there If you listed additional files on the Java Properties palette NetObjects Fusion includes them as managed assets See Inserting a Java Applet or Servlet on page 382 e You can reference an asset in a file link and NetObjects Fusion manages and publishes the asset See Creating a File Link on page 325 e You can explicitly add any special asset to Assets view and select Always publish file to ensure that NetObjects Fusion manages and publishes the asset If you select Always publish file and do not move the file in Publish view and then only publish a section of the
579. the drop down list choose the type of Web server you re publishing to Windows Mac UNIX or Email You must know the type of server as well as how the server is configured to handle CGI scripts Ask your ISP or server administrator or check the Workbench link from www netobjects com support If you choose Email see Submitting Data in an Email 441 Submitting Responses as Plain Text Success URL Double click this row and in the Link dialog select the page to display when a visitor correctly completes the form Click the Link button Error URL Double click this row and in the Link dialog select the page to display when submission fails for example if the visitor doesn t fill in a required field Output File Type a name for the file you want responses copied to Do not specify a path Perl Path for UNIX If you re publishing to a UNIX server type the path to the Perl application on the server Perl 5 is required on the server CGI Bin Directory Type the path to the directory on the Web server where the CGI scripts provided by Form Handler should be copied This directory must be in the Publish to directory or lower in the directory hierarchy Abs Storage Directory Windows only or Storage Directory Type the path to the directory on the server where you want to put the output file Required fields For each field choose whether a response is required True or not False for a submission to be successful If you m
580. the table in all versions of the target browsers 99 Selecting an HTML Output Method Selecting an HTML Output Method The wide range of browser versions and capabilities makes it difficult to know exactly what kind of HTML tags and functions will display effectively to site visitors Advances in HTML coding and browser abilities have also made it possible to create pages using less code and more efficient downloads if your site visitor s browser can support it To address these concerns and take advantage of these improvements you can choose from three types of HTML output when publishing your site Dynamic Page Layout uses Nested Table tagging and other features of the 3 2 HTML specification This is the default output method because it produces the most predictable and consistent results onscreen regardless of the type version or configuration of the site visitor s system or browser fonts Both Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 x and above and Netscape Navigator 2 x and above correctly display pages published in Nested Tables format See Optimizing Dynamic Page Layout Output on page 103 e Regular Tables uses a single table for your page design and content Both Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 x and above and Netscape Navigator 2 x and above correctly display pages published in Regular Tables format although site visitors results might vary according to their system and browser font settings Note If you select Dyna
581. the variable type from the drop down list Table 28 2 Custom Variable Types Variable Type Description URL Parameter Variables reflecting parameters appended to a URL CGI Environment Variables reflecting the CGI environment variables of the context of the requested template Form Variables reflecting the values of the fields in a form submitted to the current template Client Variables used to associate data with a specific client Session Variables used to associate data with a given client session Server Variables used to associate data with a given client session Application Variables used to associate data with a specific application Cookie Variables reflecting cookies passed by the requesting browser 8 Click Add 9 Click OK to close the Variables dialog Using the SQL Editor You can also use the SQL editor to modify the existing code or input your own 511 Retrieving and Displaying Data r i t Recordset Iterator Object 1 In Page view double click the Connector object that contains the recordset you want to work with 2 On the Recordset tab highlight the recordset and click Edit The Recordset editor will appear 3 Click on the Edit in Expert Mode link The Advanced editor will appear 4 Add or modify the code then click OK SQL SELECT ID FName LName Department Phone Email FROM Employees WHERE FName GetsQLValue Mary OR Department GetSQLValue Human Resources 0
582. ting Preview Options Setting Preview Options From the Tools menu choose Options gt Application and click the Preview tab Application Options ext Intemational Updates Select previewing default Internet Explorer 6 0 Add Installed browsers are shown here Edit Preview scope Current page Entire site Window size Maximized 640 480 800 600 1024x768 Select previewing default When you install NetObjects Fusion it lists the browsers installed on your system If installed browsers are not listed you can add them to the list Choose the Web browser you want to use for previewing sites by selecting its check box To change the browser used for previewing return to this dialog and choose a different browser To add a browser to the list click Add In the New Browser dialog type a name for the browser browse to the shortcut or exe file that launches it and click OK To remove a browser from the list select it in the list and click Remove To change a browser s name or location select the browser in the list and click Edit Enter the new information and click OK Preview scope Choose whether you want to preview only the current page or the entire site you are working on when you click the Preview Site button on the control bar Previewing the entire site takes longer but you can move from page to page in the browser to test the site s navigation buttons Select the Current
583. ting a Data Source 493 cropping pictures 200 Current Site Options dialog 101 custom attribute 173 custom messages in actions 420 421 customized assets 604 customizing templates 64 D data fields defined 474 formatted text 479 image file 479 simple text 479 data list icon SiteStyle editing 282 data lists creating 482 defined 474 searching 13 data objects defined 474 deleting 490 external 477 480 internal 477 478 managing 570 data publishing 473 data lists creating 482 process 476 stacked pages 485 data submitting via email 443 date format 25 date property published sites 604 der files 368 decimal format 25 deleting anchors 320 data objects 490 file assets 564 folders 603 links 332 569 MasterBorders 138 stacked pages 489 table rows and columns 245 text styles 174 unused file assets 565 variables 573 dir files 368 Director ActiveX control 369 Netscape plugin 369 directory structure 589 custom HTML 535 customizing 602 external HTML 397 400 distributing objects 90 91 dithering in transparent gif files 196 dll files 387 Document Map 538 documents importing 72 85 domain names imported sites 71 drop down lists in forms 438 dxr files 368 DynaButtons component 456 sub buttons 457 Dynamic Page Layout HTML output method 100 103 optimizing output 103 using with actions 401 dynamic page layout 287 dynamic pages 401 E edit fields in forms 433 edit style background SiteStyle 283 editin
584. tising banners if the banners are located on a server other than your Web server To load a picture from an external source 1 In Page view select the Picture Loader tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Draw a box on the page to indicate where you want to place the picture A placeholder and the Picture Loader Properties palette appear Picture Loader Properties MRED 20 Picture Loader Image URL 3 Click the Image URL row and type the URL where the picture is located Be sure to type the complete URL 4 Click the check mark You can add an action to an object using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 459 Adding a Go Menu Go Menu tool Adding a Go Menu You can use the Go Menu component to easily create a drop down navigation menu with each menu item corresponding to a single page in the site 1 In Page view select the Go Menu tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Draw a box on the page where you want to place the Go Menu The Go Menu dialog appears Go Menu Menu Items Button Format Internal Link Menu Item Name B Home Mission 0 Events Next Tour 9 00 Contest 3 On the Menu Items tab select a link type from the drop down list and set up a link to the items you want to include on the Go Menu See Creating Links on page 316 4 From the list on the left select the specific ite
585. tities You can deselect the section by clicking any page in the site or by clicking the Site view background Setting Properties Pages have properties Some properties affect the published site others are for your information only For example you can assign colors to the page icons to create visual groups that indicate which pages are finished or which are assigned to a particular designer You can instruct NetObjects Fusion not to publish a particular page exclude it from navigation note if a page is done and enter comments about the selected page And you can use META tags to include information about specific pages on each site 35 Setting Properties Setting Page Properties You set the following properties on the Page tab of the Properties palette Properties 2 x 919 Page title Home Custom Names Page type Normal MasterBorder DefaultMasterBorder v Exclude from navigation Page name Name assigned to the page that is used on the page icon in Site view and the banners and navigation bar buttons generated by NetObjects Fusion See Renaming Pages on page 45 Page title Text that appears in the title bar of the browser window when it displays this page When site visitors bookmark this page the page title is used The title is also emphasized in search engine queries Custom Names See Using Custom Button and Banner Names and File Extensi
586. tive A active The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog Link hover A hover Link linked A link Link visited A visited List item LI List ordered OL This preview might not show the format you ll see on your page because List bulleted UL the text might be influenced by an additional style To learn about the scope lt iil gt of styles please see Help New Duplicate Edit Delete Preview Depending on the selected scope the list of HTML tag styles can include link styles Link active Link hover Link linked and Link visited For example Link hover is the style applied when a site visitor moves the mouse pointer over the link but does not click Link visited is the style applied after a visitor clicks the link You can also create custom styles for the navigation bar a text object lists and so on for the styles listed in the pane on the left 2 From the Scope drop down list select the scope you want to work with For example if you want to see the styles that affect only the current page select Styles in page 3 Click New or Duplicate 171 Working with Text Styles The New Text Style dialog appears New Text Style Style type Redefine HTML tag Normal P Cancel f Create custom style Style scope Page specific Style will only be available on the current page C Site wide Style will be available throu
587. to change a media file that you used in a specific location You can replace one file with another To replace a media file with a new file 1 In Page view or Assets view double click the media placeholder on your page The Open dialog appears 2 Select the new file and click Open 380 CHAPTER 22 AddingJavaandActiveX You can make your site more interesting and interactive by adding special applications such as Java applets Java Beans or ActiveX controls NetObjects Fusion tools make it easy to insert these items and set their properties To choose appropriate properties settings you should be familiar with Java or ActiveX before you add these types of application files to your site A sample Java applet is available in the NetObjects Fusion 8 Java Applets folder sample Java Beans are available in the NetObjects Fusion 8 Java Beans folder This chapter describes how to add Java applets and servlets Java Beans ActiveX controls 381 Inserting a Java Applet or Servlet Java tool Inserting a Java Applet or Servlet Java applets and servlets are an efficient way to add sound and animation such as scrolling messages and color cycling buttons to a page Java applets and servlets are platform independent applications with compact file sizes Usually Java applets and servlets run from the client platform which means site visitors download and run them from a browser however servlets can include commands
588. to page of the gallery you want to work with Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor Display the Thumbnail Page tab Click Format Title Gu RS m m Set the text format See Formatting Text on page 154 Formatting an Individual Thumbnail Title You can apply formatting to all or part of the title text For example you can make a single word bold for emphasis Formatting you apply here is also reflected in the title text on the photo page 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page you want to work with 2 Click in a title text field 3 Use the options on the Format tab of the Title Properties palette to format the text See Formatting Text on page 154 Controlling Download Time When you configure a photo gallery be considerate of site visitors by minimizing the time it takes for the images to download Image quality and size both affect download time You can use the output settings in the Photo Gallery Properties Editor and the file size information on the properties palette to keep track of and adjust download time while maintaining image quality To control the image format 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or a photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 225 Controlling Download Time 3 Display the Images tab The output settings for thumbnail images and the photo images are separate Click the Thumbnail Image tab or Photo Image
589. to your local hard disk to check that the site works as intended After the site is published to your hard disk NetObjects Fusion launches your browser so you can view the site and see how it will appear to site visitors on the Web If after publishing the site to your hard disk you make changes to the site in NetObjects Fusion republish the site Depending on the complexity of the site you may publish several times to get the site working as desired Then when the site works perfectly publish it to your Web server or ISP server so everyone in the world can appreciate your handiwork 579 Publishing Locally Setting Up to Publish Locally S 1 In Publish view click the Publish Settings button on the control bar The Publish Settings dialog appears Publish Settings 2 In the Server Type drop down list choose Local Network Global ProfileName Server o Local Publish C Program Files NetObjects Local Network New Duplicate Remove Attributes Server Type LocaliNetwork Profile Name Publish Advanced Folder Files NetObjects NetObjects Fusion 80 Browse Save As Global Profile Show Close 3 Check the Folder name By default NetObjects Fusion pre configures the local location to Sitename Local Publish Also make sure the local disk drive has sufficient space for your published site files If you want to publis
590. ts NetObjects Fusion doesn t copy external assets into Assets view so it doesn t edit path names in the published HTML However this means you have to publish images and other assets yourself See Publishing Unmanaged Assets on page 400 e Be sure Size to layout is selected on the External HTML Properties palette in Page view 399 Publishing Unmanaged Assets Publishing Unmanaged Assets If you choose not to manage assets when you reference external HTML files you have to get external pictures media files applets and other assets to the Web server yourself You can upload the files to the server from wherever they reside using an FTP utility Or use the New File Asset command to copy assets into Assets view so they are published with the rest of the site 1 In Assets view from the Assets menu choose New File Asset The File dialog appears 2 Click Browse in the dialog to open an external asset you want to publish and type a name for the asset See Adding a File Asset on page 562 3 Select Always publish file and click OK This causes the file to be published even though it s not listed as being in use 4 In Publish view position the asset in your directory structure so when it s published it can be found by any HTML page referencing it Because paths to unmanaged assets aren t edited in the published HTML you must position assets so the original paths work See Customizing Your Site s
591. ts Fusion site files among several developers or across platforms You cannot copy a Sitename nod file to another computer and open it because the file refers to files and styles that are not contained in the Sitename nod file itself To distribute or move a NetObjects Fusion site 1 Export the site as a template according to the information in Exporting a Site on page 63 Copy the template zip file to the target computer via network diskette or other storage media Locate the template so you do not have to move it after you create the site This ensures that the assets are mapped correctly Start NetObjects Fusion on the destination computer From the File menu choose New Site gt From Template The Select a Template File dialog appears Open the template s folder select the TemplateName zip file and click Open In the Save Site As dialog enter a name for the new site in the File name field select the location where you want to save the site and click Save The site that was created in NetObjects Fusion on the source computer is now the active site with its own Sitename nod file on the destination computer If you open a template that uses a font which is not on your system NetObjects Fusion substitutes the browser proportional font specified on the Text tab of the Options dialog You can still apply the original font to any new text box in the site When you open the site on a system that has the original font i
592. ts for easy identification These names are only for use by NetObjects Fusion they do not affect the final Web site 1 In Page view click the Object Tree palette button in the lower left corner The Object Tree palette appears 2 Select the name of the object then click again and type a new name Some objects cannot be renamed Resizing an Object e Click an object and drag the selection handles to resize the object To make multiple objects the same size 1 In Page view select the objects by Shift Clicking each one or by drawing marquee around them 2 From the Object menu choose Size Objects e Width to make the objects the same width Height to make the objects the same height The selected objects size to match the largest object you select Positioning Objects Moving or Copying an Object e Click and drag an object to move it Press Ctrl then click and drag an object to copy it prevent an object from dropping into a container such as a Layout Region or text box select the object and press Alt while moving it over a container e You can move or copy objects from Layout to Layout in Page view using the Cut Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu 89 Positioning Objects To specify the position of an object before you paste it click the page and then use the Paste command The upper left corner of the pasted object appears at the point where you click the page Aligning and Distributin
593. ttons banners lines and text In Style view you can create your own SiteStyle or choose from pre built SiteStyles to give your entire site a consistent look and feel See Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Assets include the files links data objects and variables that you reference in your site Assets view gives you centralized control over all these referenced items When you change an asset NetObjects Fusion updates every reference to that asset throughout the site See Chapter 30 Managing Assets 3 Publish view Title bar Menu bar Control bar Toolbar Page icon in Site view Properties palette Chapter 1 NetObjects Fusion Basics e When you are ready to publish the completed site go to Publish view to set up your server profiles and publish your site See Chapter 31 Publishing Your Site NetObjects Fusion Window When you start NetObjects Fusion and create a new blank site you see a window containing a Home page icon a Standard toolbar docked at the left side of the window and a Properties palette The title bar menu bar and control bar are at the top of the NetObjects Fusion window The title bar shows the name of the current site NetObjects Fusion Mountain Jacques nod File Edit View Go Tools Help 3 9 Online Site Page Style Assets Publish New Page Preview Site Publish Site Structure Outline IB amp Properties L x lalol Page name
594. tyles list Iv Capsula Green Ivi Crossblock II Gold amp Crimson VJMy New Style Phoenix Teal amp Gray Set SiteStyle cannot be removed You can select which SiteStyles to remove the first time you enter Style view after importing a site The current set SiteStyle however cannot be removed Removing SiteStyles You can remove a style from the list of styles in the Style view You cannot remove the currently applied style When you remove a SiteStyle its style folder and images associated with that style are permanently deleted 1 In Style view select the style you want to remove 2 From the Style menu choose Remove Style From List 3 Click Yes to confirm Removing Unused Active SiteStyles 1 From the Style menu select Remove Unused Active SiteStyles The Remove Unused Active SiteStyles dialog appears 2 Place a check mark next to the SiteStyles you want to remove 3 Click Remove 294 Chapter 17 Using SiteStyles Styles Folder Structure Each SiteStyle stores its images text styles and graphic styles in a special folder structure in the Styles folder Images are stored in the Images folder Text styles are defined in Style css and graphic styles in Style ssx File Edit view Favorites Tools Help daBak gt Qsearch C ers I GE XX A Address C C Netobjects Fusion 8 Styles Capsula Blue x wl 1 Name Size Type Mot 9 Y
595. u are publishing using Fixed Page Layout this setting has no effect See Chapter 7 Controlling Published Output 6 Click the Background tab and in the Color field select Automatic to set the frame background to the color specified by the current SiteStyle Transparent to eliminate the background color e Color to select a background color from the Color Picker The selected color appears in the box to the right of the Color field To change the color click the box and select a new color from the Color Picker 7 In the Image field select Automatic to set the background to the image specified by the current SiteStyle None to eliminate the background image Use this setting to remove the SiteStyle s background image from the frame Browse to select an image from the Picture File Open dialog See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 If the picture is smaller than the frame the browser tiles the image If you select a picture with a transparent color the background color shows through To change the image click the Browse button to the right of the field You can add an action to a frame using the Actions tab See Chapter 24 Building Dynamic Pages 147 Targeting Links in AutoFrames Targeting Links in AutoFrames When a site visitor clicks a link placed within a frame the browser has to know where to display the results The frame that displays the retrieved content is the target of the li
596. u can create multimedia graphics and audio that downloads quickly NetObjects Fusion supports these Shockwave file formats Shockwave for Director 4 0 and 5 0 der Director dir 5 0 or greater Protected Director dxr To view these files site visitors must install the Shockwave plugin appropriate for their browser and platform These plugins are available from the Macromedia Web site at www macromedia com You cannot directly add a Shockwave audio swa file to a page You must embed it in a Director movie by passing it as a parameter to the movie and place the movie on your page Then in Assets view add the Shockwave audio file as a file asset Any Shockwave files you place on a page appear inline on the page itself To insert a Shockwave file 1 In Page view select the Shockwave tool from the Dynamic Media flyout on the Advanced toolbar 2 Draw a box to indicate the Shockwave Director file s location on the page The Open dialog appears 3 Select a Shockwave Director file from your hard disk or LAN or select a Shockwave Director file already in use in the site from the Plug in Assets tab For information about using assets see Chapter 30 Managing Assets 4 Click Open The Macromedia Shockwave placeholder appears on your page and the Shockwave Director Properties palette appears For most file formats NetObjects Fusion sizes the Shockwave placeholder to fit the stage which is the space where the an
597. u will need to run this application whenever you wish to run a version prior to NetObjects Fusion 7 with Update 5 7 03 0000 5006 You do not need to run this utility to launch version 7 5 or version 8 as it updates the files automatically 18 CHAPTER 2 Setting Application Options Application option settings affect all sites you work on in NetObjects Fusion You can change settings from any view by choosing Options gt Application from the Tools menu Changes take place as soon as you click OK to close the Application Options dialog This chapter explains how to set Program options Preview options Text options International options Update options For information about site specific options see Setting Options for the Current Site on page 52 19 Setting Program Options Setting Program Options From the Tools menu choose Options gt Application The Program tab of the Application Options dialog appears Application Options Program Preview Tex International Updates Application window maximized at startup Open to most recently used file at startup Open file to most recent view Use small fonts in properties palette Compact database upon exit External file editors HTML notepad exe Browse GIF Browse JPEG Browse Auto generated image output Settings Not optimized Zi Edit Measurement units Pixels hd Auto save When t
598. ured in pixels regardless of the measurement unit you select in the Options dialog You cannot change the spacing or border for text navigation bars To set button border and spacing 1 In Page view select the navigation bar 301 Using Navigation Bars 2 In the Display in pixels section To create a custom navigation bar you first create a separate site structure that is used only with the navigation bar You set up a page structure in the same way you would in Site view In the navigation structure however you can have multiple pages at the same level as your Home page plus add the same page to different trees This is especially helpful if you are designing sites such as intranets in The Navigation Bar Properties palette appears change the thickness of the navigation bar border enter a number in the Border field or click the arrows To change the spacing between buttons enter a number in the Spacing field or click the arrows Creating a Custom Navigation Bar which you want to break your design into mini sites To create a custom navigation bar structure 2 In Page view select the navigation bar In the Structure section select Custom and click Edit Custom The Custom Navigation Bar dialog appears Custom Navigation Bar Structure Link type n Intemal Link Find FindAgein Internal links s Home D amp Events D Activities D Highlights D Mission D About
599. usion site Once imported you can change the design and layout of the page in NetObjects Fusion In this method of importing there is no connection between the new pages and the original document If you update the document there is no corresponding change in the content of the NetObjects Fusion pages If you are going to import a very long document for example a 40 page report it 1s a good idea to split it into smaller documents to ensure that you do not exceed the NetObjects Fusion limit for a Layout If it is important for you to maintain a link to the original document you can publish an HTML version of the document at the time you publish the site See Creating a File Link on page 325 1 In Site view select the page you want to use as the parent of the imported document 2 From the File menu choose Import gt Document The Import Document dialog appears 72 Chapter 5 Importing Sites and Documents Choose the appropriate file type from the Files of type drop down list and navigate to the document you want to import Import Document Look in Tutorial C AdBanners E catalog My Recent SHTML Documents photo Gallery 2 sounds 24 Activities doc Desktop m Mission doc My Documents My Network File name fActivities doc Places Files of type Microsoft Word doc Assign Mastedorder ZeroMargins Select a MasterBorder to apply to the new pages from the Assign Ma
600. ut basic NetObjects Fusion concepts choose NetObjects Fusion QuickStart tips from the Help menu If you do not have a site open and you go to a NetObjects Fusion view you see a page of tips about working in that view Once you create or open a site the View tips are no longer available To see the View tips again close the site Step by Step NetObjects Fusion Getting Started contains step by step instructions that provide the quickest path to learning how to build Web sites with NetObjects Fusion In Chapter 1 Building a Site in 10 Minutes you build a small site that provides the framework for all the lessons that follow Chapter 2 Touring NetObjects Fusion uses the site you built to introduce important NetObjects Fusion features Chapter 3 Designing Site Navigation shows you how to set up links to each page in the site so site visitors have access to all pages Completing the steps in the first three chapters helps you develop the most critical skills You can do the steps in one or all of the other chapters in any order you choose In Depth Information This manual NetObjects Fusion User Guide provides information on all NetObjects Fusion features and functions from the basics of designing with text and graphics creating links and so on to information about forms data publishing and using NetObjects Fusion Components Information in this guide is arranged by topic Take some time to look through
601. vUp gif are in the NetObjects Fusion 7 NetObjects System folder If you do not want to use these buttons you can delete them and set up your own smart links between pages See Adding Navigation Buttons to Stacked Pages on page 488 Saving a Photo Gallery Profile NetObjects Fusion allows you to save the settings associated with your newly created photo gallery so it can be the basis for the next photo gallery created When you save a profile you save the e Photo image output Thumbnail image output e Thumbnail page settings including format template style and columns e Photo page settings including layout text attributes title in banner template and style To save a profile 1 In Page view display the thumbnail page or photo page of the gallery you want to work with 2 Open the Photo Gallery Properties Editor 3 Click Save Profile Note that the output settings displayed at the time you save your profile will be stored in your profile will be stored in your profile These output settings will apply to all images created with this profile in the new gallery 235 Removing a Photo Gallery 4 Type a name for the new profile Save Gallery Profile xj Name Baby Pictures Gallery Profiles Vacation OK Cancel If you choose the name of an existing profile it will replace the existing profile 5 Click OK Note Not all settings are saved in your profile Rotation records assoc
602. vidual page Suppose you type Greek characters on a page set the page character set to Western European ISO 8859 1 and preview the page Because their particular code points do not have equivalents in the Western European character set the Greek characters may appear as question marks If you want to guarantee that the Greek characters on the NetObjects Fusion page display correctly when you preview or publish you should choose a character set that includes Greek characters This character set is then inserted in the charset parameter in the generated HTML META tag which tells the browser how to interpret and display the characters If you have a page that contains languages that use different character sets for example English on the right and Greek on the left to guarantee that all characters will be interpreted correctly by the browser you can use Unicode UTF 8 or two 615 Available Character Sets byte Unicode UCS 2 as a character set for the page Remember that Unicode is evolving it is not complete yet but it does include code points for most characters in languages commonly used on computers today Note that only Netscape 4 x and Microsoft Explorer 4 0 and up currently support UTF 8 and only the most recent versions of Netscape and Microsoft Explorer support UCS 2 Available Character Sets The following character sets are included with NetObjects Fusion e Baltic CP 1257 e Central European ISO 8859 2 Ce
603. void duplication it is important to delete MasterBorders that are listed but not used in the site 1 In Page view click in the MasterBorder to display the MasterBorder Properties palette 2 Click Add Edit 3 In the Edit MasterBorder List dialog select the MasterBorder you want to delete and click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm deletion If you delete a MasterBorder that is in use the ZeroMargins MasterBorder is assigned to those pages 138 CHAPTER 11 Working with AutoFrames AutoFrames permit site visitors to scroll the body of the page while objects in the AutoFrame such as navigation buttons remain in view You can set any or all of the MasterBorder margins as an AutoFrame This chapter includes e Understanding frames Adding AutoFrames Setting frame properties Targeting links in AutoFrames 139 Understanding Frames Understanding Frames Frames are an HTML mechanism you can use to subdivide the browser window into independent areas When a site visitor scrolls the Layout the frame doesn t scroll with it so you can keep navigation buttons in view at all times Frames can also reduce the amount of refreshing required by your visitor s browser MasterBorder applied to sites Home page Fever 3 Fusion Bise StesMouresin Jessie nde henl Home Mission Everts Mew Tour Contest Left border is an AutoFrame with a picture in the b
604. will be Please choose whether to create new Photo Gallery used to save the gallery so you can reuse it at a later time insert a saved one from the list If you previously saved a profile and would like to apply those settings choose it from Name Yosemite the Profile menu Profile default Create a new Photo Gallery Help e Name Brian s Baby Gallery Profile default c x Current photo galleries and photo galleries Insert Fhioto Galery Created Yosemite 7 7 2003 New Home 7 7 2003 that were added to the site and then removed are listed in the Insert an existing Photo Gallery section as shown at the right If no other galleries were created you see the dialog above Cancel 3 Type a name for the new photo gallery NetObjects Fusion uses the name you enter as the name of the photo page This name appears in the banner at the top of each photo page You can rename the 210 Photo Gallery tool 5 Chapter 14 Creating Photo Galleries page in Site view just as you rename any other page or you can display the photo title in the banner or edit the text on the Banner Properties palette See Renaming Pages on page 45 Selecting a Photo Page Layout on page 232 or Changing the Banner Text on page 312 You cannot use the name of an existing photo gallery Choose a Profile NetObjects Fusion allows you to reuse settings each time you add a new phot
605. y OK Cancel a Click New Option to add a value such as size or color b Click Add Another to add more values Click OK to close the Edit Product Options dialog d Click OK to close the Add Options dialog e The option group will now appear in the Options field Options Add Option Small Medium Remove Large Edit Option Toedita group and its values highlight the group in the Options field and click Edit Option See Adding Options on page 344 Arranging Products Products are listed in the Name column on the List Page tab of the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor The products appear in the order you add them to the catalog which is also the order they appear on the detail pages This may not be the order you want to display the products so you must rearrange them 345 Working with Products You can rearrange the products on the List Page tab of the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor Moving Products on the List Page Tab 1 In Page view display the List page or a detail page of the catalog you want to work with 2 Open the E Commerce Catalog Properties Editor 3 Display the List Page tab 4 In the Name column e Select a product and drag it into a new position in the list An indicator displays as you move the product Selecta product and click Move Up or Move Down to shift it into the proper position Sorting Products 1 In Page view display the List page
606. y a Reset button so visitors can clear the form and start over To determine how the server handles the information entered by the site visitors you can use the NetObjects Fusion Form Handler or specify a custom CGI script Note If you re using the Form Handler component to send form responses in an email or to a text file create your Submit button as described in Submitting Responses as Plain Text on page 441 After creating the form as described on page 430 1 In Page view select the Forms Button tool from the Form toolbar 2 Draw a rectangle on the form 439 Adding Objects to a Form 3 Set the Forms Button properties Forms Button Properties 2 x o Name FormsButtont Text Text C Image The button label can be text or a picture Select Button to create a custom button Click here to attach a script defining what a custom button does Name Use the name your CGI script references Text Type the button label text in the field Image To use a picture as a label select Image click Browse and choose an image file from the Picture File Open dialog Note When you use an image as the label for a form button that button can only submit information It cannot be used as a reset button Type Choose a button type Submit creates a button that sends the site visitor s responses to the Form Handler or CGI script on the server Reset creates a butto
607. y level in the numbered list New start values only apply to numbered lists not bulleted lists 2 Click the List tab on the Text Properties palette 3 Inthe Start Value box enter a new start value or click the up and down arrows to set the new value All entries at that level of the numbered list now conform to the new start value For example if you change the start value to 3 the first entry at that level is labeled 3 and the next entry is labeled 4 177 Inserting Symbols Setting the List Bullet or Numbering Type You can choose a type of numbering or bullet character for each level of a list To set a new bullet or numbering type 1 In Page view select any level in the list 2 Click the List tab on the Text Properties palette 3 From the Bullet type drop down list select the type of bullet character or numbering you want for that level of the list The text styles associated with lists are List Ordered lt OL gt List Bulleted lt UL gt and List Item lt LI gt Selecting the type of bullet character or numbering automatically selects the proper text style from the ordered or bulleted list Changing the lt LI gt style affects both types of lists Note Lists are formatted with bullets based on the List Item lt LI gt style however you can also format lists using other styles such as Normal lt P gt In that case the list will not have a bullet character associated with it Conversely if you type a
608. ying and pasting components can lead to site corruption NetObjects Fusion components are automatically available when you install NetObjects Fusion These components appear on the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar in Page view and all apart from the Form Handler component are discussed in this chapter the Form Handler component is discussed in Submitting Responses as Plain Text on page 441 In addition you can download third party components Depending on their type third party components are installed in the appropriate place in NetObjects Fusion Additional component toolbars become available in Page view when you install a third party Page component and can be displayed in the Component Manager For information about third party components visit Online view Adding a Rotating Ad Banner You can use the Ad Banner component to display a series of images within a banner You determine which images display associate a transition with each image set the amount of time each image is displayed and specify a URL linked to each image NetObjects Fusion supports gif and jpg images in components See Choosing an Image Format on page 188 To add an Ad Banner 1 In Page view select the Ad Banner tool from the NetObjects Fusion Components toolbar 2 Click on the page to indicate the Ad Banner s location 454 10 Chapter 26 Using NetObjects Fusion Components An Ad Banner placeholder and the Ad Banner Properties pal
609. you our tour guest in learning proving existing ones Icouraging you to enjoy your activity and accomplish a personal jou have a great vacation experience and look forward to returning RI If you select Size Layout to Text and Contents wrap to browser width when you publish the page the contents of the text box adjust to the size of the browser window When you publish this page the contents of the text box adjust to the size of the browser window 129 Preserving Your Design Intentions Preserving Your Design Intentions When you place a text box on a page the text is shown in the default display font You format the text and position the text box relative to other objects on the page When you preview or publish the page and view it in your browser the size of the text box and its alignment with the objects around it are controlled by the font settings in the browser If your NetObjects Fusion default browser font is 10 point Times Roman and your browser default font is set to 14 point Arial you see an immediate difference in the arrangement and spacing of objects because text boxes expand to accommodate the new font size 25995 2250 1 E Page view at m 10 point Times Roman Browser view at 14 point Arial This font variation is not caused by NetObjects Fusion it s a consequence of site visitors controlling their browser environment You can avoid
610. you select cascading style sheet text formatting NetObjects Fusion creates style css and site css files and links them to the HTML generated for the site A index html Notepad m x File Edit Search Help K DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTHL 4 8 Transitional EN gt lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META HTTP EQUIU Content Type CONTENT text html charset ISO 8859 1 gt lt META NAHE Generator CONTENT NetObjects Fusion z5for Windows gt lt TITLE gt Home lt TITLE gt lt LINK REL STYLESHEET TVPE text css HREF file C NetObjects Fusion 75 User Sites MySite Preview style css gt lt LINK REL STVLESHEET TYPE text css HREF file C NetObjects Fusion Z5 User Sites MySite Preview site css gt lt STYLE gt lt STYLE gt lt HEAD gt 154 Chapter 12 Designing with Text The CSS standard is still evolving Cascading style sheets do not work with 2 x or 3 x browser versions Even the 4 x versions of Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer and the 5 x version of Microsoft Internet Explorer do not fully support all CSS features and in some cases support is inconsistent If you choose cascading style sheets be sure to test your site using all target browsers to make sure the site displays as you intended To switch the text format setting 1 From the Tools menu choose Options gt Current Site 2 On the General tab in the Text formatting section select HTML or Cascading Style She
611. your ISP administrator for the proper server port setting Connect passive mode is for publishing to servers not within your company s firewall or if your ISP or host company s FTP manager establishes connections using passive mode Passive mode or PASV is a security mode in which a client sends a connect signal for data the server replies with a confirmation signal and then the data begins uploading This allows the server to confirm the identity of the client that is connecting before data begins uploading Although some firewalls allow PASV as a security mode others may not be configured for PASV In that case publishing will not 610 m Publish Settings Chapter 32 Advanced Publishing work Typically NetObjects Fusion cannot publish through firewalls or proxies If a message tells you that NetObjects Fusion cannot connect to the server the problem is usually a firewall preventing you from logging on Also in some cases of publishing to a proxy server the publishing process appears to succeed but the files do not appear on your site 5 Click Close Publishing with Firewalls or Proxy Servers If you develop sites behind a firewall and need to publish to a remote server that is outside the firewall you might be able use FTP passive mode to connect to the Server 1 In Publish view click Publish Settings on the control bar Do YN Choose a profile from the Profile list Click Advanced publish settings and

User Guide - NetObjects Fusion

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents